HomeMy WebLinkAboutM_ Renton HR TI_CD - Specifications_20220708_V1CAG-22-047
CITY OF RENTON
HUMAN RESOURCES
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
P R O J E C T L O C A T I O N
1 0 5 5 S . G r a d y W a y , 7
t h F l o o r
R E N T O N , W A 9 8 0 5 6
PROJECT MANUAL
J u l y 0 6 , 2 0 2 2
MACKENZIE
500 Union Street #410
Seattle, Washington 98101
206-749-9993
B22003552
RECEIVED
07/08/2022 striplett
BUILDING DIVISION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
SEALS PAGE Job Number 2210142.00
00 01 07 - 2/2
ARCHITECT
MACKENZIE
BRETT HANSON
500 UNION STREET, #410
SEATTLE, WA 98101
TELEPHONE: (206) 749-9993
EMAIL: BHANSON@MCKNZE.COM
MECHANICAL ENGINEER
BCE ENGINEERS, INC
CHRIS CAFFEE, P.E.
6021 12TH STREET EAST, SUITE 200
FIFE, WA 98424
TELEPHONE: (253) 922-0446
EMAIL: CHRIS.CAFFEE@BCEENGINEERS.COM
ELECTRICAL ENGINEER
BCE ENGINEERS, INC
BEN HEDIN, P.E.
6021 12TH STREET EAST, SUITE 200
FIFE, WA 98424
TELEPHONE: (253) 922-0446
EMAIL: BEN.HEDIN@BCEENGINEERS.COM
END OF SECTION
7/6/2
0
2
2
4/28/202104/11/20224/28/
2
2
6/8/20226/8/2
0
2
2
6/21/
2
0
2
2
7/6/2
0
2
2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvement – Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - 1/4
SECTION 00 01 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
00 00 01 - Instruction to Bidders
00 00 02 - Advertisement for Bids
00 00 03 - Bid Proposal Form
00 01 07 - Seals Page
00 01 10 - Table of Contents
00 20 00 - Statement of Bidders Qualifications
00 42 10 - Bid Submittal Checklist
00 43 36 - Proposed Subcontractors Form
00 72 00 - General Conditions
00 80 00 01 - Bid Bond Form
00 80 00 02 - Contract Bond Template
00 80 00 03 - Sample Agreement
00 80 00 04 - Certification of Wage Compliance
00 80 00 05 - Non-Collusion Affidavit
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 11 30 - Hazardous Materials
01 14 00 – Work Restrictions
01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures
01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements
01 30 01 - Electronic Data Request and Agreement
01 40 00 - Quality Requirements
01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls
01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements
01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management & Disposal
01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 00 - Demolition
DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE (NOT USED)
DIVISION 04 -- MASONRY (NOT USED)
DIVISION 05 -- METALS (NOT USED)
Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvement – Construction Documents 06 July 2022
TABLE OF CONTENTS Job Number 2210142.00
00 01 10 - 2/4
DIVISION 06 -- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework
DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION (NOT USED)
DIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS
08 12 13 - Hollow Metal Frames
08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors
08 71 00 - Door Hardware
08 80 00 - Glazing
DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES
09 05 61 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation
09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies
09 30 00 - Tiling
09 51 00 - Acoustical Ceilings
09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring
09 68 13 - Tile Carpeting
09 90 00 - Painting and Coating
DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES
10 26 01 - Wall and Corner Guards
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
11 30 13 - Residential Appliances
DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS
12 24 00 - Window Shades – MechoShade Systems
12 36 00 - Countertops
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)
DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)
DIVISION 20 -- MECHANICAL
20 00 00 - General Mechanical Requirements
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION (NOT USED)
DIVISION 22 -- PLUMBING
22 05 17 - Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping
22 05 23 - General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping
22 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvement – Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - 3/4
22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
22 07 19 - Plumbing Piping Insulation
22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping
22 10 06 - Plumbing Piping Specialties
22 30 00 - Plumbing Equipment
22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures
DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
23 05 13 – Motors and Variable Drives
23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Control
23 05 53 - Mechanical Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 05 93 - Air System Testing and Balancing
23 07 13 - Equipment/Ductwork Insulation
23 09 00 – Addition to Existing Controls
23 21 00 - Sleeves and Seals for HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 31 13 - Steel Ductwork
23 33 00 – HVAC Specialties
23 36 00 - VAV Terminal Box Units
23 37 00 - Air Terminals
23 90 00 - Mechanical Demolition
DIVISION 25 -- INTEGRATED AUTOMATION (NOT USED)
DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL
26 00 00 - Electrical General Conditions
26 00 05 - Electrical Existing Systems
26 05 19 - Wires and Cables
26 05 26 - Grounding & Bonding
26 05 32 - Outlet and Pull Boxes
26 05 33 - Raceway
26 05 34 - Metal-Clad Cable (Type MC) and Fittings
26 05 39 - Floor Outlet Devices Poke Through
26 05 73 - Electrical System Studies
26 09 23 - Lighting Control Panel
26 24 19 - MST Motor Controllers
26 27 26 - Switches and Receptacles
26 28 13 - Fuses
26 28 16 - Disconnects and Fused Switches
26 43 00 - Surge Protective Devices (SPD)
Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvement – Construction Documents 06 July 2022
TABLE OF CONTENTS Job Number 2210142.00
00 01 10 - 4/4
26 50 00 - Lighting
DIVISION 27 -- COMMUNICATIONS
27 00 00 - Low Voltage Systems General Requirements
27 05 28 - Pathways for Communications Systems
27 20 00 - Data and Voice Infrastructure
DIVISION 28 -- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 13 00 - Access Control System
DIVISION 31 -- EARTHWORK (NOT USED)
DIVISION 32 -- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 33 -- UTILITIES (NOT USED)
DIVISION 34 – TRANSPORTATION (NOT USED)
DIVISION 35 – WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
01 25 00 - 1/2
SECTION 01 25 00
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Procedural requirements for proposed substitutions.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 00 21 13 - Instructions to Bidders: Restrictions on timing of substitution requests.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes from Contract Documents requirements proposed by Contractor to materials,
products, assemblies, and equipment.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Proposed due to changed Project circumstances beyond Contractor's
control.
a. Unavailability.
b. Regulatory changes.
c. Reduction in contract time..
d. Reduction in contract sum.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. CSI/CSC Form 1.5C - Substitution Request (During the Bidding/Negotiating Stage); Current Edition.
B. CSI/CSC Form 13.1A - Substitution Request (After the Bidding/Negotiating Phase); Current Edition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. A Substitution Request for products, assemblies, materials, and equipment constitutes a representation
that the submitter:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of
the specified product, equipment, assembly, or system.
2. Agrees to provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.
3. Agrees to provide same or equivalent maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as
applicable.
4. Agrees to coordinate installation and make changes to other work that may be required for the
work to be complete, with no additional cost to Owner.
5. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent.
6. Agrees to reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with
re-approval by authorities.
B. A Substitution Request for specified installer constitutes a representation that the submitter:
1. Has acted in good faith to obtain services of specified installer, but was unable to come to
commercial, or other terms.
C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with
Contract Documents. Burden of proof is on proposer.
1. Note explicitly any non-compliant characteristics.
D. Content: Include information necessary for tracking the status of each Substitution Request, and
information necessary to provide an actionable response.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Job Number 2210142.00
01 25 00 - 2/2
1. Forms indicated in the Project Manual are adequate for this purpose, and must be used.
E. Limit each request to a single proposed substitution item.
1. Submit an electronic document, combining the request form with supporting data into single
document.
3.02 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DURING PROCUREMENT
A. Submittal Time Restrictions:
1. Instructions to Bidders specifies time restrictions and the documents required for submitting
substitution requests during the bidding period.
B. Submittal Form (before award of contract):
1. Submit substitution requests by completing CSI/CSC Form 1.5C - Substitution Request. See this
form for additional information and instructions. Use only this form; other forms of submission
are unacceptable.
3.03 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Submittal Form (after award of contract):
1. Submit substitution requests by completing CSI/CSC Form 13.1A - Substitution Request (After
Bidding/Negotiating). See this form for additional information and instructions. Use only this
form; other forms of submission are unacceptable.
B. Submit request for Substitution for Cause within 14 days of discovery of need for substitution, but not
later than 14 days prior to time required for review and approval by Architect, in order to stay on
approved project schedule.
C. Substitutions will not be considered under one or more of the following circumstances:
1. When they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without having
received prior approval.
2. Without a separate written request.
3.04 RESOLUTION
A. Architect may request additional information and documentation prior to rendering a decision. Provide
this data in an expeditious manner.
B. Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request.
1. Architect's decision following review of proposed substitution will be noted on the submitted
form.
3.05 ACCEPTANCE
A. Accepted substitutions change the work of the Project. They will be documented and incorporated into
work of the project by Change Order, Construction Change Directive, Architectural Supplementary
Instructions, or similar instruments provided for in the Conditions of the Contract.
3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
B. Include completed Substitution Request Forms as part of the Project record. Include both approved
and rejected Requests.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRONIC DATA REQUEST AND AGREEMENT
01 30 01 - 1/2
SECTION 01 30 01
ELECTRONIC DATA REQUEST AND AGREEMENT
DATE:_________________
REQUESTOR'S NAME:__________________________________________________
REQUESTOR'S ADDRESS:__________________________________________________
REQUESTOR'S PHONE:_________________ E-MAIL:_______________________________
TO: MACKENZIE.
Attention: Kim Doyle
500 Union Street, #410, Seattle, Washington 98101
Phone: 206.749.9993
Email: kdoyle@mcknze.com
RE: PROJECT NAME: RENTON CITY HALL - 7TH FLOOR HR TENANT IMPROVEMENT
PROJECT NUMBER: 2210142.00
Provision of Electronic Data
Dear __________________:
Requestor hereby requests the following electronic data for subject project: PROVIDE DESCRIPTION OF
REQUESTED INFORMATION HERE:
Requestor understands that the information contained therein may change during the course of the
project.
Requestor will use the information only as follows: PROVIDE DESCRIPTION OF USE HERE:
Requestor acknowledges the following: MACKENZIE. is not responsible for any modifications to this
data, whether intentional or unintentional, without MACKENZIE.'s participation. All copyrights assigned
to this data or portions of it shall remain the property of the original copyright holders. Although
MACKENZIE. will make every effort to ensure the accuracy and completeness of information provided,
MACKENZIE will not be responsible for inaccuracy or incompleteness. Because of the differences
among the many available software and hardware systems and the different ways in which various
systems represent drawing elements, it is not possible to ensure complete, accurate information.
Signature _________________________ Printed Name ___________________________
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
ELECTRONIC DATA REQUEST AND AGREEMENT Job Number 2210142.00
01 30 01 - 2/2
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 DEMOLITION
02 41 00 - 1/2
SECTION 02 41 00
DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Sequencing and staging requirements.
B. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Description of items to be salvaged or removed for re-use by Contractor.
C. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Handling and storage of items removed for salvage and
relocation.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 29 CFR 1926 - Safety and Health Regulations for Construction; Current Edition.
B. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2022.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required.
1. Minimum of 3 years of documented experience.
PART 3 EXECUTION
2.01 SCOPE
A. Remove portions of existing buildings in the following sequence:
1. interior walls, doors, frames, sidelites, and ceiling as described on demolition plans..
B. Remove other items indicated, for relocation.
2.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent
structures and the public.
1. Obtain required permits.
2. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.
3. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and
occupants.
4. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not
obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal
operations.
B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner.
C. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.
D. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Architect and
Owner; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury.
E. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials.
1. Dismantle existing construction and separate materials.
2. Set aside reusable, recyclable, and salvageable materials; store and deliver to collection point or
point of reuse.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
DEMOLITION Job Number 2210142.00
02 41 00 - 2/2
2.03 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS
A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing
record documents only.
1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as indicated.
2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.
3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be
apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition.
B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.
1. Remove items indicated on drawings.
C. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and
Telecommunications): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated.
1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment
and operational components.
2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services,
maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service.
3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal.
4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible
ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with
identification.
D. Protect existing work to remain.
1. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.
2. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.
3. Patch as specified for patching new work.
2.04 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL
A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.
B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
06 41 00 - 1/4
SECTION 06 41 00
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Specially fabricated cabinet units.
B. Hardware.
C. Preparation for installing utilities.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 12 36 00 - Countertops.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards, 2nd Edition; 2014, with Errata (2016).
B. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards, 2nd Edition; 2014, with Errata (2016).
C. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2021, with Errata.
D. BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware; 2020.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and
accessories.
1. Scale of Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot, minimum.
C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.
D. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 12 inches square,
illustrating proposed cabinet, countertop, and shelf unit substrate and finish.
E. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets,
demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with
minimum five years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect units from moisture damage.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in
building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Genothen; www.genothen.com.
B. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Job Number 2210142.00
06 41 00 - 2/4
2.02 CABINETS
A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS),
unless noted otherwise.
B. Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade.
C. Cabinets:
1. Adjustable Shelf Loading: 50 lbs. per sq. ft.
a. Deflection: L/144.
2. Cabinet Style: Flush overlay.
3. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush style.
2.03 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS
A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
2.04 LAMINATE MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com/#sle.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application.
B. Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded PVC, flat shaped; smooth finish; self locking serrated tongue; of width to
match component thickness.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.06 HARDWARE
A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified.
B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf standards or
multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch
spacing adjustments.
C. Drawer and Door Pulls: Berenson Wire Pull 4". Finish, satin nickel..
D. Catches: Magnetic.
E. Drawer Slides:
1. Type: Full extension.
2. Static Load Capacity: Commercial grade.
3. Mounting: Side mounted.
4. Stops: Integral type.
5. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type.
6. Manufacturers:
a. Accuride International, Inc: www.accuride.com/#sle.
b. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com/#sle.
c. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company; Heavy-Duty Drawer Slides:
www.knapeandvogt.com/#sle.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
F. Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type, stainless, steel with satin finish.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com/#sle.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
06 41 00 - 3/4
b. Hardware Resources: www.hardwareresources.com/#sle.
c. Blum, Inc: www.blum.com/#sle.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
2.07 FABRICATION
A. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage
through building openings.
B. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece
for any single length.
C. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.
Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.
D. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with
manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel
arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.
E. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops as recommended by laminate manufacturer at 16
inches on center.
F. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint
cut edges.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Job Number 2210142.00
06 41 00 - 4/4
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
08 12 13 - 1/4
SECTION 08 12 13
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire-rated hollow metal frames for non-hollow metal doors.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors: Non-hollow metal door for hollow metal frames.
B. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glazed borrowed lites.
C. Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting: Field painting.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI/SDI A250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Coatings for Steel
Doors and Frames; 2019.
B. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100); 2017.
C. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel
Doors and Frames; 2020.
D. BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation In Steel Doors And Steel Frames; 2016.
E. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications For Receipt, Storage and Installation of Hollow Metal Doors
and Frames; 2007.
F. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2022.
G. UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type
and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade
standard.
C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying
location of different finishes, if any.
D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation
instructions relating to this project.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section,
with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least
three years of documented experience.
C. Maintain at project site copies of reference standards relating to installation of products specified.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store in accordance with applicable requirements and in compliance with standards and/or custom
guidelines as indicated.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES Job Number 2210142.00
08 12 13 - 2/4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Hollow Metal Frames with Integral Casings:
1. Curries, an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle.
2. Republic Doors, an Allegion brand: www.republicdoor.com/#sle.
3. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/#sle.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the drawings for frame sizes, fire ratings, sound ratings, finishing,
door hardware to be installed, and other variations, if any.
B. Door Frame Type: Provide hollow metal door frames with integral casings.
C. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one
type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior
frame that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for
exterior frames and for sound-rated frames; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most
stringent.
D. Hardware Preparations, Selections and Locations: Comply with BHMA A156.115, NAAMM HMMA 830,
NAAMM HMMA 831 or ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified requirements.
2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAMES WITH INTEGRAL CASINGS
A. Fire-Rated Door Frames: Slip-on type.
1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100).
a. Level 2 - Heavy-duty.
b. Physical Performance Level B, 500,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4.
c. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum.
d. Zinc Coating: Manufacturer's standard coating thickness; ASTM A653/A653M.
2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C or NFPA
252 ("positive pressure fire tests").
3. Provide units listed and labeled by ITS (DIR) or UL (DIR).
a. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit.
4. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished.
2.04 FINISHES
A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of
pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related requirements of specified
frame standards or custom guidelines indicated.
B. Install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.
C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
08 12 13 - 3/4
D. Install door hardware as specified in Section 08 71 00.
3.02 TOLERANCES
A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: Comply with related requirements of specified frame standards
or custom guidelines indicated in accordance with SDI 117 or NAAMM HMMA 861.
B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edges, crossed corner to corner.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES Job Number 2210142.00
08 12 13 - 4/4
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 14 16 - 1/4
SECTION 08 14 16
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire-rated and non-rated.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 08 12 13 - Hollow Metal Frames.
B. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards, 2nd Edition; 2014, with Errata (2016).
B. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2021, with Errata.
C. UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
D. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics.
C. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling, blocking
for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details.
D. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 8 1/2 x11 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain color,
and sheen.
E. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.
F. Installer's Qualification Statement.
G. Warranty, executed in Owner's name.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and
finishing.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section,
with not less than three years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.
B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet
areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if
stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
FLUSH WOOD DOORS Job Number 2210142.00
08 14 16 - 2/4
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.
C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective
materials, and telegraphing core construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors:
1. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com/#sle.
2. Graham Wood Doors: www.grahamdoors.com/#sle.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
2.02 DOORS AND PANELS
A. Doors: Refer to drawings for locations and additional requirements.
1. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, Heavy Duty performance, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI
(AWS), unless noted otherwise.
2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.
B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.
1. Provide solid core doors at each location.
2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with UL 10C - Positive
Pressure; Underwriters Laboratories Inc (UL) or Intertek/Warnock Hersey (WHI) labeled without
any visible seals when door is open.
2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES
A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces as
indicated.
B. Fire-Rated Doors: Mineral core type, with fire resistant composite core (FD), plies and faces as indicated
above; with core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without
through-bolting.
2.04 DOOR FACINGS
A. Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: White birch, veneer grade in accordance with quality standard
indicated, plain sliced (flat cut), with book match between leaves of veneer, running match of spliced
veneer leaves assembled on door or panel face.
2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.
B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:
C. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with
hardware requirements and dimensions.
D. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in
accordance with specified quality standard.
E. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 14 16 - 3/4
2.06 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS
A. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section 5 - Finishing
for grade specified and as follows:
1. Transparent:
a. System - 4, Latex Acrylic, Water-based.
b. Stain: As selected by Architect.
c. Sheen: Satin.
B. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample.
C. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Hollow Metal Door Frames: As specified in Section 08 11 13.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.
1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements.
B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.
C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.
D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.
E. Coordinate installation of glazing.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Comply with specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.
B. Comply with specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Adjust closers for full closure.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
FLUSH WOOD DOORS Job Number 2210142.00
08 14 16 - 4/4
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 GLAZING
08 80 00 - 1/4
SECTION 08 80 00
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glazing units.
B. Glazing compounds and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors: Glazed lites in doors.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; Current Edition.
B. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks,
and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2019).
C. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2021.
D. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2018.
E. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; 2008.
F. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; 2008.
G. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition.
H. UL 9 - Standard for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
I. UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
J. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data on Glazing Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental
characteristics, limitations, special application requirements, and identify available colors.
C. Samples: Submit two samples 4 by 4 inch in size of glass units.
D. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed
in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA (GM) and GANA (SM) for glazing installation methods.
Maintain one copy on site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three years of documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least
three years documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Glass Manufactures:
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
GLAZING Job Number 2210142.00
08 80 00 - 2/4
1. PPG Industries, Inc.: www.ppg.com.
2. Guardian: www.guardian.com.
3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
2.02 GLAZING UNITS
A. Safety Glass (Type T) - Monolithic Interior Vision Glazing:
1. Applications: Door and side lite glazing unless noted otherwise.
2. Glass Type: Fully tempered float glass.
3. Tint: Clear.
4. Thickness: 1/4 inch, nominal.
B. Rated Doors - Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing: Type, thickness, and configuration of glazing that contains
flame, smoke, and does not block radiant heat, as required to achieve fire-doors indicated fire-rating
period of 90 minutes or less.
1. Applications:
a. Glazing in fire-rated door assembly.
2. Provide products listed by 2 or 2 and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Safety Glazing Certification: 16 CFR 1201 Category II.
4. Glazing Method: As required for fire rating.
5. Fire-Rating Period: As indicated on drawings.
6. Markings for Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Assemblies: Provide permanent markings on
fire-protection-rated glazing in compliance with 1, local building code, and authorities having
jurisdiction
a. "D" - meets fire door assembly criteria of NFPA 252, UL 10B, or UL 10C fire test standards.
b. "OH" - meets fire window assembly criteria including hose stream test of NFPA 257, or UL 9
fire test standards.
c. "H" - meets fire door assembly hose stream test of NFPA 252, UL 10B, or UL 10C fire tests
standards.
d. "XXX" - placeholder that represents fire-rating period, in minutes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances, including those for size,
squareness, and offsets at corners.
3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install glazing in compliance with written instructions of glass, gaskets, and other glazing material
manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in glazing referenced
standards.
B. Install glazing sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193, GANA (SM), and manufacturer's instructions.
C. Do not exceed edge pressures around perimeter of glass lites as stipulated by glass manufacturer.
D. Set glass lites of system with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
E. Prevent glass from contact with any contaminating substances that may be the result of construction
operations such as, and not limited to the following; weld splatter, fire-safing, plastering, mortar
droppings, etc.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 GLAZING
08 80 00 - 3/4
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application using solvents or
cleaners recommended by manufacturers.
B. Remove non-permanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete.
C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured.
D. Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of Substantial Completion in
accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste.
B. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
GLAZING Job Number 2210142.00
08 80 00 - 4/4
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION
09 05 61 - 1/4
SECTION 09 05 61
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section applies to floors identified in Contract Documents that are receiving the following types of
floor coverings:
1. Carpet tile.
2. Resilient Tile.
B. Preparation of existing concrete floor slabs for installation of floor coverings.
C. Testing of concrete floor slabs for moisture and alkalinity (pH).
D. Patching compound.
E. Remedial floor coatings.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars
(Using 2-in. or [50 mm] Cube Specimens); 2021.
B. ASTM C472 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum
Concrete; 2020.
C. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2021.
D. ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor
Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride; 2016a.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate scheduling of cleaning and testing, so that preliminary cleaning has been completed for at
least 24 hours prior to testing.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Floor Covering and Adhesive Manufacturers' Product Literature: For each specific combination of
substrate, floor covering, and adhesive to be used; showing:
1. Moisture and alkalinity (pH) limits and test methods.
2. Manufacturer's required bond/compatibility test procedure.
B. Testing Agency's Report:
1. Description of areas tested; include floor plans and photographs if helpful.
2. Summary of conditions encountered.
3. Moisture and alkalinity (pH) test reports.
4. Copies of specified test methods.
5. Recommendations for remediation of unsatisfactory surfaces.
6. Product data for recommended remedial coating.
7. Submit report to Architect.
8. Submit report not more than two business days after conclusion of testing.
C. Adhesive Bond and Compatibility Test Report.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Moisture and alkalinity (pH) testing shall be performed by an independent testing agency employed and
paid by Contractor.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION Job Number 2210142.00
09 05 61 - 2/4
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency experienced in the types of testing specified.
1. Submit evidence of experience consisting of at least 3 test reports of the type required, with
project Owner's project contact information.
C. Contractor's Responsibility Relating to Independent Agency Testing:
1. Provide access for and cooperate with testing agency.
2. Confirm date of start of testing at least 10 days prior to actual start.
3. Allow at least 4 business days on site for testing agency activities.
4. Achieve and maintain specified ambient conditions.
5. Notify Architect when specified ambient conditions have been achieved and when testing will
start.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations.
B. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s packaging; include installation instructions.
C. Keep materials from freezing.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperature in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48
hours prior to testing, at not less than 65 degrees F or more than 85 degrees F.
B. Maintain relative humidity in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48
hours prior to testing, at not less than 40 percent and not more than 60 percent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Patching Compound: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for conditions,
and compatible with adhesive and floor covering. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring
manufacturer, provide a product with the following characteristics:
1. Cementitious moisture-, mildew-, and alkali-resistant compound, compatible with floor, floor
covering, and floor covering adhesive, and capable of being feathered to nothing at edges.
2. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi, minimum, after 28 days, when tested in accordance with ASTM
C109/C109M or ASTM C472, whichever is appropriate.
B. Alternate Flooring Adhesive: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for the
moisture and pH conditions present; low-VOC. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring
manufacturer, provide a product recommended by adhesive manufacturer as suitable for substrate and
floor covering and for conditions present.
C. Remedial Floor Coating: Single- or multi-layer coating or coating/overlay combination intended by its
manufacturer to resist water vapor transmission to degree sufficient to meet flooring manufacturer's
emission limits, resistant to the level of alkalinity (pH) found, and suitable for adhesion of flooring
without further treatment.
1. Use product recommended by testing agency.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONCRETE SLAB PREPARATION
A. Perform following operations in the order indicated:
1. Preliminary cleaning.
2. Moisture vapor emission tests; 3 tests in the first 1000 square feet and one test in each additional
1000 square feet, unless otherwise indicated or required by flooring manufacturer.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION
09 05 61 - 3/4
3. Internal relative humidity tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless
otherwise indicated.
4. Alkalinity (pH) tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless otherwise
indicated.
5. Specified remediation, if required.
6. Patching, smoothing, and leveling, as required.
7. Other preparation specified.
8. Adhesive bond and compatibility test.
9. Protection.
B. Remediations:
1. Active Water Leaks or Continuing Moisture Migration to Surface of Slab: Correct this condition
before doing any other remediation; re-test after correction.
2. Excessive Moisture Emission or Relative Humidity: If an adhesive that is resistant to the level of
moisture present is available and acceptable to flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive for
installation of the flooring; if not, apply remedial floor coating or remedial sheet membrane over
entire suspect floor area.
3. Excessive Alkalinity (pH): If remedial floor coating is necessary to address excessive moisture, no
additional remediation is required; if not, if an adhesive that is resistant to the level present is
available and acceptable to the flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive for installation of the
flooring; otherwise, apply a skim coat of specified patching compound over entire suspect floor
area.
3.02 PRELIMINARY CLEANING
A. Clean floors of dust, solvents, paint, wax, oil, grease, asphalt, residual adhesive, adhesive removers,
film-forming curing compounds, sealing compounds, alkaline salts, excessive laitance, mold, mildew,
and other materials that might prevent adhesive bond.
B. Do not use solvents or other chemicals for cleaning.
3.03 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION TESTING
A. Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method
or this specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements.
B. Where this specification conflicts with the referenced test method, comply with the requirements of
this section.
C. Test in accordance with ASTM F1869 and as follows.
D. Plastic sheet test and mat bond test may not be substituted for the specified ASTM test method, as
those methods do not quantify the moisture content sufficiently.
E. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as
indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if test values exceed 3 pounds
per 1000 square feet per 24 hours.
F. Report: Report the information required by the test method.
3.04 ALKALINITY TESTING
A. Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method
or this specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements.
B. The following procedure is the equivalent of that described in ASTM F710, repeated here for the
Contractor's convenience.
C. Use a wide range alkalinity (pH) test paper, its associated chart, and distilled or deionized water.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION Job Number 2210142.00
09 05 61 - 4/4
D. Place several drops of water on a clean surface of concrete, forming a puddle approximately 1 inch in
diameter. Allow the puddle to set for approximately 60 seconds, then dip the alkalinity (pH) test paper
into the water, remove it, and compare immediately to chart to determine alkalinity (pH) reading.
E. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as
indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if alkalinity (pH) test value is
over 10.
3.05 PREPARATION
A. See individual floor covering section(s) for additional requirements.
B. Comply with recommendations of testing agency.
C. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.
D. Fill and smooth surface cracks, grooves, depressions, control joints and other non-moving joints, and
other irregularities with patching compound.
E. Do not fill expansion joints, isolation joints, or other moving joints.
3.06 ADHESIVE BOND AND COMPATIBILITY TESTING
A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.
3.07 APPLICATION OF REMEDIAL FLOOR COATING
A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of coating manufacturer.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Cover prepared floors with building paper or other durable covering.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09 21 16 - 1/6
SECTION 09 21 16
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.
B. Metal stud wall framing.
C. Acoustic insulation.
D. Gypsum wallboard.
E. Joint treatment and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum
Board; 2017.
B. ASTM C 630/C 630M - Standard Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board; 2000.
C. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2018.
D. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2020.
E. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2020.
F. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum
Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2020.
G. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base;
2019.
H. ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Exterior Gypsum Panel Products for Use as
Sheathing; 2018.
I. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2017.
J. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior
Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2016.
K. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2016.
L. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Current Edition.
M. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Current Edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system.
C. Test Reports: For stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or ASTM C754, provide
independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840. Comply with requirements of GA-600 for fire-rated assemblies.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board installation and finishing,
with minimum 3 years of experience.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Job Number 2210142.00
09 21 16 - 2/6
C. Apprentice workers may be employed only under constant supervision from experienced installers or
applicators.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies as indicated on drawings.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Protection
1. Store materials in dry, ventilated space, under cover and 4 inches above concrete floor slabs.
2. Protect members from excessive stress during erection.
3. Distribute gypsum panels throughout the building to prevent overstressing the floor structural
systems during construction.
4. Store gypsum panels on flat surface and protect panels from warp and edge damage.
1.08 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Temperature and Humidity Requirements:
1. Maintain ambient air temperature above 55 degrees F.
2. Maintain 70 percent maximum relative humidity.
3. Maintain air temperature and humidity within the above limits in each work area for 48 hours
prior to, during, and after installation of gypsum board systems.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.
B. Interior Partitions, Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following
characteristics:
1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests
conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.
C. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:
1. Fire Rated Partitions: UL listed assembly No. U419; 1 hour rating.
2. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular assembly
in the current UL (FRD).
2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:
1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems: www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle.
2. Jaimes Industries: www.jaimesind.com/#sle.
3. Marino: www.marinoware.com/#sle.
4. SCAFCO Corporation: www.scafco.com/#sle.
5. Steel Construction Systems: www.steelconsystems.com/#sle.
6. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
B. Metal Framing Connectors and Accessories:
1. Same manufacturer as framing.
2. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc.: wwwstrongtie.com
C. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and
properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of
wall framing of L/120 at 5 psf.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09 21 16 - 3/6
1. Exception: The minimum metal thickness and section properties requirements of ASTM C 645 are
waived provided steel of 40 ksi minimum yield strength is used, the metal is continuously dimpled,
the effective thickness is at least twice the base metal thickness, and maximum stud heights are
determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 72 using assemblies specified by ASTM C 754.
2. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces.
3. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.
4. Ceiling Channels: C-shaped.
5. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch.
D. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.
E. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate
deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, preventing rotation of studs while
maintaining structural performance of partition.
1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity required
by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI S100-12.
2. Material: ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50/340, with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized
coating.
3. Provide components UL-listed for use in UL-listed fire-rated head of partition joint systems
indicated on drawings.
2.03 BOARD MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:
1. American Gypsum Company: www.americangypsum.com/#sle.
2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com/#sle.
3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle.
4. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com/#sle.
5. USG Corporation: www.usg.com/#sle.
6. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize
joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
a. Mold resistant board is required At Sink Walls.
3. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no
tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.
4. Thickness:
a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch.
b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch.
5. Paper-Faced Products:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock.
b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Fireguard X.
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
6. Mold Resistant Paper Faced Products:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Mold-Guard.
b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Fireguard X Mold-Guard.
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
C. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; ends square cut.
1. Application: Sink Areas.
2. Core Type: Regular & Type X.
3. Thickness: 5/8 inch, as indicated.
4. Edges: Tapered.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Job Number 2210142.00
09 21 16 - 4/6
2.04 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES
A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: Full Stud
inch.
B. Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant; do not use solvent-based
non-curing butyl sealant.
1. Products:
a. Franklin International, Inc; Titebond GREENchoice Professional Acoustical Smoke and Sound
Sealant: www.titebond.com/#sle.
b. Liquid Nails, a brand of PPG Architectural Coatings; AS-825 Acoustical Sound Sealant:
www.liquidnails.com/#sle.
c. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
C. Acoustical Caulking, CK-3: ASTM C 919, non-hardening polyisobutylene rubber.
D. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise.
1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance.
E. Beads, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: ASTM C1047, rigid plastic, galvanized steel, or rolled zinc,
unless noted otherwise.
1. Corner Beads: Low profile, for 90 degree outside corners.
F. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project
conditions.
1. Fiberglass Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise
indicated.
2. Paper Tape: 2 inch wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated.
3. Joint Compound: Drying type, vinyl-based, ready-mixed.
a. Products:
1) CertainTeed Corporation; Extreme All-Purpose Joint Compound:
www.certainteed.com/#sle.
2) Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
G. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033 inch in
Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping screws, corrosion resistant.
H. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness:
ASTM C954; steel drill screws, corrosion resistant.
I. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self-piercing tapping type.
J. Adhesive for Attachment to Wood, ASTM C557 and Metal:
1. Products:
a. Franklin International, Inc; Titebond PROvantage Professional Drywall Adhesive:
www.titebond.com/#sle.
b. Liquid Nails, a brand of PPG Architectural Coatings; DWP-24 Drywall Construction Adhesive:
www.liquidnails.com/#sle.
c. Substitution: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PERFORMANCE
A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.
1. Examine structural framing and conditions under which wall and ceiling systems are to be
installed.
2. Start of wall and ceiling system Work will indicate acceptance of surfaces and conditions within
each area.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09 21 16 - 5/6
B. Protection: Provide temporary covering to eliminate splattering of joint compound on adjacent finished
surfaces.
3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center.
1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations.
2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to to ceiling framing in
accordance with details.
C. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain clearance
between top of studs and structure.
D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than
double studs at jambs.
E. Blocking: Install blocking for support of wall cabinets. Bolt or screw steel channels to studs.
3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and
mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.
B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing members.
2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board.
3. Seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes, except where
firestopping is provided.
3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints,
especially in highly visible locations.
B. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly
listing.
C. Exposed Gypsum Board in Interior Wet Areas: Seal joints, cut edges, and holes with water-resistant
sealant.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.
B. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.
3.06 JOINT TREATMENT
A. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint
compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.
B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:
1. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish.
2. Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish.
3. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed
construction.
C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive
finishes.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Job Number 2210142.00
09 21 16 - 6/6
1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
2. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile and
fixed cabinetry.
3. Taping, filling and sanding is not required at base layer of double layer applications.
3.07 TOLERANCES
A. Do not exceed 3/16 inch variation in 8'-0" from plumb, level, and true lines.
B. Do not exceed 1/8 inch variation in 8'-0" from level surface in areas scheduled to receive thin set
ceramic tile and fiberglass reinforced polyester resin panels.
C. Do not exceed 1/16 inch offset at joints between panels within the same plane.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 TILING
09 30 00 - 1/4
SECTION 09 30 00
TILING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Tile for wall applications.
B. Cementitious backer board as tile substrate.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A108/A118/A136 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile
(Compendium); 2019.
B. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set
Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2017.
C. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured
Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 2017.
D. ANSI A108.1c - Contractor's Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland
Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with
Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2021).
E. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set
Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 2020.
F. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 2017.
G. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of Cementitious
Backer Units; 2018.
H. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2012
(Revised).
I. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for High Performance Cement Grouts for Tile
Installation; 2010 (Reaffirmed 2016).
J. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for
Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2016).
K. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 2021.
L. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2019.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include
instructions for using grouts and adhesives.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with
dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details.
D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 by 18 inches in size
illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Installer's Qualification Statement:
1. Submit documentation of National Tile Contractors Association (NTCA) or Tile Contractors'
Association of America (TCAA) accreditation.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
TILING Job Number 2210142.00
09 30 00 - 2/4
G. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stain removal
methods.
H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Extra Tile: 1 percent of each size, color, and surface finish combination.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Maintain one copy of and ANSI A108/A118/A136 and TCNA (HB) on site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in
this section, with minimum five years of documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications:
1. Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of five years of documented
experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment.
B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TILE
A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer.
1. United Tile: www.unitedtile.com/#sle.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures
B. Glazed Wall Tile: ANSI A137.1, standard grade.
1. Size: 3 by 12 inch, nominal.
2. Thickness: 9.52 mm
3. Surface Finish: Matte glaze.
4. Color(s): As indicated on drawings.
5. Products:
a. United Tile - Settecento, New Yorker: www.unitedtile.com/#sle.
2.02 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.4.
1. Products:
a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX N 23 MICROTEC: www.ardexamericas.com
b. Custom Building Products; ProLite Premium Rapid Setting Large Format Tile Mortar, with
Multi-Surface Bonding Primer: www.custombuildingproducts.com
c. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete 735 Premium Flex: www.merkrete.com
d. TEC, an H.B. Fuller Construction Products Brand; TEC Ultimate Large Tile Mortar:
www.tecspecialty.com
e. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
2.03 GROUTS
A. High Performance Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 TILING
09 30 00 - 3/4
1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is
indicated.
2. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints less than 1/8
inch wide.
3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
4. Products:
a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX FL: www.ardexamericas.com
b. Custom Building Products; Fusion Pro Single Component Grout:
www.custombuildingproducts.com
c. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE PERMACOLOR Grout: www.laticrete.com
d. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Pro Grout: www.merkrete.com
e. TEC, an H.B. Fuller Construction Products Brand; TEC AccuColor Plus Grout:
www.tecspecialty.com
f. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Grout Sealer: Liquid-applied, moisture and stain protection for existing or new Portland cement grout.
1. Composition: Water-based colorless silicone.
2. Products:
a. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Grout Sealer: www.merkrete.com
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Backer Board: Cementitious type complying with ANSI A118.9; high density, glass fiber reinforced, 1/2
inch thick; 2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners.
1. Products:
a. Custom Building Products; WonderBoard Lite Backerboard:
www.custombuildingproducts.com
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are
dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect surrounding work from damage.
B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.
C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness
tolerances.
D. Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape
joints and corners, cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install tile, thresholds, and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI
A108.1a through ANSI A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB) recommendations.
B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
TILING Job Number 2210142.00
09 30 00 - 4/4
C. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout joints
without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.
D. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
E. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.
F. Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated.
G. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout, with either bond
breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding.
3.04 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09 51 00 - 1/4
SECTION 09 51 00
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 21 13 00 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system.
B. Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling.
C. Section 26 51 00 - Interior Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system.
D. Section 28 46 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm components in ceiling system.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2017.
B. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels; 2019.
C. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile
and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2020.
D. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2019.
E. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Current Edition.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is
provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and
approved.
B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning.
C. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components.
D. Samples: Submit two samples each, 4 inches long, of suspension system main runner.
E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Extra Acoustical Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Job Number 2210142.00
09 51 00 - 2/4
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior
to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Suspension Systems:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com/#sle.
2. USG: www.usg.com/#sle.
3. Match Existing System Where Indicated.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A.
B. Acoustical Panels: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type III, with the following characteristics:
1. Size: 24 by 24 inches.
2. Thickness: 7/8 inches.
3. Composition: Wet felted.
4. Edge: Square Lay-in
5. Surface Color: White.
6. Surface Pattern: Non-directional fissured.
7. Suspension System: Exposed grid Type 15/16 PRELUDE.
8. Products:
a. Armstrong Ultima - Square Lay-in.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures
2.03 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)
A. Metal Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and interlocking
components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required.
B. Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; heavy-duty.
1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face.
2. Finish: White painted.
3. Products:
a. Armstrong: 15/16 PRELUDE.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic
requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.
B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid.
1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid.
C. Acoustical Sealant For Perimeter Moldings: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in conjunction with
suspended ceiling system.
D. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09 51 00 - 3/4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M, ASTM E580/E580M, and
manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section.
B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection
of 1:360.
C. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work.
D. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying
members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected
hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
F. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to
exceed deflection capability.
G. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support
components independently.
H. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.
I. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other
interruptions.
1. Use longest practical lengths.
2. Overlap and rivet corners.
3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and
function.
C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.
D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.
E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.
F. Cutting Acoustical Units:
1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.
G. Install hold-down clips on each panel to retain panels tight to grid system; comply with fire rating
requirements.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Job Number 2210142.00
09 51 00 - 4/4
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 RESILIENT FLOORING
09 65 00 - 1/4
SECTION 09 65 00
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Resilient tile flooring.
B. Resilient base.
C. Installation accessories.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2021.
B. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2021.
C. RFCI (RWP) - Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings; 2011.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics;
including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.
C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial selection.
D. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, 4 by 4 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each
resilient flooring product specified.
E. Concrete Testing Standard: Submit a copy of ASTM F710.
F. Concrete Sub-floor Test Report: Submit a copy of the moisture and alkalinity (pH) test reports.
G. Certification: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring manufacturer and
adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub-floor is acceptable.
H. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and
suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified flooring with minimum
three years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing specified flooring with minimum three years
documented experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Upon receipt, immediately remove any shrink-wrap and check materials for damage and the correct
style, color, quantity and run numbers.
B. Store all materials off of the floor in an acclimatized, weather-tight space.
C. Maintain temperature in storage area between 65 degrees F and 85 degrees F.
D. Do not double stack pallets.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of
70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
RESILIENT FLOORING Job Number 2210142.00
09 65 00 - 2/4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TILE FLOORING
A. Vinyl Tile - Type LVT: Surface-decorated, with wear layer.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Shaw Contract: www.shawcontract.com/#sle
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
2. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1700, of Class corresponding to type specified.
3. Plank Tile Size: 9 by 48 inch.
4. Total Thickness: 0.197 inch.
5. Pattern: Unite - Cove 0927V.
6. Color: As indicated on drawings.
2.02 RESILIENT BASE
A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company: www.johnsonite.com/#sle.
b. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com/#sle.
c. Substitution: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures
2. Height: 4 inch.
3. Thickness: 0.125 inch.
4. Finish: Satin.
5. Length: Roll.
6. Color: Refer to schedule of interior finishes located on drawings.
7. Accessories: Premolded external corners and internal corners.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Primers, Adhesives, and Seam Sealer: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
B. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Vinyl, color as selected by Architect.
C. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might
telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other
chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.
B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are
dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.
C. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring
installation by testing for moisture and pH.
1. Test in accordance with ASTM F710.
2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring
manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove existing resilient flooring and flooring adhesives; follow the recommendations of RFCI (RWP).
B. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 RESILIENT FLOORING
09 65 00 - 3/4
C. Clean substrate.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of wall conditions.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Adhesive-Applied Installation:
1. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
2. Fit joints and butt seams tightly.
3. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
D. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring
under centerline of door.
E. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight
joints.
3.04 INSTALLATION - TILE FLOORING
A. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless otherwise
indicated in manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical pattern.
C. Install plank tile with a random offset of at least 6 inches from adjacent rows.
3.05 INSTALLATION - RESILIENT BASE
A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.
B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded
units.
C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
RESILIENT FLOORING Job Number 2210142.00
09 65 00 - 4/4
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 TILE CARPETING
09 68 13 - 1/4
SECTION 09 68 13
TILE CARPETING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Carpet tile, loose laid with edges and control grid adhered.
B. Removal of existing carpet tile.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09 05 61 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Independent agency testing of
concrete slabs, removal of existing floor coverings, cleaning, and preparation.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering
Materials; 2016 (Reapproved 2021).
B. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant
Heat Energy Source; 2019a, with Editorial Revision (2020).
C. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet; 2015.
D. CRI (GLP) - Green Label Plus Testing Program - Certified Products; Current Edition.
E. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant
Heat Energy Source; 2019.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics;
sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of joints.
D. Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring
special attention.
F. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and
suggested schedule for cleaning.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet tile with minimum three years
documented experience and approved by carpet tile manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Tile Carpeting:
1. Mohawk Group: www.mohawkgroup.com
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
TILE CARPETING Job Number 2210142.00
09 68 13 - 2/4
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Tile Carpeting, Type 1: Multi-level pattern loop, manufactured in one color dye lot.
1. Product: As shown on drawings.
2. Tile Size: 12 x 36 inch, nominal.
3. Thickness: 0.210 inch.
4. Color: As indicated on drawings.
5. Pattern: As indicated on drawings.
6. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with ASTM E648
or NFPA 253.
7. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D2859 (the "pill test").
8. VOC Content: Provide CRI (GLP) certified product; in lieu of labeling, independent test report
showing compliance is acceptable.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer.
B. Edge Strips: Vinyl, color as selected by Architect.
C. Adhesives:
1. Compatible with materials being adhered; maximum VOC content of 50 g/L; CRI (GLP) certified; in
lieu of labeled product, independent test report showing compliance is acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and
are ready to receive carpet tile.
B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive
materials to sub-floor surfaces.
C. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooring
installation by testing for moisture and pH.
1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material
manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove existing carpet.
B. Prepare floor substrates for installation of flooring in accordance with Section 09 05 61.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match.
D. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.
E. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.
F. Adhere carpet tile to substrate along centerline of rooms, at perimeter of rooms, where tiles are cut,
and at 15 foot intervals throughout rooms. Lay remainder of tile dry over substrate.
G. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 TILE CARPETING
09 68 13 - 3/4
H. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces.
B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
TILE CARPETING Job Number 2210142.00
09 68 13 - 4/4
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PAINTING AND COATING
09 90 00 - 1/6
SECTION 09 90 00
PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation.
B. Field application of paints.
C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having
factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment.
5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.
6. Glass.
7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural
Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2019.
C. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and
Wood-Based Materials; 2020.
D. GreenSeal GS-11 - Paints, Coatings, Stains, and Sealers; 2015.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each:
1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g.
"alkyd enamel").
2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47).
3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each
system.
C. Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range of
colors available for each finishing product specified.
1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen.
D. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.
F. Maintenance Data: Submit data including care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and
repair of painted and coated surfaces.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with
minimum three years documented experience.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
PAINTING AND COATING Job Number 2210142.00
09 90 00 - 2/6
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code,
coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions
for mixing and reducing.
C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees
F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges
required by the paint product manufacturer.
B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for
exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no
exceptions.
B. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible.
1. In the event that a single manufacturer cannot provide all specified products, minor exceptions
will be permitted provided approval by Architect is obtained using the specified procedures for
substitutions.
C. Paints:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com/#sle.
2. PPG Paints: www.ppgpaints.com/#sle.
3. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Product Requirements..
2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL
A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.
1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly
dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of
drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
3. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single
production run.
4. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is
specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B. Primers: As follows unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer of top coats;
where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as
"best" by the manufacturer.
1. Gypsum Board: Interior Institutional Low Odor/VOC Primer Sealer; MPI #149.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PAINTING AND COATING
09 90 00 - 3/6
2. Wood: Latex Primer for Interior Wood; MPI #39.
3. Steel, Uncoated: Anti-Corrosive Alkyd Primer for Metal; MPI #79.
4. Steel -- Shop Primer: Interior/Exterior Quick Dry Alkyd Primer for Metal; MPI #76.
5. Products:
C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following:
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings.
b. Architectural coatings VOC limits of Washington.
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or
other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited:
1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds
(hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).
2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-ethylhexyl)
phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate,
dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead,
mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene, toluene
(methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride.
E. Colors: As indicated on drawings
2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR
A. Typical All Interior Surfaces Indicated to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including gypsum
board and wood.
1. Two top coats and one coat primer.
2. Top Coat(s): Institutional Low Odor/VOC Interior Latex; MPI #143-148.
3. Top Coat Product(s):
a. Sherwin-Williams Harmony Interior Acrylic Latex. (MPI #44, 53, 54, 143, 144)
b. Substitution: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
4. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats.
B. Door Frames Medium Duty Door/Trim: For surfaces subject to frequent contact by occupants, including
metals:
1. Medium duty applications include door frames.
2. Two top coats and one coat primer.
3. Top Coat Product(s):
a. Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic Coating. (MPI #153, 154)
b. Substitution: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
4. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats.
2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials,
and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not;
commercial quality.
B. Patching Material: Latex filler.
C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
PAINTING AND COATING Job Number 2210142.00
09 90 00 - 4/6
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that
may potentially affect proper application.
D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
E. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
F. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless
moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for
the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and
bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
F. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after
repair.
G. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust.
Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel
surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components
and paint separately.
B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.
D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
E. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to
applying next coat.
G. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to
finishing.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove
daily from site.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PAINTING AND COATING
09 90 00 - 5/6
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project.
B. Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.
3.06 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMS
A. As indicated on drawings. .
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
PAINTING AND COATING Job Number 2210142.00
09 90 00 - 6/6
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
10 26 01 - 1/2
SECTION 10 26 01
WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Corner guards.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.
B. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2017.
C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2021a.
D. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; 2020.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Indicate physical dimensions, features, anchorage details, and rough-in measurements.
C. Samples: Submit two sections of corner guard, 6" inch long, illustrating component design,
configuration, color and finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Wall and Corner Guards:
1. Construction Specialties, Inc; CO-8 | CO-8M: www.c-sgroup.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Corner Guards - Surface Mounted:
1. Material: Type 304 stainless steel, No. 4 finish, 16 gage, .051 inch thick.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide assemblies with flame spread index of 10 or less and
smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Height: 4 feet
4. Width of Wings: 2 inches.
5. Corner: Square.
a. Field verify corner angles at conditions not equal to 90 degrees for CO-8M Corner Guards.
6. Color: refer to schedule of interior finishes located on drawings.
7. Length: One piece.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that rough openings, concealed blocking, and anchors are correctly sized and located.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
WALL AND CORNER GUARDS Job Number 2210142.00
10 26 01 - 2/2
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured rigidly in
position to wall framing members only.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Required Height: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
11 30 13 - 1/2
SECTION 11 30 13
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Kitchen appliances.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping: Plumbing connections for appliances.
B. Section 26 05 83 - Wiring Connections: Electrical connections for appliances.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions, capacity, and operating features of each
piece of residential equipment specified.
C. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 KITCHEN APPLIANCES
A. Provide Equipment Eligible for Energy Star Rating: Energy Star Rated.
B. Dishwasher, Type ADA: Undercounter.
1. Controls: Solid state electronic.
2. Wash Levels: Three (3).
3. Cycles: Six (6), including normal, rinse and hold, short, china/crystal, and pot and pan.
4. Features: Include rinse aid dispenser, optional no-heat dry, optional water temperature boost,
adjustable upper rack, and adjustable lower rack.
5. Finish: Porcelain enameled steel, color as indicated.
6. Manufacturers:
a. Bosch: www.bosch-home.com/#sle..
b. Product: 800 Series (SGX78BFFUC)
c. Substitution: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify utility rough-ins are provided and correctly located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Remove packing materials from equipment and properly discard.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES Job Number 2210142.00
11 30 13 - 2/2
B. Wash and clean equipment.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 WINDOW SHADES - MECHOSHADE SYSTEMS
12 24 00 - 1/4
SECTION 12 24 00
WINDOW SHADES - MECHOSHADE SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Manual roller shades and accessories.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NFPA 701 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films; 2019.
B. UL (GGG) - GREENGUARD Gold Certified Products; Current Edition.
C. WCMA A100.1 - Safety of Window Covering Products; 2018.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sequencing:
1. Do not fabricate shades until field dimensions for each opening have been taken with finished
conditions in place. "Hold to" dimensions are not acceptable.
2. Do not install shades until final surface finishes and painting are complete.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product to be
used including materials, finishes, fabrication details, dimensions, profiles, mounting requirements, and
accessories.
C. Shop Drawings: Include shade schedule indicating size, location and keys to details.
D. Source Quality Control Submittals: Provide test reports indicating compliance with specified fabric
properties.
E. Selection Samples: Include fabric samples in full range of available colors and patterns.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: List of all components with part numbers, and operation and
maintenance instructions; include copy of shop drawings.
G. Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty and documentation of final executed warranty
completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section,
with not less than ten years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this type with minimum ten years
of documented experience with shading systems of similar size, type, and complexity; manufacturer's
authorized representative.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver shades in manufacturer's unopened packaging, labeled to identify each shade for each opening.
B. Handle and store shades in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
WINDOW SHADES - MECHOSHADE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00
12 24 00 - 2/4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: MechoShade Systems LLC; www.mechoshade.com/#sle.
B. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures
2.02 ROLLER SHADES
A. General:
1. Provide shade system components that are designed to remove or adjust without removal of
mounted shade brackets.
2. Provide shade system that operates smoothly when shades are raised or lowered.
B. Roller Shades MechoShade Systems LLC; Mecho/5 System; www.mechoshade.com/#sle.
1. Description: Single roller, manually operated fabric window shades.
a. Size: As indicated on drawings at new sidelite locations. Existing conditions to be field
verified..
2. Brackets and Mounting Hardware: As recommended by manufacturer for mounting indicated and
to accommodate shade fabric roll-up size and weight.
a. Material: Steel, 1/8 inch thick.
3. Roller Tubes:
a. Material: Extruded aluminum.
b. Size: As recommended by manufacturer; selected for suitability for installation conditions,
span, and weight of shades.
c. Fabric Attachment: Utilize extruded channel in tube to accept vinyl spline welded to fabric
edge. Shade band to be removable and replaceable without removing roller tube from
brackets or inserting spline from the side of the roller tube.
d. Roller tubes to be capable of being removed and reinstalled without affecting roller shade
limit adjustments.
4. Hembars: Designed to maintain bottom of shade straight and flat.
a. Style: Exposed aluminum bottom bar with matching finials, rectangular profile.
1) Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color selection.
5. Clutch Operator: Manufacturer's standard material and design integrated with bracket/brake
assembly.
a. Provide a permanently lubricated brake assembly mounted on a oil-impregnated hub with
wrapped spring clutch.
b. Brake must withstand minimum pull force of 50 pounds in the stopped position.
c. Mount clutch/brake assembly on the support brackets, fully independent of the roller tube
components.
6. Drive Chain: Continuous loop stainless steel beaded ball chain, 95 pound minimum breaking
strength. Provide upper and lower limit stops.
a. Chain Retainer: Chain tensioning device complying with WCMA A100.1.
7. Accessories:
a. Fascia: Removable extruded aluminum fascia, size as required to conceal shade mounting,
attachable to brackets without exposed fasteners; As selected from manufacturer's standard
colors..
1) Fascia to be capable of installation across two or more shade bands in one piece.
2) Color: refer to schedule of interior finishes located on drawings.
3) Profile: Square.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 WINDOW SHADES - MECHOSHADE SYSTEMS
12 24 00 - 3/4
2.03 SHADE FABRIC
A. Fabric - Type 1: Non-flammable, color-fast, impervious to heat and moisture, and able to retain its
shape under normal operation.
1. Material Certificates and Product Disclosures:
a. Low-Emitting Material Certification: Greenguard Gold certified and listed in UL (GGG).
2. Performance Requirements:
a. Flammability: Pass NFPA 701 large or small scale test.
3. Products:
a. MechoShade Systems LLC Inc; Soho - 1900 Series (5% open): www.mechoshade.com/#sle.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures
2.04 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION
A. Field measure finished openings prior to ordering or fabrication.
B. Dimensional Tolerances: Fabricate shades to fit openings within specified tolerances.
1. Vertical Dimensions: Fill openings from head to sill with 1/4 inch space between bottom bar and
window stool.
2. Horizontal Dimensions - Inside Mounting: Fill openings from jamb to jamb.
3. Horizontal Dimensions - Outside Mounting: Cover window frames, trim, and casings completely.
C. At openings requiring continuous multiple shade units with separate rollers, locate roller joints at
window mullion centers; butt rollers end-to-end.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine finished openings for deficiencies that may preclude satisfactory installation.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
C. Start of installation shall be considered acceptance of substrates.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for achieving best result for substrate
under the project conditions.
B. Coordinate with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to support shades.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings, using mounting
devices as indicated.
B. Replace shades that exceed specified dimensional tolerances at no extra cost to Owner.
C. Adjust level, projection, and shade centering from mounting bracket. Verify there is no telescoping of
shade fabric. Ensure smooth shade operation.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean soiled shades and exposed components as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Replace shades that cannot be cleaned to "like new" condition.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
WINDOW SHADES - MECHOSHADE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00
12 24 00 - 4/4
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from subsequent construction operations.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 COUNTERTOPS
12 36 00 - 1/4
SECTION 12 36 00
COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Countertops for manufactured casework.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards, 2nd Edition; 2014, with Errata (2016).
B. ISFA 3-01 - Classification and Standards for Quartz Surfacing Material; 2013.
C. MIA (DSDM) - Dimensional Stone Design Manual, Version VIII; 2016.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Specimen warranty.
C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of cabinets
and casework specified in other sections.
D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's full range
of available colors and patterns.
E. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section,
with not less than three years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in
accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental
conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COUNTERTOPS
A. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Countertops: Sheet or slab of natural quartz and plastic resin over
continuous substrate.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
COUNTERTOPS Job Number 2210142.00
12 36 00 - 2/4
1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 1-1/4 inch, minimum.
2. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Sheets, Slabs and Castings: Complying with ISFA 3-01 and
NEMA LD 3; orthophthalic polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous
and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating;
color and pattern consistent throughout thickness.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Pental Quartz; www.pentalquartz.com.
2) Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.
b. Factory fabricate components to the greatest extent practical in sizes and shapes indicated;
comply with the MIA Dimension Stone Design Manual.
c. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Polished.
3. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch thick; square edge.
4. Fabricate in accordance with manufacturer's standard requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade, A-C veneer grade, minimum 5-ply; minimum
3/4 inch thick; join lengths using metal splines.
B. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials
being joined.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.
1. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against cabinet or
wall.
2. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary
cutouts or fixture holes.
B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated.
1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue.
2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece; join pieces with adhesive sealant in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are
installed in proper locations.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for
the substrate under the project conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shim where
required.
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 COUNTERTOPS
12 36 00 - 3/4
B. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, maximum.
B. Offset From Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch maximum; 1/16 inch minimum.
C. Field Joints: 1/8 inch wide, maximum.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 06 July 2022
COUNTERTOPS Job Number 2210142.00
12 36 00 - 4/4
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00 - 1/15
SECTION 20 00 00
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes, but not limited to, furnishing labor, materials, and equipment for completion of work unless
indicated or noted otherwise. See Division 1 for sequence of work.
B. Work indicated on the mechanical plans and in the specifications that will not be performed by this
Mechanical Contractor (i.e. duct and pipe block-outs, penetrations through walls, floors, and attic, wall
patching, work indicated to be performed by other Contractors, etc) shall be coordinated with the
General Contractor prior to bid. The Mechanical Contractor is responsible for identifying quantity, size,
and type of work with the General Contractor. Work not coordinated will be the responsibility of the
Mechanical Contractor and shall not be charged as additional cost to the Owner.
C. This Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits required by State and local authorities governing the
installation of the mechanical work. It is the Contractor's responsibility to contact all utility
organizations serving the building, prior to bid, and to include all charges for inspections, installation of
materials, equipment and connection of all required utilities.
D. Furnish exact location of electrical connections and complete information on motor controls to Division
26, prior to bid.
E. Putting heating, ventilating, cooling, and exhaust systems into full operation and continuing their
operation during each working day of testing and balancing.
F. Making changes in mechanical drive systems (pulleys, belts, VFD’s, motor speed, etc) and dampers or
adding dampers as required for correct balance as recommended by Section 23 05 93 and at no
additional cost to Owner. All equipment shall be provided with a single point electrical connection,
unless otherwise indicated.
G. The drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is binding as if called
for in both.
H. The ductwork and accessibility to HVAC equipment shall take precedence over all other equipment in
the ceiling interstitial spaces or other mechanical areas including, but not limited to, sprinkler piping,
heating piping, domestic water piping and electrical conduit (except fire pump rooms where as fire
sprinkler equipment takes precedence).
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 apply to this Section.
1.03 SUBMITTALS REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Access doors.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. Perform work in accordance with applicable Codes.
2. In case of differences between building codes, state laws, local ordinances, utility company
regulations, and Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern.
B. Product Approvals: See paragraphs elsewhere in this specification.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2210142.00
20 00 00 - 2/15
C. Warranties:
1. In addition to guarantee specified in General Conditions, guarantee heating, cooling, and
plumbing systems to be free from noise in operation that may develop from failure to construct
system in accordance with Contract Documents.
2. In order to be protected, secure proper guarantees from suppliers and Subcontractors.
3. Provide certificates of warranty for each piece of equipment. Clearly record "start-up" date of
each piece of equipment on certificate. Include certificates as part of Operation & Maintenance
Manual.
D. Manufacture: Use domestic made pipe, pipe fittings, and motors on Project.
E. Identification: Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL and AGA labels shall be in
place when Project is turned over to Owner.
1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Codes and agencies having jurisdictional authority over mechanical installation.
1. Washington State Energy Code -- Latest Approved Edition
2. International Building Code -- Latest Approved Edition
3. International Fire Code - Latest Approved Edition
4. International Mechanical Code -- Latest Approved Edition
5. Uniform Plumbing Code -- Latest Approved Edition
6. Local Sewer and Water District Requirements
7. State and County Department of Health
8. Local Fire Marshal
10. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
11. Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act (WISHA)
12. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
1.06 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
A. Site Inspection:
1. Examine premises and understand the conditions which may affect performance of work of this
Division before submitting proposals for this work.
2. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence related to
failure to examine site conditions.
1.07 DESIGN DRAWINGS
A. Mechanical drawings are not shop drawings and are intended to show general arrangement of piping,
ductwork, equipment, etc. Follow as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades
will permit.
B. Consider architectural, structural and electrical drawings part of this work in so far as these drawings
furnish information relating to design and construction of building. Architectural drawings take
precedence over mechanical drawings.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00 - 3/15
C. Because of small scale of mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and
accessories which may be required. The Mechanical Contractor shall include in the bid a sufficient
quantity of offsets, fittings, and accessories for the size of the project, based upon the contractor’s
experience, necessary to facilitate mechanical utility installation. No additional costs shall be charged
for additional offsets, fittings, and accessories required for installation of the mechanical utilities shown
on the design drawings. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting this work and arrange
work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves, and accessories required in meeting the design
conditions.
1.08 PRE-CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION MEETING
A. This Contractor is responsible to participate in coordination meetings with the General Contractor, Fire
Protection Contractor and other subcontractors needing to coordinate special requirements (such as
electrical contractor, HVAC contractor, plumbing contractor, etc.)
B. Coordination meetings shall consider elevations, required clearances, and routings of all trades to
assure that all trades can be installed without conflict.
C. The outcome of this coordination shall allow each system (Mechanical, Fire Protection, Plumbing,
Electrical, etc) to be installed without further conflicts for space or locations.
D. Failure to coordinate with other trades and/or existing conditions that result in the removal and re-
installation of systems shall not be charged as additional costs.
1.09 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Develop coordination drawings, and other pre-installation coordination methods as necessary to
coordinate layouts prior to installation. Coordination drawings shall consist of overlay drawings, or
other similar methods to graphically indicate plumbing, fire protection, HVAC, electrical, and other
similar elements in a single location in order to identify conflicts. All elements shall be drawn to scale.
Coordination drawings are not required to be submitted for approval, except where indicated otherwise
in the specification. However, a minimum of one hard copy of coordination drawings shall be present
on site at all times and made available to the Architect/Engineer (A/E) Representative upon request. If
coordination drawings are not on file, or if systems are not installed per coordination drawings, costs
and delays of required reengineering, replacement and other work required to correct conflicts shall be
solely the Contractor’s.
1. Contractor shall have the underground coordination drawings available upon request by A/E
Representative within 60 days after Notice to Proceed.
2. Contractor shall have the aboveground coordination drawings available upon request by A/E
Representative within 90 days after Notice to Proceed.
B. Coordination drawings shall consist of one of the following:
1. Drawing sheets developed sequentially by each trade with all components drawn to scale and
color coded to represent each trade.
C. Where coordination drawings, or other preinstallation coordination methods show that available space
is inadequate or that modifications will affect architectural elements, request information from the
Architect before proceeding with work. No additional payment will be made for installation conflicts
which could have been identified by coordination drawings or other pre-installation coordination
methods.
D. Make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other
installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2210142.00
20 00 00 - 4/15
E. Each subcontractor shall:
1. Indicate the exact name, location and dimension of each element to be provided by that
subcontractor.
2. Arrange components as necessary to avoid conflict with new and existing conditions and the work
of other subcontractors as directed by the General Contractor.
3. Note requirements for sleeves, block-outs, cutting, patching, access doors, blocking, supports,
inserts and other similar items.
4. Notify the General Contractor of conflicts.
5. Approve the coordination drawings when all conflicts are resolved and an acceptable layout is
obtained.
F. The General Contractor shall coordinate the layouts indicated on the coordination drawings and resolve
any conflicts prior to commencement of subject portions of the work.
1.10 ELECTRICAL
A. All electrical work, conduit, boxes and devices in connection with control wiring as required to install
the control equipment as specified herein or shown on the drawings shall be furnished and installed
complete by the Division 26 Contractor.
B. All electrical work performed under this Section of the Specifications shall conform to all applicable
portions of the Division 26 specifications and shall conform to all governing codes.
C. All equipment shall be factory wired to a junction box for connection to electrical service.
D. Where a piece of equipment specified includes an electric motor, the motor shall be furnished and
mounted by this Contractor. Motor starter, disconnect switches and wiring from the electrical panel to
the motor control devices and to the motor shall be provided by the Division 26 Contractor unless
stated otherwise in the mechanical specification and/or on the mechanical drawings.
E. All motor controllers and equipment panels (including but not limited to packaged equipment, custom
control panels, custom air handler panels) shall comply with NEC (including, but not limited to, marking
on controllers and labeling requirements).
1.11 TEMPORARY HEATING
A. Temporary heating for facility during construction phase shall not be supplied by the permanent system
installed under these specifications, unless all of the following are satisfied:
1. Product warranties shall be extended to account for construction use. Contractor shall furnish
certified document stating such extended warranties.
2. Contractor shall obtain letter of approval from the Owner stating that they understand equipment
expected life may be shortened due to severe usage.
3. Contractor shall be responsible for pressure cleaning all coils and vacuum cleaning all ductwork
prior to occupancy.
1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING AND PROTECTION
A. Contractor is responsible for protection of all material, equipment and apparatus provided under this
Section from damage, water, corrosion, freezing and dust, both in storage and when installed, until final
project acceptance.
B. Provide temporary heated and sheltered storage facilities for material and equipment.
C. Completely cover motors and other moving machinery to protect from dirt and water during
construction.
D. Handle and protect equipment and/or material in manner precluding unnecessary fire hazard.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00 - 5/15
E. Equipment requiring rotation and/or lubrication during storage shall have records maintained and
witnessed on a monthly basis and forwarded to the Architect/Engineer prior to acceptance. Provide
recorded maintenance for the O&M Manual.
F. Material or equipment damaged because of improper storage or protection will be rejected.
G. Equipment finish that is damaged by handling, storage, etc. shall be corrected by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner.
1.13 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces used for habitation or occupancy where rough surfaces are plastered, paneled,
or otherwise treated to provide a pleasing appearance.
B. Unfinished Spaces: Spaces used for storage or work areas, such as fan rooms, mechanical and boiler
rooms, etc., where appearance is not a factor.
C. Concealed Spaces: Spaces out of sight. For example, above ceilings; below floors; between double
walls; furred-in areas; pipe and duct shafts; and similar spaces.
D. Exposed: Open to view. For example, pipe running through a room and not covered by other
construction.
E. Outside: Open to view up to 5 feet beyond the exterior side of walls, above the roof, and unexcavated
or crawl spaces.
F. Conditioned Space: An area, room or space normally occupied and being heated or cooled for human
habitation by any equipment as defined by the extent of the building envelope insulation.
G. Replace: Existing mechanical equipment and components shall be demolished and discarded from the
project site or as directed otherwise. New mechanical equipment and components shall be installed in
the area where the existing mechanical equipment and components were demolished or as indicated
on the contract documents.
H. Removed: Existing mechanical equipment and components identified on the contract documents shall
be taken apart, taken down, and discarded from the project site unless directed otherwise on plan.
Removed items shall not be brought back to the project site for use or reinstallation.
I. Reinstall: Existing mechanical equipment and components identified on the contract documents that
need to be taken down and installed in the same or new location.
1.14 ABBREVIATIONS
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
A/E Architect/Engineer
AFF Above Finish Floor
AGA American Gas Association
AMCA Air Moving & Conditioning Association
ANSI American National Standards Institute
APWA American Public Works Association
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society of Testing & Materials
AWWA American Water Works Association
BFF Below Finish Floor
BHP Brake Horsepower
BTU British Thermal Unit
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2210142.00
20 00 00 - 6/15
CFM Cubic Feet per Minute
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
fpm feet per minute
FS Federal Specifications
FDC Fire Department Connection
FCO Flush Cleanout
FD Floor Drain
PWH Freeze Proof Wall Hydrant
GPM Gallons per Minute
HP Horsepower
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
IAQ Indoor Air Quality
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
KW Kilowatt
LPG Liquefied Petroleum Gas
MBH One Thousand British Thermal Units per Hour
MS Military Specifications
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society
NEC National Electrical Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NP Non-Potable Water
NPSH Net Positive Suction Head
OS&Y Outside Screw and Yoke
PIV Post Indicator Valve
PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute
per in accordance with
POC Point of Connection
PSI Pounds per Square Inch Gauge Pressure
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
SP Static Pressure
SWP Steam Working Pressure
UL Underwriter's Laboratories
VFD Variable Frequency Drive
VTR Vent Thru Roof
wg Water Gauge (inches of water)
WP Working Pressure
WPL Weatherproof Louver
WQA Water Quality Association
Additional abbreviations are as listed on the drawings or elsewhere in these specifications.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00 - 7/15
1.15 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. General: Provide schedule of values per Division 1 and related project requirements:
1. Division 22 and 23 Breakdown: Provide schedule of values, broken down into labor and materials
per specification section at a minimum. Further breakdown into subcategories is at the option of
the Contractor, except as noted below:
a. Section 20 00 00 - General Mechanical Requirements: Provide a subcategory for
“Mechanical Punchlist, Closeout and Owner Training”. The dollar value for this subcategory
shall be no less than 2.25% of the total dollar value of the Division 22 and 23 work (or as
indicated in Division 1, whichever is higher. The contractor shall receive payment upon
completion of all Mechanical Punchlist and Closeout items and Owner Training.
b. Section 23 08 00 - Commissioning HVAC System: The dollar value for “Commissioning” shall
in no case be less than 0.75% of the total dollar value of the Division 22 and 23 work (or as
indicated in Division 1, whichever is higher). The contractor shall receive payment upon
completion of all outstanding commissioning items as identified by the commissioning agent,
Engineer, and/or Owner.
B. The Contractor is advised that in addition to payments held out for retainage and project final
completion (i.e. “Mechanical Punchlist, Closeout, and Owner Training”), as specified above and in
Division 1, the Owner reserves the right to withhold 10% of the funds for any of the above categories
until the systems (of that category) have been proven to operate as specified and have been completely
tested, adjusted, and balanced.
1.16 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. All material used on the project shall be new and free of defects. The Architect and/or Engineer reserve
the right to reject any material, the appearance of which has been damaged on the site or in shipment.
The material shall be of pre-approved equal quality to that which is specified. Should the make and
type of material differ from that specified, the Contractor may be required to submit catalog and
engineering data (samples if requested) necessary to make a comparison and determine its suitability.
The Contractor shall also bear the cost of all changes to any aspect of the project (electrical,
mechanical, building, etc.) made necessary by any approved substitutions. Approved substitutions
include those listed as approved manufacturers or approved substitutions. Tentative approval of
substitute material and equipment will be made prior to bid only. Such request for approval shall be
made two weeks in advance of the bid opening to allow time to assess its suitability. Failure to obtain
approval prior to bid shall require the successful bidder to furnish materials and equipment only as
specified herein (see paragraph 2.01, this specification).
B. Equipment submittals shall be submitted per one of the following processes as selected by the
Architect/Engineer Representative and/or Owner:
1. Electronic Submittal Process:
a. The Contractor shall upload one complete PDF file of the Electronic Submittal Package to the
Architect’s SharePoint Site for approval. The Electronic Submittal package shall include the
following:
1) All required submittals (i.e. equipment cut sheets, shop drawings, etc.) per each
specification section.
2) Table of contents identifying each specification section, submittal requirement of each
specification, and the manufacturer name and model number of each item submitted.
3) Index sheet for each specification section.
4) Submission of PDF files of individual specifications or equipment cuts will be
automatically rejected.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2210142.00
20 00 00 - 8/15
5) The Contractor shall complete and upload a Submittal Information Form, in Microsoft
WORD format, for the A/E team to review. The equipment submittal will not be
considered “Received” nor will a review be provided until both the Electronic
Submittal Package and Submittal information Form have been uploaded.
6) If the Electronic Submittal Process is not feasible for a particular submittal section (i.e.
samples, certain shop drawings, recorded videos, CD’s, etc.), the Contractor shall
submit a request in writing to the A/E Representative to deviate from the Electronic
Submittal Process. If acceptable by the A/E Representative the Contractor shall follow
the Hard Copy Submittal Process for the submission.
2. Review of submittal data by the Engineer or Architect does not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for quantities, measurements, and compliance with the intent of all contract
documents.
3. Furnish submittals generally according to the list below. Individual sections may contain more
specific submittal listing of the particular section labeled “Submittal Requirements.” Furnish on
each particular section and the following equipment:
a. Pipe
b. Pipe Insulation
c. Duct Insulation and Lining
d. Hot Water Tanks
e. Plumbing Fixtures
f. Valves
g. Pipe Hangers
h. Piping Specialties
i. HVAC Equipment
j. Temperature Control Equipment and Shop Drawings
k. Air Balance Contractor
l. Fire Marshal Stamped and Approved Shop Drawings for Fire Sprinkler System
m. Any material found to be installed without prior approval will be required to be removed and
replaced with only specified material at Contractor's cost.
n. Mechanical Drawings for the project have been developed by the Engineer using AutoCAD™
Revision 2015 software. These drawing files will be made available to the Contractor for
development of shop drawings and/or "As-Builts" for a fee of $30.00 per sheet. Full payment
to be made prior to release of drawing files.
1.17 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
A. Bind Operation & Maintenance Manual for Mechanical Systems in three-ring, hard-backed binder with
clear plastic pocket on spine. Spine of each binder shall have following typewritten lettering inserted:
OPERATION
AND
MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
B. Provide master index at beginning of Manual showing items included. Use plastic permanent tab
indexes for Sections of Manual.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00 - 9/15
C. First Section shall consist of name, address, and phone number of Architect, General Contractor, and
Mechanical, Plumbing, Sheet Metal, Refrigeration, Temperature control, and Electrical Subcontractors.
Also include complete list of equipment installed with name, address, and phone number of each
vendor.
D. Provide Section for each type of item of equipment.
E. Submit copies as specified by Division 1 and at a minimum provide three (3) copies of Operation &
Maintenance Manual to Architect for his approval.
F. Include descriptive literature (Manufacturer's catalog data) of each manufactured item. Literature shall
show capacities and size of equipment used and be marked indicating each specific item with applicable
data underlined.
G. Include all warranties/guarantees including extended warranties.
H. Include all start-up logs.
I. Operating Instructions shall include:
1. General description of each mechanical system
2. Step-by-step procedure to follow in putting each piece of mechanical equipment into operation
3. Provide schematic control diagrams for all systems. Each diagram shall show locations of start-
stop switches, insertion thermostats, room thermostats, thermometers, firestats, pressure
gauges, automatic valves, refrigeration accessories. Mark correct operating settings for each
control instrument on these diagrams.
4. Provide diagram for electrical control system showing wiring of related electrical control items
such as firestats, fuses, interlocks, electrical switches, and relays.
5. Provide drawing of each temperature control panel identifying components on panels and their
function.
J. Maintenance Instructions shall include:
1. Manufacturer's maintenance instructions for each piece of mechanical equipment installed in
Project. Instructions shall include name of vendor, installation instructions, parts numbers and
lists operation instructions of equipment, and maintenance and lubrication instructions.
2. Summary list of mechanical equipment requiring lubrication showing name of equipment,
location, and type and frequency of lubrication.
3. List of mechanical equipment used indicating name, model, serial number, and name plate data of
each item together with number and name associated with each system item.
4. For hydronic systems, include gallons in system, amounts and types of each chemical, etc. Also,
include step-by-step procedure to recharge the system.
1.18 COMMISSIONING
A. General Requirements: The building’s systems shall be tested to ensure that control devices,
components, equipment, and systems are calibrated, adjusted, and operate in accordance with the
approved plans and specifications. This shall include the following:
1. Commissioning Plan
2. Systems Testing and Balancing
3. Controls Functional Performance Testing
4. Preliminary Commissioning Report
5. Post Construction Documentation
6. Final Commissioning Report
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2210142.00
20 00 00 - 10/15
B. Commissioning Plan: A commissioning plan shall be developed by a registered design professional or
approved agency and shall include at a minimum the following:
1. A detailed explanation of the design intent
2. Equipment and systems to be tested
3. Functions to be tested (for example, economizer control, discharge air temperature control, etc.)
4. Conditions under which the test shall be performed
5. Measureable criteria for acceptable performance
C. System Testing and Balancing: Provide testing and balancing as specified in Sections 23 05 93.
D. Controls Functional Performance Testing: Functional testing shall demonstrate the correct installation
and operation of each component, system, and system to system intertie relationship in accordance
with the plans and specifications. This demonstration is to prove operation, function, and maintenance
serviceability for each of the commissioned systems. Testing shall include all modes of operation,
including:
1. All modes as described in the sequence of operation
2. Performance of alarms
3. Mode of operation upon a loss of power and restored power
4. The HVAC control system shall be tested to ensure that control devices, components, equipment,
and systems are calibrated, adjusted, and operate in accordance with the plans and specifications.
E. Preliminary Commissioning Report: The preliminary commissioning report, completed and certified by
the registered design professional or approved agency, shall be provided to the Owner. The preliminary
commissioning report shall include test procedures and results, and shall identify the following:
1. Deficiencies found during testing which have not been corrected at the time of report preparation
and the anticipated date of correction.
2. Deferred tests which cannot be performed at the time of report preparation due to climatic
conditions. Include the climatic conditions required for testing and the anticipated date of each
deferred test.
3. Record of progress and completion of operator training.
F. Post Construction Documentation: Provide Operation and Maintenance (O&M) data, as-built record
drawings, final commissioning report and test and balance report, as specified in this section, within 90
days of the date of receipt of the Certificate of Occupancy.
G. Final Commissioning Report: Provide a complete report of test procedures and results and submitted to
the Engineer and the Owner. The report shall identify the following:
1. Procedures and results of all functional performance tests
2. Disposition of all deficiencies found during testing, including details of corrective measures used
or proposed
H. The Contractor is responsible to submit to the code official a commissioning compliance checklist, per
section C408 of the WSEC, signed by the building owner.
1.19 WARRANTY
A. All warranty information shall be submitted as part of the “Operation and Maintenance Manual for
Mechanical Systems” in this section.
B. All warranties for mechanical and plumbing equipment shall start upon completion of commissioning.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00 - 11/15
1.20 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall maintain, in addition to coordination drawings, an as-built set of prints that clearly
identify all deviations from the original design. The As-Built drawings shall be drafted per one of the
following methods:
1. Draft all revisions on a separate dark layer, on the coordination drawing set. The Contractor shall
maintain a copy of the original coordination drawing set.
2. Draft all revisions on the design drawings with a red color pencil.
B. This red lined set shall identify all drawing revisions including addenda items, change orders, and
Contractor revisions.
C. Drawings shall show locations of all underground pipe and duct installed by this Contractor.
Underground pipes and ducts shall be shown with cross section elevations. All pipe, raceway, manholes
or lines of other trades shall be included.
D. The Contractor shall update all references to specific products to indicate products actually installed on
project. This shall include, but not be limited to, air handlers, heat pumps etc.
1. Upon completion of the Division 22 and 23 Work, the Contractor shall deliver the red lined
drawings and one set of neatly drafted as-built drawings on electronic media in ACAD 2015 format
and PDF files to the Engineer for transmittal through the Engineer to the Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Any reference to the specifications or on the drawings to any article, device, product, material, fixture,
form or type of construction by manufacturer, name, make, or catalog number shall be interpreted as
establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition.
B. The manufacturer listed as Approved Manufacturers are approved to bid the project for the items
indicated without obtaining prior approval. Other manufacturers desiring to bid the project require
prior approval.
C. The listing of a manufacturer as an Approved Manufacturer does not necessarily mean that the
products of that manufacturer are equal to those specified. The listing is only an indication of those
manufacturers which may be capable of manufacturing, or have in the past manufactured, items equal
to those specified, and is intended to aid the Contractor in identifying manufacturers.
D. Products provided by Approved Manufacturers shall be equal to or superior to the specified
manufacturer's item in function, appearance, and quality, and shall fulfill all requirements of the plans
and specifications. The Architect/Engineer shall be the final judge as to whether an item meets these
requirements or not. If a manufacturer is not certain that his product meets these requirements or not,
then the manufacturer shall submit data as required to obtain the Design Consultant's approval prior to
bid opening.
E. The approval of a manufacturer applies to the manufacturer only and does not relieve the Contractor
from the responsibility of meeting all applicable requirements of the plans and specifications.
F. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs to other trades and all revisions required in accommodating
any products which are different from those specified or shown.
G. In reviewing a manufacturer for acceptance, factors considered include the following: engineering data
showing item's performance, proper local representation of manufacturer, likelihood of future
manufacturer's local support of product, service availability, previous installation, previous use by
Owner/Engineer/Architect and record, product quality, availability/quality of maintenance and
operation data, capacity/performance compared to specified items, acoustics, items geometry/access
utility needs, and similar concerns.
H. If approval is received to use other than specified items, responsibility for specified capacities and
ensuring that items to be furnished will fit space available lies with this Division.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2210142.00
20 00 00 - 12/15
I. If non-specified equipment is used and it will not fit job site conditions, this Division assumes
responsibility for replacement with items named in Specification.
2.02 ACCESS DOORS
A. This Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing flush mounted access doors in walls,
ceiling and floors and chases where the following equipment is concealed and is not accessible through
same.
1. Valves (shut off, balancing, control, trap primers, etc)
2. Dampers (control, balancing, fire, smoke, etc.)
B. Doors shall be UL listed 20 ga. cold rolled steel with concealed hinge, screwdriver operated lock and
prime coated. Furnish suitable for area mounted. Provide stainless steel access doors for non-painted
surfaces (i.e. tile, MDF)
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Milcor
2. Acudor
3. Greenheck
4. Nystrom
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WORKMANSHIP
A. This Contractor shall provide completed systems with a neat and finished appearance. If, in the
judgment of the Engineer, any portion of the work has not been performed in a workmanlike manner or
is left in a rough, unfinished state, this Contractor will be required to remove, reinstall or replace same
and patch and paint surrounding surfaces in a manner acceptable to the Engineer, without increase in
cost to the Owner.
3.02 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Final Inspection:
1. Prior to acceptance of the mechanical work, the Contractor shall put all mechanical systems into
operation for a period of not less than 5 working days so that they may be inspected by the
Architect/Engineer and the Owner's representatives.
2. The time of the final inspection shall be mutually agreed to by the Owner, Engineer, and
Contractor.
3. The Contractor shall furnish adequate staff to operate the mechanical systems during inspection.
3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING
A. Upon completion of the work, and after all tests and final inspection of the work by the Authority(s)
having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall demonstrate and instruct the Owner's designated operation
and maintenance personnel in the operation and maintenance of the various mechanical systems. The
Contractor shall arrange scheduled instruction periods with the Owner. The Contractor's
representatives shall be Superintendents or Foremen knowledgeable in each system and Supplier's
Representative when so specified.
B. Scheduled instruction periods shall be:
1. HVAC System Controls 1 Hour
2. HVAC Equipment Maintenance 1 Hour
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00 - 13/15
C. The contractor shall, at a minimum, include an Owner Training sign-in sheet in the O&M Manual that
indicates the start and end times of the training and the type of training provided. Owner shall sign off
on the Owner training sign-in sheet to be considered complete and satisfactory to Owner.
D. Costs for time involved by Contractor shall be included in the bid.
3.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Requirements: Final approval of mechanical installation will be recommended upon completion of the
following:
1. Completion of all punchlist items
2. Owner Training Sign-In sheet with Owner's signature
3. Permit Submittal
4. Valve Diagrams
5. Reproducible As-Built drawings delivered to Architect
6. Air Balance Report
7. Asbestos Free Statement
8. Guarantees
9. Equipment Manufacturer of all HVAC compressor units shall provide start-up logs.
10. EMCS Trend Logs
3.05 PREPARATION
A. Existing Buildings:
1. Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to existing work. Do not cut beams, columns, or
trusses.
2. Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs with materials of same quality and appearance as
adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown. Surface finishes by General Contractor.
3. Cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing pavements, sidewalks, roads, and curbs to permit
installation of work of this Division is responsibility of Section installing work.
4. This work shall be scheduled such that utility services and/or existing systems for the facility are
not interrupted during normal operating hours, without prior written permission of the Owner's
representative. Work that is performed during normal operational hours shall not interfere with
the normal function of the facility's daily operation.
5. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all existing mechanical
equipment and utilities indicated to be removed on the drawings. The Mechanical Contractor
shall also be responsible for the removal and reinstallation of all existing mechanical equipment
and utilities that will interfere with installation and operation of any new construction indicated
or required and shall be responsible for the removal of all existing mechanical equipment and
utilities indicated to be abandoned that will interfere with installation and operation of any new
construction indicated or required. All mechanical equipment (other than piping) to be removed
shall remain the property of the Owner, and shall be transported - stored - or disposed of, as
directed by the Owner. This will be at no cost to the Owner.
3.06 INSTALLATION
A. Install mechanical equipment to permit easy access for normal maintenance, and so that parts requiring
periodic replacement or maintenance, (e.g., coils, heat exchanger bundles, sheaves, filters, motors,
bearings, etc.) can be removed. Relocate items, which interfere with access.
B. Provide access doors in equipment, ducts, and walls/ceilings as required to allow for inspection and
proper maintenance.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2210142.00
20 00 00 - 14/15
C. Valves, damper operators, and other devices which are manually adjusted or operated shall be located
so as to be easily accessible by a person standing on the floor. Any such items which are not in the open
shall be made accessible through access openings in the building construction.
D. Gauges, thermometers, instrumentation and other components which are installed to monitor
equipment performance, operating conditions, etc., shall be oriented so as to be easily read by a person
standing on the floor. Provide necessary brackets and hangers as needed.
E. If circumstances at a particular location make the accessible installation of an item difficult or
inconvenient, the situation shall be discussed with the Architect/Engineer before installing the item in a
poor access location.
F. Belts, pulleys, couplings, projecting set screws, keys and other rotating parts which may pose a danger
to personnel, shall be fully enclosed or guarded in accordance with OSHA regulations.
G. Dissimilar Metals: Provide separations between all dissimilar metals. Where not specified in another
way, use 10 mil black plastic tape wrapped at point of contact or plastic centering inserts.
H. Provide offsets around all electrical panels (and similar electrical equipment) to maintain space clear
above and below panel to structure and clearance of 3.5 feet directly in front of panel, except where
indicated otherwise or required by NEC to be more. Such offsets are typically not shown on the
drawings, but are required per this paragraph.
I. Piping Through Framing: Piping through framing shall be installed in the approximate center of the
member. Where located such that nails or screws are likely to damage the pipe, a steel plate at least
1/16-inch thick shall be installed to provide protection. At metal framing, wrap piping to prevent
contact of dissimilar metals. At metal and wood framing, provide plastic pipe insulators at piping
penetrations through framing nearest each fixture and on at least 48-inch centers.
J. Safety Protection: All ductwork, piping and related items installed by this Contractor that present a
safety hazard (i.e., items installed at/near head height, items projecting into maintenance access paths,
etc.) shall be covered (at hazardous area) with 3/4" thick elastomeric insulation and 2" wide reflective
red/white striped self-sticking safety tape.
K. Equipment Access: Access to equipment is of utmost importance. Contractor shall apply extra attention
to the laying out of pipe and duct routings, and in coordinating all work. Poor access to equipment will
not be accepted. Contractor shall note that in essentially all areas, piping routed in ceiling space needs
to run in joist space, necessitating elbows/fittings/transitions at crosses with other trades, at structural
beams, and at all connections to mains and branches. Hatched areas at HVAC units indicate equipment
access areas. These (and all other) access areas shall be clear of obstructions. The Mechanical
Contractor is responsible to coordinate and ensure that all trades stay clear of access areas for any
Division 22 and 23 furnished equipment.
L. Ensure that items to be furnished fit space available. Make necessary field measurements to ascertain
space requirements including those for connections and furnish and install equipment of size and shape
so final installation shall suit true intent and meaning of Contract Documents.
M. Pipe Installation: Install piping in longest reasonable lengths. The use of short lengths of pipe with
multiple couplings where a single length of pipe could have been used is not acceptable.
3.07 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Properly lubricate equipment before Owner's acceptance.
B. Clean exposed piping, ductwork, equipment, and fixtures, remove debris from site. Repair all damaged
finishes and leave everything in working order.
C. Remove stickers from fixtures and adjust flush valves.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00 - 15/15
3.08 PAINTING
A. Paint all exposed pieces of equipment if not factory finished or painted under the Architectural Section
of these specifications. Paint shall be one coat primer and two coats enamel color as directed by the
Architect.
3.09 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI)
A. It is our intent to provide a timely response for RFIs regarding Division 22 and 23 Work. To further
expedite this process, if a suggestion can be determined or derived at by the initiator of the RFI, it is
required this suggestion be supplied with the submitted RFI. If no suggestion is given where one is
possible, the RFI will be returned as incomplete. RFI’s will be returned to the Contractor within seven
(7) business days from the time received by the Architect/Engineer Representative. All Mechanical RFIs
shall be written on the form provided at the back of this Section.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 05 17 - 1/3
SECTION 22 05 17
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe sleeves
B. Manufactured sleeve-seal systems
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASTM C592 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe
Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type); 2016
B.ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems; 2013a (Reapproved
2017)
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Seals
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Clean equipment, pipes, valves, and fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge that may have
accumulated from the installation and testing of the system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Vertical Piping:
1. Sleeve Length: 1 inch (25 mm) above finished floor.
2. Provide sealant for watertight joint.
3. Blocked Out Floor Openings: Provide 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) angle set in silicon adhesive around
opening.
4. Drilled Penetrations: Provide 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) angle ring or square set in silicone adhesive
around penetration.
B. Sheet Metal: Pipe passing through interior walls, partitions, and floors, unless steel or brass sleeves are
specified below.
C. Pipe Passing Through Below Grade Exterior Walls:
1. Zinc coated or cast iron pipe.
2. Provide watertight space with link rubber or modular seal between sleeve and pipe on both pipe
ends.
D. Pipe Passing Through Concrete Beam Flanges, except where Brass Pipe Sleeves are Specified:
1. Galvanized steel pipe or black iron pipe with asphalt coating.
2. Connect sleeve with floor plate except in mechanical rooms.
E. Pipe Passing Through Mechanical, Laundry, and kitchen above Basement:
1. Galvanized steel pipe or black iron pipe with asphalt coating.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING Job Number 2210142.00
22 05 17 - 2/3
2. Connect sleeve with floor plate except in mechanical rooms.
F. Penetrations in concrete beam flanges are permitted but are prohibited through ribs or beams without
prior approval from the Architect.
G. Clearances:
1. Provide allowance for insulated piping.
2. Wall, Floor, Floor, Partitions, and Beam Flanges: 0.5 inch (13 mm) greater than external; pipe
diameter.
3. All Rated Openings: Caulked tight with fire stopping material conforming to ASTM E814 in
accordance with Section 07 84 00 to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and gases.
2.02 MANUFACTURED SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Flexicraft Industries; PipeSeal
2. Thunderline; Link-Seal
B. Modular/Mechanical Seal:
1. Synthetic rubber interlocking links continuously fill annular space between pipe and wall/casing
opening.
2. Provide watertight seal between pipe and wall/casing opening.
3. Elastomer element size and material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Glass reinforced plastic pressure end plates.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient.
B. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work.
C. Install piping and pipe sleeves to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment.
D. Structural Considerations:
1. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated.
E. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors, walls, partitions, and similar elements. Seal pipe
including sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required.
1. Underground Piping: Caulk pipe sleeve watertight with mechanically expandable chloroprene
inserts with bitumen sealed metal components.
2. Aboveground Piping:
a. Pack solid using mineral fiber conforming to ASTM C592.
b. Fill space with an elastomer caulk to a depth of 0.50 inch (15 mm) where penetrations occur
between conditioned and unconditioned spaces.
3. All Rated Openings: Caulk tight with fire stopping material conforming to ASTM E814 in
accordance with Section 07 84 00 to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and gases.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 05 17 - 3/3
4. Caulk exterior wall sleeves watertight with mechanically expandable chloroprene inserts with
mastic-sealed components.
F. Manufactured Sleeve-Seal Systems:
1. Install manufactured sleeve-seal systems in sleeves located in grade slabs and exterior concrete
walls at piping entrances into building.
2. Provide sealing elements of the size, quantity, and type required for the piping and sleeve inner
diameter or penetration diameter.
3. Locate piping in center of sleeve or penetration.
4. Install field assembled sleeve-seal system components in annular space between sleeve and
piping.
5. Tighten bolting for a water-tight seal.
6. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
G. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are compatible and
joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union,
and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.
H. Insulation shall run continuous through sleeves in non-fire rated elements. Insulation shall not run
continuous through sleeves in fire rated elements unless the fire sealant system used is UL accepted for
use with insulated pipes.
I. Do not place sleeves around soil, waste, vent, or roof drain lines passing through concrete floors on
grade.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 05 23 - 1/5
SECTION 22 05 23
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Applications
B. General requirements
C. Angle valves
D. Ball valves
E. Butterfly valves
F. Check valves
G. Gate valves
H. Globe valves
I. Plug valves
J. Thermostatic balancing valves
K. Balancing valves
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 20 00 00 - General Mechanical Requirements
B. Section 22 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
C. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
D. Section 22 07 19 - Plumbing Piping Insulation
E. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. CWP: Cold working pressure.
B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber
C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber
D. NRS: Non-rising stem
E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke
F. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene
G. RS: Rising stem
H. SWP: Steam working pressure
I. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARD
A.ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch); 2013
B.ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250; 2015
C.ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard; 2017
D.ASME B16.10 - Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Valves; 2017
E.ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2012
F.ASME B16.34 - Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End; 2017
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 05 23 - 2/5
Job Number 2210142.00
G.ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2014
H.ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Procedures;
Welders; Brazers; and Welding, Brazing and Fusing Operators; 2017
I.ASTM A48/A48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings; 2003 (Reapproved 2016)
J.ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings; 2004
(Reapproved 2014)
K.ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings; 1984 (Reapproved 2014)
L.ASTM B61 - Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings; 2015
M.ASTM B62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings; 2017
N.AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; 2015
O.MSS SP-45 - Bypass and Drain Connections; 2003 (Reaffirmed 2008)
P.MSS SP-67 - Butterfly Valves; 2017
Q.MSS SP-70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; 2011
R.MSS SP-71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; 2011, with Errata (2013)
S.MSS SP-72 - Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service; 2010a
T.MSS SP-78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; 2011
U.MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; 2013
V.MSS SP-85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; 2011
W.MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends; 2010
X.MSS SP-125 - Gray Iron and Ductile Iron In-Line, Spring-Loaded, Center-Guided Check Valves; 2010
Y.NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2017
Z.NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2016
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on valves including manufacturers catalog information. Submit
performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions,
maintenance and repair data, and parts listings.
C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish Owner with one wrench for every ten plug valves, in each size of
square plug valve head.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer:
1. Obtain valves for each valve type from single manufacturer.
2. Company must specialize in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than
three years of documented experience.
B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC-IX.
C. Domestic water fittings, joining materials, and all other appurtenances in contact with potable water
shall be lead-free except those specifically exempted in Section 3874 of the Safe Water Drinking Act.
1. Lead-free shall mean:
a. Not containing more than 0.2% lead when used with respect to solder and flux; and
b. Not more than a weighted average of 0.25% when used with respect to the wetted surfaces
of pipes, pipe fittings, plumbing fittings, and fixtures.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 05 23 - 3/5
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Minimize exposure of operable surfaces by setting plug and ball valves to open position.
2. Protect valve parts exposed to piped medium against rust and corrosion.
3. Protect valve piping connections such as grooves, weld ends, threads, and flange faces.
4. Adjust globe, gate, and angle valves to the closed position to avoid clattering.
5. Secure check valves in either the closed position or open position.
6. Adjust butterfly valves to closed or partially closed position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection and protect flanges and specialties from dirt.
a. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps.
b. Maintain caps in place until installation.
2. Store valves in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation.
a. Store valves indoors in dry environment.
b. Store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures when indoor storage is not an option.
C. Exercise the following precautions for handling:
1. Handle large valves with sling, modified to avoid damage to exposed parts.
2. Avoid the use of operating handles or stems as rigging or lifting points.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPLICATIONS
A. See drawings for specific valve locations.
B. Provide the following valves for the applications if not indicated on drawings:
1. Shutoff: Ball
C. Substitutions of valves with higher CWP classes or SWP ratings for same valve types are permitted when
specified CWP ratings or SWP classes are not available.
D. Domestic, Hot and Cold Water Valves:
1. 2 NPS (50 DN) and Smaller:
a. Ball: One piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim
2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: No less than rating indicated; as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
B. Valve Sizes: Match upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
C. Valve Actuator Types:
1. Handwheel: Valves other than quarter-turn types
2. Hand Lever: Quarter-turn valves 6 NPS (150 DN) and smaller
3. Wrench: Plug valves with square heads
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 05 23 - 4/5
Job Number 2210142.00
D. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2 NPS (50 DN) stem extensions and the following features:
1. Ball Valves: Extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective
sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.
E. Valve-End Connections:
1. Threaded End Valves: ASME B1.20.1
2. Flanges on Iron Valves: ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves
3. Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 1/2 NPS (15 DN) through 24 NPS (600 DN): ASME B16.5
4. Solder Joint Connections: ASME B16.18
5. Grooved End Connections: AWWA C606
F. General ASME Compliance:
1. Ferrous Valve Dimensions and Design Criteria: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34
2. Solder-joint Connections: ASME B16.18
3. Building Services Piping Valves: ASME B31.9
G. Valve Materials for Potable Water: NSF 61 and NSF 372
H. Bronze Valves:
1. Fabricate from dezincification resistant material
2. Copper alloys containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted
I. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45
J. Source Limitations: Obtain each valve type from a single manufacturer
2.03 BRONZE BALL VALVES
A. One Piece, Reduced Port with Bronze Trim:
1. Comply with MSS SP-110
2. SWP Rating: 400 psig
3. CWP Rating: 600 psig
4. Body: Bronze
5. Ends: Press
6. Seats: PTFE
B. Two Piece, Full Port with Stainless Steel Trim:
1. Comply with MSS SP-110
2. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa)
3. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa)
4. Body: Bronze
5. Ends: Threaded
6. Seats: PTFE or TFE
7. Stem: Stainless steel
8. Ball: Stainless steel, vented
9. Manufacturers:
a. Nibco
b. Stockham
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 05 23 - 5/5
c. Apollo
d. Jomar
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Discard all packing materials and verify that valve interior, including threads and flanges are completely
clean without signs of damage or degradation that could result in leakage.
B. Verify valve parts to be fully operational in all positions from closed to fully open.
C. Confirm gasket material to be suitable for the service, to be of correct size, and without defects that
could compromise effectiveness.
D. Should valve is determined to be defective, replace with new valve.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Provide unions or flanges with valves to facilitate equipment removal and maintenance while
maintaining system operation and full accessibility for servicing.
B. Provide separate valve support as required and locate valve with stem at or above center of piping,
maintaining unimpeded stem movement.
C. Install check valves where necessary to maintain direction of flow as follows:
1. Lift Check: Install with stem plumb and vertical.
2. Swing Check: Install horizontal maintaining hinge pin level.
3. Orient plate-type and center-guided into horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 48 - 1/9
SECTION 22 05 48
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.Seismic Restraints shall be bidder-designed. Seismic Design Criteria are to be established per the International
Building Code and ASCE along with Project Structural drawings.
B.Items not included in this specification shall not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of providing seismic
bracing that meets all the criteria required by the referenced codes and in accordance with the seismic design
guidelines and the project structural drawings.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Equipment support bases
B.Vibration isolators
C.Seismic snubber assemblies
D.Seismic restraints for suspended components and equipment
1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures; 2016
B.ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2018
C.SMACNA (SRM) - Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems; 2008
D.Applicable Project Structural Drawings for Seismic Design Criteria
E.Applicable Manufacturer's Seismic Design Guides for Proprietary listed seismic braces and mounting hardware
1.05 SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA
A.Occupancy Category of Structure (I-IV) per ICC (IBC) or ASCE 7
B.Component Importance Factor (Ip) per ASCE 7
C.Mapped Acceleration Parameters (S1 and (Ss) per ICC (IBC) and Project Structural Drawings
D.Site Class (A - F) per ICC (IBC) and Project Structural Drawings
E.Site Coefficient (Fa) per ICC (IBC) and Project Structural Drawings
F.Site Coefficient (Fv) per ICC (IBC) and Project Structural Drawings
G.Seismic Design Category (A - D) based on Short Period Response Accelerations per ICC (IBC) and Project
Structural Drawings
H.Seismic Design Category (A - D) based on 1-Second Period Response Acceleration per ICC (IBC) and Project
Structural Drawings
I.Amplification Factor ap per ASCE 7
J.Response Modification Factor Rp per ASCE 7
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 48 - 2/9
Job Number 2210142.00
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data:
1.Provide manufacturer's product literature documenting compliance with PART 2 PRODUCTS.
2.Include seismic rating documentation for each isolator and restraint component accounting for
horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.
B.Shop Drawings:
1.Fully dimensioned fabrication drawings and installation details for vibration isolation bases, member
sizes, attachments to isolators, and supported equipment.
2.Include auxiliary motor slide bases and rails, base weights, inertia bases, concrete weights, equipment
static loads, support points, vibration isolators, and detailed layout of isolator location and orientation
with static and dynamic load on each isolator.
3.Include selections from prescriptive design tables that indicate compliance with the applicable building
code and the vibration isolator manufacturer's requirements.
4.Clearly indicate the load and capacity assumptions selected. Include copies of any calculations.
5.Include the calculations that indicate compliance with the applicable building code for seismic controls
and the vibration isolator manufacturer's requirements.
6.Include the seal of the Professional Engineer registered in the State of Washington in which the Project is
located, on drawings and calculations which at a minimum include the following:
a.Seismic Restraint Details: Detailed drawings of seismic restraints and snubbers including anchorage
details that indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration, edge distance, and spacing of
anchors.
b.Equipment Seismic Qualification Certification: Certification by the manufacturer or responsible
party that each piece of equipment provided will withstand seismic force levels as specified in the
applicable building code for seismic controls.
1)Basis for Certification: Indicate whether the withstand certification is based on actual testing
of assembled components, on calculations, or on historic data.
2)Indicate equipment to be sufficiently durable to resist design forces and or remain functional
after the seismic event.
c.Dimensioned outline drawings of equipment identifying center of gravity, locations, and provisions
for mounting and anchorage.
d.Detailed description of the equipment anchorage devices on which the certifications are based.
e.Statement of Special Inspections: Prepared by the registered design professional in responsible
charge.
C.Periodic Special Inspections: The mechanical contractor shall provide a list of components/systems requiring
periodic special inspections per ICC (IBC).
D.Special Certification Requirements: Each contractor responsible for the construction of a “Designated Seismic
System” for active plumbing equipment that must remain operable following the design earthquake, or
components with hazardous contents certified by the manufacturer to maintain containment following the
design earthquake shall submit a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance for review and approval by the
Registered Design Professional responsible for the design of the system. This information shall then be
submitted to the AHJ.
E.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions with special procedures and setting dimensions.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 48 - 3/9
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Perform design and installation in accordance with applicable codes.
B.Designer Qualifications: Perform design of seismic controls under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer
experienced in design of this type of work and registered and licensed in the State in which the Project is
located.
C.Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type
specified in this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Kinetics Noise Control, Inc
B.Mason Industries
C.Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.General:
1.All vibration isolators, base frames and inertia bases to conform to all uniform deflection and stability
requirements under all operating loads.
2.Steel springs to operate in the linear portion of the load versus deflection curve over deflection range of
not less than 50 percent above specified deflection.
3.All equipment mounted on vibration isolated bases to have minimum operating clearance of
2 inches (50 mm) between the base and floor or support beneath unless noted otherwise.
2.03 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT BASES
A.Structural Bases:
1.Construction: Engineered, structural steel frames with welded brackets for side mounting of the isolators
2.Frames: Square, rectangular or T-shaped
3.Design: Sufficiently rigid to prevent misalignment or undue stress on machine, and to transmit design
loads to isolators and snubbers.
B.Concrete Inertia Bases:
1.Construction: Engineered, steel forms, with integrated isolator brackets and anchor bolts, welded or tied
reinforcing bars running both ways in a single layer
2.Size: 6 inches (152 mm) minimum depth and sized to accommodate elbow supports
3.Mass: Minimum of 1.5 times weight of isolated equipment
4.Connecting Point: Reinforced to connect isolators and snubbers to base including template and fastening
devices for equipment
5.Concrete: Filled on site with minimum 3000 psi (20 mPa) concrete. See Section 03 30 00 for additional
requirements
2.04 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A.Non-Seismic Type:
1.All Elastomeric-Fiber Glass Pads:
a.Configuration: Flat or molded
b.Thickness: 0.25 inch (6 mm) minimum
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 48 - 4/9
Job Number 2210142.00
c.Assembly: Single or multiple layers using bonded, galvanized sheet metal separation plate between
each layer with load plate providing evenly distributed load over pad surface
2.Elastomeric Mounts:
a.Material: Oil, ozone, and oxidant resistant compounds
b.Assembly: Encapsulated load transfer plate bolted to equipment and base plate with anchor hole
bolted to supporting structure
3.Steel Springs:
a.Assembly: Freestanding, laterally stable without housing
b.Leveling Device: Rigidly connected to equipment or frame
4.Restrained Steel Springs:
a.Housing: Rigid blocking during rigging prevents equipment installed and operating height from
changing during temporary weight reduction.
b.Equipment Wind Loading: Adequate means for fastening isolator top to equipment and isolator
base plate to supporting structure
5.Elastomeric Hangers:
a.Housing: Steel construction containing elastomeric isolation element to prevent rod contact with
housing and short-circuiting of isolating function
b.Incorporate steel load distribution plate sandwiching elastomeric element to housing.
6.Spring Hanger:
a.Housing: Steel construction containing stable steel spring and integral elastomeric element
preventing metal to metal contact
b.Bottom Opening: Sized to allow plus/minus 15 degrees rod misalignment
7.Thrust Restraints:
a.Housing: Steel construction containing stable steel spring and integral elastomeric element
installed in pairs to resist air pressure thrusts
b.Bottom Openings: Sized to allow plus/minus 15 degrees rod misalignment
B.Seismic Type:
1.Coil Springs Consisting of Single Elements:
a.Housing: Manufactured from cast iron material
b.Ductile Material: Designed and rated for seismic applications
c.Spring: Restrained by housing without significant degradation of vibration isolation capabilities
during normal equipment operating conditions
d.Resilient Snubbing Grommet System: Incorporated and designed with clearances of no more than
0.25 inch (6 mm) in any direction preventing direct metal-to-metal contact between supported
member and fixed restraint housing
e.Resilient Pad: Located in series with spring
f.Coil Springs: Color coded elements to have a lateral stiffness greater than 0.8 times the rated
vertical stiffness with 50 percent overload capacity
g.Finish: Suitable for the application
2.All Directional Elastomeric:
a.Material: Molded from oil, ozone, and oxidant resistant compounds
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 48 - 5/9
b.Operating Parameters: Designed to operate within the isolator strain limits providing maximum
performance and service life
c.Attachment Method: Encapsulated load transfer plate bolted to equipment and base plate with
anchor hole bolted to supporting structure
d.Rating: Cast iron and aluminum housings rated for seismic restraint applications
e.Minimum Operating Static Deflections: Deflections indicated in project documents are not to
exceed published load capacities
2.05 SEISMIC SNUBBER ASSEMBLIES
A.Comply with:
1.SMACNA (SRM)
B.All Directional External:
1.Application: Minimum three (3) snubbers are required for each equipment installation, oriented properly
to restrain isolated equipment in all directions.
2.Construction: Interlocking steel construction attached to the building structure and equipment in a
manner consistent with anticipated design loads
3.Performance: Equipment movement at each snubber location limited to a maximum of
0.25 inches (6 mm) in any direction without significantly degrading the vibration isolation capability of
the isolator during normal operating conditions
4.Resilient Pad: Minimum 0.25 inch (6 mm) thick cushions any impact and prevents metal-to-metal contact
C.Lateral External:
1.Application: Minimum three (3) snubbers are required for each stable equipment installation, oriented
properly to restrain isolated equipment in all lateral directions where uplift forces are zero or addressed
by other restraints.
2.Construction: Steel construction attached to the building structure and equipment in a manner
consistent with anticipated design loads
3.Performance: Equipment movement at each snubber location limited to a maximum of
0.25 inches (6 mm) in any direction without significantly degrading the vibration isolation capability of
the isolator during normal operating conditions
4.Resilient Pad: Minimum 0.25 inch (6 mm) thick cushions any impact and prevents metal-to-metal contact
D.Omni Directional External:
1.Application: Minimum four (4) snubbers are required for each stable equipment installation, oriented
properly to restrain isolated equipment in all lateral directions.
2.Construction: Steel construction attached to the building structure and equipment in a manner
consistent with anticipated design loads
3.Performance: Equipment movement at each snubber location limited to a maximum of
0.25 inches (6 mm) in any direction without significantly degrading the vibration isolation capability of
the isolator during normal operating conditions
4.Resilient Pad: Minimum 0.25 inch (6 mm) thick cushions any impact and prevents metal-to-metal contact
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 48 - 6/9
Job Number 2210142.00
E.Horizontal Single Axis External:
1.Application: Minimum four (4) snubbers are required for each stable equipment installation, oriented
properly to restrain isolated equipment in all lateral directions where uplift forces are zero or addressed
by other restraints.
2.Construction: Steel construction attached to the building structure and equipment in a manner
consistent with anticipated design loads
3.Performance: Equipment movement at each snubber location limited to a maximum of
0.25 inches (6 mm) in any direction without significantly degrading the vibration isolation capability of
the isolator during normal operating conditions
4.Resilient Pad: Minimum 0.25 inch (6 mm) thick cushions any impact and prevents metal-to-metal contact
2.06 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS FOR SUSPENDED COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT
A.Comply with:
1.SMACNA (SRM)
B.Cable Restraints:
1.Wire Rope: Steel wire strand cables sized to resist seismic loads in all lateral directions
2.Protective Thimbles: Eliminates potential for dynamic cable wear and strand breakage
3.Size: Based on the lesser of cable capacity or anchor load taking into account bracket geometry
4.Connections:
a.Use overlapping wire rope U clips, cable clamping bolts, swaged sleeves or seismically rated tool-
less wedge insert lock connectors.
b.Internally brace clevis hanger bracket cross bolt to prevent deformation.
5.Vertical Suspension Rods: Attach required bracing of sufficient strength to prevent rod buckling from
vertical compression forces utilizing series of attachment clips.
C.Rigid Restraints:
1.Structural Element: Sized to resist seismic loads in all lateral directions and carry both compressive and
tensile loading
2.Size: Based on the lesser of cable capacity or anchor load taking into account bracket geometry
3.Connections: Internally brace clevis hanger bracket cross bolt to prevent deformation.
4.Static Support System: Anchorage capable of carrying additional tension loads generated by the vertical
component of the rigid brace compression which is additive to any static load requirements on the
system
5.Vertical Suspension Rods: Attached required bracing of sufficient strength to prevent rod buckling from
vertical compression forces utilizing series of attachment clips.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Bases:
1.Set steel bases for one inch (25 mm) clearance between housekeeping pad and base.
2.Set concrete inertia bases for 2 inches (50 mm) clearance between housekeeping pad and base.
3.Adjust equipment level.
C.On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 48 - 7/9
D.Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed
weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to
load to allow shim removal.
E.Provide pairs of horizontal limit springs on fans with more than 6.0 inches WC (1.5 kPa) static pressure, and on
hanger supported, horizontally mounted axial fans.
F.Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators or resilient hangers for
scheduled distance.
1.Up to 4 Inches (100 mm) Pipe Size: First three points of support
2.5 to 8 Inches (125 to 200 mm) Pipe Size: First four points of support
3.10 inches (250 mm) Pipe Size and Over: First six points of support
4.Select three hangers closest to vibration source for minimum 1.0 inch (25 mm) static deflection or static
deflection of isolated equipment. Select remaining isolators for minimum 1.0 inch (25 mm) static
deflection or 1/2 static deflection of isolated equipment.
3.02 INSTALLATION - SEISMIC
A.Seismic Snubbers:
1.Provide on all isolated equipment and piping.
2.Provide minimum of four seismic snubbers located close to isolators.
3.Snub equipment designated for post-disaster use to 0.05 inch (1.5 mm) maximum clearance.
B.Floor and Base-Mounted Equipment, Vibration Isolated Equipment and associated Vibration and Seismic
Controls for Connections:
1.Install equipment anchorage items designed to resist seismic design force in any direction.
2.Install vibration and seismic controls designed to include base and isolator requirements.
3.Provide flexible connections between equipment and interconnected piping.
4.Provide isolators and restraints designed for amplified code forces per ASCE 7 and with demonstrated
ability to resist required forces including gravity, operational and seismic forces.
5.Where equipment is not designed to be point loaded, provide base capable of transferring gravity and
seismic demands from equipment to isolator base plate anchorage.
6.Where concrete floor thickness is less than required for expansion anchor installation, install through bolt
in lieu of expansion anchor.
7.Where timber/wood floor or other substrate is inadequate for installation of lag bolts, screws or other
mechanical fasteners, install supplemental framing or blocking to transfer loads to structural elements.
C.Suspended Mechanical Equipment:
1.Provide supports and bracing to resist seismic design force in any direction.
2.Provide flexible connections between equipment and interconnected piping.
3.Brace equipment hung from spring mounts using cable or other bracing that will not transmit vibration to
the structure.
4.Use of proprietary restraint systems with a certificate of compliance, verified and listed by an accredited
inspection body is acceptable (pending shop drawing approval), as an alternative to project specific
seismic bracing design.
D.Wall mounted Mechanical Equipment:
1.Provide support and bracing to resist seismic design force in any direction.
2.Install backing plates or blocking as required to deliver load to primary wall framing members.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 48 - 8/9
Job Number 2210142.00
3.Anchoring to gypsum wallboard, plaster or other wall finish that has not been engineered to resist
imposed loads is not permitted.
E.Piping:
1.Provide seismic bracing in accordance ASCE 7.
2.Provide supports, braces, and anchors to resist gravity and seismic design forces.
3.Provide flexible connections between floor mounted equipment and suspended piping; between
unbraced piping and restrained suspended items; as required for thermal movement; at building
separations and seismic joints; and wherever relative differential movements could damage pipe in an
earthquake.
4.Brace resiliently supported pipe with cable bracing or alternate means designed to prevent transmission
of vibrations and noise to the structure.
5.Brace every run 5.0 feet (1.5 m) or more in length with two transverse and one longitudinal bracing
locations.
6.Pipes and Connections Constructed of Ductile Materials (copper, ductile iron, steel or aluminum and
brazed, welded or screwed connections) and is 2.5 inches and larger and all fuel piping 1 inch and larger:
a.Provide transverse bracing at spacing not more than 40.0 feet (12.2 m) on center.
b.For fuel liquid and gas piping, provide transverse bracing at spacing not more than
20.0 feet (6.1 m) on center.
c.Provide longitudinal bracing at spacing not more than 80.0 feet (24.4 m) on center.
d.For fuel liquid and gas piping, provide longitudinal bracing at spacing not more than
40.0 feet (12.2 m) on center.
e.Transverse bracing for one pipe section may also act as a longitudinal bracing for a pipe section
connected perpendicular to it, if the bracing is installed within 2 feet of the elbow or tee of similar
size.
f.Piping conveying fluids at 100°F. and higher shall have expansion devices provided in between
longitudinal braces to allow for thermal expansion.
g.Bracing may be omitted when the top of the pipe is suspended 12 inches or less from the
supporting structural member and the pipe is suspended by an individual hanger.
7.Pipes and Connections Constructed of Non Ductile Materials (cast iron, no-hub, plastic or non-UL listed
grooved coupling pipe) and is 2.5 inches and larger:
a.Provide transverse bracing at spacing not more than 20.0 feet (6.1 m) on center.
b.Provide longitudinal bracing at spacing not more than 40.0 feet (12.2 m) on center.
c.Transverse bracing for one pipe section may also act as a longitudinal bracing for a pipe section
connected perpendicular to it, if the bracing is installed within 2 feet of the elbow or tee of similar
size.
d.Piping conveying fluids at 100°F. and higher shall have expansion devices provided in between
longitudinal braces to allow for thermal expansion.
e.Bracing may be omitted when the top of the pipe is suspended 12 inches or less from the
supporting structural member and the pipe is suspended by an individual hanger.
8.Provide lateral restraint for risers at not more than 30 feet (9.1 m) on center or as required for horizontal
runs, whichever is less.
9.Piping Explicitly Exempt from Seismic Bracing Requirements:
a.Provide flexible connections between piping and connected equipment, including in-line devices
such as VAV boxes and reheat coils.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 48 - 9/9
b.Install piping consistent with ASCE 7, such that swinging of the pipes will not cause damaging impact
with adjacent components, finishes, or structural framing while maintaining clear horizontal
distance of 67 percent of the hanger length between subject components.
10.Use of proprietary restraint systems with a certificate of compliance, verified and listed by an accredited
inspection body is acceptable (pending shop drawing approval), as an alternative to project specific
seismic bracing design.
11.For equipment 400 lbs or greater, provide lateral force calculations per ICC (IBC) if required by the
building official.
12.Provide earthquake bumpers for all equipment that is supported on isolators and weighing over 300 lbs.
including base. Provide minimum of four bumpers for equipment weighing less than 2,000 lbs., and eight
bumpers for heavier equipment.
13.Re-use of Existing Hangers:
a.Re-using existing hangers at locations of seismic bracing are to be judged on a case-by-case basis by
the registered project design professional.
b.Unless otherwise shown on drawings, it is assumed all hangers supporting new piping, located at a
seismic brace, will be new.
F.Tanks:
1.Provide seismic bracing for hot water tanks.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 53 - 1/4
SECTION 22 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nameplates
B. Tags
C. Stencils
D. Pipe markers
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting: Identification painting
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2015
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Valve Diagram: Provide an unlaminated copy of the valve diagram.
2. Valve Tag Schedule: Provide an unlaminated copy of the valve tag schedule.
3. Concealed Items Legend: Provide a color legend listing the colors used to label equipment above
the ceiling.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NAMEPLATES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Brimar Industries, Inc
2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co
3. Seton Identification Products
B. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.
1. Letter Color: White
2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch (6 mm)
3. Background Color: Black
4. Plastic: Conform to ASTM D709
2.02 TAGS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Advanced Graphic Engraving.
2. Brady Corporation
3. Brimar Industries, Inc
4. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 53 - 2/4
Job Number 2210142.00
5. Seton Identification Products.
6. Or equal.
B. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background
color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) diameter.
C. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) diameter with smooth
edges.
D. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list hard laminated.
2.03 STENCILS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Brady Corporation
2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co
3. Seton Identification Products
4. Or equal.
B. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
1. 3/4 to 1-1/4 inch (20-30 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch (200 mm) long color
field, 1/2 inch (15 mm) high letters
2. 1-1/2 to 2 inch (40-50 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch (200 mm) long color
field, 3/4 inch (20 mm) high letters
3. 2-1/2 to 6 inch (65-150 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch (300 mm) long color
field, 1-1/4 inch (30 mm) high letters
C. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 91 23, semi-gloss enamel, colors conforming to ASME A13.1
2.04 PIPE MARKERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Brady Corporation
2. Brimar Industries, Inc
3. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co
4. Seton Identification Products
5. Or equal
B. Comply with ASME A13.1
C. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or
pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being
conveyed.
D. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed
markings.
E. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6
inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mil (0.10 mm) thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
F. Color code assignments shall be verified with the Owner prior to ordering. Color code as follows:
1. Potable Domestic Cold, Hot, and Hot Recirculation Water: Green with white letters
2. Fire Quenching Fluids: Red with white letters
3. Non-Potable Cold, Hot, and Hot Recirculation Water: Orange with black letters with added words
stating "CAUTION: NON_POTABLE, DO NOT DRINK"
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 53 - 3/4
4. Flammable Fluids: Yellow with black letters
5. Compressed Air: Blue with white letters
2.05 VALVE TAG SCHEDULES
A. Provide a Valve Tag Schedule for each piping system, typewritten, and reproduced on 8-1/2" x 11" bond
paper, hard laminated. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag),
location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are
intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule.
2.06 VALVE DIAGRAM
A. Provide a Valve Diagram showing the location of all valves relative to the floor plan of the building.
Each Valve Diagram shall be 11x17, hard laminated sheets. Each piping system shall be in a unique
color and a legend noting the system colors shall be placed on the first page.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with
sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade, directly
above buried pipe.
F. Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above lay-in panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel
closest to equipment.
3.03 PIPE MARKERS AND COLOR BANDS
A. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied space,
machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces and exterior non-concealed locations or in accessible
ceiling spaces.
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at
branch where there could be question of flow pattern.
3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floor/ceilings, or enter non-accessible
enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
3.04 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install engraved plastic laminate sign on or near each major item of plumbing equipment and each
operation device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational
devices. Provide signs or suspended ceiling tile below mechanical equipment located above ceiling.
1. Pumps and similar motor-driven units.
2. Tanks and pressure vessels.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 53 - 4/4
Job Number 2210142.00
3.05 NON POTABLE DOMESTIC SYSTEMS
A. Furnish and install label reading “CAUTION: NON-POTABLE WATER, DO NOT DRINK” at each fixture
served by a non-potable system.
3.06 CONCEALED ITEMS
A. Items concealed above accessible ceilings requiring access, shall have the ceiling marked to indicate
such items location. The marking system shall consist of colored phenolic plates with ½” tall engraved
lettering specifying the item concealed; plate shall be applied to ceiling T-bar framing with rivets or
other owner approved method below the concealed item. Colors used shall be verified with Owner,
and unless directed otherwise, shall be:
1. Fire Protection System Components: Red
2. Domestic Plumbing System Component: Green
3.07 VALVE TAG SCHEDULE
A. Provide the hard laminated Valve Tag Schedule in the mechanical/janitors room.
3.08 VALVE DIAGRAM
A. Provide the hard laminated Valve Diagram in the mechanical/janitors room.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
22 07 19 - 1/5
SECTION 22 07 19
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping insulation
B. Jackets and accessories
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip,
Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015
B.ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014
C.ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric);
2014
D.ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2013
E.ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2007 (Reapproved
2013)
F.ASTM C449 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing
Cement; 2007 (Reapproved 2013)
G.ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the
Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2017
H.ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation; 2013
I.ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal
Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2016
J.ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2017
K.ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2016a
L.ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and
Industrial Applications; 2013
M.ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless
Steel; 2008 (Reapproved 2013)
N.ASTM C1695 - Standard Specification for Fabrication of Flexible Removable and Reusable Blanket
Insulation for Hot Service; 2010 (Reapproved 2015)
O.ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2017
P.ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2016
Q.UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for
each service, and locations.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
22 07 19 - 2/5
Job Number 2210142.00
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section
with minimum 5 years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.
B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.
2.02 GLASS FIBER
A. Manufacturers:
1. CertainTeed Corporation
2. Johns Manville Corporation
3. Knauf Insulation
4. Owens Corning Corporation; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation ASJ
5. Manson Insulation
B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible
1. 'K' ('Ksi') Value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0.035 at 24 degrees C)
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F (454 degrees C)
3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume
4. Maximum flame/smoke spread developed: 25/50
C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture
vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02 perm-inches (0.029 ng/Pa
s m).
D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation
E. Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool
F. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish
G. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black
color
H. Outdoor Breather Mastic: Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color
I. Insulating Cement: ASTM C449
2.03 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION
A. Manufacturer:
1. Aeroflex USA, Inc
2. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex
3. K-Flex USA LLC; Insul-Tube
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
22 07 19 - 3/5
4. Durkflex.
B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534/C534M
Grade 1; use molded tubular material wherever possible.
1. Minimum Service Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F (Minus 40 degrees C)
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F (104 degrees C)
3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive
4. K” Value: 0.25 Btu-in per hour per square foot °F at 75 degrees F
5. Maximum flame/smoke spread developed: 25/50
6. Maximum water vapor permeability, wet cup, perm-in 0.10
7. Fiber free, formaldehyde-free, and low VOC’s
C. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation
2.07 JACKETS
A. PVC Plastic.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Johns Manville Corporation; Zeston 2000
2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, gloss white color.
a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F (Minus 18 degrees C)
b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F (66 degrees C)
c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch (0.0029 ng/Pa s m), maximum, when tested
in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M
d. Thickness: 10 mil (0.25 mm)
e. Connections: Pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape
B. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq. yd (220 g/sq. m) plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute fire
retardant lagging adhesive.
1. Lagging Adhesive: Compatible with insulation
C. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet.
1. Thickness: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) sheet
2. Finish: Embossed
3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch (50 mm) laps
4. Fittings: 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner
5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide; 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick aluminum
D. Stainless Steel Jacket: ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel.
1. Thickness: 0.010 inch (0.25 mm)
2. Finish: Smooth
3. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide; 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick stainless steel
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
22 07 19 - 4/5
Job Number 2210142.00
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
C. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings,
valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints.
E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing
longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch
expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as
adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
F. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F (60 degrees C) or less, do not insulate flanges and unions
at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
G. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure
with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe.
Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
H. Insulated Pipe Supports and Shields:
1. Install in place at each hanger and support as required be Section 22 10 05 Plumbing Piping prior
to insulating.
2. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) diameter or larger.
3. Shields: Galvanized steel or PVC as follows:
a. 20 gauge (18 gauge for pipe larger than 3 inches) galvanized steel between pipe hangers or
pipe hanger rolls and insulated pipe supports. Shield shall cover a minimum of 40% of the
insulation where the pipe is supported from the bottom and 100% of the insulation where
the pipe is clamped.
b. PVC shield the full diameter of the pipe insulation with 20 gauge galvanized steel shield
riveted to the PVC.
4. Insulated Pipe Supports Location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.
5. Insulated Pipe Support Configuration: Minimum 6 inches (150 mm) long, of same thickness and
contour as adjoining insulation. Provide 9 inches (230 mm) long insulated pipe support and
18 gauge galvanized steel shield for pipes larger than 3 inches.
6. Insert Material: See Section 22 10 05 Plumbing Piping.
I. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations except where
prohibited by code. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Fire
Stop Specification Section 07 84 00.
J. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet (3 meters) above
finished floor): Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
22 07 19 - 5/5
K. Exposed Work: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers applied after pipe insulation is installed. A pre-
cut "Hi-Lo Temp" insulation insert, conforming to the UL 25/50 rating, shall be snugly tucked around the
fitting making sure the fitting is covered with the full thickness of insulation.
1. All others provide covering in pad form, constructed as follows: Use 1-inch thick Owens-Corning
Fiberglas TIW Glass Wool, Type I, non-oiled, fully enclosed on all sides and edges within tight-
weave canvas jacket. Attach Bergen hooks around edges of pad. Fit pad to device with edges
tightly butted and secure with copper wire laced between hooks. Provide vapor seal where vapor
seal is required for adjacent insulation.
.
L. Elastomeric Insulation Installation:
1. For PEX piping installation, elastomeric insulation shall be installed continuous through stud
framing and all penetration locations through walls, floors, and ceilings.
2. Elastomeric insulation with wall thicknesses greater than 1” shall not be installed in air plenums.
3. All elastomeric foam and sheet seams shall be sealed with adhesive per the insulation
manufacturer’s recommendations.
4. Install elastomeric insulation on all PEX domestic hot water and recirculation water piping.
3.03 PIPE HANGERS
A. Do not allow pipes to come in contact with hangers.
3.04 SCHEDULES
A. Plumbing Systems:
1. Domestic Hot Water Supply (including Recirculation):
a. Glass Fiber Insulation:
1) Pipe Size Range: 1/2-1.25 inch
2) Thickness: 1 inch
3) Thickness: 1 1/2 inch
2. Domestic Cold Water:
a. Glass Fiber: All Sizes on metal pipes: 1 inch (25 mm)
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - 1/13
SECTION 22 10 05
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Pipe, pipe fittings, specialties, and connections for piping systems.
1.Sanitary sewer
2.Domestic water
3.Flanges, unions, and couplings
4.Pipe hangers and supports
5.Manufactured sleeve-seal systems
6.Strainers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 22 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
B.Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2012
B.ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; 2013
C.ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2014
D.ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Procedures;
Welders; Brazers; and Welding, Brazing and Fusing Operators; 2017
E.ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014
F.ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; 1999 (Reapproved 2014)
G.ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products; 2017
H.ASTM A269/A269M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service; 2015a
I.ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014)
J.ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2016
K.ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2016
L.ASTM B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy
Tube; 2016
M.ASTM B828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube
and Fittings; 2016
N.ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping
Systems; 2012
O.ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and
Fittings; 2014
P.ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for the Two-Step (Primer & Solvent Cement) Method of Joining Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) or Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Pipe and Piping Components with Tapered
Sockets; 2015
Q.ASTM F876 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing; 2017
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - 2/13
Job Number 2210142.00
R.ASTM F877 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water
Distribution Systems; 2011a
S.ASTM F1960 - Standard Specification for Cold Expansion Fittings with PEX Reinforcing Rings for Use with
Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing; 2015
T.AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; 2015
U.AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; 2014
V.CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain,
Waste and Vent Piping Applications; 2009 (Revised 2012)
W.CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for
Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; 2011 (Revised 2012)
X.ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2015
Y.ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry Elements; 2015
Z.ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2015
AA.ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2016
AB.MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and
Installation; 2009
AC.NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2017
AD.NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2016
AE.PPI TR-4 - PPI Listing of Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), Hydrostatic Design Stress (HDS), Strength Design
Basis (SDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), and Minimum Required Strength (MRS) Ratings For Thermoplastic
Piping Materials or Pipe; 2017
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers
catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
B.Welder Certificate: Include welders certification of compliance with ASME BPVC-IX.
C.Shop Drawings: For non-penetrating rooftop supports, submit detailed layout developed for this project,
with design calculations for loadings and spacings.
D.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1.See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
E.Operation and Maintenance Data
1.Domestic water sterilization test
2.Domestic water pressure tests
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Perform work in accordance with applicable codes.
B.Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body
C.Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC-IX and applicable state labor regulations.
D.Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME BPVC-IX
E.Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, potable water
certification, water pressure rating.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - 3/13
F.Domestic water fittings, joining materials, and all other appurtenances in contact with potable water shall
be lead-free except those specifically exempted in Section 3874 of the Safe Water Drinking Act.
1.Lead-free shall mean:
a.Not containing more than 0.2% lead when used with respect to solder and flux; and
b.Not more than a weighted average of 0.25% when used with respect to the vetted surfaces of
pipes, pipe fittings, plumbing fittings, and fixtures.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.
B.Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the
work, and isolating parts of completed system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings, and solder and flux (if used), that comply with
NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.
2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A.Cast Iron Pipe: Conform to CISPI 301, hubless pipe and fittings
1.Manufacturers:
a.AB&I
b.Charlotte
c.Tyler
B.Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. Couplings shall be
constructed of 300 Series type stainless steel. There shall be 2 bands for pipe sizes up to 4” and a minimum
of 4 bands for pipe sizes 5” and larger. Sealing bands shall require a minimum of 60-inch lbs. torque per
band. Neoprene gasket shall meet ASTM C 564.
1.Manufacturers:
a.Thermafit Regular Duty
b.Tyler Standard No-Hub
c.Clamp-All HI-TORQ 80
C.Flashing: Lead flashing, 4 lbs. per sq. ft. of sheet lead flashing. Flashing skirt radius from the inserted pipe of
at least 8 inches or 2 foot square.
1.Manufacturers:
a.Elmdor Stoneman
D.Vent Cap: Vandal Resistant. Cast Iron. Minimum of 2 to 1 open area compared to the cross-sectional area
of the vent pipe
1.Manufacturers:
a.Elmdor Stoneman
E.PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, schedule 40, DWV, solid core pipe
1.Fittings: PVC
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - 4/13
Job Number 2210142.00
2.Joints: ASTM D2564
a.Mechanical Joints: Mechanical joints on drainage pipe shall be made with an elastomeric seal
conforming to ASTM C 1173, ASTM D 3212 or CSA CAN/CSA-B602. Mechanical joints shall not be
installed in above-ground systems, unless otherwise approved. Joints shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
b.Solvent Cementing: Joint surfaces shall be clean and free from moisture. A purple primer that
conforms to ASTM F 656 shall be applied. Solvent cement not purple in color and conforming to
ASTM D 2564, CSA CAN/CSA-B137.3, CSA CAN/CSA-B181.2 or
CSA CAN/CSA-B182.1 shall be applied to all joint surfaces. The joint shall be made while the
cement is wet and shall be in accordance with ASTM D 2855. Solvent-cement joints shall be
permitted above or below ground.
c.Threaded Joints: Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1. Schedule 80 or heavier pipe shall be
permitted to be threaded with dies specifically designed for plastic pipe. Approved thread
lubricant or tape shall be applied on the male threads only.
3.Manufacturers:
a.Charlotte
b.Mueller Industries
c.Cresline
2.03 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A.Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L (B), hard drawn
1.Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.
2.Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder, lead free conforming to UPC standards for solder and all local
code requirements.
a.Manufacturers:
1)Canfield
2)J.W. Harris
3)Aqua-Clean
3.Mechanical Press Sealed Fittings: Double pressed type, NSF 61 and NSF 372 approved or certified,
utilizing EPDM, non-toxic synthetic rubber sealing elements.
a.Manufacturers:
1)Grinnell Products
2)Viega LLC
3)Nibco
4.Mechanical Couplings on pipe 2.5" and larger: NSF 61
a.Manufacturers:
1)Victualic
2)Gruvlok
B.Cross-Linked Polyethylene (PEX) Pipe: ASTM F876 or ASTM F877. Pipe shall be NSF 61 and NSF 14 certified.
1.Manufacturers:
a.Uponor, Inc
b.Viega LLC
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - 5/13
c.Zurn Industries, LLC
d.Watts.
e.Rehau
2.PPI TR-4 Pressure Design Basis:
a.100 psig (689 kPa) at maximum 180 degrees F (82 degrees C)
3.Fittings: Brass and engineered polymer (EP) ASTM F1960
4.Joints: Mechanical compression fittings
5.Joints: ASTM F1960 cold-expansion fittings
2.04 CONDENSATE PIPING
A.Schedule 40 PVC, solid core
B.Type L copper for use in air plenum, penetrating a fire wall, or used with gas-fired equipment
C.Insulate per Section 22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation
2.05 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A.Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches (80 mm) and Under:
1.Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions
2.Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints
B.Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch (25 mm):
1.Ferrous Pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene
gaskets
2.Copper Tube and Pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets
C.Mechanical Couplings for Grooved and Shouldered Joints: Two or more curved housing segments with
continuous key to engage pipe groove, circular C-profile gasket, and bolts to secure and compress gasket.
1.Dimensions and Testing: In accordance with AWWA C606
2.Housing Material: Provide ASTM A47/A47M malleable iron or ductile iron, galvanized
3.Gasket Material: Nitrile rubber suitable for operating temperature range from minus 20 degrees F to
180 degrees F (minus 29 degrees C to 82 degrees C)
4.Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc-electroplated steel
5.When pipe is field grooved, provide coupling manufacturer's grooving tools
6.Manufacturers:
a.Grinnell Products, a Tyco Business
b.Victaulic
c.Gruvlok
D.Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water
impervious isolation barrier
2.06 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.
1.If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using
MSS SP-58 recommendations.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - 6/13
Job Number 2210142.00
2.Hanger Rods: Threaded hot rolled steel, electro-galvanized or cadmium plated. Hanger rods shall be
sized so that the total load (including pipe or duct, insulation, hangers, and fluid) does not exceed the
following:
a.610 pounds for 3/8" diameter rods
b.1130 pounds for 1/2" diameter rods
3.Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze hangers.
a.Cold and Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Double hangers
4.Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure
5.Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp, epoxy coated
6.Steel: Provide structural steel per ASTM A36/A36M
7.Wood: Shall be fire treated
8.Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with bases that rest on top of roofing
membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetrating the roofing
assembly, with support fixtures as specified; and as follows:
a.Bases: High density polypropylene.
b.Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing assembly.
c.Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in
accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.
d.Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as indicated for
equivalent indoor hangers and supports; corrosion resistant material.
e.Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches (150 mm) under pipe to top of roofing.
f.Manufacturers:
1)PDH
2)Elcen
3)Grinnel
4)B-line
5)Unistrut
6)Caddy
7)Tolco
B.Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent:
1.Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch (15 mm) to 1-1/2 Inches (40 mm): Malleable iron, adjustable swivel,
split ring.
2.Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
3.Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches (80 mm): Cast iron hook.
4.Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches (100 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp.
5.Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
C.Plumbing Piping - Water:
1.Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch (15 mm) to 1-1/2 Inches (40 mm): Malleable iron, adjustable swivel,
split ring.
2.Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - 7/13
3.Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) to 4 Inches (100 mm): Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis
4.Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron pipe roll,
double hanger
5.Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches (80 mm): Cast iron hook
6.Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches (100 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp
7.Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron pipe roll
8.Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated
D.Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:
1.Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193
2.Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01
3.Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193
4.Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106
5.Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308
6.Other Types: As required
7.Manufacturers:
a.Powers Fasteners, Inc
b.Rawplug
c.Phillips
d.Hilti
e.Caddy
E.Insulated Pipe Inserts and Insulation Shields:
1.Insulated pipe insert shall have no more than 5% deformation at 100 psi and a thermal conductivity
no more than 0.38 Btu/hr./sq. ft./degree F/1-inch thick at 75°F.
2.Insulated pipe insert shall be same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation and sized to match pipe in
which it is used on. See Section 22 07 19 for insulation sizes.
3.Provide shield per Section 22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation.
4.Manufacturers:
a.TPS Thermal Pipe Shields
b.B-Line
c.Clement Support Services
d.Snappitz
F.PEX Pipe Hangers and supports
1.Provide continuous steel channel pipe supports at all horizontal PEX pipe runs greater than 6’-0” in
length.
a.Steel Channel Pipe Supports:
1)23-gauge, galvanized steel channel with a copper tube size controlled outside diameter.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - 8/13
Job Number 2210142.00
2)Steel channel pipe supports shall be available in lengths up to 9’-0” for
pipe sizes ½” - 3 ½”.
3)Secure pipe to channel support with stainless steel straps rated for 300-pound tensile
strength.
2.Manufacturers:
a.Uponor PEX-a Pipe, or approved equivalent
3.All horizontal PEX pipe shall utilize steel brackets, clevis, J-hangers, or trapeze style hangers.
2.07 MANUFACTURED SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A.Manufacturers:
1.The Metraflex Company; MetraSeal
2.Link Seal
B.Modular/Mechanical Seal:
1.Synthetic rubber interlocking links continuously fill annular space between pipe and wall/casing
opening.
2.Provide watertight seal between pipe and wall/casing opening.
3.Elastomer element size and material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4.Glass reinforced plastic pressure end plates.
2.08 STRAINERS
A.Manufacturers:
1.Armstrong International, Inc
2.Bell and Gossett
3.Apollo Conbraco
4.Hoffman
5.Wheatley
6.Nibco
B.Size 2 inch (50 mm) and Under:
1.Threaded brass body for 175 psi (1200 kPa) CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) stainless steel
perforated screen.
2.Class 150, threaded bronze body 300 psi (2070 kPa) CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) stainless
steel perforated screen.
C.Size 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) to 4 inch (100 mm):
1.Class 125, flanged iron body, Y pattern with 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) stainless steel perforated screen.
D.Size 5 inch (125 mm) and Larger:
1.Class 125, flanged iron body, basket pattern with 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) stainless steel perforated screen.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - 9/13
B.Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C.Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A.Furnish and install complete system of piping, valved as indicated or as necessary to completely control
entire apparatus. Pipe drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general location and connections. Piping
may have to be offset, lowered, or raised as required or directed at site. This does not relieve this Division
from responsibility for proper erection of systems of piping in every respect. Install in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
B.Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
C.Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.
D.Consult all drawings for location of pipe spaces, ducts, electrical equipment, ceiling heights, door openings,
window openings, and other details and report discrepancies or possible conflicts to Architect/Engineer
before installing pipe.
E.Allow sufficient clearances for installation of pipe insulation in thickness specified. If interferences occur,
reroute piping to accommodate insulation.
F.Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space, removal of other
equipment, ducts, or devices, or block access to doors, windows, or access openings.
G.Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
H.Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
I.Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and
access to valves and fittings.
J.Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
K.Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 3.3 ft (1 m) of cover.
L.Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one
coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
M.Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.
N.Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Refer to Section 22 05 23.
O.Install water piping to ASME B31.9.
P.Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.
Q.Do not use reducing bushings, street elbows, or close nipples.
R.T-drill procedure for connecting pipes will not be allowed.
S.All piping in finished areas shall be installed concealed unless specifically noted otherwise.
T.Provide escutcheons where pipe passes through walls, floors, or ceilings.
U.Install all exposed piping parallel to the closest wall and in a neat, workmanlike manner.
V.Strainers: Install strainers as indicated. Provide plugged gate or ball valve in blow-off connection on
strainers, valve shall be same size as blow-off tapping. Final blow-off shall have a hose connection fitting.
W.Copper Pipe and Tube: Make soldered joints in accordance with ASTM B828, using specified solder, and flux
meeting ASTM B813; in potable water systems use flux also complying with NSF 61 and NSF 372.
X.PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855.
Y.Inserts:
1.Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - 10/13
Job Number 2210142.00
2.Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced
concrete beams.
3.Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over
4 inches (100 mm).
4.Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
Z.Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1.Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.
2.Support horizontal piping as indicated.
3.Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch (15 mm) space between finished covering and adjacent
work.
4.Place hangers within 12 inches (300 mm) of each horizontal elbow.
5.Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe
movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
6.Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected
horizontal piping.
7.Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze
hangers.
8.Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
9.Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation; refer to
Section 22 05 48.
10.Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.
AA.Manufactured Sleeve-Seal Systems:
1.Install manufactured sleeve-seal systems in sleeves located in grade slabs and exterior concrete walls
at piping entrances into building.
2.Provide sealing elements of the size, quantity, and type required for the piping and sleeve inner
diameter or penetration diameter.
3.Locate piping in center of sleeve or penetration.
4.Install field assembled sleeve-seal system components in annular space between sleeve and piping.
5.Tighten bolting for a water-tight seal.
6.Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
BB.When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are compatible and
joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and
couplings for servicing are consistently provided.
3.04 SOIL, WASTE, AND VENT
A.Place cleanouts as follows:
1.Where shown on plans and near bottom of each stack and riser.
2.At every 135 degree change of direction for horizontal lines.
3.Every 100 feet of horizontal run.
4.Extended cleanout to accessible surface. Do not place cleanouts in carpeted floors. In such locations,
use wall type cleanouts.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - 11/13
B.Vent entire waste system to atmosphere. Discharge vent pipe minimum 14 inches above roof. Join lines
together in least practicable number before projecting above roof. Set back vent lines so they will not pierce
roof near edge or valley. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.
C.Use torque wrench to obtain proper tension in cinch bands on above ground hubless cast iron pipe. Butt
ends of pipe against centering flange of coupling.
D.Install vertical waste pipe to comply with standard installation practices for suds control.
E.Reducing size of pipe in the direction of flow is prohibited.
F.Install drainage piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:
1.Building soil and waste drain: 2 percent downward in the direction of flow unless indicated otherwise
on the plans.
G.Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent
damage from traffic and construction work.
3.05 CROSS-LINKED POLYETHYLENE (PEX) PIPE
A.Provide stainless steel inserts at compression stop valves.
B.All couplings, elbows, tees, reducing tees adapters and any other connecting devices shall be of the same
manufacturer as the PEX piping.
C.Kinked tubing shall be reformed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation or cut out and
replaced.
D.90 degree direction turns and wall penetrations shall be provided with a bend support or elbow fitting.
E.Copper sweated and threaded connections are to be made prior to PEX connections.
F.Transition PEX to copper at fire walls. Provide fire stop sealants at fire rated walls.
G.PEX tubing shall be fully seated against shoulder of fitting.
H.Horizontal piping shall be supported every 32".
I.Vertical piping shall be supported every 4'.
J.Allow 1/8" to 3/16" of slack per foot of run for expansion and contraction.
K.PEX tubing shall be installed to allow for expansion and contraction. Do not rigidly attach to structure.
L.Provide sleeves where PEX piping passes through masonry walls.
M.Protect tubing from nail/screw damage with suitable steel plate protectors.
N.The minimum bend radius of PEX tubing is six times its diameter. Smaller radius turns shall be provided with
an elbow.
O.Provide insulators where PEX piping passes through metal studs.
P.Supply stops shall be provided with a pipe bracket support from adjacent structure, a pipe clamp, tube
talon, and a plastic or metal bend support. (Sioux Chief Universal Slider Bracket or approved equal).
Q.Insulation does not have to be continuous at hanging brackets and clamps.
R.Plastic speed clips may be used for connection to structure. Speed clips shall be listed for use on PEX piping.
3.06 APPLICATION
A.Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
B.Provide flow controls in water recirculating systems where indicated.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - 12/13
Job Number 2210142.00
3.07 TOLERANCES
A.Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch (10 mm) vertically of location indicated and
slope to drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) slope.
B.Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot (1:400) and arrange to drain at low points.
3.08 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING TESTS
A.Tests: As the work progresses each section of the water system shall be tested under a 100 psi hydrostatic
test held for 2 hours without reduction of pressure (a pressure fluctuation of +/- 1 psi is acceptable). If any
leaks occur or piping or valves are found to be defective, same shall be removed and new material installed,
and the test made on that section again until all material is found to be satisfactory. Such test shall be made
in the presence of the Owner's Representative.
B.Provide written test documentation in the operation and maintenance manual.
3.09 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A.Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
B.Ensure acidity (pH) of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash)
or acid (hydrochloric).
C.Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80
mg/L residual.
D.Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum
15 percent of outlets.
E.Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
F.If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
G.Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.
H.Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and
analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
I.Provide test results in the operation and maintenance manual.
3.10 SCHEDULES
A.Pipe Hanger Spacing:
1.Metal Piping:
a.Pipe Size: 1/2 inches (15 mm) to 1-1/4 inches (32 mm):
1)Maximum Hanger Spacing: 6.5 ft (2 m)
2)Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inches (9 mm)
b.Pipe Size: 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) to 2 inches (50 mm):
1)Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 ft (3 m)
2)Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inch (9 mm)
c.Pipe Size: 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) to 3 inches (75 mm):
1)Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 ft (3 m)
2)Hanger Rod Diameter: 1/2 inch (13 mm)
d.Pipe Size: 4 inches (100 mm) to 6 inches (150 mm):
1)Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 ft (3 m)
2)Hanger Rod Diameter: 5/8 inch (15 mm)
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05 - 13/13
e.Pipe Size: 8 inches (200 mm) to 12 inches (300 mm):
1)Maximum hanger spacing: 14 ft (4.25 m)
2)Hanger Rod Diameter: 7/8 inch (22 mm)
f.Pipe Size: 14 inches and Over (350 mm and Over):
1)Maximum Hanger Spacing: 20 ft (6 m)
2)Hanger Rod Diameter: 1 inch (25 mm)
2.Plastic Piping:
a.All Sizes:
1)Maximum Hanger Spacing: 6 ft (1.8 m)
2)Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inch (9 mm)
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 10 06 - 1/4
SECTION 22 10 06
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Thermometers
B. Pressure Gauges
C. Unions
D. Flexible Connectors
E. Cleanouts
F. Refrigerator valve and recessed box
G. Water hammer arrestors
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASME A112.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; 2016
B.NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2017
C.NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2016
D.PDI-WH 201 - Water Hammer Arresters; 2010
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and
support requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with not less than three years documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Specialties in Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide products that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372
for maximum lead content.
2.02 THERMOMETERS
A. Adjustable angle type, 304 stainless steel stem, 5" reading dial type, true anti-parallax-dial black
numerals, markings in degrees F., stainless steel, double-strength glass viewing window. Provide sockets
with extension necks where installed on insulated piping
B. Thermometer Temperature Ranges:
1. Domestic Cold Water, range of 0 - 100 degrees F with 1 degree F increments.
2. Domestic Hot Water, range of 30 - 180 degrees F with 2 degrees F increments.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 10 06 - 2/4
Job Number 2210142.00
C. Manufacturers:
1. Ashcroft
2. March
3. Weiss
4. Tel-Tru
5. Winters
6. Taylor
2.03 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Glycerin filled type, 2.5” reading dial with aluminum face and black numerals, markings in English units,
304 stainless steel case and acrylic lens. Provide each gauge with snubber and needle valve. Provide
sockets with extension necks where installed on insulated piping.
B. Pressure gauge ranges:
1. Domestic Hot Water, range 0 - 160 PSI with numeral intervals of 20 PSI and 2 PSI inter-
graduations.
2. Domestic Cold Water, range 0 - 160 PSI with numeral intervals of 20 PSI and 2 PSI inter-
graduations.
3. Compressed Air, range 0 - 160 PSI with numeral intervals of 20 PSI and 2 PSI inter-graduations.
C. Manufacturers:
1. Ashcroft
2. Marsh
3. Weiss
4. Tel-Tru
5. Winters
6. Taylor
2.04 UNIONS
A. Dielectric Waterways: Inert, non-corrosive thermoplastic lining with zinc electroplated casing, rated at
300 psi at 225 deg. F., conforming to NSF 61 Type and size to match piping.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Walter Vallett Company V-line
b. Clear Flow
B. Unions on Copper Pipe:
1. In 2" Pipe and Smaller: Wrought copper solder joint copper to copper union.
2. In 2.5" Pipe and Larger: Brass flange unions.
3. Manufacturers:
a. Watts
b. Nibco
c. Mueller
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 10 06 - 3/4
2.05 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Water Pump Flexible Connectors: Flexible bronze braid, bronze hose, and copper ends rated to a
working pressure of 470 psi at 70°F for a 1” flexible connector.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Metraflex
b. Minnesota Flex
c. Resistoflex
2.06 CLEANOUTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company
2. Josam Company
3. Zurn Industries, LLC
B. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas:
1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly,
and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to accept
floor finish in finished floor areas.
C. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas:
1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round
stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.
2.07 REFRIGERATOR VALVE AND RECESSED BOX
A. Box Manufacturers:
1. Guy Gray
2. Oatey Supply Chain Services, Inc
2.08 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company
2. Sioux Chief; [650 Series]
3. Wade; [WP5-100]
4. Zurn Industries, LLC; 1250 XL
B. Water Hammer Arrestors:
1. Stainless steel construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDI-WH 201, precharged
suitable for operation in temperature range minus 100 to 300 degrees F (minus 73 to 149 degrees
C) and maximum 250 psi (1700 kPa) working pressure.
2. Piston-type with sufficient volume of air to dissipate the calculated kinetic energy generated in
the piping system.
3. Arrestors shall be effective when installed at any angle
4. Provide isolation valve for service
5. Maximum working temperature of 250 degrees F
6. Maximum working pressure 350 PSIG
7. Performance per ANSI/ASSE 1010-2004 Standard
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 10 06 - 4/4
Job Number 2210142.00
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Thermometers: Install thermometers and thermal wells in piping at locations indicated, and so as to be
easily read.
C. Pressure Gauges: Install pressure gauges at each side of pressure reducing valves; and as indicated.
D. Unions: Install unions in pipe connections to control valves, coils, regulators, reducers, all equipment,
and where it may be necessary to disconnect the equipment or piping for repairs or maintenance; and
as indicated.
E. Install (1) piston type water hammer arrester at each quick acting valve for branch supply lines up to 20’
in length serving plumbing fixture groups. Install water hammer arrester between last two fixtures, for
branch supply lines exceeding 20’ in length, serving plumbing fixture groups install water hammer
arrester between middle two fixtures and last two fixtures. Size per manufacturer’s instructions.
F. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of
graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.
G. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold-water supply
piping to on fast acting valves such as water closet flush valves, washer machines, etc.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
22 30 00 - 1/2
SECTION 22 30 00
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Water Heaters:
1. Commercial electric
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 22 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
B. Section 26 05 83 - Wiring Connections: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.UL 174 - Standard for Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions
B.UL 778 - Standard for Motor-Operated Water Pumps; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTAL
A. Product Data:
1. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other
equipment and piping.
2. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement
part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number.
D. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed
in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Certifications:
1. Water Heaters: NSF approved
2. Electric Water Heaters: UL listed and labeled to UL 174
3. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.,
as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WATER HEATERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. A.O. Smith Water Products Co
2. Rheem
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
22 30 00 - 2/2
Job Number 2210142.00
3. State
4. Lochinvar
5. Bradford White
6. PVI
7. Heat Transer Products
8. EEMAX
B. Commercial Electric Tankless:
1. Type: Factory-assembled and wired, electric, vertical storage.
2. Performance:
a. Maximum Working Pressure: 150 psig (1000 kPa)
3. Controls: Automatic immersion water thermostat; externally adjustable temperature range from
60 to 180 degrees F (16 to 82 degrees C), flanged or screw-in nichrome elements, high
temperature limit thermostat.
4. Accessories
a. Water Connections: Brass.
b. Dip Tube: Brass
c. Drain valve
d. Anode: Magnesium
e. Integrated Mixing Valve
5. Tankless water heater shall have a UL rated cover.
6. Controls: Electronic low-water (probe-type) cut-off and high temperature limit thermostat.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required by code, and
complying with conditions of certification, if any.
B. Domestic water heaters.
1. On all water heaters, provide and install seismic bracing per S.M.A.C.N.A. zone 3.
2. Provide and install brass fittings between water heater and piping connections. Dielectric fitting
connections are not acceptable.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00 - 1/3
SECTION 22 40 00
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sinks
B. Hot Water Dispenser
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010
B.ASTM D3222 - Standard Specification for Unmodified Poly(Vinylidene Fluoride) (PVDF) Molding
Extrusion and Coating Materials; 2005 (Reapproved 2015)
C.NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2017
D.NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2016
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and
finishes.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and procedures.
C. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists.
D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name
and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in
this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to
protect fixtures and prevent use.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Potable Water Systems: Provide plumbing fittings and faucets that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for
maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.
2.02 SINKS
A. Sink Manufacturers:
1. Just
2. Elkay
B. Single Compartment Bowl: ASME A112.19.3; 18 gage, 0.0359 inch (0.91 mm) thick, Type 304 stainless
steel, self rimming and undercoated, with ledge back drilled for trim.
1. Drain: 3-1/2 inch (90 mm) crumb cup and tailpiece.
2. Verify amount of hole punches required for each sink prior to ordering.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00 - 2/3
Job Number 2210142.00
C. Double Compartment Bowl: ASME A112.19.3; 18 gage, 0.0359 inch (0.91 mm) thick, Type 304 stainless
steel, self rimming and undercoated, with ledge back drilled for trim.
1. Drain: 3-1/2 inch (90 mm) crumb cup and tailpiece.
2. Verify amount of hole punches required for each sink prior to ordering.
2.03 HOT WATER DISPENSER
A. Hot water dispenser shall be U.L. listed, 750 watts, 6.5 amps, 115 volts, factory mounted 3 wire cord
and 3 prong plug, adjustable thermostat with range of 140°F to 200°F. ½ gallon storage capacity with
faucet having chrome plated finish. Refer to manufacturer’s installation manual for proper installation.
Provide shut-off valve in supply line to unit, install in back left or back right corner of sink.
B. Manufacturers:
1. In-sink-erator (ISE)
2. Other manufacturers will be allowed by prior approval only. To request approval, the
manufacturer must provide an equipment layout showing how the proposed equipment will fit in
the space and meet all access requirements. This manufacturer must include in the cost of the
proposed equipment, at bid time, the difference in piping, electrical, etc.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.
B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
C. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top
lavatories and sinks.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in
schedule for particular fixtures.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install each fixture with a removable trap to be easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
B. Provide chrome plated rigid supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons.
C. Install components level and plumb.
D. Caulk between fixtures and wall and floor with white butyl rubber non-absorbent caulking compound.
Point edges.
E. All exposed metal shall be chrome-plated brass.
3.04 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and
installation.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
B. Polish chrome finish at completion of Project.
C. Remove all manufacturers’ labels tags, and protective plastic.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00 - 3/3
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations.
B. Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.
3.08 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. Fixture Heights: Install fixtures to heights above finished floor as indicated on the architectural
elevation drawings
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 MOTORS AND VARIABLE DRIVES
23 05 13 - 1/2
SECTION 23 05 13
MOTORS AND VARIABLE DRIVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes, but not limited to, motors 1/12 HP or larger used in Division 23
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions, Division 1
B. Section 20 00 00 – General Mechanical Requirements
1.03 SUBMITTALS REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. All variable drives
B. Total harmonic voltage distortion calculation
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Check out sheet for each variable drive showing all programmed parameters. Date of check out, and
name and company address of employee responsible for checkout.
B. Programming manual explaining how to access and change all programmable points
C. International wiring diagram for each different unit
D. Parts diagram with replacement parts listed
E. Trouble shooting guide
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MOTORS
A. Motors located indoors shall be open frame, drip-proof type, unless indicated otherwise. Motors
located outdoors exposed to weather shall have corrosion resistant finish and shall be totally enclosed
fan cooled (TEFC) or totally enclosed non-ventilated (TENV) type, unless indicated otherwise. Motors
used in fans serving dishwashing hoods shall be TEFC type.
B. All motors shall be UL listed.
C. All motors used with variable frequency drives shall be premium efficiency inverter ready and shall be
capable of running at least 85 Hz.
D. All motors 1 HP and larger shall be energy efficient type and shall meet the 2015 Washington State
Energy Code requirements.
E. All fan motors 1/12 HP or greater and less than 1 HP shall be Electronically Commutated Motors (ECM)
or shall have a minimum motor efficiency of 70 percent when rated in accordance with
DOE 10 C.F.R. 431. These motor speeds shall be adjustable.
F. Motors shall not be smaller than indicated on drawings; however, motors shall be of adequate size to
drive the respective equipment when handling the quantities specified without exceeding the
nameplate full load current at any conditions encountered in actual operation. If it becomes evident
that a motor furnished is too small to meet these requirements as a result of the Contractor using
substituted equipment or having revised the system arrangement, the Contractor shall replace it with a
motor of adequate size at no additional cost to the Owner. This Contractor shall also arrange with the
Electrical Contractor to increase the size of the wiring, motor starter and other accessories as required
to serve the larger motor at no additional cost to the Owner.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
MOTORS AND VARIABLE DRIVES Job Number 2210142.00
23 05 13 - 2/2
G. ECM (Electrically Commutated Motors) shall conform to the motor requirements listed above. In
addition, the Contractor purchasing the HVAC equipment that includes the ECM is responsible for
ensuring the ECM motor control speed control is set to match the required component operation. The
ECM motor control speed control may be preset by the HVAC equipment manufacturer. The Contractor
purchasing the HVAC equipment shall provide documentation showing the appropriate ECM motor
control board jumper pins, dip switches and/or multi-pin plugs settings for correct HVAC equipment
component operation.
H. Approved Manufacturers:
1. General Electric
2. Westinghouse
3. Reliance
4. Allis-Chalmers
5. Gould
6. Century
7. Wagner
8. Baldor
9. U.S. Motors Marathon
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Applicable
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 1/3
SECTION 23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes:
1. Duct Hangers and Supports
2. Mechanical Equipment Anchors and Supports
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions, Division 1
B. Section 20 00 00 – General Mechanical Requirements
C. Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Control
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All methods, materials, and workmanship shall conform to the International Building Code (IBC) and
International Mechanical Code (IMC), as amended and adopted by the authority having jurisdiction.
1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Hangers
B. Struts
C. Anchors
D. Shop drawings are required for all equipment supports and fabricated supports or assemblies
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF THIS SECTION
Not Applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Hangers and Supports: Elcen, Grinnell, B-Line Systems, Unistrut, Caddy, Tolco, PHD
B. Anchors: Rawplug, Phillips, Hilti, Caddy
2.02 GENERAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods: Threaded hot rolled steel, electro-galvanized or cadmium plated. Hanger rods shall be
sized so that the total load (including pipe or duct, insulation, hangers, and fluid) does not exceed the
following:
Nominal Rod Diameter Maximum Load
3/8 Inch 610 Pounds
1/2 Inch 1130 Pounds
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Job Number 2210142.00
23 05 29 - 2/3
B. Hanger Straps: Galvanized steel. Straps shall be sized so that the total load does not exceed the
following:
Strap Size Maximum Load
1” x 22 Gauge 230 Pounds
1” x 20 Gauge 290 Pounds
1” x 18 Gauge 380 Pounds
1” x 16 Gauge 630 Pounds
C. Beam Attachments: Shall be of the following type:
MSS Type Elcen Figure No.Grinnel Figure No.
21 33, 34 131
22 67 66
23 29A 87
28 95 292, 228
30 95 229
D. Anchors: Masonry anchors shall be Phillips wedge anchors, Phillips "Red Head" or Rawl "Saber-Tooth".
E. Steel: Structural steel per ASTM A36.
F. Wood: Shall be fire treated.
2.03 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers: As shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
B. Vertical Duct Supports at Floor: 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" (minimum) galvanized steel angle and to support
ducts, as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Figure 4-6. For ducts over 30 inches
wide, provide riser reinforcing with hanger rods between the riser support and riser reinforcing.
C. Vertical Duct Supports at Wall: 1-1/2" x 1/8" (minimum) strap or 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" (minimum)
angle bracket and as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Figure 4-7.
D. Hanger Attachments to Structure: As shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standard Figures 4-1,
4-2, 4-3 to suit building construction and as allowed on structural drawings. Where C-clamps are
provided, retainer clips shall be used. Friction beam clamps shall not be used.
E. Hanger Attachments to Ducts: As shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Figure 4-4.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Provide all necessary bolts, nuts, washers, turnbuckles, rod connectors, and any other miscellaneous
accessories required for the support and anchoring of all pipes, ducts, and mechanical equipment.
B. Install steel or wood backing in walls (anchored to studs) as required to provide support for items hung
from walls.
C. Install concrete inserts and anchors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. All welded steel support assemblies shall have a power wire brush and primer paint finish.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide anchors and supports for all ductwork.
B. Rectangular Duct: Supports and hangers shall be of size and spacing as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards for the appropriate class of duct. (Hangers maximum allowable loads shall not
be as shown in SMACNA Tables but shall be as specified in these specifications.)
C. Round Duct: Supports and hangers shall be of size and spacing as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards for the appropriate class of duct.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 3/3
D. Maximum Hanger Spacing (provided duct gauge and reinforcement comply with SMACNA Standards for
such spacing):
Duct Area Maximum Spacing
Up to 4 sq. ft. (27” Diameter)8 Feet
4.1 to 10 sq. ft. (28” to 42” Diameter)6 Feet
10.1 sq. ft. and up (43” Diameter and up)4 Feet
E. Provide supports at each change in direction of duct. Locate hangers at inside and outside corners of
elbows, or at each end of fitting, on each side.
F. Provide additional supports at each side concentrated loads (such as modulating dampers, duct heaters,
sound attenuators, etc.)
G. Provide supports for exterior ductwork per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards or as detailed
on the drawings.
3.03 CEILING AIR TERMINALS/SERVICES
A. Ceiling mounted air terminals or services weighing less than 20 pounds shall be positively attached to
the ceiling suspension main runners or to cross runners with the same carrying capacity as the main
runners.
B. Terminals or services weighing 20 pounds but not more than 56 pounds in addition to the above shall
have two No. 12 gauge hangers connected from the terminal or service to the ceiling system hangers or
to the structure above. These wires may be slack.
C. Terminals or services weighing more than 56 pounds shall be supported directly from the structure
above by approved hangers.
D. All air terminals that use side inlet "plenums" or have fire dampers shall be supported directly from the
structure with approved hangers (regardless of total weight).
3.04 INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide anchoring and supports for all mechanical equipment.
B. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning equipment where suspended from structure shall be
supported per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards or as shown on the drawings.
C. Equipment shall be supported and anchored in such a way so that no equipment vibration is
transmitted to the building structure.
D. Added supports and bracing shall be provided per Section 23 05 48.
E. Provide curbing as shown on drawings and as required to support all mechanical equipment.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
23 05 48 - 1/5
SECTION 23 05 48
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. This section includes, but not limited to vibration isolation and seismic restraint installation for all
equipment, ductwork, and piping as described here-in.
B. Seismic Restraints shall be bidder-designed. Seismic Design Criteria are to be established per the
International Building Code and ASCE along with Project Structural drawings.
C. Items not included in this specification shall not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of providing
seismic bracing that meets all the criteria required by the referenced codes and in accordance with the
seismic design guidelines and the project structural drawings.
1.02 REFERENCED CODE AND STANDARDS
A. The latest adopted versions of the following codes and standards apply to this section.
1. International Building Code (IBC)
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA-13)
3. Seismic Restraint Manual – Guidelines for Mechanical Systems (SMACNA)
4. ASCE 7-10, American Society of Civil Engineers “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures”
5. Applicable Project Structural Drawings for Seismic Design Criteria
6. Applicable Manufacturer’s Seismic Design Guides for proprietary listed seismic bracing and
mounting hardware
7. Where there is a conflict in requirements between these guidelines and above-mentioned codes
the more stringent parameters shall prevail.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions, Division 1 and Division 23
B. Section 20 00 00 – General Mechanical Requirements
1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Occupancy Category of Structure (I-IV) per IBC or ASCE
B. Component Importance Factor (Ip) per ASCE
C. Mapped Acceleration Parameters (S1 and (Ss) per IBC and Project Structural Drawings
D. Site Class (A – F) per IBC and Project Structural Drawings
E. Site Coefficient (Fa) per IBC and Project Structural Drawings
F. Site Coefficient (Fv) per IBC and Project Structural Drawings
G. Seismic Design Category (A – D) based on Short Period Response Accelerations per IBC and Project
Structural Drawings
H. Seismic Design Category (A – D) based on 1-Second Period Response Acceleration per IBC and Project
Structural Drawings
I. Amplification Factor ap per ASCE
J. Response Modification Factor Rp per ASCE
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL Job Number 2210142.00
23 05 48 - 2/5
1.05 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Isolation Pads
B. Spring Isolators
C. Seismic Control:
1. Include design calculations and details for selecting seismic restraints complying with
performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight, operation,
seismic, and wind forces required to select vibration isolators, seismic and wind restraints.
a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment mounted
outdoors. Comply with requirements in other sections for equipment mounted outdoors.
3. Seismic and Wind Restraint Details:
a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic and wind restraints.
Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraint to the
restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacing’s.
Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces
transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration
isolation devices.
c. Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind-restraint details
required for equipment mounted outdoors.
4. Periodic Special Inspections: The mechanical contractor shall provide a list of
components/systems requiring periodic special inspections per IBC.
5. Special Certification Requirements: Each contractor responsible for the construction of a
“Designated Seismic System” for active mechanical equipment that must remain operable
following the design earthquake, or components with hazardous contents certified by the
manufacturer to maintain containment following the design earthquake shall submit a
Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance for review and approval by the Registered Design
Professional responsible for the design of the system. This information shall then be submitted to
the AHJ.
6. All brace or restraint components, mounting devices, snubbers and anchors.
1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not Applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NEOPRENE ISOLATORS
A. Suspension Isolators: Shall be double deflection neoprene type, with isolator encased in open steel
bracket and minimum 3/8-inch deflection. Hanger rod shall be isolated from steel bracket with
neoprene grommets. Mason Series HD, Amber Booth "BRD" or approved.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
23 05 48 - 3/5
2.02 SPRING ISOLATORS
A. General: The load carried by each isolator shall be carefully calculated and isolators selected so that the
static deflection will be the same and the supported equipment will remain level. Isolators shall be so
designed that the ends of the springs will remain parallel during and after deflection to operating
height. At operating height, springs shall have additional travel to complete (solid) compression equal
to at least 50 percent of the operating deflection. Suspension isolator springs shall have a static
deflection (as shown on drawings) not less than 1-1/2", except that for units with components rotating
at 1000 rpm and less, the static deflection shall be not less than 2 inches. Floor isolator springs shall
have deflection of not less than 1 inch. All isolators shall provide at least 96% isolation efficiency. Note:
Deflections other than these may be used where circumstances warrant and more optimum isolation
results can be achieved.
B. Suspension Type Spring Isolators: Shall consist of a rigid steel frame, a stable steel spring in the bottom
part of the frame, and double deflection neoprene isolating pad at the top of the frame. Where
supporting rods pass through the frame, a clearance of not less than on half rod diameter shall be
provided all around the rod.
1. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Mason Series DNHS
b. Amber Booth "BSSR" or approved
2.03 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. General:
1. All seismic hangers and components shall be domestically made. Products designed domestically
and fabricated in a foreign country are prohibited.
2. Products not permitted include: powder actuated anchors, gas actuated anchors, or anchors
requiring epoxy.
3. Only Steel or Ductile Iron components shall be provided. No Cast Iron or Cast Aluminum
components are allowed.
4. Steel shall be per ASTM A36; hangers and other devices shall be as shown in “SMACNA Seismic
Restraint Manual” or approved manufacturers seismic design guidelines.
B. Seismic Bracing (rigid and cable):
1. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Tolco
b. International Seismic Application Technology (ISAT)
c. Mason Industries
d. Cooper B-Line
e. Kinetics Noise Control
f. AFCON
g. Gripple
h. PHD
i. Unistrut
j. Anvil or prior approved equal.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL Job Number 2210142.00
23 05 48 - 4/5
C. Seismic Anchorages (for wood, steel and concrete):
1. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Hilti
b. ITW Ramset/Red Head
c. ITW Buildex
d. Mason Industries
e. Tolco, AFCON
f. Simpson Strong-Tie
g. Powers Fasteners, Inc. or prior approved equal.
D. Flexible Connectors:
1. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Mason Industries
b. Metraflex
c. Victaulic
d. Kinetics Noise
e. International Seismic Application Technology (ISAT) or prior approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 VIBRATION ISOLATION
A. Motorized equipment shall be mounted on or suspended from spring vibration isolators either integral
or external to the equipment. Floor mounted or suspended isolators.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, resilient mounts for motorized equipment shall be of the type and size to
provide maximum ten percent transmissibility. Use unhoused, free-standing stable steel springs which
are preferred over housed spring assemblies. The horizontal stiffness of the spring shall be
approximately equal to its vertical stiffness. The spring deflection shall be selected based on the
equipment power range (HP), speed range (RPM), and static deflection of the supporting structural
floor. It is a specific recommendation that whenever a steel spring is used, two pads of ribbed waffle-
pattern neoprene be used in series with the spring.
C. The design of vibration dampening shall consider lateral load as well as vertical load and be suitably
snubbed against earthquake forces.
D. A list of isolators accompanied by certified transmissibility ratings for the required duty shall be
submitted for each item of equipment.
E. Unless noted otherwise, all vibration isolating equipment shall be of the same make and shall be
submitted as one group.
3.02 SEISMIC BRACING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Support and bracing from the structure to pipes, ducts and mechanical equipment shall conform to
ASCE and the plumbing & HVAC industry standard SMACNA “Seismic Restraint Manual, Guidelines for
Mechanical Systems” or approved manufacturer’s listed seismic assemblies.
3.03 SEISMIC BRACING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - PIPING
A. When determining horizontal load requirements, consider all pipes full of water and maximum
equipment heights unless calculated for other substances and equipment.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
23 05 48 - 5/5
B. Seismic bracing shall not limit the expansion and contraction of the piping system. When thermal
expansion or contraction is involved, longitudinal bracing shall be designed at the anchor point of the
piping system. The longitudinal bracing and the connections must be capable of resisting the additional
force induced by expansion and contraction.
C. Seismic bracing for fire sprinkler system piping and riser components shall be as specified per
Division 21.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of seismic restraints shall be as follows:
1. Upon completion of installation of all seismic restraint materials and before start up of restrained
equipment, all debris shall be cleaned from beneath all protected equipment, leaving equipment
free to contact snubbers.
2. All external utility connections to restrained equipment shall be designed to allow differential
seismic motion without damage to the equipment or utility connections.
3. Adjust isolators and restraints after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at its
operating weight, following manufacturer’s written instructions.
4. After equipment installation is completed, adjust limit stops following manufacturer’s written
instructions so they are out of contact during normal operation.
5. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written instructions.
6. Torque anchor bolts according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions to resist seismic
forces.
7. Attach piping to the trapeze per seismic restraint manufacturer’s design. Install cables so they do
not bend across sharp edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
8. Install vertical braces to stiffen hanger rods and prevent buckling per seismic restraint
manufacturer’s design. Clamp vertical brace to hanger rods. Requirements apply equally to
hanging equipment. Do not weld vertical braces to rods.
3.05 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
A. When required continuous or periodic special inspections of the equipment and systems designated on
the list provided by the mechanical contractor shall be performed in accordance with the IBC and ASCE.
The owner shall reserve the right to employ an approved special inspector.
B. Per the IBC, the registered design professional in responsible charge may designate members of the
A&E team to act as special inspectors provided those personnel meet the qualification requirements of
the IBC to the satisfaction of the building official.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53 - 1/2
SECTION 23 05 53
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other
Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. ANSI Compliance: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, colors, and installed viewing angles of
identification devices.
1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not Applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
Not Applicable
2.02 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS
A. Provide engraved stock phenolic plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, engraved with engraver's
standard letter style of sizes and wording, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise
indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of
substrate.
1. Thickness: 1/16" for units up to 20 sq in or 8" length; 1/8" for larger units
2. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where
screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate.
3. Letter Size: No less than ½" tall. (Use unit# as noted on the equipment schedules)
B. Provide for all items on equipment schedules.
2.03 PAINT
A. Benjamin Moore Impervo or equivalent
B. Use appropriate primer
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or
finish including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification prior to installation of
acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Job Number 2210142.00
23 05 53 - 2/2
3.02 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install engraved plastic laminate sign on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each
operation device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational
devices. Provide signs on suspended ceiling tile below mechanical equipment located above ceiling.
1. Fans, exhaust, and air handling units
3.03 FIRE AND FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER IDENTIFICATION
A. Furnish and install label reading "FIRE DAMPER" or "FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER" on each fire damper duct
access door. Provide additional labels at locations where external duct insulation covers the access
door. Install on outside of insulation.
3.04 CONCEALED ITEMS
A. Items concealed above accessible ceilings requiring access, shall have the ceiling marked to indicate
such items location. The marking system shall consist of colored phenolic plates with ½” tall engraved
lettering specifying the item concealed; plate shall be applied to ceiling T-bar framing with rivets or
other owner approved method below the concealed item. Colors used shall be verified with Owner,
and unless directed otherwise, shall be:
Item Color
Heating System Equipment Component Green
Fire Protection System Component Red
B. Provide three (3) color legends (hard laminate) listing the above colors. Locate as directed by Owner.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 AIR SYSTEM TESTING AND BALANCING
23 05 93 - 1/4
SECTION 23 05 93
AIR SYSTEM TESTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A.Includes, but not limited to, testing, balancing and adjusting of air heating, cooling and exhaust systems.
1.02 RELATED SECTION(S)
A.General Conditions and Division 1 apply to this section
B.Division 23 shall make changes in pulley, belts, and dampers as required for correct balance as recommended by
Air Testing & Balancing Agency at no additional cost to Owner.
C.Division 23 shall repair leaks in ductwork at no additional cost to Owner.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS)
A.Perform testing and balancing in complete accordance with the Associated Air Balancing Council (AABC), National
Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), or National Balancing Council (NBC) standards and procedures.
B.Air Testing & Balance Agency shall perform tests specified, compile test data, and submit copies of complete test
data to Contractor for forwarding to Architect/Engineer for evaluation and approval.
1.04 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED BY THIS SECTION
A.Company information including Washington State Contractors’ license
B.Key personnel and resumes
C.AABC, NEBB, or NBC certifications
D.Provide reference of five (5) completed jobs of similar size and complexity.
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A.Final air balance report shall be bound in the O & M Manual or provided under a separate volume.
B.Preliminary air balance report shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval. Preliminary report shall
note all finished measured data.
C.Final Test Data:
1.Provide project name, name and telephone number of balancing firm, GC, MC, Architect, and Engineer in
the cover (or first page) of report.
2.Provide a summary of air balance findings regarding airtightness of each ducted systems, deficiencies of
equipment to meet design requirements, deficiencies of space pressure relationships, etc.
3.Cover sheet shall have a statement from the site project manager that reads, “The air system testing and
balancing report contained here in is true and factual based on actual field measurements and adjustments.
I have personally performed or witnessed a minimum of 5% of the airflow tests.”
4.Each page of test report to have a unique page number.
5.Provide fan curve or chart of each fan in system.
6.Provide final approved test report in PDF format on CD. Provide one more CD than hard copies of test
report.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
AIR SYSTEM TESTING AND BALANCING Job Number 2210142.00
23 05 93 - 2/4
7.Obtain and provide a copy of the air barrier test (building tightness) whether or not the Air Balance
Contractor produced the test.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (QUALIFICATIONS)
A.Mechanical Contractor shall procure services of an independent Air Testing & Balance Agency, which specializes in
testing, and balancing of heating, ventilating, and cooling systems to balance, adjust, test air-moving equipment,
air distribution, and exhaust systems.
B.Agency shall be approved in writing by Consultant.
C.Instruments used by Agency shall be accurately calibrated and maintained good working order.
D.If requested, conduct tests in presence of Architect/Owner/Engineer.
1.07 SEQUENCING & SCHEDULING
A.Mechanical Contractor shall award test and balance contract to approved agency upon receipt of his contract to
proceed to allow Agency to schedule this work in cooperation with other Sections involved and comply with
completion date.
B.Begin air testing and balancing upon completion of air cooling, heating, and exhaust systems including installation
of all specialties and devices.
C.Mechanical Contractor shall put heating, ventilating, and cooling systems and equipment into full operation and
continue their operation during each working day of testing and balancing.
PART 2 PRODUCT
Not applicable
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.Testing Procedure: Air Testing & Balancing Agency shall perform following tests and balance system in accordance
with following requirements at design conditions of supply and a minimum outside air CFM (not 100% return or
100% economizer).
1.Test, adjust, and record fan rpm to design requirements.
2.Test and record motor amperes at design conditions.
3.Make pitot tube traverse of main supply duct and obtain design cfm at fans. (systems of 1000 CFM or
greater)
4.Test and record system static pressures: suction, discharge, and clean filters (if applicable; for systems of
2000 CFM or greater)
5.Test, adjust, and record system for design cfm air.
6.Test, adjust, and record system for design cfm outside air.
7.Test, adjust, and record each diffuser, grille, and register to within 10% of design requirements.
8.On a floor plan, identify each diffuser, grille, and register to location and area using a designation symbol
unique to that page.
9.Identify and list size, type, and manufacturer of diffusers, grilles, registers, and testing equipment. Use
manufacturer's rating on equipment to make required calculations.
10.In readings and tests of diffusers, grilles, and registers, include required cfm and test cfm after adjustments.
11.In cooperation with Division 23, set adjustments of automatically operated dampers to operate as specified,
indicated, or noted.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 AIR SYSTEM TESTING AND BALANCING
23 05 93 - 3/4
12.Adjust diffusers, grilles, and registers to minimize drafts.
13.Identify at each volume damper with permanent mark, the position of actuator handle once final balance
has been achieved.
14.Measure and record all pressure differential relationships as identified by the controls diagrams (i.e.
building pressure, etc). These measurements are to be taken when all HVAC is running after full balance
has been completed. Note the measured reference points to determine the pressure differential.
15.For any spaces with exhaust and supply to them where design airflows cannot be obtained, the systems
shall be adjusted to produce a negative pressure to the adjacent space (i.e. workrooms, restrooms, etc.)
16.When reconciling supply, return, outside, and exhaust air quantities, priority shall be placed on outside air
quantities (typically, return air quantities noted on plans are for duct sizing only).
17.Where duct pressure sensors are noted in controls diagrams (i.e. variable volume systems) adjust system to
its minimum pressure point that still achieves full airflow to all terminals. Record this setpoint in test report
and provide data to controls contractor.
18.For variable volume systems, adjust sheave package to produce maximum airflow (or diversity as
applicable) at 60 Hz with simulated filter loading. If maximum airflow cannot be obtained at 60 Hz, increase
frequency until maximum airflow is obtained as allowed by the equipment manufacturer and maximum
motor amperes. Record final values.
19.Verify that all gravity backdraft dampers are moving freely, open in proper direction, and are unbound.
20.After balancing system, measure terminal CFM when system is in 100% economizer. If supply is greater
than design, coordinate with controls contractor or MC to provide damper stops to provide design CFM
during 100% economizer.
21.On All Motors With Variable Drives: Set maximum amperage safety to protect motor from over loading.
B.Final Inspection & Adjustments:
1.Balancing agency shall be represented at final inspection meeting by qualified testing personnel with
balancing equipment and two copies of air balancing test report.
a.Architect may choose and direct spot balancing of one zone. Differences between the spot balance
and test report will be justification for requiring repeat of testing and balancing for entire building.
b.Rebalancing shall be done in presence of Architect and subject to his approval.
c.Spot balance and rebalance shall be performed at no additional cost to Owner.
2.System shall be completely balanced and all reports submitted to Architect prior to prefinal inspection.
3.Where equipment supplied to job site provides over 5% more air than schedule requirements, rooms
supplied by that equipment shall have their supply air quantities increased by the ratio of actual total air
quantity supplied to minimum air quantity required by schedule.
3.02 BALANCING FIRMS (APPROVED)
A.Hardin and Sons
B.United Test and Balance
C.Airtest Company, Inc
D.American Air Balance Company
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
AIR SYSTEM TESTING AND BALANCING Job Number 2210142.00
23 05 93 - 4/4
E.Advanced Mechanical Services, Inc
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 EQUIPMENT/DUCTWORK INSULATION
23 07 13 - 1/3
SECTION 23 07 13
EQUIPMENT/DUCTWORK INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. This section describes the insulation requirement to meet or exceed the 2012 Washington State Energy
Code. Lining installation is per 23 31 13.
1.02 RELATED SECTION(S)
A. General Conditions, Division 1
B. Section 20 00 00 - General Mechanical Conditions
C. Section 23 31 13 - Steel Ductwork
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Wrap Insulation
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not Applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
Not Applicable
2.02 DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Manville Corporation Owens Corning, Knauf Insulation, Manson Insulation, or approved
equal.
B. Flexible Fiber Glass Blanket (Wrap Insulation): Manville, Microlite Type 75 meeting ASTM C553, Type 1,
Class B-2; flexible blanket.
1. 'K' ('ksi') Value: 0.27 at 75°F (0.040 at 24°C) installed
2. Density and R-value:
a. R-3.3: 1.0” inch of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft. glass fiber blanket
b. R-5.3: 2.0” inches of 0.75 lb/cu. Ft. or 1.5 inches of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft. glass fiber blanket
c. R-7: 3.0 inches of 0.75 lb/cu. Ft. or 2.0 inches of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft. glass fiber blanket
3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: FSK, aluminum foil reinforced with fiber glass yarn and laminated to
fire-resistant kraft, secured with UL listed pressure sensitive tape and/or outward cinched
expanded staples and vapor barrier mastic as needed.
C. Rigid Fiber Glass Board: Insulation Board meeting ASTM C 612 Type IA and IB; rigi
1. ‘K’ (‘ksi’) Value: ASTM C 177, 0.22 at 75°F mean temperature
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450°F
3. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, or FSK or PSK conforming to
ASTM C 1136 Type II.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
EQUIPMENT/DUCTWORK INSULATION Job Number 2210142.00
23 07 13 - 2/3
4. Securement: Secured in place using adhesive and mechanical fasteners spaced a minimum of 12”
on center with a minimum of 2 rows per side of duct. Insulation shall be secured with speed
washers and all joints, breaks and punctures sealed with appropriate pressure-sensitive foil tape,
or glass fabric and vapor retarder mastic.
5. Density and R-value:
a. R-4.5: 1.0” of 6.0 lb./cu.ft
b. R-6.8: 1.5” of 6.0 lb./cu.ft
c. R-9.1: 2.0” of 6.0 lb./cu.ft
D. Duct Insulation Protection:
1. Aluminum Jacket: 0.016-inch (.045 mm) thick sheet, smooth/embossed finish, with longitudinal
slip joints and 2-inch (50 mm) lamps.
2. Manville Insulkote ET, a non-water-vapor retarder, non-burning, weatherproof coating for use
over insulation where "breathing" is required.
3. Manville Zeston 2000 jacketing, UV resistant polyvinyl chloride covering with joints secured and
sealed with Manville Perma-Weld Adhesive.
4. Canvas Jacket: UL listed fabric, 6 oz/sq. yd. (220 g/sq. m.), plain weave cotton treated with dilute
fire-retardant lagging adhesive.
5. Self-Adhering Jacketing: Material to be VentureClad [1579CW] with a white finish. Jacketing
material is to have a maximum flame spread/smoke developed index of 25/20 per
UL 723, 1 0.0000 water vapor permeance rating per ASTM E-96, mold inhibitors incorporated, and
be UV stable.
2.03 DUCTWORK LINING
A. See Section 23 31 13 - Steel Ductwork.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Verify that ductwork has been tested for leakage in accordance with SMACNA standards before
applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that all surfaces are clean, dry, and free of foreign material.
C. External Ductwork Insulation:
1. Provide insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature with vapor retardant
jacket. Seal all vapor retardant jacket seams and penetrations with UL listed tapes or vapor
retardant adhesive.
2. Provide insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature with or without vapor
retardant jacket. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation.
3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations except where
prohibited by code.
4. The underside of ductwork 24 inches or greater shall be secured with mechanical fasteners and
speed clips spaced approximately 18 inches on center. The protruding ends of the fasteners
should be cut off flush after the speed clips are installed, and then, when required, sealed with
the same tape as specified above.
5. For ductwork exposed to physical abuse in unfinished and exposed spaces, finish with duct
insulation protection.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 EQUIPMENT/DUCTWORK INSULATION
23 07 13 - 3/3
D. For installation of lining insulation, see Section 23 31 13.
3.02 INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Provide wrap insulation and duct liner for the duct systems indicated per the following table (R-value
indicates the thickness to be provided as defined in Section 23 07 13 for wrap insulation and
Section 23 31 13 for liner):
DUCT TYPE AND LOCATION LINER WRAP
Within Conditioned Space:
- Supply Air R - 3.3 Not Required
- Return Air R - 3.3 Not Required
- Primary Air Not Required R – 3.31
- Transfer Air R-3.3 Not Required
- Exhaust Air R-3.3 Not Required2
Table Footnotes:
1 Where duct is exposed to view, provide wrap with paintable duct insulation protection
2 Building level insulation is required from backdraft/motorized damper to louver or roof hood.
See plans for additional details. Coordinate with GC for insulation.
B. For purposes of the Insulation Schedule above, the following defines the duct systems:
1. Supply Air: Air that has passed through mechanical conditioning device, such as a furnace, coil,
evaporative section, heat recovery device, etc. that is distributed to the conditioned space
2. Return Air: Air from the conditioned space to an air handler
3. Primary Air: See Section 23 31 13 – Steel Ductwork
4. Transfer Air: Air from one conditioned space to another conditioned space
5. Exhaust air: Air from a space moved by a fan to directly outside. Also, air downstream of a heat
recovery device to directly outside
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS
23 09 00 - 1/8
SECTION 23 09 00
ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.Conform to General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions for Washington State Facilities Construction.
B.The general Provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary, and Special Conditions, and
Division 1- General Requirements, apply to work specified in this section. Subcontractor must familiarize
himself with the terms of the above documents.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A.Scope of Work: Under the base bids, the controls as specified under Section 23 09 00 will be added to the
project scope of work as a separate bid and pricing package. The following Controls manufacturers are
approved for use on this project. No substitutions of manufacturers other than those listed will be
considered. Input and output devices are not restricted to these manufacturers. Systems approved for
bidding are:
1.Approved Manufacturers:
a.Delta Control by ESC
1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.All work of this Division shall be coordinated and provided by the single Controls Contractor.
B.The work of this Division shall be scheduled, coordinated, and interfaced with the associated work of
other trades. Reference the Division 23 Sections for details.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A.Analog: A continuously variable system or value not having discrete levels. Typically exists within a
defined range of limiting values.
B.Binary: A two-state system where an “ON” condition is represented by one discrete signal level and an
“OFF” condition is represented by a second discrete signal level each separated by a defined deadband.
Digital Inputs and Digital Outputs are examples.
C.Controls Contractor: The single Contractor to provide the work of this Division. This Contractor shall be
the primary installer, commissioner and ongoing service provider for the Controls work.
D.Control Sequence: A pre-programmed arrangement of software algorithms, logical computation, target
values and limits as required to attain the defined operational control objectives.
E.Direct Digital Control: The digital algorithms and pre-defined arrangements included in the controls
software to provide direct closed-loop control for the designated equipment and controlled variables.
Inclusive of Proportional, Derivative and Integral control algorithms together with target values, limits,
logical functions, arithmetic functions, constant values, timing considerations and the like.
F.Node: A digitally programmable entity existing on the controls network.
G.PC: Personal Computer from a recognized major manufacturer. PC “clones” assembled by a third-party
Subcontractor are not acceptable. PC must also have documentation verifying that it has been tested and
is completely compatible with all installed software and communicates with any peripherals such as
modems, NEC cards, printers, hubs, zip drives, etc. that may be attached.
H.Operator Workstation: Software and PC combination that serves as the graphic and/or text interface to
EMCS
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS Job Number 2210142.00
23 09 00 - 2/8
I.Wiring: The term “Wiring” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean provide the controls
wiring and terminations.
J.Install: The term “Install” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean receive at the jobsite
and mount.
K.Software: The term “software” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean all programmed
digital processor software, preprogrammed firmware and project specific digital process programming
and database entries and definitions as generally understood in the controls industry for real-time,
integrated controls configurations.
L.The following abbreviations and acronyms may be used in describing the work of this Division:
ADC Analog to Digital Converter
AI Analog Input
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AO Analog Output
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
AWG American Wire Gauge
CFM Cubic Feet Per Minute
DAC Digital to Analog Converter
DDC Direct Digital Control
DI (Binary) Digital Input
DO (Binary) Digital Output
EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
EMCS Energy Management Control System
FAS Fire Alarm Detection and Annunciation System
HOA Hand-Off-Auto
ID Identification
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
I/O Input/Output
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
MCC Motor Control Center
NC Normally Closed
NIC Not In Contract
NO Normally Open
OWS Operator Workstation
OAH Outdoor Air Humidity
OAT Outdoor Air Temperature
PC Personal Computer
RAM Random Access Memory
RF Radio Frequency
RFI Radio Frequency Interference
RH Relative Humidity
ROM Read Only Memory
SPDT Single Pole Double Throw
SPST Single Pole Single Throw
TBA To Be Advised
VAC Volts, Alternating Current
VAV Variable Air Volume
VDC Volts, Direct Current
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS
23 09 00 - 3/8
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.General:
1.The Controls Contractor shall have a branch facility within a 100-mile radius of the job site supplying
complete maintenance and support services on a 24 hour, 7-day-a-week basis. This branch facility
shall provide the work for this project. This support facility shall have spare parts and all necessary
test and diagnostic equipment required to install, commission and service the additional controls.
2.As evidence and assurance of the Contractor’s ability to support the Owner's system with service
and parts, the Contractor must have been in business for at least the last ten (10) years and have
successfully completed three projects comparable to the value of this contract in the preceding five
years
B.Quality Management Program:
1.Provide a competent and experienced Controls Project Manager employed by the Controls
Contractor. The Project Manager shall be supported as necessary by other Controls Contractor
employees in order to provide professional management service for the work. The Project Manager
shall attend scheduled Project Meetings as required and shall be empowered to make technical,
scheduling and related decisions on behalf of the Controls Contractor
1.06 REFERENCES
A.All work shall conform to the following Codes and Standards, as applicable:
1.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards
2.National Electric Code (NEC) and applicable local Electric Code
3.Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listing and labels
4.UL 916 Energy Management
5.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
6.NFPA 90A - Standard for The Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
7.NFPA 92A and 92B Smoke Purge/Control Equipment
8.Factory Mutual (FM)
9.American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
10.National Electric Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)
11.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
12.American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
13.Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA)
14.Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
15.American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII)
16.Electronics Industries Association (EIA)
17.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
18.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
19.Federal Communications Commission (FCC) including Part 15, Radio Frequency Devices
20.Americans Disability Act (ADA)
B.In the case of conflicts or discrepancies, the more stringent regulation shall apply
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS Job Number 2210142.00
23 09 00 - 4/8
C.All work shall meet the approval of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction at the project site.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A.Control Drawings, Product Data, and Samples:
1.The Controls Contractor shall submit a complete controls package divided in two sections. The first
section shall be delivered within 30 days after the contract has been awarded and the second
section shall be delivered within 60 days after the contract has been awarded.
2.Allow at least 15 working days for the review of each package by the Engineer.
3.Equipment and systems requiring approval of local authorities must comply with such regulations
and be approved. Filing shall be at the expense of the Controls Contractor where filing is necessary.
Provide a copy of all related correspondence and permits to the Owner.
B.Submittal Section 1:
1.Product data sheets for all products including software.
C.Submittal Section 2:
1.Controller wiring diagrams and sequences. Control drawings shall be created on AUTOCAD
software, version 14 or newer.
2.Detailed Bill of Material, identifying part number, quantity, description, and optional features.
3.Details of all interfaces and connections to the work of other trades.
1.08 RECORD DOCUMENTATION
A.Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1.Three (3) copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided to the Owner's
Representative upon completion of the project. The entire Operation and Maintenance Manual
shall be furnished on Compact Disc media, and include the following for the controls provided:
a.Table of contents
b.As-built Control Drawings using AutoCAD Version 14 or newer. Drawings shall represent the
as-built condition of the system and incorporate all information supplied with the approved
submittal.
c.Manufacturer’s product data sheets for all products including software
d.System Operator’s manuals.
e.Wiring termination diagrams (use AutoCAD version 14 or newer)
f.Interfaces to all third-party products and work by other trades
g.Point to point checkout sheets with dates and checkout signatures
h.Repair contact name and phone number
1.09 WARRANTY
A.Standard Material and Labor Warranty:
1.Provide a one-year labor warranty on the Controls.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS
23 09 00 - 5/8
2.The controls components shall be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use
and service. If within one (1) year from the date of awarding of the Certificate of Occupancy any
controls equipment is found to be defective, it will be replaced, repaired or adjusted by the Controls
Contractor free of charge. The Controls Contractor is not responsible for the removal or
reinstallation of any components that were originally installed by others, such as valves, dampers,
wells, air flow stations, etc.
3.Maintain an adequate supply of materials within 100 miles of the Project site such that replacement
of key parts and labor support, including programming. Warranty work shall be done during
Controls Contractor’s normal business hours unless there is an emergency.
4.Maintain an on-site record of all work done, all items removed from site, all items returned to site,
all new replacement items installed and all remedial programming and database entry work
undertaken including software revisions installed. Maintain a record of all re-calibrations required
as a result of Warranty service.
1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not Applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
Not Applicable
2.02 CONTROLS DESCRIPTION
A.The controls work shall be an addition to the existing EMCS. It shall have controls and sensors that shall
perform all the functions listed in the drawings. The new additional controls shall be added via graphics
and/or text test screens to all operator workstations currently communicating with the existing EMCS. All
controllers and workstations connected to or communicating with the new additional controls shall be
updated as necessary to continue connection and/or communication. The points list is as follows: two (2)
pump start stops, and two (2) pump statuses. Controls contractor is responsible for all programming and
scheduling changes that need to occur though-out the existing EMCS to accommodate the new additional
controls.
B.The work of the single Controls Contractor shall be as defined individually and collectively in all Sections of
this Division specifications together with the associated Point Sheets and Drawings and the associated
interfacing work as referenced in the related documents as are listed in Part 1 of this Section.
C.The controls work shall consist of the provision of all labor, materials, etc. as Specified in these Division
documents which are required for the complete, fully functional and commissioned controls.
D.Provide a complete, neat and workmanlike installation. Use only employees who are skilled, experienced,
trained, and familiar with the specific equipment, software and configurations to be provided for this
Project.
E.Manage and coordinate the controls work in a timely manner in consideration of the Project schedules.
Coordinate cooperatively with the associated work of other trades so as to assist the progress and not
impede or delay the work of associated trades.
2.03 NODES
A.HVAC Node:
1.HVAC Node shall provide direct digital control of HVAC systems.
2.A dedicated HVAC Node shall be configured and provided for the new additional controls.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS Job Number 2210142.00
23 09 00 - 6/8
3.The HVAC Node shall retain its function and setpoint information in the event of a power failure and
shall return to normal operation upon restoration of power.
PART 3 PERFORMANCE/EXECUTION
3.01 NSTALLATION PRACTICES
A.Controls Wiring:
1.All conduit, wiring, accessories and wiring connections required for the installation of the Controls,
as herein specified, shall be provided by the Controls Contractor unless specifically shown on the
Electrical Drawings under Division 26 Electrical. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of
applicable portions of Division 26 and all local and national electric codes, unless specified
otherwise in this section.
2.All Controls wiring materials and installation methods shall comply with Controls manufacturer
recommendations.
3.The sizing type and provision of cable, conduit, cable trays, and raceways shall be the design
responsibility of the Controls Contractor. If complications arise, however, due to the incorrect
selection of cable, cable trays, raceways and/or conduit by the Controls Contractor, the Contractor
shall be responsible for all costs incurred in replacing the selected components.
4.Wire/conduit ratios shall follow the same wire/conduit ratios included in Division 26.
5.Class 2 Wiring:
a.All Class 2 (24VAC or less) wiring shall be installed in conduit or be plenum rated and shall be
installed in accordance with local code requirements.
b.Conduit is not required for Class 2 wiring in concealed accessible locations. Inaccessible
locations such as “hard lid” ceilings require conduit.
c.Wire supports and be installed per local wiring code requirements. As a default, wire shall be
supported every 5’ from the building structure utilizing metal hangers designed for this
application.
d.Where it is not possible to conceal raceways in finished locations, surface raceway (Wiremold)
may be used as approved by the Engineer.
e.All conduits and raceways shall be installed level, plumb, at right angles to the building lines
and shall follow the contours of the surface to which they are attached.
f.Provide firestopping for all penetrations used by dedicated Controls conduits and raceways
using approved fire resistive sealant. All other project firestopping to be by other trade.
g.All wiring passing through penetrations, including walls or other structure, shall be in conduit
or enclosed raceway.
h.Penetrations of floor slabs shall be by core drilling. All penetrations shall be plumb, true, and
square.
i.No penetrations in structural elements shall be made before receipt of written approval from
the Structural Engineer.
6.Class 2 signal wiring and 24VAC power can be run in the same conduit. Power wiring 120VAC and
greater cannot share the same conduit with Class 2 signal wiring.
7.Perform circuit tests using qualified personnel only. Provide necessary instruments and equipment
to demonstrate that:
a.All circuits are continuous and free from short circuits and grounds.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS
23 09 00 - 7/8
b.All circuits are free from unspecified grounds; that resistance to ground of all circuits is no less
than 50 megaohms.
c.All circuits are free from induced voltages
8.Provide complete testing for all cables used under this Contract. Provide all equipment, tools, and
personnel as necessary to conduct these tests.
9.Provide for complete grounding of all signal and communications cables, panels and equipment so
as to ensure system integrity of operation. Ground cabling and conduit at the panel terminations.
Avoid grounding loops.
B.Controls Line Voltage Power Source:
1.120-volt AC circuits used for the controls shall be taken from panelboards and circuit breakers
provided by Division 26. Coordinate circuit installation with Division 26. Division 26 shall be
responsible for the installation of 120 VAC controls circuits.
2.Circuits used for the controls shall be dedicated and shall not be used for any other purposes.
3.Terminal unit controllers may use 120-volt AC power from motor power circuits.
C.Controls Identification Standards:
1.Node Identification: All nodes shall be identified by a permanent label fastened to the outside of
the enclosure. Labels shall be suitable for the node location.
2.Cable and/or conduit shall be labeled at suitable intervals with the controlled unit’s name. Labeling
shall be sufficient to trace cable from device to unit.
3.Specify a different wire color for analog, digital, power and communication wiring. Include wiring
color on control drawings legends.
4.Raceway Identification: All the covers to junction and pull boxes of the control’s raceways shall be
labeled.
5.Wire Identification: All low and line voltage control wiring shall be identified by a number, as
referenced to the associated shop drawing and as-built drawing, at each end of the conductor or
cable. Identification number shall be permanently secured to the conductor or cable and shall be
typed.
D.Node Installation:
1.The controls panels and cabinets shall be mounted at shoulder height wherever possible. All panels
shall be accessible. Each cabinet shall be anchored per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.The Controls Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating panel locations with other trades and
Electrical and Mechanical Contractors.
E.Input Devices:
1.All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation and shall be of the type
and accuracy suitable for this specific application.
2.Locate components in accessible local control panels wherever possible.
3.The Mechanical Contractor shall install all in-line devices such as temperature wells, pressure taps,
airflow stations, etc.
F.HVAC Output Devices:
1.All output devices shall be installed per the manufacturers recommendation and shall be suitable in
type and accuracy for this specific application. The Mechanical Contractor shall install all in-line
devices such as control valves, dampers, etc.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS Job Number 2210142.00
23 09 00 - 8/8
3.02 TRAINING
A.The Controls Contractor shall provide the following training services:
1.Provide one half day of on-site orientation by a system technician who is fully knowledgeable of the
specific installation details of the project. This orientation shall, at a minimum, consist of a review
of the project as-built drawings and a walk through of the facility to identify panel and device
locations. Training may be split into smaller sessions on different days if the Owner prefers.
2.Supply a list of available factory training classes and contact information.
3.03 COMMISSIONING
A.Acceptance Verification Document is defined as a series of check sheets that include all controls and
functions. Each point entry shall be signed and dated verifying that each point and function has been fully
calibrated and tested.
B.Conduct functional performance tests to demonstrate that controls systems maintain setpoints and
operates through the full range of operations. The commissioning agent will provide functional tests that
the Controls Contractor shall review and provide comments on the tests for incorporation into the final
test documents.
C.Provide all necessary specialist labor, materials and tools to demonstrate to the Engineer that the controls
have been commissioned and are operating in compliance with the contract. Prepare a list of noted
deficiencies signed by both the Engineer and the Controls Contractor.
D.Promptly rectify all listed deficiencies and submit to the Engineer that this has been done.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 SLEEVES AND SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 21 00 - 1/2
SECTION 23 21 00
SLEEVES AND SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes sleeving and sealing of piping and ductwork
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions, Division 1
B. Section 23 31 13 – Steel Ductwork
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM E814: Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
B. UL 1479: Through-Penetration Fire Stop Systems
1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submittal requirements for this Section
1. Seals
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR THIS SECTION
Not Applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Products shall comply with Section 20 00 00, paragraph 2.01, Approved Manufacturers.
B. Fire Seals: 3M, Dow Corning, General Electric, Rectorseal Metacaulk
2.02 DUCT SLEEVES
A. Size: Inside dimension of sleeves shall be at least ½" larger than the outside dimensions of the duct or
duct covering on all sides.
B. Ends: Sleeve ends shall be cut flush with finished surface.
C. Material - Non-structural: Sleeves shall be fabricated from 20-gauge galvanized steel, shall be
continuous around the interior without holes or openings, and shall match the configuration of the item
being sleeved.
D. Material - Structural: Sleeves through structural elements shall be fabricated from Schedule 40 steel
pipe (round openings) and welded steel supporting elements (sizes/arrangement as shown on
drawings) for other openings.
2.03 SEALS
A. Seals in Interior Fire Rated Assemblies: Shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E814 and shall be UL
classified per UL 1479 as a through-penetration fire stop device.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
SLEEVES AND SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Job Number 2210142.00
23 21 00 - 2/2
B. Seals in Exterior Masonry Walls and Floors:
1. Ducts: Silicone type sealant, designed for use with duct material involved as weatherproof
sealant.
C. Seals in Other Areas: Packed fiberglass or wool insulation, where no weatherproofing or adhesive
properties are required; otherwise, sealants shall be silicone type, as specified in applicable Division 7
Specification Section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF DUCT SLEEVES
A. Provide duct sleeves for all round ducts less than 15 inches in diameter where the duct passes through
any floors, walls, ceilings, partitions, or roofs and similar elements.
B. Provide duct sleeves for all square and rectangular ducts having their largest dimension 14 inches and
less where the duct passes through any floors, walls, ceilings, partitions, roofs, and similar elements.
C. Round ducts larger than 15 inches in diameter, and square of rectangular ducts larger than 14 inches in
any dimension, shall have framed openings where the duct passes through any element. Such framed
openings shall be of the same type as the structural materials used in the wall and shall comply with
materials specified for this project. Sleeves shall be provided in addition to the framed opening where
any void space(s) occurs through the penetration (as through CMU walls, double walls, etc.).
D. Set sleeves plumb or level, in proper position and location, tightly fitted into the work.
E. Fill openings around outside of duct sleeve with same material as surrounding construction, or with
material of equivalent fire and smoke rating.
F. Sleeves are not required for penetrations through existing single solid elements, having no voids, at the
location where the duct passes through the element (e.g., precast concrete panels with pre-framed
openings, core drilled/saw cut solid concrete, etc.). Where a sleeve is required, such sleeve shall
continue all the way through any solid items within that element however.
G. Insulation shall run continuous through sleeves in non-fire rated elements. Insulation shall not run
continuous through sleeves in fire rated elements unless the fire sealant system used is UL accepted for
use with insulated pipes.
H. Sleeves for fire dampers shall be as specified for fire dampers and be in compliance with the damper UL
listing.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF SEALS
A. Provide seals around all piping and ducts passing through walls, floors, roofs, foundations, footings,
grade beams, partitions, and similar elements.
B. Seals shall be of material and workmanship to maintain the fire and smoke rating of element being
penetrated. Seals ability to maintain the rating of the element being penetrated shall be listed in UL
Laboratories Building Materials Directory or otherwise confirmed by an approved listing agency. It shall
be the Contractor's responsibility to submit shop drawings and technical data showing seals and
systems proposed, and corresponding agency approval. The Contractor shall also be responsible to
submit any data as required by local agencies to satisfy them that the Contractor's proposed fire seals
are satisfactory.
C. Seals shall be watertight where the penetration may be exposed to water or moisture.
D. Duct penetrations through roof or exterior wall assemblies shall be provided with flashings for a
weathertight assembly in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Such openings
shall be sealed to be weatherproof.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 STEEL DUCTWORK
23 31 13 - 1/8
SECTION 23 31 13
STEEL DUCTWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A.Includes, but not limited to, furnishing and installing above-ground ductwork and related items specified
below and shown on Drawings.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.General Conditions and Division 1 apply to this Section
B.Section 20 00 00 - General Mechanical Conditions
C.Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment
D.Section 23 07 13 - Equipment/Ductwork Insulation
E.Section 23 33 00 - HVAC Specialties
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A.Duct liner
B.Access doors
C.Volume dampers
D.Duct Sealers
E.Duct Closure Collars
F.Turning vanes
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not Applicable
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A.Duct Sizes: All duct dimensions shown are inside clear dimensions. Where inside duct lining is specified or
indicated, duct dimensions are to the inside face of lining.
B.Low Pressure System: Velocities less than 2,000 fpm and static pressure in duct 2 inches w.g. or less
C.Medium Pressure System: Velocities greater than 2,000 fpm or static pressure in duct up through 6 inches
w.g
D.High Pressure System: Velocities greater than 2,000 fpm or static pressure in duct over 6 inches w.g. and
up to 10 inches w.g
E.Primary Duct System: Any duct between an air handler and a terminal (capable of heating and/or cooling)
in a variable air volume or induction terminal system.
F.Gauges: Steel sheet and wire are U.S. Standard Gauge; aluminum sheet is Brown and Sharpe Gauge
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
STEEL DUCTWORK Job Number 2210142.00
23 31 13 - 2/8
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
Not Applicable
2.02 DUCTS
A.Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal, except as
indicated. Fabricate of zinc-coated lock-forming quality steel sheets meeting requirements of
ASTM A 527-85, "Specification for Sheet Steel Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Lock
Forming Quality", with G 60 coating.
B.Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not
possible, provide turning vanes.
C.Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 30° divergence and 45° convergence.
D.Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inches (200 mm) and smaller with
crimp in direction of airflow.
2.03 DUCT JOINTS
A.General: Duct with sides or diameter up to and including 36 inches shall be as scheduled below.
Max. Side
Inches
Required Minimum Metal
Gauges Steel, U.S. Standard
Gauge
Type of Transverse Joint
Connections
Bracing
Required
Under 13"26 S-drive, pocket or bar slips
on 7 - 10" centers None
13" to 24"24 S-drive, pocket or bar slips
on 7-10" centers None
25" to 30"24 S-drive, 1" pocket or 1"
bar slips on 7'-10" centers
1"x1"x1/8"
angles 4' from
joints
31" to 36"22 Drive 1"pocket or 1"bar
slips on 7'-10" centers
1"x1"x1/8"
angles 4' from
joints
B.Ducts with sides over 36 inches to 48 inches, transverse duct joint system by Ductmate/25, Nexus, or WDCI
(Lite) (SMACNA "E" or "G" Type connection).
C.Ducts 48 inches and larger, Ductmates/35, Nexus, or WDCI (Heavy) (SMACNA "J" Type connection).
D.Proprietary duct connections may be used on other sizes, Ductmate, WDCI, or equal.
2.04 ROUND DUCT
A.Fabricate of zinc-coated lock-forming quality steel sheets meeting requirements of ASTM A 527-85,
"Specification for Sheet Steel Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality", with
G 60 coating.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 STEEL DUCTWORK
23 31 13 - 3/8
B.Gauge Selection Table:
Maximum 2" w.g.
Static Positive
Maximum 2" w.g.
Static Negative
Duct
Diameter
in Inches Spiral Seam
Gauge
Longitudinal
Seam Gauge
Spiral
Seam Gauge
Longitudinal
Seam Gauge
3 thru 8
9 thru 14
15 thru 26
27 thru 36
37 thru 50
51 thru 60
61 thru 84
28
28
26
24
22
20
18
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
24
24
22
20
18
16
14
C.Provide insulation where required by the Insulation Schedule in Section 23 07 13 - Equipment/Ductwork
Insulation.
2.05 SPIRAL DUCT
A.The outer pressure sheet shall be manufactured from galvanized steel meeting ASTM A-527-67 in the
following minimum gauges:
Nominal Size
Range
Solid Spiral Wound Duct Outer
Pressure Shell
Solid Welded Fitting Outer Pressure
Shell
3"-12"26 Ga.20 Ga.
13"-24"24 Ga.20 Ga.
25"-34"22 Ga.20 Ga.
35"-48"20 Ga.18 Ga.
50"-58"18 Ga.16 Ga.
2.06 DUCT LINER
A.Densities and R-value:
1.R-3.3: 1.0 inch of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft. duct liner
2.R-5.3: 1.5 inches of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft. duct liner
3.R-7: 2.0 inches of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft. duct line
B.Duct Liner:
1.'K' ('ksi') Value: ASTM C518, 0.25 at 75°F (0.036 at 24°C)
2.Noise Reduction Coefficient: 0.65 or higher based on "Type A mounting"
3.Maximum Velocity on Mat or Coated Air Side: 5,000 ft/min (25.4 m/sec)
4.Adhesive: UL listed waterproof type
5.Fasteners: Duct liner galvanized steel pins, welded or mechanically fastened
6.Approved Manufacturers:
a.Manville Permacote Linacoustic (HP)
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
STEEL DUCTWORK Job Number 2210142.00
23 31 13 - 4/8
C.Spiral Duct Liner :
1.For ductwork requiring 1-inch (25 mm) Spiracoustic Plus System Lining:
a.The installed 1-inch lining shall have a Thermal Resistance (R-Value) of 4.3 (.76) at 75°F (24°C)
mean temperature, and Noise Reduction Coefficients (NRC) per ASTM C 423, Type "A"
mounting.
b.Metal duct with inside diameters from 8 inches to 18 inches (203 to 457 mm) shall be lined with
1-inch Preformed Round Liner.
1)Approved Manufacturers:
a)Permacote Spiracoustic Liner
c.Metal duct with inside diameters from 18 inches to 32 inches (457 to 813 mm) shall be lined
with 1-inch Round Liner Board.
1)Approved Manufacturers
a)Spiracoustic Plus “SD” Liner
d.Metal duct with inside diameters greater than or equal to 34 inches (364 mm) shall be lined
with 1-inch Round Liner Board.
1)Approved Manufacturers
a)Spiracoustic Plus “LD” Liner
2.For ductwork requiring 1 1/2-inch (38 mm) Lining:
a.The installed 1 1/2-inch lining shall have a Thermal Resistance (R-Value) of 6.3 (1.11) at
75°F (24°C) mean temperature, and a Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) of 0.95 per
ASTM C 423, Type "A" mounting.
b.Metal duct with inside diameters from 9 inches to 18 inches (229 to 457 mm) shall be lined with
1 1/2-inch Preformed Round Liner.
1)Approved Manufacturers:
a)Permacote Spiracoustic Liner
c.Metal duct with inside diameters from 22 inches to 38 inches (559 to 965 mm), shall be lined
with 1 1/2-inch Round Liner Board.
1)Approved Manufacturers:
a)Spiracoustic Plus “SD” Liner
d.Metal duct with inside diameters greater than or equal to 40 inches (1.02 m), shall be lined with
1 1/2-inch Spiracoustic Plus LD Round Liner Board.
2.07 ACCESS DOORS IN DUCTS
A.At each backdraft damper and at each motorized damper, install factory built 1" insulated access door with
hinges and sash locks. Locate doors within 6 inches of installed dampers. Construction shall be galvanized
sheet metal, 22 ga. minimum frame and 24 ga. minimum door. Minimum door shall be 12x12. If duct is too
small for 12" door, then maximum door size shall be installed in duct.
B.Access doors for fire damper shall have a minimum clear opening of 12"x12" or as specified on Drawings to
easily service fire damper. Doors shall be within 6 inches of fire dampers.
C.Approved Manufacturers:
1.Nailor - Hart Industries Inc
2.Cesco - Advanced Air
3.AirBalance Fire/Seal
4.Louvers & Dampers
5.Kees Inc
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 STEEL DUCTWORK
23 31 13 - 5/8
6.Ductmate Industries Inc "Sandwich" Access Door
7.National Controlled Air Inc.
8.Greenheck
9.Elmdor
2.08 FLEXIBLE EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A.Provide flexible equipment connections between ductwork and equipment. See Section 23 33 00 - HVAC
Specialties.
2.09 VOLUME DAMPERS
A.Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as
indicated.
B.Fabricate splitter dampers of same material and gage as duct to 24 inches (600 mm) size in either direction,
and two gages heavier for larger sizes, secured with continuous hinge or rod, operated with minimum 1/4-
inch (6 mm) diameter rod.
C.Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 30 inch (240 x 760 mm).
D.Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72 inch (300 x 825
mm). Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable
hardware.
E.Except in round ductwork 12 inches (300 mm) in diameter and smaller, provide end bearings.
F.Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. Where width exceeds
30 inches (750 mm), provide regulator at both ends.
2.10 DUCT HANGERS
A.See Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment.
2.11 DUCT SEALANT AND ADHESIVES
A.Duct Sealant technical makeup shall be water based, solvent-free and of the synthetic latex family.
Sealants shall be UL 181 Listed, meet all SMACNA pressure and seal classes and be rated to ± 15 inches
water gauge. Sealants shall have flame spread of 0 and smoke development of 0 when tested in
accordance to ASTM E-84. They shall be formulated to withstand working temperatures of -25°F to +200°F.
All sealants shall exceed 500 hours under ASTM C-732 (Artificial Weathering) and pass
ASTM C-734 (Low Temperature Flexibility after Artificial Weathering). All sealants shall be of an
elastomeric nature, have a minimum weight of 12 pounds and a minimum solids content by weight of 66%
± 2%. Sealants shall be resistant to cracking, peeling, mold and mildew. Sealants shall also have excellent
water and UV resistance. Sealants shall meet FDA, USDA and EPA standards as well as meet NFPA 90A and
90B requirements. Sealant shall be Design Polymerics DP 1010 or DP 1020 duct sealant or equal.
B.Solvent based duct sealant VOC shall be less than or equal to 50 g/l and be UL 723 Classified with a flame
spread of 0 and a smoke development of 0. Sealant shall have passed 1000 hours of QUV accelerated
outdoor aging testing. Sealant shall be Design Polymerics DP 1090 duct sealant or equal.
1.All traverse joints, longitudinal seams and penetrations in duct systems shall be sealed with duct
sealant of the type specified. Spiral lockseams are not longitudinal seams and do not require duct
sealant. All sealant shall be applied per the manufactures’ recommendations. Joints that are not
fully welded shall be sealed. For spiral and flat oval duct slip connections; coat both the female and
male ends. The slip connections should then be brushed over with an additional coat
2 to 3 inches wide 20 to 40 mils thick.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
STEEL DUCTWORK Job Number 2210142.00
23 31 13 - 6/8
2.All conditioned air supply ducts, return ducts and fresh air intakes shall have all joints and seams
sealed or welded, except spiral seams round and flat oval ducts, which are exempt.
3.Seal sealants and joint sealants shall not be used as a substitute for good workmanship. No
ductwork will be covered or installed until inspected and pressure tested if necessary.
C.Gaskets for TDC, TDF and applied flange connections shall meet all SMACNA pressure and seal classes. The
gasket shall meet UL 723, ASTME E-84, NFPA 90A and 90B requirements as well as FDA, USDA and EPA
standards. The tape shall be 5/8 inches by 3/16 inches and applied according to the manufactures’
directions. Expanded or extruded foam gaskets are not acceptable. Gasket shall be Design Polymerics DP
1040 Butyl Gasket Tape or equal.
D.Exterior Ductwork: Sealant shall be Design Polymerics DP 1090, or equal.
2.12 DUCT CLOSURE COLLARS
A.General: Closure collars shall provide closure of opening between duct and opening in element penetrated
and shall abut tight up to and overlap duct and shall consist of rolled angle material (for round ducts) and
welded framed angles (for rectangular/round ducts).
B.Size: Closure collars shall be sized to match duct/opening applied to and shall have minimum 2-inch
overlap on duct side and 2-inch overlap at opening/ penetrated element side but shall completely cover
opening in element penetrated with minimum 1-inch overlap to undisturbed element (i.e., wall, floor, etc.).
C.Material: Closure collars shall be fabricated of 20-gauge galvanized steel for ducts 15 inches diameter and
less and shall be fabricated of 18-gauge galvanized steel duct for all larger ducts and all square and
rectangular ducts.
2.13 TURNING VANES
A.Turning vanes may be either Contractor or factory fabricated. Factory fabricated vanes shall be Barber
Colman "Airturns" or approved.
B.Vanes and runners shall be fabricated of minimum 24 gauge galvanized.
C.Turning vanes shall comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. For duct widths less than 19
inches, vanes may be single wall construction; for widths greater than 19 inches, vanes shall be double wall
"airfoil" type.
D.Turning vanes shall be equally spaced, parallel to each other, and securely attached to runners.
E.For elbows where the inlet and outlet dimensions are not the same, modify vane shape or angle to provide
optimum turning.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.Ducts:
1.Straight and smooth on inside with joints neatly finished unless otherwise directed.
2.Duct panels through 48-inch dimension having acoustic duct liner need not be crossbroken or
beaded.
3.Crossbreak unlined ducts and duct panels larger than 48 inch or bead 12 inches on center.
4.Securely anchor ducts to building structure with screws.
5.Brace and install ducts so they shall be free of vibration under all conditions of operation.
6.Round, horizontal ducts shall be hung with bands, which extend the entire perimeter of the duct.
7.Ducts shall be braced and guyed to prevent lateral or horizontal swing.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 STEEL DUCTWORK
23 31 13 - 7/8
8.Ducts shall not bear on top of structural members.
9.Make duct take-offs to branches, registers, grilles, and diffusers as detailed on Drawings.
10.Ducts shall be large enough to accommodate inside duct liner. Dimension shown on Drawings are net
clear inside dimensions after duct liner has been installed.
11.Properly flash where ducts protrude above roof.
12.Install internal ends of slip joints in direction of flow. Make joints airtight using specified duct sealer.
13.Cover horizontal and longitudinal joints on exterior ducts two layers of Hardcast tape installed with
Hardcast HC-20 adhesive according to Manufacturer's recommendations.
14.Ducts installed on mechanical space floor or walkway where ducts may be subject to abuse shall
have Ductmate/35 or (heavy) SMACNA "J" type connection on all joints.
15.All exposed ducts shall be spiral.
16.Provide duct transitions to equipment openings.
B.Duct Liner:
1.Adhere insulation to sheet metal with full coverage of a UL listed adhesive.
2.Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners as indicated by SMACNA or manufacturer. Pin
length should be as recommended by the liner manufacturer.
3.All exposed edges of the fibrous type liner must be factory or field coated. For systems operating at
4000 fpm or higher, a metal nosing must be installed in all liner leading edges.
4.Repair fibrous type liner surface penetrations with UL listed adhesive.
5.Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct size to allow
for insulation thickness.
6.Provide duct liner for all return air ducts unless specifically excluded in Section 23 07 13.
7.Provide liner for all supply duct unless specifically excluded from Section 23 07 13.
8.Provide ductliner for first 10’ in and out of all exhaust fans (excluding dishwasher, kitchen fume, and
particulate fans).
C.Turning Vanes:
1.Install turning vanes in all square duct turns, and at locations shown on drawings.
2.Securely attach turning vane runners to ductwork.
D.Flexible Connections: See Section 23 33 00 - HVAC Specialties.
E.Balancing Dampers:
1.Provide each take-off with an adjustable volume damper to balance that branch.
2.Anchor dampers securely to duct.
3.Install dampers in main ducts within insulation.
4.Dampers in branch ducts shall fit against sheet metal walls, bottom and top of duct, and be securely
fastened. Cut duct liner to allow damper to fit against sheet metal.
F.Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers: Install and anchor securely.
G.Adjustable Lock Splitter Dampers:
1.Dampers in equipment rooms shall be complete with locking quadrant.
2.Other dampers shall have concealed ceiling damper regulator with plate.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
STEEL DUCTWORK Job Number 2210142.00
23 31 13 - 8/8
H.Painting of Ductwork: Paint ductwork visible through registers, grilles, and diffusers flat black.
I.Ductwork Leakage Criteria:
1.All transverse joints and longitudinal seams shall conform to SMACNA's Class A sealing requirements
as defined on page 1-6 of the 1985 SMACNA Manual, First Edition.
2.Constant Volume Systems/Supply Ductwork
a.Allowable Leakage – per SMACNA
3.Constant Volume Systems/Return Ductwork
a.Return Ductwork – per SMACNA
4.Variable Air Volume Systems/Supply Ductwork
a.Fan to VAV Boxes -- 1% of design cfm
b.VAV Boxes to Registers -- 2% of design cfm
5.Variable Air Volume Systems/Return Ductwork
a.Return Ductwork -- 2% of design cfm
J.Ductwork Leakage Testing:
1.Duct leakage testing is required for all duct systems constructed to a pressure class of 3” water
column or greater per the 2015 Washington State Energy Code, Section C403.2.8.3.3.
2.Installed ductwork shall be tested prior to installation of access doors, take-offs, insulation, etc.
3.All leak testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer or representative of the Engineer. The Contractor
shall give the Engineer 72 hours notice prior to testing. Any testing not witnessed by the Engineer or
his/her representative, shall be considered invalid and will be redone.
4.Ductwork shall be tested in accordance with the requirements outlined in the SMACNA HVAC Air
Duct Leakage Test Manual and shown to have a (CL) less than or equal to 4.0.
5.Duct leakage, in excess of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Manual, shall be repaired and have the
test re-performed until the leakage rate is within acceptable levels.
6.Submit leakage test report identifying on a plan all the ducts tested and tested leakage rate.
K.Duct Cleanliness Criteria: Unless otherwise specified, the delivery, storage, and installation of all
un-lined ductwork shall comply with the intermediate duct cleanliness level of SMACNA Duct Cleanliness
for New Construction Guidelines. All lined and acoustic duct shall comply with the advanced level.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 HVAC SPECIALTIES
23 33 00 - 1/4
SECTION 23 33 00
HVAC SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Includes, but not limited to, furnishing and installing specified material as described in Contract
Documents.
B. Filters used in air handling units and heat pumps.
C. Flexible ductwork from supply air branch duct runouts to diffusers where indicated on drawings.
D. Section Includes:
1. Backdraft dampers
2. Filters and filter housing
3. Flexible connections
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions
B. Division 01
C. Section 20 00 00 - General Mechanical Requirements
D. Section 23 31 13 - Steel Ductwork
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Backdraft dampers
B. Filters
C. Flexible ductwork
D. Flexible equipment connections
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Backdraft dampers
B. Filters (Summarized list including equipment tag and size and quantity of filter per unit.)
1. Provide dates or projected dates of extra filter replacement.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCES
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. Bear the AMCA seal and UL label, NSF approved.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
Not Applicable
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
HVAC SPECIALTIES Job Number 2210142.00
23 33 00 - 2/4
2.02 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS (COUNTER BALANCED)
A. General: 0.125 inches extruded aluminum frame, 0.07 inches aluminum blades with extruded vinyl
edges, synthetic bearings, counterbalance, adjustable zinc plated bar on blades.
B. Backdraft dampers are to be factory set to open at 0.01" w.c. of building pressure and shall have a
maximum static pressure drop of 0.05" w.c. at 700 fpm per AMCA Standard 500. Backdraft dampers
shall have a leakage rate at no more than 20 CFM/sq. ft. at 1" w.c. of static pressure with a dimension of
24" or greater and 40 CFM/sq. ft. at 1” w.c. of static pressure with dimension smaller than 24” per
AMCA Standard 500D.
C. Approved Manufacturer:
1. Ruskin
2. Greenheck
2.03 FILTERS
A. 2" MERV 8:
1. General: 30% efficient filters as specified herein shall be medium efficiency, pleated panel type,
disposable filters; Farr 30/30 or approved and shall have an average efficiency of 25-30%
atmospheric and 90-92% arrestance by ASHRAE Standard 52-76 unless instructed otherwise.
2. Filter Housings: Shall be sized to fit furnished unit or duct to be installed in and provide minimum
filter sizes to obtain a maximum filter velocity of 300 fpm.
3. Resistance: Initial resistance of a 24"x24"x2" filter handling 2000 CFM shall not exceed 0.31" w.g.
4. Duct Holding Capacity: Shall be no less than 60 grams per square foot of face area at 1.0" w.g.
5. Size: Filters shall be 2" deep (unless indicated otherwise), with number and sizes indicated, or as
required to give minimum nominal face area as scheduled on drawings.
6. Provide a filter pull strap for all multiple filter sets longer than 24 inches.
7. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Farr Co
b. Airguard
c. Purolator
d. Eco-Air
B. 2" or 4" MERV 13 Low Static:
1. General: 80% efficient filters as specified herein shall be high efficiency, pleated panel type,
disposable filters; Filtration Group MERV 13 Green Pleat or approved and shall have a Minimum
Efficiency Reporting Value of MERV 13 when evaluated under the guidelines of ASHRAE Standard
52.2 2007.
2. Filter Housings: Shall be sized to fit furnished unit or duct to be installed in and provide minimum
filter sizes to obtain a maximum filter velocity of 300 fpm.
3. Resistance: Initial resistance of a 24"x24"x2" filter handling 500 fpm shall not exceed 0.38" w.g.
and 24"x24"x4" shall not exceed 0.23" w.g.
4. Duct Holding Capacity: Shall be no less than 60 grams per square foot of face area at 1.0" w.g.
5. Size: Filters shall be 2" deep (unless indicated otherwise), with number and sizes indicated, or as
required to give minimum nominal face area as scheduled on drawings.
6. Provide a filter pull strap for all multiple filter sets longer than 24 inches.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 HVAC SPECIALTIES
23 33 00 - 3/4
7. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Filtration Group
C. 2" or 4" MERV 13:
1. General: 80% efficient filters as specified herein shall be high efficiency, pleated panel type,
disposable filters and shall have a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value of MERV 13 when
evaluated under the guidelines of current ASHRAE Standard 52.2.
2. Filter Housings: Shall be sized to fit furnished unit or duct to be installed in and provide minimum
filter sizes to obtain a maximum filter velocity of 300 fpm.
3. Resistance: Initial resistance of a 24"x24"x2" filter handling 500 CFM shall not exceed 0.41" w.g.
and 24"x24"x4" shall not exceed 0.35" w.g.
4. Duct Holding Capacity: Shall be no less than 60 grams per square foot of face area at 1.0" w.g.
5. Size: Filters shall be 2" deep (unless indicated otherwise), with number and sizes indicated, or as
required to give minimum nominal face area as scheduled on drawings.
6. Provide a filter pull strap for all multiple filter sets longer than 24 inches.
7. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Farr
b. Airguard
c. Purolator
d. Eco-Air
2.04 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
A. Formable, flexible, circular duct shall have a fiberglass scrim (or equivalent) and retain its cross-section,
shape, rigidity, and shall not restrict air flow after bending.
B. Normal 1-1/2 inches thick, 3/4 lb/cu ft density fiberglass insulation with airtight, see-through
polyethylene or polyester core, sheathed in seamless vapor barrier jacket factory installed over flexible
assembly.
C. Assembly including insulation and vapor barrier, shall meet Class 1 requirements of NFPA 90A and be UL
181 rated, with flame spread of 25 or less and smoke developed rating of 50 or under.
D. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Wiremold
2. Flexible Air Movers Inc
3. J.P. Lamborn
4. General Flex Corp
5. Young & Co. Mfg 165
6. Thermaflex 'GKM'
7. Cleavaflex
2.05 FLEXIBLE EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. General: 30 oz. closely woven UL approved glass fabric, double coated with neoprene. Fire retardant,
waterproof, airtight, resistant to acids and grease, and withstand constant temperatures of 250°F.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
HVAC SPECIALTIES Job Number 2210142.00
23 33 00 - 4/4
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Ventglas by Ventfabrics
2. DuroDyne MFN
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and for structural rigidity,
strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting performance of heat exchangers.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Backdraft Dampers: Provide access doors to backdraft dampers.
B. Filters and Filter Housing:
1. Contractor to install temporary filters to provide temporary sealing of all duct systems during the
construction period to prevent the entry of dirt, dust and debris into the duct systems. These
systems that are operated during the construction period shall have temporary filters installed
over all inlets and filters installed in the air handling equipment. Filters installed in equipment
shall be same type as final filters required for the units. Temporary air inlet type filters shall be
taped over all inlets to completely filter all air drawn into the systems.
2. Contractor to provide and install four (4) complete sets of all filters as scheduled below:
a. At equipment start-up
b. Prior to balancing system
c. Three (3) months after building occupancy
d. During the one-year warranty to be scheduled with Owner
3. Construct and install filter housings to prevent passage of unfiltered air. Provide sheet metal
blanks, felt, rubber, and/or neoprene seals as necessary.
4. Furnish Owner with schedule of filter sizes for each air handler.
C. Flexible Equipment Connections:
1. Provide insulated flexible equipment connections between ducts and vibrating equipment. Fans
which are internally isolated with spring isolators do not require flexible connections, unless
indicated on the plans.
2. Install flexible connections with sufficient slack to permit 2 inches of horizontal or vertical
movement of ducts or equipment at connection point without stretching the flexible material.
3. Where installed exposed to weather, provide a galvanized "hat" channel protecting top and
vertical stretches of flexible connector from sunlight and weather.
D. Flexible Ductwork:
1. Install duct in fully extended condition free of sags and kinks, using ten-foot maximum lengths.
2. Make duct connections by coating exterior of duct collar for 3 inches with duct sealer and
securing duct in place over sheet metal collar with 1/2-inch-wide metal cinch bands and sheet
metal screws. Tape exterior of flex to duct ahead of damper.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 VAV TERMINAL BOX UNITS
23 36 00 - 1/2
SECTION 23 36 00
VAV TERMINAL BOX UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: Furnish and install specified material as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Sections: General Conditions and Division 1 apply to this Section.
1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Fan terminal boxes
B. VAV Shut-off boxes
C. Sound Data (discharge, intake, and radiated)
1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Submittal Data
B. Unit Operation and Maintenance Manual
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Trane
B. Titus
C. Nailor
D. Price
E. ENVIRO-TEC (ETI)
2.02 FAN TERMINAL VAV BOX
A. Fan Terminal Box Unit:
1. Horizontal constant fan series.
2. Standard UL approved unit consists of: Casing, fan, motor and drive, coils, single point electrical
connection, control power transformer, fan relay, control box, filter section, and electrical
components
B. Casing:
1. Single wall constructed of 22-gauge minimum galvanized steel. Provide with flange at outlet and
inlets for duct connections.
2. Insulated with 1", 1.55 lb./cu. ft. density glass fiber, coated to retard erosion, meets NFPA 90A
and UL 181.
3. Entire bottom panel to be removable for service of components.
C. Fan, Motor and Drive:
1. Forward curved, centrifugal type, aluminum wheel with factory-built housing and inlet cones,
direct drive.
2. Fans are statically and dynamically balanced.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
VAV TERMINAL BOX UNITS Job Number 2210142.00
23 36 00 - 2/2
3. Motors to be permanently lubricated, permanent split capacitor type with thermal overload
protection.
4. Motors rated for 100,000-hour life
5. Motors to be factory run tested in unit
6. ECM motor with factory mounted controller to change fan motor speed. Adjustment knob
located external to control panel.
7. Fan Control Relay - 24 VAC coil, rated as required for fan motor, suitable for connection to
terminal unit controller.
D. Damper Assemblies of 16-gauge, galvanized steel shall be multiple opposed blade construction
arranged to close at 45 degrees from full open to minimize air turbulence. Damper blades shall be
fitted with flexible seals for tight closure. In the fully closed position, air leakage past the closed
damper shall not exceed 2% of the nominal catalog rating a 3” w.g. inlet static pressure as rated by
ASHRAE Standard 130. Each unit shall be complete with factory mounted DDC controls including
actuators, which shall be fully coordinated with Controls Contractor prior to equipment ordering.
Gauge tap ports shall be supplied in the piping between the flow pick up and the controller.
2.03 SHUT-OFF VAV BOX
A. Casing:
1. Unit casing shall be 22-gauge, galvanized steel with round or flat oval inlets (flanged).
2. Units shall be internally lined with 1” dual density fiberglass insulation. Edges shall be sealed
against airflow erosion. Units shall meet NFPA 90A and UL 181 standards.
B. Inlet Damper Assemblies shall be of galvanized steel construction with a fully closed leakage rate no
greater than 2% at 3.0” wg. Damper blades shall be fitted with flexible seals for tight closure. In the
fully closed position, air leakage past the closed damper shall not exceed 2% of the nominal catalog
rating a 3” w.g. inlet static pressure as rated by ASHRAE Standard 130. Each unit shall be complete with
factory mounted DDC controls including actuators, which shall be fully coordinated with Controls
Contractor prior to equipment ordering. Gauge tap ports shall be supplied in the piping between the
flow pick up and the controller.
2.04 ELECTRIC COILS
A. Provide electric coils sized and staged per equipment schedule.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Physical size and noise criteria will be strictly enforced. Approved manufacturers are listed for quality
only, not for noise and size. It is up to the equipment supplier to provide equal VAV boxes to those
listed on the schedule.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 AIR TERMINALS
23 37 00 - 1/2
SECTION 23 37 00
AIR TERMINALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install complete, all air terminals described in Contract Documents
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions and Division 1 apply to this Section
B. Section 20 00 00 - General Mechanical Condition
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Grilles, registers, and diffusers
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not Applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS (GRD)
A. Shall be as scheduled on drawings.
B. Provide the various grilles, registers and diffusers shown on the plans and of the various types herein
before specified. All terminals with prime-coat finish shall be installed before the walls and ceiling is
painted, in order that they may be finish painted by the General Contractor. Those with factory finish
or aluminum construction shall be installed after the walls and ceilings are painted. All air terminals
located in shower, toilet rooms, locker and dressing rooms shall be of aluminum construction w/baked
off-white finish. All other Air Terminals shall be of a standard steel construction; wall-mounted
terminals shall be prime coat finish; ceiling diffusers, exhaust and return air terminals shall have factory-
applied baked enamel finish, color as selected by Architect.
C. Approved Manufacturers: (subject to submittal approval):
1. Anemostat
2. Nailor
3. Kees
4. Krueger
5. Price
6. Titus
7. Tuttle & Bailey
8. Shoemaker (except 700MA)
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Bird Screen: 1/2-inch mesh, constructed of either 0.051-inch aluminum wire or 19-gauge galvanized
steel wire
B. Insect Screen: 14 x 18, 0.009” galvanized steel mesh
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
AIR TERMINALS Job Number 2210142.00
23 37 00 - 2/2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The interior of duct connection including opposed blade damper and all visible duct interiors at
connection shall be painted matte black.
B. Each air terminal shall be installed with a spun rubber gasket between the flange and the frame or wall.
C. Each air terminal with flexible duct connection shall have a square-to-round transition adapter box.
D. Anchor securely into openings.
E. All air terminals that supply, return, and/or exhaust air, which are not required to have an OBD, shall be
provided with a volume damper.
F. Provide round neck to flex duct reducers as required.
G. Provide bird screened openings (1/2" mesh) on all duct openings where indicated and where openings
do not have grilles or registers.
H. All outlet and inlets exposed to the weather shall be adequately flashed and installed in a manner to
assure complete weatherproofness.
I. Provide blank-off panels on louver portion not connected to a duct. Blank-off panels to be painted flat
black.
J. Provide insect screen where indicated on drawings.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
23 90 00 - 1/1
SECTION 23 90 00
MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Limited To: Demolition and maintaining existing systems
B. Related Sections: General Conditions, Division 1 and Section 20 00 00 apply to this Section.
1.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not applicable
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DEMOLITION
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all existing Mechanical equipment
including, but not limited to piping, fixtures, HVAC equipment, ductwork in areas shown on the
drawings and indicated thereon.
B. The Mechanical Contractor shall also be responsible for the removal and/or relocation of all Mechanical
equipment that will interfere with installation and operation of any new construction indicated or
required.
C. Any existing equipment to which modifications are made under this contract shall be painted and
labeled in accordance with specifications for new materials.
D. All Mechanical equipment (other than piping) to be removed shall remain the property of and shall be
transported, stored, or disposed as directed by the Owner. This will be at no cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
26 00 00 - 1/13
SECTION 26 00 00
ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Conform to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and related work in other Divisions for
all work in Division 26 and 27. See Division 1 for sequence of work.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. It is the intention of this division of the specifications and the accompanying drawings to describe and
provide for the furnishing, installing, testing and placing in satisfactory and successful operation all
equipment, materials, devices and necessary appurtenances to provide a complete electrical system,
together with such other miscellaneous installations and equipment hereinafter specified and/or shown
in the plans. The work shall include all materials, appliances and apparatus not specifically mentioned
herein or noted on the plans, but which are necessary to make a complete working installation of all
electrical systems shown on the plans or described herein. Equipment and devices furnished and
installed under other divisions of this specification (or by the Owner) shall be connected under this
division. The drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is binding
as if called for in both.
B. By submitting a bid, the Contractor is acknowledging that he has made a thorough examination of the
Contract Documents, existing site and building conditions, and has determined that these documents
do sufficiently describe the scope of construction work required under this Contract.
1.03 SCOPE OF BASIC BID
A. Included in Division 26 and 27 work is all work and related items necessary to provide all electrical
installations except as specifically excluded. In general, this includes all labor, equipment, tools, etc., to
complete the electrical work.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Temporary Power and Lighting – Division 1
B. Mechanical Control Wiring – See Division 23
C. Cutting and Patching - See Division 1
D. Trenching, backfill and asphalt work – See Division 2
1.05 STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS
A. The work shall comply with the latest edition of the applicable Standards and Codes of the following:
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters
NEC National Electrical Code
--- State Electrical Code
NESC National Electrical Safety Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
U.L. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Associated
CBM Certified Ballasts Manufacturers
--- Federal, State and Local Building Codes
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number 2210142.00
26 00 00 - 2/13
ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories
B. If any conflict occurs between Government adopted Code Rules and this specification, the codes are to
govern. Nothing in these drawings and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming
to governing codes. Also, this shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from complying with
any requirements of the plans and specifications which may be in excess of, but not in conflict with,
requirements of the Governing Codes.
1.06 PERMITS & FEES
A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all licenses, permits and inspections required by laws,
ordinances and rules governing work specified herein. The Contractor shall arrange for inspection of
work by the inspectors and shall give the inspectors all necessary assistance in their work of inspection.
B. The Contractor shall consult with and follow the requirements of the local fire, power, telephone, and
television utilities serving the area and shall coordinate his work with them.
C. Utility connection and hook-up charges for power, telephone and television shall be paid by the Owner
directly to the utility. The Electrical Contractor is required to provide any and all coordination necessary
to support the utility connection, file for application of service (or assist the Owner in filing for
application of service) and coordinate dates for service with the utilities.
1.07 DEFINITIONS
A. When "Provide" is used, it shall be interpreted as "furnishing and installing complete in operating
condition".
B. When "Drawings" is used, it shall be interpreted as "all Contract Drawings for all Disciplines".
C. When "Contractors" is used, it shall be interpreted as the Electrical Contractor.
1.08 INTENT OF DRAWINGS
A. The electrical drawings are intended to serve as working drawings for general layout. The equipment
layout is diagrammatic and unless specifically dimensioned or detailed, does not indicate all fittings,
hardware or appurtenances required for a complete operating installation.
B. Anything shown on the drawings but not covered in the specifications, or anything covered in the
specifications but not shown on the drawings, shall be as if covered in both. In case of conflict between
the drawings and specifications, the Engineer will select the method to be used. The Contractor shall be
responsible for verifying all measurements before proceeding with the work.
C. Wiring diagrams are not intended to indicate the exact course of raceways or exact location of outlets.
Raceway and outlet locations are approximately correct and are subject to revision as may be necessary
or desirable at the time of installation. Precise location in every case shall be subject to the Engineer's
approval.
D. The contractor shall review the manufacturer provided installation instructions for each piece of
equipment prior to rough-in. Any conflict between the drawings, specifications and installation
instructions shall be brought to the Engineer’s attention immediately. The contractor will not be paid
for any reinstallation required due to failing to comply with manufacturer’s recommendations or
requirements unless specifically directed by the engineer, in writing, after the conflict has been
identified.
1.09 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall store and guard all equipment before installation and shall protect same, and
replace any equipment that has been damaged prior to final acceptance. See Division 1 for detailed
requirements.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
26 00 00 - 3/13
1.10 HOUSEKEEPING
A. All electrical materials shall be kept stored in an orderly fashion protected from heat, cold, and the
weather.
B. All marred surfaces shall be refinished and painted after installation.
C. All debris shall be removed from premises during work, as directed, and at completion of job.
1.11 TEMPORARY USE
A. Temporary or interim use of any and all portions of the electrical system shall be under the supervision
of the Electrical Contractor.
B. Temporary power and lighting for use during construction shall be provided per the requirements of the
Division 1 specifications.
1.12 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall maintain, in addition to any reference drawings, an as-built set of prints, on which
all deviations from the original design shall be drafted in a neat, legible manner with red colored pencil.
This red lined set shall identify all drawing revisions including addenda items, change orders, and
Contractor revisions. The Contractor is responsible to revise panel schedules and load calculations as
required.
B. Drawings shall show locations of all concealed raceway runs larger than 1", giving the number of
conductors and size of raceway. Underground ducts shall be shown with cross section elevations. All
pipe, raceway, manholes or lines of other trades shall be included.
C. The Contractor shall update all references to specific products to indicate products actually installed on
project. This shall include, but not be limited to, lighting fixtures, lighting controls, etc.
D. Upon completion of the Division 26 and 27 work, the Contractor shall deliver the red lined drawings and
one set of neatly marked up as-built drawings to the Engineer for transmittal through the Engineer to
the Owner.
E. Upon completion of the Division 26 and 27 Work, the Contractor shall deliver the red lined drawings
and one set of neatly drafted as-built drawings on electronic media in AutoCAD R-2013 format and full-
size pdf to the Engineer for transmittal through the Engineer to the Owner.
F. See Section 27 00 00 for additional requirements of low voltage systems.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Provide a written warranty that the Division 26 and 27 work is free from mechanical and electrical
defects. Contractor shall replace and repair, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, any parts of the
installation which may fail within a period of 12 months after the certificate of final acceptance or date
of substantial completion, provided that such failure is due to defects in material or workmanship, or
failure to follow the specifications and drawings.
B. See Section 27 00 00 for additional requirements of low voltage systems.
1.14 INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS
A. Operation and maintenance data shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 78 23.
B. A preliminary, complete copy, except for the bound cover, shall be submitted 60 days prior to
completion of the project for checking and review. Five (5) bound, corrected copies shall be delivered
to the Owner 20 days prior to scheduled instruction periods as specified under Section 1.16 "Instruction
Periods" after review of the preliminary copy. Obtain a receipt for the manuals and forward a copy of
the receipt to the Engineer with the completed form.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number 2210142.00
26 00 00 - 4/13
C. Manuals shall contain shop drawings, wiring diagrams, operating and maintenance instructions,
replacement parts lists, and equipment nameplate data for all equipment and systems installed under
the project. Signal equipment submittals shall contain step-by-step circuit description information
designed to acquaint maintenance personnel with equipment operation in each mode of operation.
Manuals shall contain original brochures supplied by manufacturers. Xerox copies of originals will not
be accepted.
D. Each type of device provided shall be identified in the O & M Manual using the same identification as
shown on the drawings and specifications. The information included must be the exact equipment
installed not the complete "line" of the Manufacturer. Where sheets show the equipment installed and
other equipment, the installed equipment shall be neatly and clearly identified on such sheets. Parts
lists shall give full ordering information assigned by the original parts manufacturer. Relabeled and/or
renumbered parts information as reassigned by equipment supplier is not acceptable. The following
information shall be provided for each device:
1. Manufacturer's name, address and phone number
2. Local supplier's name, address and phone number
3. Complete parts lists including quantities and manufacturer's part numbers
4. Installation instructions
5. Recommended maintenance items including maintenance procedure and recommended interval
of maintenance listed in hours of operation, calendar unity or other similar time unit
E. The O & M Manual shall be assembled as detailed in Section 01 70 00. As a minimum, the following
sections shall be broken out:
F. The O & M Manual shall be assembled in a loose leaf, 3-ring, hard cover binder and electronically on
compact disc. The information contained in the manuals shall be grouped in an orderly arrangement by
specification index. The manuals shall have a typewritten index and divider sheets between categories
with identifying tabs. The covers shall be imprinted with the name of the job, Owner, Architect,
Electrical Engineer, Division 26 and 27 Contractor, and year of completion. The back edge shall be
imprinted with the name of the job, Owner, and year of completion. As a minimum, the following
selection shall be broken out:
1. Light Fixtures
2. Fire Alarm System
3. Intrusion Alarm
4. Access Control System
5. Audio/Visual Presentation Systems
6. Sound Systems
7. Low Voltage Lighting Control Systems
8. Data Network
9. Uninterruptible Power Supply System
10. Electrical System Protective Device Study
11. Ground Fault Testing Results
G. Wiring Diagrams for each system shall be complete for the specific system installed under the Contract.
"Typical" Line Diagrams will not be acceptable unless properly marked to indicate the exact field
installation.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
26 00 00 - 5/13
1.15 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A. Indicated motors, controls, and equipment as described in other divisions shall be furnished by other
trades, but shall be moved, set and wired to electrical controls and power supply by the Electrical
Contractor.
B. Work to be included under this Contract shall be defined on drawings and in these specifications. Any
details beyond these limits are meant only to give installation clarity to that portion which is a part of
this Contract.
1.16 INSTRUCTION PERIODS
A. Upon completion of the work and after all tests and final inspection of the work by the authority(s)
having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall demonstrate and instruct the Owner's designated operation
and maintenance personnel in the operation and maintenance of the various electrical systems. The
Contractor shall arrange scheduled instruction periods with the Owner. The Contractor's
representatives shall be superintendents or foremen knowledgeable in each system and suppliers’
representatives when so specified.
B. Scheduled Instruction periods shall be:
1. Low Voltage Lighting Control Systems 1/2 day
2. Fire Alarm System 1/2 day
3. Security System 1/2 day
4. Access Control System 1/2 day
5. Data Network 1/2 day
6. Daylighting Control Systems 1/2 day
C. Costs for time involved by Contractor shall be included in the bid.
1.17 COMPLETION OF WORK
A. Upon completion of the Division 26 and 27 work, the Contractor shall comply with requirements of
Section 01 70 00 for project closeout.
B. Upon completion of the Division 26 and 27 work, the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer a
completion letter stating that he has fulfilled all the requirements of his Contract for Division 26 and 27
work as set forth in the drawings and specifications and that all items in pre-final inspection lists
submitted by the Engineer have been satisfactorily completed.
C. Arrange for and obtain all required inspections and certificates pertaining to the Division 26 and 27
work and deliver the certificates to the Engineer in triplicate.
D. Prior to or at the time of final inspection, the Contractor shall, as outlined in detail in the specifications,
complete the delivery of all the following items:
1.Completion Letter
2.Certificate of Final Inspection.
Electrical Inspector
Fire Department
COMPLETION OF WORK -
26 00 00 – 1.17
3.Warranty to Owner
(with copy for Engineer)
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS –
26 00 00 – 1.13
4.Marked Set, Electronic Media Set on Solid-
State Drive-in AutoCAD R-2013 Format, and
full-size PDF of As-Built Electrical Drawings
GENERAL AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
26 00 00 – 1.12
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number 2210142.00
26 00 00 - 6/13
5.Certificate of Completion and Document
Requirements for Protective Device Study
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDY –
26 05 73
6.Motor Current Readings GENERAL, TESTS – 26 05 19 – 3.03(D)
7.Phase Current Readings GENERAL, TESTS – 26 05 19 – 3.03(E)
8.OHMIC Test Readings GENERAL, TESTS – 26 05 19 – 3.03(B)
9.Ground Fault Settings
10.Panelboard and Special Equipment Shop
Drawings and Final Approved List of Materials
Installed.
MATERIALS, GENERAL – 26 00 00 – 2.03
11.Certificate of Feeders Torque Results WIRES AND CABLES – 26 05 19
12.* Receipt from person to whom delivered the
following spare glasses, plastic diffusers,
lamps, and ballast fuses.
LIGHTING FIXTURES – 26 50 00
13.* Receipt from person to whom delivered the
following: Spare Elements for Fire Detectors,
Fuses for Switches, Spare Keys for
Panelboards, receptacles switches, plugs, etc.
LOW VOLTAGE – 27 00 00
FIRE ALARM – 28 31 00
FUSES – 26 28 13
PANELBOARDS – 26 24 16
SWITCHES & RECEPTACLES – 26 27 26
ELECTRICAL MEDIUM VOLTAGE SERVICE
UNDERGROUND AND PAD-MOUNTED LOAD BREAK
SWITCH – 26 05 13
14.Wiring diagrams, Maintenance Manuals,
Operation Instructions, and Brochures (5 sets
minimum)
GENERAL, INSTRUCTIONS
& MANUALS – 26 00 00 – 1.14
* Secure delivery instructions from Architect for delivery to Owner.
1.18 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS
A. This Contractor shall submit to the Architect as described in Section 01 60 00. When shop drawings are
submitted electronically, they shall be submitted as described in Paragraph B below.
B. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect no later than 30 days after the award of the Contract, a
minimum of seven (7) copies, each bound under separate cover, with index, detailed shop drawings, to
include:
1. Manufacturer's Catalog Data
2. Complete Physical and Technical Data
3. Wiring Diagrams
4. Detailed Reference (written or highlighted) noting compliance with the appropriate specification
section and applicable item numbers within that section
5. Other Descriptive Data as required by the Architect/ Engineer
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
26 00 00 - 7/13
C. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect electronic shop drawings in PDF format. Electronic Shop
Drawings that are submitted without following the format as outlined below will be returned for
corrections without any further review.
1. A separate PDF file shall be submitted for each Division including All submittal items for that
Division as outlined below:
a. Division 26 – Electrical
b. Division 27 – Telecommunications
2. The contractor shall provide either a digital or hardware method of transporting the electronic
submittal to the Architect. Files larger than 10Megabytes shall not be sent via email and shall be
transferred via an FTP or similar file transfer protocol, PC compatible CD or PC compatible Thumb
Drive. Divisions shall not be broken up into separate files for transfer via email.
3. Each Specification PDF shall be submitted with the following format and salient attributes:
a. Cover page including:
1) Project Title as indicated on the plans
2) Project Location including Address, City, State, Country
3) Prime Contractor name, phone number, and email address
4) Sub-Contractor name, phone number, and email address
5) Specification Division Number and Title
b. Index Page outlining each specification section included in the submittal. This list shall be
linked to a corresponding Specification Section Divider for each section. This link shall enable
the reviewer to jump to a specification section by clicking the item in the list.
c. Specification Section Divider: Shop Drawings shall be divided by specification section and
each section shall begin with a Divider Page outlining the Specification Number, Title, and a
list of Submittal Items for the section. In the upper right-hand corner of the divider page, a
Link shall be provided returning the reviewer to the Index Page.
d. Each Submittal Item listed on the Specification Section Divider shall be linked to the specific
item being submitted. Each Submittal Item shall be hi-lighted Yellow with a Note Reference
to the specific paragraph giving the submittal requirements.
e. Each page of the submittal shall be numbered in the Bottom Right corner of the page. Page
numbering shall be Roman Numerals for all pages before the First Specification Section. Each
Specification Section page shall be numbered with the Specification Section number, a dash,
and the page number in the Specification Section.
f. Specification items shall be specifically hi-lighted as they apply to the project rather than hi-
lighting an entire product family. Items that do not apply to this project shall be crossed out
with a Red X.
g. The PDF file shall not be protected to prevent printing, selecting of text within the document,
or extracting of pages from the document.
D. Shop drawings shall be submitted complete, at one time and each item indexed with dividers and
separated per specification section and shall be, but not limited to the items of equipment listed below:
1. Motor starters and controls designating where items are intended to be used and equipment
being controlled.
2. Disconnect Switches
3. Fuses and spare fuse cabinet
4. Electrical System Protective Device Study
5. Lighting Fixtures (Complete)
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number 2210142.00
26 00 00 - 8/13
6. Low Voltage Lighting Control Systems
7. Wiring Devices
8. Back Boxes
9. Coverplates
10. Raceways and Connectors
11. Fire Wall Penetration Seals
12. Copper Wire
13. *Fire Alarm System
14. *Security System
15. *CCTV
16. *Access Control System
17. *Telecommunication System
18. *Audio/Visual Presentation Systems
19. *Data Network Systems
20. **All Specialty Systems not listed above**
21. Any other items requested by Engineer
*See Section 27 00 00 for further requirements.
E. Within 10 working days after the date of the letter rejecting any items of equipment, lighting fixtures, or
materials as not in accordance with the specifications, Contractor shall submit a new list of items he
proposes to furnish and install in place of those items rejected. If the Contractor fails to submit this new
list within the above specified time, or if any items on this second list are rejected as not being in
accordance with these specifications, the Engineer may select the items which the Contractor shall
furnish and install without change in Contract price or time of completion.
F. The acceptance of a manufacturer’s name or product by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of
the responsibility for providing materials and equipment which comply in all details with the
requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for submitting
materials at such a time to allow a minimum of two weeks for Engineer’s review.
G. Electrical Drawings for the project have been developed by the Engineer using AutoCAD™ Revision 2013
software. These drawing files will be made available to the Contractor for development of shop
drawings and/or “As-Builts” with a signed waiver of responsibility.
1.19 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Provide Schedule of Values per Division 1 and related project requirements.
B. Division 26 and 27 Breakdown: Provide schedule of values for the following categories (as a minimum):
1. Electrical Mobilization
2. Electrical Submittals
3. Electrical General Project Management, General Design, General Coordination
4. Branch Circuit Materials Rough-in
5. Branch Circuit Materials Rough in – Labor
6. Branch Circuit Trim – Materials
7. Branch Circuit Trim – Labor
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
26 00 00 - 9/13
8. Panelgear, Disconnects, Starters
9. Panelgear, Disconnects, Starters – Labor
10. Light Fixtures
11. Light Fixtures – Labor
12. Fire Alarm System
13. Security System
14. Data System
15. Systems Equipment – Labor
16. Cable Tray
17. Cable Tray – Labor
18. Commissioning
19. Electrical Punchlist, Closeout, and Owner Training
C. The dollar value for “Electrical Punchlist, Closeout, and Owner Training” shall in no case be less than 2%
of the total dollar value of the Division 26 and 27 work (or as indicated in Division 1, whichever is
higher). The dollar value for “Commissioning” shall in no case be less than 3.0% of the total dollar value
of the Division 26 and 27 work (or as indicated in Division 1, whichever is higher).
D. The Contractor is advised that in addition to payments held out for retainage and project final
completion (i.e. “Electrical Punchlist, Closeout, and Owner Training”), as specified above and in Division
1, the Owner reserves the right to withhold 10% of the funds for any of the above categories until the
systems (of that category) have been proven to operate as specified and have been completely tested
and adjusted.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COMPETITIVE PRODUCTS
A. Any reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of
construction by name, make or catalog number shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality
and shall not be construed as limiting competition. The Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use
any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the judgment of the
Engineer, expressed in writing, is equal to that specified. However, any manufacturer not listed as an
accepted Bidder for a specific item must be submitted for acceptance in writing in accordance with
Section 01 60 00.
B. Any reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of
construction by name, make or catalog number shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality
and shall not be construed as limiting competition. The Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use
any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the judgment of the
Engineer, expressed in writing, is equal to that specified. However, any manufacturer not listed as an
accepted bidder for a specific item must be submitted for acceptance in writing and with descriptive
data verifying equal quality and performance at least ten (10) working days prior to the bid date for
approval.
2.02 MANUFACTURER/EQUIPMENT PRIOR APPROVALS
A. Any manufacturer/equipment not listed as an approved substitute for a specified item must be
submitted for acceptance in accordance with Section 01 60 00, in writing, with detailed information to
include:
1. Manufacturer's Catalog Data
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number 2210142.00
26 00 00 - 10/13
2. Complete Physical and Technical Data
3. Wiring Diagrams
4. Detailed reference (written or highlighted) noting compliance with the appropriate Specification
Section and all applicable Specification item numbers within that Section
5. Complete type written index cross referencing all proposed substitutes and specified items
6. Detailed reference to specified items (written or highlighted) noting equal quality and
performance of proposed substitute equipment
7. Other descriptive data, as required by the Engineer
B. If substitute material is determined to be acceptable by the Engineer, it will be included in a subsequent
Addenda prior to bidding. The acceptance of a manufacturer’s name or product by the Engineer does
not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing materials and equipment which comply in
all details with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
C. Only materials which are specified or published in addenda as acceptable shall be used.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. All materials must be of the quality herein specified. All materials shall be new, of the best quality and
free from defects. They shall be designed to ensure satisfactory operation and operational life in the
environmental conditions which will prevail where they are being installed.
B. Each type of material shall be of the same make and quality. The materials furnished shall be standard
products of the manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and shall be the
manufacturer's latest standard design.
C. All materials shall be U.L. or E.T.L. listed for the purpose for which they are used.
D. Equipment in compliance with U.L. standards but not bearing their label is not acceptable. If the
manufacturer cannot arrange for labeling of an assembled unit at the factory the unit shall be field
evaluated per the Washington State Administrative Code (WAC) and the electrical inspector’s
requirements.
2.04 COMPLETE SYSTEM
A. All the systems mentioned shall be complete and operational in every detail except where specifically
noted otherwise. Mention of certain materials in these specifications shall not be construed as
releasing the Contractor from furnishing such additional materials and performing all labor required to
provide a complete and operable system.
2.05 NAMEPLATES
A. Provide nameplates constructed of plastic (black on white) laminated material engraved through black
surface material to white sublayer (attach with screws on NEMA 1 enclosures). EXCEPTION (1):
Emergency distribution system component labeling - white letters on red background. Exception (2):
Series rated systems shall be yellow background with white letters.
1. Switch and Receptacle Labels: Refer to Section 26 27 26.
2. Motor Starter and Disconnect Labels: Refer to Section 26 28 16.
3. Special Equipment/Outlet Labels: Refer to Appropriate Sections.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
26 00 00 - 11/13
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Careful consideration shall be given to clearances under and over beams, pipes and ducts, to provide
proper headroom in all cases. Check drawings to determine heights of all suspended ceilings and size of
pipe shafts where raceway and wire-ways shall run. Coordinate installation of Division 26 and 27 wiring
and equipment with Division 23 and other trades. Where insufficient room for proper installation
appears, obtain clarification from Engineer before any installation is begun.
B. Cutting and Patching:
1. Obtain permission from the Architect and/or Owner’s Representative prior to cutting. Locate
cuttings so they will not weaken structural components. Cut carefully and only the minimum
amount necessary. Cut concrete with diamond core drills except where space limitations prevent
the use of such drills.
2. All construction materials damaged or cut into during the installation of this work must be
repaired or replaced with materials of like kind and quality as original materials by skilled labor
experienced in that particular building trade.
3.02 COORDINATION
A. The Contractor is responsible for accomplishing Division 26 and 27. The work shall coordinate with that
of the other Contractors and/or other trades doing work in the building and shall examine all Drawings,
including the several Divisions of Mechanical, Structural, Civil and Architectural, for Construction Details
and necessary coordination. Specific locations of construction features and equipment shall be
obtained from the Contract Documents, field measurements, and/or from the trade providing the
material or equipment. No extra costs will be allowed for failure to obtain this information.
B. All conflicts shall be reported to the Engineer in writing before installation for decision and correction.
Special attention is called to the following items:
1. Door swings to the end that switches will be located on "Strike" side of the door.
2. Location of grilles, pipes, sprinkler heads, ducts and other mechanical equipment so that all
electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and other electrical outlets and equipment are clear from and in
proper relation to these items.
3. Location of cabinets, counters and doors so that electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and equipment
are clear from and in proper relation to these items.
4. Type and height of ceiling.
5. All device measurements referenced on drawings or specifications are to be centered of device
unless noted otherwise.
C. The Contractor will not be paid for work requiring reinstallation due to lack of coordination or
interference with other Contractors or trades. This includes, but is not limited to, removing, replacing,
relocating, cutting, patching, and finishing.
D. The Contractor shall review the installation manual for each device to be installed. If a conflict appears
to occur between the manufacturer’s recommended installation practices and the plans or
specifications, notify the Engineer immediately. Final determination shall be by the Engineer. The
Contractor will not be paid for reinstallation due to failure to comply with manufacturer instructions or
design documents.
E. Device and fixture locations may be changed within 15 feet without extra charge if so desired by the
Engineer, before installation.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number 2210142.00
26 00 00 - 12/13
3.03 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI)
A. It is our intent to provide a timely response for RFIs regarding Division 26 and 27 work. To further
expedite this process, where a suggestion can be determined or derived at by the initiator of the RFI, it
is required this suggestion be supplied with the submitted RFI. If no suggestion is given where one is
possible, the RFI will be returned as incomplete. All Electrical RFIs shall be written on the form provided
at the back of this section.
3.04 CLEANING AND PAINTING
A. All equipment, whether exposed to the weather or stored indoors shall be covered to protect it from
water, dust and dirt.
B. After installing, all metal finishes shall be cleaned and polished, cleaned of all dirt, rust, cement, plaster,
grease and paint.
C. All equipment with a primer coat of paint shall be given two (2) or more coats of a finish enamel and
scratched surfaces be refinished to look like new. Markings, identification and nameplates shall be
replaced.
3.05 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide identifying engraved bakelite nameplate on all equipment, including pull boxes, to clearly
indicate its use, area served, circuit identification, voltage, and any other useful data.
B. Each auxiliary system, including communications, shall be clearly labeled to indicate its function.
3.06 DEVIATION
A. Deviation from the shop drawings in construction or installation of equipment shall not be made unless
Shop Drawings showing proposed deviations are submitted to and approved by the Engineer. If any
equipment is furnished under this or other divisions with current, voltage or phase ratings that differ
from those shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing immediately and
shall not connect said equipment until instructed as to required changes by the Architect. No extension
of time will be granted as a result of such changes.
3.07 EXCAVATIONS
A. All excavations are to be so conducted so that no walls or footings shall be disturbed in any way.
B. Remove all surplus earth not needed for backfilling and dispose of same as directed.
3.08 WIRING METHODS
A. All low voltage wiring shall be in Raceway with Junction Boxes and Fittings where concealed in walls, in
inaccessible ceiling space, or where exposed in finished or unfinished areas.
B. All low voltage wiring shall be in Raceway with Junction Boxes and Fittings.
C. All branch circuit wiring shall be installed in raceway with junction boxes and fittings.
D. Provide access panels as needed for pull boxes and equipment located above ceiling or behind walls.
E. All emergency systems outlet and junction boxes shall have a red plastic tag inside marked critical or life
safety as applicable.
F. Multiple feeder runs shall be rod hung, using a strut type channel with individual one-hole clamps, back
plates and machine screws.
G. Any low voltage cables that are not terminated at both ends shall be tagged and labeled per code.
H. See Section 27 00 00 for additional requirements of low voltage systems.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
26 00 00 - 13/13
3.09 PENETRATIONS OF FIRE RATED ELEMENTS
A. Must be made such as to retain that rating.
3.10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide hangers, brackets, and suspension rods and supplementary steel to support equipment.
B. Hangers provided under other divisions shall not be used for support of Division 26 and 27 equipment
unless permitted by Architect/Engineer.
3.11 CHASES AND OPENINGS
A. Provide to the masonry and concrete trades all templates and details of chases, openings in floors and
walls as required for Division 26 and 27 equipment installation.
3.12 PAINTING
A. Painting in general will be covered under another division of this specification, except items furnished
under Division 26 and 27 that are scratched, marred in shipment or installation, shall be refinished by
the Division 26 and 27 Contractor.
3.13 WORKMANSHIP AND OBSERVATION
A. Workmanship shall be of the best quality and none but competent workers shall be employed under
the supervision of a competent foreman. All completed work shall represent a neat and workmanship
like appearance.
B. All work and materials shall be subject to observation at any and all times by representatives of the
Engineer.
3.14 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Provide complete seismic anchorage and bracing for the lateral and vertical support of conduit and
electrical equipment, as required by the International Building Code.
B. Conduits that cross seismic separations shall be installed with flexible connection suitable to
accommodate conditions. Secure raceways on each side of a separation and provide a minimum of 36”
length of flexible conduit to span separation.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL – EXISTING SYSTEMS
26 00 05 - 1/2
SECTION 26 00 05
ELECTRICAL – EXISTING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Portions of the existing electrical lighting, power and signal systems are to be removed as detailed on
the drawings.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EXISTING MATERIALS
A. Existing materials which are a part of the building shall remain the property of the Owner.
2.02 EXISTING MATERIALS RE-INSTALLED
A. Existing materials and equipment that are removed as a part of the work or stored in surplus may be
re-installed as a part of the new system subject to approval of condition suitability by the
Architect/Engineer. The requirements of the specifications (i.e. installation, warranty, testing, etc.) shall
apply as if the materials were new, supplied by the Contractor.
2.03 EXISTING MATERIALS NOT TO BE RE-INSTALLED
A. In coordination with the Architect/Engineer, these materials shall be made available for his inspection
and decision as to whether the Owner will retain possession. Items selected for retention shall be
delivered to a location on the premises selected by the Owner and turned over to him. Take reasonable
care to avoid damage to this material. If the Contractor fails to conform to this requirement, he shall
purchase and turn over to the Owner replacement materials of like kind and quality.
B. All material not selected for retention by the Owner and debris shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
This shall include, but not be limited to, removal of PCB type ballasts and fluorescent lamps which shall
be disposed of in accordance with EPA requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Examine the structure, building, and conditions under which Division 26 work is to be installed for
conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until
deficiencies encountered in installation have been corrected. Report any delay or difficulties
encountered in installation of Division 26 work which might be unsuitable to connect with work by other
divisions of this specification. Failure to report conditions shall constitute acceptance of other work as
being fit and proper for the installation of Division 26 work.
B. Maintain continuity of existing circuits of equipment to remain. Existing circuits of equipment shall
remain energized. Circuits which are to remain but were disturbed during demolition shall have circuits,
wiring, and power restored back to original condition.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ELECTRICAL – EXISTING SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00
26 00 05 - 2/2
3.02 DEMOLITION
A. Switchboards, panelboards, signaling systems, other electrical equipment free standing (or surface
mounted), raceway (exposed) and conductors no longer in service as a result of this Contract shall be
removed. Unused raceways or sleeves shall be cut flush at ceiling, floor or wall and filled with grout.
3.03 NEW DEVICES IN REMODEL AREAS
A. Provide surface mounting for devices on existing walls. Where existing boxes are indicated to be reused,
extend box as necessary and provide new devices and plates.
3.04 EXISTING PANELBOARD
A. Any modifications made to existing panels must be incorporated into the existing circuit index on the
panel. If more than three circuits are modified a new typewritten index incorporating the changes to
the existing index shall be installed in the existing panel.
B. Listing shall match circuit breaker arrangements, typically with odd numbers on the left and even
numbers on the right. Room numbers used shall be final room numbers used in the building as verified
with the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 WIRES AND CABLES
26 05 19 - 1/3
SECTION 26 05 19
WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all wire, cable, and terminations complete.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WIRE AND CABLE (COPPER, 600-VOLT)
A. Interior and Above Grade: All wires to be Type THW or RHW. Type THWN/THHN or XHHW wire may be
utilized at Contractors option, subject to code requirements. Wire and cables shall be brought to
project in original containers bearing the underwriters label. Provide Type AVA wire where conductors
are subject to temperature above 167 Degrees F.
2.02 SPLICES
A. Above Grade: Solderless type only. Preinsulated "twist-on" type (limited to size #10 and smaller). Bolt
on compression type with application of preformed insulated cover, heat shrinkable tubing or plastic
insulated tape acceptable for all sizes.
2.03 TERMINATIONS
A. Compression set, bolted or screw terminal.
B. Conductors #12 and smaller shall utilize eye or forked tongue type compression set terminator when
termination is to a bolted or screw set type terminal block or terminal cabinet.
2.04 PLASTIC CABLE TIES
A. Nylon or Equivalent, locking type.
2.05 CABLE TAGS
A. Cable tags shall be installed on all three phase feeder cables. Tags shall be embossed with feeder power
source and circuit number, i.e. panel A-26. Use tag part No. FT201 for cables up to 1-1/2 inch, use
FT-205 for over 1-1/2 inch.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install all wiring in Raceway unless shown or specifically authorized otherwise.
3.02 WIRE SIZE
A. No. 12 AWG minimum for power and lighting circuits.
B. Provide solid wire for No. 10 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG and larger
(600) volts.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
WIRES AND CABLES Job Number 2210142.00
26 05 19 - 2/3
3.03 TESTS
A. In addition to the factory testing of all equipment and cable, the Contractor shall test all wiring
connections for continuity and ground before any fixtures or other loads are connected. Tests shall be
made with a 500V minimum DC "Megger" type tester. If tests indicate faulty insulation (less that
2 megohms), such defects shall be corrected and tested again. Contractor shall provide all apparatus to
make tests and shall bear all expenses of required testing. Routine operation tests shall be made on all
pieces of equipment to demonstrate that working parts are in operating condition. Results of all tests
shall be recorded and submitted to the Architect. The Contractor shall immediately replace all parts,
which fail to pass the test.
B. Measure the OHMIC value of the Electric Service Entrance metallic "System Ground" with reference to
"Earth Ground" using the "Multiple Ground Rod Fall-In-Potential" method and suitable instruments.
Maximum resistance to ground shall be less than 10 ohms. If this resistance cannot be obtained with
the ground system shown, notify the Architect immediately for further instructions. Provide OHMIC test
results to Engineer.
C. All circuits both in and out of the building shall test out free of grounds, short circuits and other defects.
D. Check and record catalog number and ampere size of controller overload heaters installed, nameplate
full-load amperes, and actual operating amperes of each motor. IMPORTANT: Submit recorded data in
triplicate to the Engineer. Check proper load balance on the electrical system, direction of rotation,
lubrication, and overload protection of all motors before placing in operation.
E. Provide a log of ampere reading for all panels from phase to neutral for 4 wire panels and from phase to
phase for 3 wire panels. These readings shall be taken with all loads activated.
F. The final test of all equipment shall be made on dates designated by the Architect/Engineer and all
readings shall be made in his presence.
G. Feeders shall be checked to ensure all phases are energized before connecting to their respective
motors. Each motor shall rotate in the proper direction for its respective load. Prior to rotation test, all
bearings shall be inspected for proper lubrication.
H. Minimum megger test for equipment shall be as follows:
Equipment Maximum Minimum Test
Voltage Rating Resistance
1,000-Volts or less 2 Megohms
I. Provide certification of torque values for feeder and service entrance conductors per equipment
manufacturer's recommendation.
3.04 CONDUCTOR SIZES, REFERENCED ON PLANS
A. Copper, type THW or RHW unless noted
3.05 PULLING
A. Use no mechanical means for pulling No. 8 AWG conductors and smaller. Powdered soap stone or
approved spray cream shall be the only lubricant used.
3.06 STRIPPING INSULATION
A. Do not ring the cable, always pare or pencil.
3.07 TAPING
A. If used shall be half lapped synthetic tape
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 WIRES AND CABLES
26 05 19 - 3/3
3.08 CONDUCTORS IN PANELS AND SWITCHBOARDS
A. Conductors in panels, switchboards, and terminal cabinets shall be neatly grouped and formed in a
manner to "Fan" into terminals with regular spacing.
3.09 CABLE SUPPORTS
A. Provide conductor support devices as required by code in vertical cable runs.
3.10 RACEWAY SIZES REFERENCED ON DRAWINGS
A. Raceways are sized for copper, type THW, unless otherwise noted. Size all Raceways per code unless
specifically noted to be larger on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 GROUNDING AND BONDING
26 05 26 - 1/2
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. A grounding system shall be provided for neutral ground and equipment ground as required by code.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Copper, code size, with physical protection where subject to damage. Bare or green insulated
2.02 GROUND RODS
A. 3/4" x 8'-0" copper clad steel
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Provide all grounding for electrical systems and equipment as required by codes and as specified herein.
3.02 GROUND RODS
A. Provide as shown and/or required. Connect the ground conductor to each rod.
3.03 SIZE OF GROUND WIRE
A. As required by code. Where ground wire is exposed to physical damage or is used outside of building,
protect with conduit
3.04 GROUND CONNECTION OF WATER PIPING
A. Metal internal piping shall be grounded, as part of this Contract. This includes jumpers for dielectric
fittings.
3.05 GROUND CONNECTION OF BUILDING STEEL
A. Structural metal shall be grounded, as part of this Contract.
3.06 CONNECTION TO THE GROUND BUS
A. Provide connections in accordance with the codes; including but not limited to raceway systems,
switchboard/panelboard frames, service neutral, separately derived systems, electrically operated
equipment and devices. No device or equipment shall be connected for electrical service which has a
neutral conductor connected to a grounding conductor or to the frame within the device or equipment.
3.07 METHOD OF CONNECTION
A. Make all ground connections and ground cable splices by thermal welding. Grounding lugs, where
provided as standard Manufacturer's items on equipment furnished, may be used.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
GROUNDING AND BONDING Job Number 2210142.00
26 05 26 - 2/2
3.08 FLEXIBLE RACEWAY
A. Shall not be used for grounding. Install separate ground conductor in all flexible raceway.
3.09 PVC RACEWAY
A. Install separate ground conductor in all PVC raceway as required per code.
3.10 DROP CORDS
A. Shall have a grounding wire and be connected with a grounding type plug and receptacle
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 OUTLET AND PULL BOXES
26 05 32 - 1/3
SECTION 26 05 32
OUTLET AND PULL BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide outlet and pull boxes to enclose devices, permit the pulling of conductors and for wire splices
and branches.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 INTERIOR WIRING
A. General: Outlet and pull boxes shall be pressed drawn steel, zinc coated with plaster ring where
applicable. Welded boxes not allowed. Four-inch size minimum. Large pull boxes shall be fabricated
sheet steel, zinc coated or baked enamel finish, with return flange and screw retained cover.
B. Surface Metal Raceway: Boxes of same Manufacture and to match Raceway. Boxes to accommodate
standard devices and device plate.
C. Concrete and Masonry: Boxes for casting in concrete or mounting in masonry walls shall be the type
specifically designed for that purpose.
D. Install pull boxes so as to be accessible after completion of building construction.
E. Ceiling outlet boxes shall be galvanized octagonal 4 inch, 1-1/2-inch-deep (without fixture stud),
2-1/8 inches deep (with fixture stud).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ANCHORING
A. All boxes shall be firmly anchored directly or with concealed bracing to building studs or joints. Boxes
must be so attached so that they will not "Rock" or "Shift" when devices are operated.
3.02 FLUSH MOUNTING
A. Except for surface mounted boxes or boxes above accessible ceilings, all boxes shall have front edge
(box or plaster ring) even with the finished surface of the wall or ceiling.
3.03 ELECTRICAL OUTLETS
A. General: Coordinate the work of this section with the work of other sections and trades. Study all
Drawings that form a part of this Contract and confer with various trades involved to eliminate conflicts
between the work of this section and the work of other trades. Check and verify outlet locations
indicated on Architectural Drawings, door swings, installation details, layouts of suspended ceilings and
locations of all plumbing, heating and ventilating equipment.
B. Centered on Built-In Work: In the case of doors, cabinets, recessed or similar features, or where outlets
are centered between such features, such as between a door jamb and a cabinet, make these outlet
locations exact. Relocate any outlets which are located off center.
C. Vertical and Horizontal Relationships: Where more than one outlet is shown or specified to be at the
same elevation or one above the other, align them exactly on centerlines horizontally or vertically.
Relocate as directed all such outlets (including lighting, receptacle, power signal and thermostat outlets)
which are not so installed, at no additional cost to Owner.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
OUTLET AND PULL BOXES Job Number 2210142.00
26 05 32 - 2/3
D. Device Outlet Height: Measure from the finished floor.
*Switches 4 Feet, Set Vertically, to Top of Box
*Receptacles, Telecommunications 18 Inches, Set Vertically to Centerline
Other As Noted or as Directed by Architect
Heights may vary. See Drawings for additional information
E. Ceiling Location: For acoustical material locate outlet either at the corner joint or in the center of a
panel, whichever is closer to the normal spacing. Locate all outlets in the same room in the same panel
location.
F. Installed in Sound Walls: Boxes installed in sound walls shall not be installed back to back. All boxes
shall be separated by one stud space and shall be interconnected with flex conduit with a 90° loop.
Where stud space separation is not possible, utilize sound attenuating mastic around each box. 3M Fire
Barrier Moldable Putty Pads MPP+ (2.54 mm minimum) or similar.
3.04 ELECTRICAL WORK IN COUNTERBACKS, MILLWORK AND CASEWORK
A. Provide as shown and/or specified. Provide templates, where required, to other trades for drilling and
cutting to ensure accurate location of electrical fixtures (outlets and devices) as verified with the
Architect. Provide all wiring, devices, plates and connections required by said fixture.
3.05 CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT
A. For equipment furnished under this or other Divisions of the Specifications, or by others. Provide outlet
boxes of sizes and at locations necessary to serve such equipment. An outlet box is required if the
equipment has pigtail wires for external connection, does not have space to accommodate circuit wiring
used. Study equipment details to assure proper coordination.
3.06 BLANK COVERS
A. Provide blank covers or plates over all boxes not covered by equipment.
3.07 JUNCTION OR PULL BOXES
A. Pull and junction boxes shall be installed as shown, and to facilitate pulling of wire and to limit the
number of bends within code requirements. Boxes shall be permanently accessible and shall be placed
only at locations approved by the Architect.
B. In suspended ceiling spaces, boxes shall be supported from the structure independently from ceiling
suspension system.
C. The Drawings do not necessarily show every pull or Junction Box required. The Contractor is permitted
to provide boxes deemed necessary when installed in accordance with these Specifications.
3.08 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER
A. Conceal the Electrical Outlet behind the unit housing as provided for by the Manufacturer.
3.09 BOXES CONTAINING MULTIPLE DEVICES
A. Boxes containing emergency and normal devices are permitted only with steel barriers Manufactured
especially for the purpose of dividing the box into two completely separate compartments.
B. Device boxes containing multiple devices and wiring rated over 150 volts to ground and over 300 Volts
between conductors are permitted only with steel barrier manufactured especially for the purpose of
dividing the box into separate compartments for each device having exposed live parts.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 OUTLET AND PULL BOXES
26 05 32 - 3/3
3.10 COLOR CODING
A. All junction boxes installed in accessible spaces and exposed in unfinished areas shall be color coded
using spray paint or tape on the box and cover as applicable in the following manner:
277/480-Volt ........................................... Sand
120/208-Volt ........................................... Gray
Emergency Power .................................... Orange
Fire Alarm ................................................ Red
Intrusion Alarm ........................................ Yellow
B. The colors shall match the colors used on the Raceway - See Section 26 05 33.
3.11 NAMEPLATES
A. For all line voltage junction boxes, provide engraved nameplate indicating circuit numbering of all wiring
in junction box.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 RACEWAY
26 05 33 - 1/4
SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A.Provide Raceway System complete.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT (GRS)
A.General: Hot dipped galvanized
B.Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron or noncorrosive alloy compatible with galvanized conduit. Erickson
couplings, watertight split couplings (O.Z. type or equivalent) permitted. Running thread or set screw type
fittings not approved.
2.02 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)
A.General: Hot Dipped galvanized.
B.Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron or noncorrosive alloy compatible with galvanized conduit. Erickson
couplings, watertight split couplings (O.Z. type or equivalent) permitted. Running thread or set screw type
fittings not approved.
2.03 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A.General: Hot dipped galvanized.
B.Fittings: Raintight; steel or malleable iron type using a split corrugated compression ring and tightening nut or
stainless-steel locking disc. Steel set screw fittings are acceptable for dry locations. Indenter, drive-on and
pressure cast or die cast type set screw are not acceptable.
2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC, LFMC)
A.Dry Locations:
1.General: Galvanized flexible steel for dry locations only
2.Fittings: Malleable iron or steel, Thomas and Betts "squeeze" type or equal
B.Damp and Wet Locations:
1.Liquid Tight: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) weatherproof cover over flexible steel conduit.
2.Fittings: Thomas and Betts "liquid tight" or equal
2.05 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
A.Formed steel or aluminum type. Standard factory finish. Where color choice is available, consult
Architect/Engineer for selection prior to ordering.
2.06 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT (PVC)
A.Schedule 40 rigid polyvinyl chloride type unless otherwise noted.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
RACEWAY Job Number 2210142.00
26 05 33 - 2/4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A.Install Raceway concealed in construction unless noted otherwise on the Drawings or specifically approved in
writing by the Architect/Engineer.
B.Cut Raceway ends square, ream and extend maximum distance into all couplings and connectors.
C.Provide and install manufactured end caps on all Raceway ends during construction to prevent the entrance of
water or dirt. Tape, as a cover, not permitted.
D.Swab out all Raceways before pulling wires.
E.All elbows for GRS and PVC Raceway shall be factory radius bends. For all other Raceway, use factory radius
bends of 1-1/4" and larger diameter.
F.Raceway shall not penetrate sheet metal ducts unless permission is granted by Architect/Engineer. All sleeves
shall be provided for Raceway installation.
G.Provide 2 - 3/4" C.O. stub into accessible ceiling space from all recessed panelboards or systems terminal boxes.
3.02 GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
A.All Connections shall be watertight. Install for all Raceways in concrete or where subject to damage.
3.03 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT
A.Intermediate metal conduit is permitted as a substitute for galvanized rigid steel conduit except where GRS is
required by code.
3.04 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING
A.Install for wiring in masonry, frame construction, furred ceilings and above suspended ceilings. May be used for
exposed work in unfinished areas where not subject to damage. Where construction involves masonry work,
surface cut masonry units wherever such masonry units are to remain unplastered or uncovered in complete
construction.
3.05 RACEWAYS UNDERGROUND
A.Galvanized rigid steel conduit - painted with two coats of bitumastic paint - or galvanized rigid steel conduit with
15 mil. polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket (repair abrasions with PVC base paint or PVC)
B.PVC Raceways may be used for underground runs when permitted by code. Field bends, when necessary, shall
be formed only with factory recommended heater. Penetrations through floor and walls shall be galvanized
rigid steel (GRS) conduit. PVC, if used, shall be increased in size from that shown to include code required
ground wire.
C.All underground bends in excess of 10 degrees and all elbows shall be GRS.
D.Arrange and slope Raceways entering building to drain away from building.
E.Ground wires shall be provided in all PVC Raceway.
3.06 INSERTS, SHIELDS AND SLEEVES
A.Furnish and set in place, in advance of pouring slabs and walls, all inserts and sleeves needed to execute Division
26 equipment installation.
B.Where supports in slabs are required after wall has been poured, use a drilled-in threaded insert, installed as
recommended by Manufacturer.
C.Sleeves shall be provided for all wall penetrations.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 RACEWAY
26 05 33 - 3/4
3.07 RACEWAYS THAT STUB UP THROUGH FLOOR
A.Install at such depth that the exposed Raceway is vertical and no curved section of the elbow is visible.
B.PVC Raceway shall not be stubbed through floors.
3.08 SEALING OF RACEWAY PENETRATIONS
A.Exterior Wall Surfaces Above Grade: Seal around all penetrations with caulking approved by Engineer. For
concrete construction above ground level, cast Raceway in wall or core drill wall and hard pack with a mixture of
equal parts of sand and cement.
B.Exterior Surfaces Below Grade: Cast Raceway into wall (or floor) or use manufactured seal assembly (such as
O.Z. type "FSK") cast in place.
C.Roofs: Provide mopped, lead, roof jack where Raceway penetrates roof membrane.
D.Fire Rated Floors, Walls, Ceiling/Roofs: Concrete or masonry, seal around Raceway penetration with Dow
Corning 3-6548 silicone RTV foam or approved equal. Plaster or gypsum wallboard, seal around Raceway
penetration with plaster, fire tape per local Fire Marshal's requirements.
3.09 SEALING OF RACEWAYS
A.Seal interior of all Raceways which pass through buildings roofs, floors or through outside walls of the building,
above or below grade. Seal on the end inside the building using duct sealing mastic,
non-hardening compound type, specially designed for such service to maintain the integrity of the seal of the
wall, floor or roof. Pack around the wires in the Raceways.
3.10 HANGERS FOR RACEWAYS
A.In suspended ceiling spaces Contractor may, at his option, attach 1/2" or 3/4" EMT Raceways to the ceiling
suspension system where such system is structurally suitable on independent wire secured at both ends; in
which case, provide clips manufactured for the purpose.
B.When more than two Raceways will use the same routing, group together on a patented channel support
system (such as Unistrut).
3.11 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
A.Install parallel to building surface (i.e., wall, ceiling, floor). Fasten to surface as recommended by Manufacturer.
Mount so Raceway is in the least obvious location. Shall be used in lieu of conduit in finished areas.
3.12 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
A.Flexible conduit shall be used only for connection to motors and equipment subject to vibration with
90 degrees loop minimum to allow for isolation and for lay-in fluorescent fixtures above T-Bar ceilings. For
fixture installations, one end of flex must terminate in rough-in junction box. Flex conduit shall not be installed
over 6' long or used to connect from fixture to fixture. Use liquid tight for pumps, equipment which is regularly
washed down, and equipment in damp locations. Provide ground wire.
3.13 COLOR CODING
A.General: Provide color bands of tape or paint one inch (25 mm) wide for Raceways up to two inches
(51 mm) in diameter and one-half the Raceway diameter for larger Raceways, applied at panel and pullbox
locations within each room, and 50 ft. (15.25 m) on centers within an area.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
RACEWAY Job Number 2210142.00
26 05 33 - 4/4
B.Color Banding:
120/208 Volt .................................. Gray
277/480 Volt ................................. Sand
Emergency Power .........................Orange
Fire Alarm ...................................... Red
Intrusion Alarm ............................. Yellow
Low Voltage Switching .................. Black
C.The colors shall match the colors used on the boxes - See Section 26 05 32.
3.14 PULL CORDS
A.Nylon type shall be included in all installed empty Raceway.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 METAL CLAD CABLE (TYPE MC) AND FITTINGS
26 05 34 - 1/3
SECTION 26 05 34
METAL CLAD CABLE (TYPE MC) AND FITTINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide Metal Clad (Type MC) Cable for power, control and lighting systems.
B. Provide wiring connections and terminations.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions
1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. UL 1569. Products shall be tested, approved and labeled/listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
1.04 USES PERMITTED
A. MC Cable is permitted to be used for 20amp lighting and power circuits where routing is above grade,
concealed and the installation meets the requirements of NEC 330.
B. MC Cable shall NOT be used for homerun circuits from the fixture, receptacle, or equipment to the
panelboard. Hard conduit must be used from the panelboard to the nearest accessible ceiling space to
the panelboard.
C. MC Cable shall not be used for HVAC equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CABLE ASSEMBLY
A. Metal clad cable assemblies shall consist of 2, 3 or 4 current carrying conductors and an equipment
ground conductor.
B. Conductors: Solid Copper conductor, No. 12 AWG minimum or No. 10 AWG maximum. Installation
methods shall be as specified under Part 3 - Execution.
C. Insulation: Conductor insulation shall be rated 600-volt, Type THHN, 90°C dry.
D. Fillers: Fillers shall be non-hygroscopic and non-wicking.
E. Binder: Core binder shall be corrugated polyester.
F. Sheath: The metal sheath shall be galvanized steel or aluminum. The metal sheath shall be extruded
onto the cable or applied longitudinally, then wrapped and welded. The sheath shall then be corrugated
for greater flexibility.
G. Jacketing: When PVC jacketing is required, the jacket shall be flame-retardant PVC with a temperature
range of -40°C to 90°C.
H. Equipment Grounding Conductor: The equipment ground wire shall be of the same construction as
specified in 2.02.A and 2.02.B and be at a minimum the same size as the current carrying conductors.
The insulation color shall be green.
2.02 FITTINGS
A. Fittings shall be UL listed and identified for such use with metal clad continuous corrugated sheath
cable, with or without PVC jacketing, as is appropriate for the installation.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
METAL CLAD CABLE (TYPE MC) AND FITTINGS Job Number 2210142.00
26 05 34 - 2/3
B. Connectors shall be of steel or malleable iron and shall be a squeeze type clamp connector with a
locknut for non-jacketed metal clad cable. Compression gland type connectors shall be used for
jacketed metal clad cable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION – POWER AND LIGHTING SYSTEMS WIRING
A. All wiring shall be installed in compliance with the latest version of the National Electrical Code and all
other applicable codes and standards as indicated elsewhere in these specifications.
B. Use of metal clad cable shall be permitted only for lighting, equipment and receptacle branch circuits.
Metal clad cable shall not be permitted in locations designated to be hazardous Class I, II or III.
C. Metal clad cable shall be permitted only for motor circuits where the motor being served is less than
½ HP and rated for 120V, single phase. Metal clad cable is not permitted for HVAC equipment and
controls.
D. Metal clad cable shall only be installed concealed within walls and above ceiling interstitial spaces.
Where there is no ceiling interstitial space, metal clad cable may not be used.
E. Bends in corrugated sheath metal clad cable shall be made so that the cable will not be damaged. The
radius of the curve of the inner edge of any bend shall not be less than seven (7) times the diameter of
the metallic sheath.
F. Metal clad cable is not permitted to connect branch circuits to fumehoods, gas storage cabinets, or
chemical storage cabinets.
G. No metal clad cable shall be installed in ventilation ducts or plenums.
H. Conductors in Enclosures: Provide neat and workmanlike installation with conductors tied with T&B
Ty-Rap, Virginia Plastics, or equal, nylon wire ties in terminal cabinets, gutters and similar locations.
3.02 FITTINGS
A. Fittings used for connecting metal clad cable to boxes, light fixtures or other equipment shall be UL
listed and identified for such use.
B. Cable preparation for installation of fittings shall follow manufacturer’s instructions. The manufacturer’s
specialized tools shall be used for preparing cable ends for installation of fittings.
C. The cable end shall be cut square to ensure flush seating of the cable into the fitting. Fitting securement
screws shall be properly torqued. Cable ends shall be fitted with insulating bushings intended for the
type of metal clad cable being installed.
D. For jacketed metal clad cable, the outer jacket shall be removed to the length specified by the fitting
manufacturer’s instructions. Remove oils or solvent by-products from the outer jacket of the cable. The
cable end shall be cut square to ensure flush seating of the cable into the fitting. The fitting gland nut
shall be properly torqued to the manufacturer’s specifications.
3.03 ARRANGEMENT AND SUPPORT
A. Metal clad cables shall be run parallel with walls or structural elements. Vertical runs shall be plumb;
horizontal runs level and parallel with structure, as appropriate. Groups shall be racked together neatly
with both straight runs and bends parallel and uniformly spaced.
B. Metal clad cables shall be securely fastened in place at intervals of not more than six feet, with suitable
clamps or fasteners of approved type, and all vertical conduits shall be properly supported to present a
mechanically rigid and secure installation.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 METAL CLAD CABLE (TYPE MC) AND FITTINGS
26 05 34 - 3/3
C. Metal clad cable installed parallel to framing members, such as studs, joist, or rafters, shall be supported
so that the nearest outside surface of the cable is not less than 1-1/4 inches from the nearest edge of
the framing member. Where this distance cannot be maintained, the cable shall be protected by a steel
plate, sleeve, or equivalent that is at least 1/16-inch thick.
D. Maintain at least 6-inch clearance between metal clad cables and other piping systems. Maintain
12-inch clearance between metal clad cables and heat sources such as flues, steam pipes, and heating
appliances.
E. No metal clad cable shall be fastened to other conduits or pipes or installed so as to prevent the ready
removal of other pipes or ducts for repairs.
F. Individual metal clad cables hung from roof structure or structural ceiling shall be supported by split-ring
hangers and wrought-iron hanger rods. Where three (3) or more metal clad cables are suspended from
the ceiling in parallel runs, use steel channels, Kindorf, Unistrut or equal, hung from 1/2-inch rods to
support the conduits. The conduit on these channels shall be held in place with metal clad cable clamps
designed for the particular channel that is used.
G. Secure metal clad cable support racks to concrete walls and ceilings by means of cast-in-place anchors;
die-cast, rustproof alloy expansion shields; or cast flush anchors. Wooden plugs, plastic inserts, or
gunpowder driven inserts shall not be used as a base to secure conduit supports.
H. Metal clad cable shall be supported immediately on each side of a bend and not more that one (1) foot
from an enclosure where a run of metal clad cable ends.
I. Use of cable tray:
1. The sum of the cross-sectional areas of all cables shall not exceed the maximum allowable cable fill
area allowed by NEC Tables 392.9, 392.9(E) and 392.9(F).
2. Cables shall be installed in a single layer with a maintained spacing of not less than one cable
diameter between cables.
3. Ampacity of cables installed in cable tray shall meet the requirements of NEC 392.11.
3.04 INSPECTION AND TESTS
A. General: The electrical installation shall be inspected and tested to ensure safety to building occupants
and operating personnel and conformity to Code
B. Measure and record insulation resistance of all power and control wiring including insulation resistance
of all equipment:
1. The insulation resistance of each circuit phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground shall be measured.
For circuits rated less than 600 volts, the resistance shall not be less than 2 megohms.
2. Systems rated above 240 volts shall be tested with a 1000-volt Megohmeter. Circuits rated
240 volts and below shall be tested with a 500-volt Megohmeter. The D.C. potential shall be
applied for thirty (30) seconds.
C. The contractor shall record test readings and submit certified test to the Engineer for review and
acceptance approval before energizing respective circuits.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 FLOOR OUTLET DEVICES POKE THROUGH
26 05 39 - 1/2
SECTION 26 05 39
FLOOR OUTLET DEVICES POKE THROUGH
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide, poke through type, floor outlet devices, for Power and Communications in quantities required
at locations as verified by the Architect.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. In general, all floor boxes shall be of size and type indicated on drawings herein specified. All floor
boxes shall be located as directed by architect or as dimensioned on the architectural drawings. If
drawings are not dimensioned, coordinate exact location prior to rough-in.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Walker
B. O.Z./Gedney
C. Hubbell
D. Square D
2.02 FIRE RATING
A. Poke through assembly shall have a one, two, three or four hour fire resistance rating, as required by
Building Construction Code, and be U.L. listed for this rating. Assembly shall, in addition, have available
an abandonment device, U.L. listed, at this rating.
2.03 POKE THROUGH ASSEMBLY
A. Shall consist of a pedestal floor outlet assembly, raceway through floor and a fire-rated center coupling
factory equipped with inorganic chemical panels that will expand on exposure to high heat to form a
flame, smoke, toxic fume and waterproof seal within the entire assembly. Shall have a means to level
assembly in place.
2.04 SERVICE OUTLET FITTINGS
A. All Service Outlet Fittings shall be of the same Manufacturer. Finish shall be satin aluminum, unless
noted otherwise. Fittings shall be secured type to prevent spinning of fittings.
B. Telephone Service Fittings: Shall be of a type approved by the local Telephone Company. Bushed-type
fittings shall be of the same design as the receptacle service fittings, but with 1-1/4" inside diameter,
bushed-opening, faced so that the cable leaves the bushing in a horizontal plane.
C. Receptacle Service Fittings: Shall have back-to-back duplex receptacles with configuration and
requirements in accordance with Section 26 27 26. Receptacle color: White unless otherwise noted.
D. Computer, alarm and other in-house low voltage systems service fittings to be identical to telephone
fittings.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
FLOOR OUTLET DEVICES POKE THROUGH Job Number 2210142.00
26 05 39 - 2/2
E. Combination Power and Telephone Fittings: Shall comply with above except with single duplex
receptacle. Shall contain separate Raceways for Telephone and Power, or barrier in single Raceway
with minimum 3/4" space for telephone cable.
2.05 PLATES
A. All sides of all service fittings to have blanking plate, device plate or low potential plate.
B. Abandonment plates shall have same fire rating as complete assembly.
2.06 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING
A. Branch circuit wiring shall conform to applicable Sections of these Specifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Coordinate with Architect/Engineer for exact location of all devices. Adjust outlet fittings to level with
floor and secure. Install per Manufacturer's Instructions; as required to maintain U.L. listing; and per
related Sections of these Specifications.
B. Coordinate cover orientation with architect prior to installation.
3.02 SERVICE OUTLET FITTINGS
A. Number: Assemblies shall be provided in the quantities indicated by the Contract Documents.
Installation of the number of devices shown on the Drawings shall be at locations as shown on the final
Drawings and/or as directed by the Architect/Engineer; with no additional cost to the Owner.
B. All indicated outlets shall be completely wired and connected; at no additional cost to the Owner;
regardless of the selection of location by the Architect/Engineer. Not more than eight 120 volt
receptacle outlet fittings shall be connected to a single circuit unless explicitly shown otherwise.
3.03 CORE DRILLING FLOORS
A. All necessary Coring of Floor for the installation of service fittings shall be made in a neat workmanlike
manner and as recommended by the Manufacturer. Floor Construction or finish damaged by the
installation of fittings shall be patched or replaced to original condition or as directed by the
Architect/Engineer.
B. When Core Drilling over an occupied floor make all provisions required to prevent damage to that floor.
Repair or replace all items damaged at no cost to Owner.
3.04 ADDITIONAL FITTINGS
A. Service Fittings and Plates, which the Architect/Engineer does not direct to be installed, shall be turned
over to the Owner for future use. Obtain receipt for these surplus fittings and forward a copy to
Architect/Engineer.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM STUDIES
26 05 73 - 1/5
SECTION 26 05 73
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM STUDIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Conform to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and related work in other Divisions for
all work in Division 26. See Division 01 for sequence of work.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions
B. Section 26 24 16 – Panelboards
C. Section 26 24 19 – Motor Controllers
D. Section 26 28 13 – Fuses
E. Section 26 28 16 – Disconnects and Fused Switches
1.03 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section includes the requirements for the contractor to perform electrical system studies based on
the selected electrical equipment.
B. The required studies include but are not limited to a Coordination Study and an Arc Flash Assessment
Study.
C. Each of the studies performed shall be based on the actual equipment to be installed. Any revisions of
the selected equipment shall result in an updated study with the revised equipment submitted for
review and approval prior to ordering equipment.
D. If the contractor installs different equipment than was included in the approved electrical system
studies, the owner reserves the right to require the contractor to replace the non-approved electrical
equipment at no additional cost to the owner.
E. The contractor shall provide all studies in agreement with all applicable codes and standards. If a
specific code is applicable to the electrical system being modeled, the code shall be referenced and the
portion of the electrical system impacted shall be noted.
1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. During the Shop Drawing process and prior to ordering electrical equipment, the contractor shall submit
an Electrical System Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study. The Coordination study shall
be submitted with the product data for all devices included in the coordination study and shall be
formatted as indicated in Paragraph 2.01.
B. After the electrical system has been installed and is ready for energization, the Contractor shall provide
an Arc Flash Assessment Study. The Arc Flash Assessment shall be submitted for approval prior to
substantial completion. Once the Arc Flash Assessment Study is approved, the Contractor shall print and
install the approved Arc Flash notification labels on all equipment containing overcurrent protective
devices. Labels installed outdoors shall be suitable for outdoor installation. The Arc Flash Assessment
Study shall be assembled as outlined in Paragraph 2.02.
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. All Studies shall be prepared by a qualified professional electrical engineer.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM STUDIES Job Number 2210142.00
26 05 73 - 2/5
1.06 DEFINITIONS
A. For the purposes of this section, overcurrent device coordination shall be defined in two levels as
follows:
1. Coordinated = Full coordination outside of the instantaneous region of the overcurrent devices.
2. Selectively Coordinated = Full coordination including the instantaneous region of the overcurrent
devices.
1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. The contractor shall provide to the owner the following information to be included in the Operation and
Maintenance Manual:
1. Final Arc Flash Assessment Study submitted in accordance with the requirements outlined in
Specification 26 00 00 Electrical General Conditions.
2. The electronic copy shall also include a sub-folder with the software model used to perform the
calculations. The model shall include all files necessary to access and review the model
electronically. The Contractor shall include a Text File in the directory labeled
“MODEL_INFORMATION.TXT” which includes the following:
a. Project Name
b. Electrical Contractor Name
c. Software used to model the system including version
d. Date the model was last updated
e. Contact information for the individual/organization who prepared the model.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
A. The contractor shall submit an Electrical System Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study
during the Shop Drawing submittal phase of the project prior to ordering equipment with overcurrent
protective devices. The Coordination study shall be submitted with the product data for all devices
included in the coordination study.
B. All overcurrent protection devices shall be provided as a coordinated system by the manufacturer. Any
cases where the selected manufacturer is unable to coordinate two overcurrent devices in series due to
the sizes indicated in the design, the engineer shall be notified and a recommended coordination
solution provided by the manufacturer prior to or during the submittal phase. For overcurrent
protection devices 400A and larger where the manufacturer is unable to provide a coordinated system,
the overcurrent protection devices shall include Long-Time/Short-Time/Instantaneous (LSI) time delay
and ampacity settings minimum.
C. Unless noted otherwise, when a main service overcurrent device with adjustable Ground Fault trip has
been specified, the next level feeder overcurrent devices shall also include adjustable Ground Fault trip.
The Coordination Study shall also provide recommended settings for all adjustable Ground Fault trip
devices.
D. All emergency system overcurrent protection devices shall be selectively coordinated as defined by
applicable codes and standards (2020 NEC 700.32 and WAC 296-46B-700). The scope of the selectively
coordinated system shall be as defined by applicable local, state, and federal codes.
E. For modifications/additions to existing electrical systems, at a minimum the Coordination Study shall
include:
1. All new electrical equipment containing overcurrent devices
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM STUDIES
26 05 73 - 3/5
2. The existing overcurrent protective devices immediately downstream of the new electrical
equipment
3. All existing overcurrent protective devices upstream of the new electrical equipment to the main
electrical utility service entrance.
F. The Protective Device Coordination Study shall present the following information in an organized
report:
1. Coordination Study Title Page shall include:
a. Project Name
b. Electrical Contractor name
c. Date Study was performed
d. Study Type (ie Overcurrent Device Coordination Study)
e. Name/Company/Contact information for organization performing the study
f. Analysis software used to perform the study including version
2. Coordination Study Executive Summary shall include a brief project description, an overall
description of the electrical system, and a listing of any items that may need resolution. If specific
Code requirements exist for any portion of the electrical system, they shall be noted in addition to
how the requirement was implemented.
3. Coordination Study Analysis shall include a detailed outline of the overcurrent device coordination
analysis. Time Current Curves shall be provided for each unique coordination path in the electrical
system from the Main service protective device to the largest branch circuit breaker. Each Time
Current Curve shall be uniquely labeled. The report shall include a list of the overcurrent devices
included in each Time Current Curve and a description of any potential un-coordinated devices
with the potential impact on the electrical system due to the lack of coordination.
4. Conclusion shall include a summary of overall protective device coordination for the electrical
system being modeled. The Conclusion shall also include a table listing all devices with adjustable
settings and the recommended settings based on the coordination study. Any uncoordinated
electrical devices that include recommended revisions shall be listed with the proposed system
revision.
5. As an Appendix, the Coordination Study shall include a one-line diagram of the modeled system
with each bus and overcurrent device identified. The naming of the devices in the one-line
diagram shall exactly match the device names in the report and time-current curves.
2.02 ARC FLASH ASSESSMENT STUDY
A. After the electrical system has been installed and is ready for energization, the Contractor shall provide
an Arc Flash Assessment Study. The Arc Flash Assessment Study shall be submitted for approval prior to
substantial completion. Once the Arc Flash Assessment Study is approved, the Contractor shall print and
install the approved Arc Flash notification labels on all equipment containing overcurrent protective
devices.
B. The Arc Flash Assessment Study shall include the following at a minimum:
1. Study Title Page shall include the following information
a. Project Name
b. Date Study was performed
c. Name/Company/Contact information for organization performing the study
d. Analysis software used to perform the study including version
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM STUDIES Job Number 2210142.00
26 05 73 - 4/5
2. An Index shall be provided listing each Section included in the Arc Flash Assessment Report.
3. Study Executive Summary shall a brief overview of each section of the Study including any
recommended revisions to the electrical system based on the results of the Study. The overview
shall include at a minimum, any pieces of equipment with a calculated fault current that exceeds
the equipment rating, a listing of any overcurrent devices with revised settings, a brief listing of
un-coordinated equipment that necessitate revisions, and a listing of each piece of equipment
with a Dangerous level of Arc Flash energy.
C. Each of the following sections and appendices shall include a dedicated Cover Page outlining the
contents of the Section.
D. Section #1 Fault Analysis shall include an updated Fault Current Analysis of the entire electrical system.
The Fault Analysis shall include as a minimum the following information:
1. The available fault current at the Utility for the fault analysis shall be based on the actual Utility
fault current and not an assumption. For electrical distribution systems that are primary metered,
the study shall include the primary electrical system back to the point of service including but not
limited to actual cable lengths/sizes/types and any overcurrent protective devices. The study shall
include correspondence from the utility showing the available fault current at the utility service
point in the appendices.
2. Updated cable size/type/length shall be included in the report based on the installed conditions.
3. Updated transformer information based on the installed transformer nameplates
4. Current limiting fuses shall be indicated where applicable based on the actual equipment
installed.
5. Large motors (>50hp) shall be included in the analysis. Smaller motors shall be grouped together
at each panel/switchboard.
6. A Table shall be provided with a comparison of calculated fault current to equipment fault rating
for each piece of equipment containing overcurrent protective devices. The calculated fault
current shall be adjusted as necessary based on the calculated X/R ratio.
7. Any equipment that is found to have a rating less than the calculated/adjusted fault current shall
be specifically indicated along with recommended corrective action.
8. The Fault Analysis shall include the system model one-line diagram with the following information
indicated:
a. Utility connection point with available fault current and X/R ratio
b. Cables with conductor size, length, parallel count, raceway type
c. Transformers with impedance, kva, X/R ratio
d. Large motors (>50hp). Smaller motors shall be grouped together at each panel/switchboard.
e. Electrical equipment with overcurrent protective devices showing calculated fault current
E. Section #2 Protective Device Coordination Study shall include an updated Coordination Study for the
entire distribution system as outlined in Paragraph 2.01. The updated coordination study shall optimize
settings to provide coordination while reducing the Arc Flash energy present.
F. Section #3 Arc Flash Assessment shall include a description of the method used to calculate the Arc
Flash energy present and the assumptions of the study. The following additional items shall be included
in the study as a minimum:
1. Table summarizing the Arc flash energy present at each pieces of equipment and the conditions
under which the incident energy occurred. The table shall also include the arcing time, fault
current, upstream overcurrent device, and any notes for different conditions present.
2. A template Arc Flash label with each piece of information included on the label explained.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM STUDIES
26 05 73 - 5/5
3. Sample Arc Flash Labels for each piece of equipment in the model showing the code required
information.
G. Appendix A shall include that correspondence from the electric utility providing the available fault
current used in the analysis.
H. Appendix B shall include cut sheets for all electrical equipment included in the Arc Flash Assessment
study.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 TESTING/VERIFICATION
A. The contractor shall provide testing of each piece of electrical equipment with adjustable overcurrent
protective devices to verify proper operation in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
The test reports shall indicate the following at a minimum:
1. Equipment name
2. Date of the test
3. Name and organization of the individual performing the testing
4. Test results. Any equipment failing the testing shall be replaced at no additional cost to the
owner.
5. As-Left settings. These settings shall be as indicated in the Arc Flash Assessment Study. Any
settings that vary from the Study shall be either updated in the Study including a revised submittal
package or shall be corrected in the field and an updated test report provided.
3.02 FIELD APPLIED ARC FLASH LABELS
A. After the Arc Flash Assessment Study is approved and the electrical equipment has been successfully
tested, the Contractor shall provide Arc Flash and Shock Hazard warning labels on all electrical devices
containing overcurrent protection stating the following information at a minimum:
1. PPE level of protection
2. Incident energy (cal/cm2) at 24” from the equipment unless specified otherwise by the
Owner/Engineer
3. Flash hazard boundary
4. Glove class
5. Limited approach distance
6. Restricted approach distance
7. Prohibited approach distance
B. Labels shall be permanently affixed to the equipment or wiring method and shall not be hand written.
C. The label shall be of sufficient durability to withstand the installed environment. Labels installed
outdoors shall be suitable for outdoor installation with no degradation due to sun light or precipitation.
D. The label shall meet ANSI Z535 guidelines and requirements.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23 - 1/10
SECTION 26 09 23
LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 INTRODUCTION
. The work covered in this section is subject to all of the requirements in the general conditions of the
specifications. Contractor shall coordinate all of the work in this section with all the trades covered in
the other sections of the specification to provide a complete and operative system.
A. Electrical Contractor shall provide all support, labor and material to accommodate commissioning, per
Section 01 91 13.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of lighting control system work is indicated by drawings and by the requirements of this section.
It is defined to include low voltage lighting control panels, switch inputs, and wiring.
B. The work covered by this section of the specifications shall be coordinated with the related work as
specified elsewhere under the project specifications.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. UL & ULC Approvals: The control panels shall be tested and listed under the UL 916 Energy
Management Equipment standards by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
B. NEC Compliance: The control system shall comply with all applicable National Electrical Codes regarding
electrical wiring standards.
C. NEMA Compliance: The control system shall comply with all applicable portions of the NEMA standards
regarding the types of electrical equipment enclosures.
D. Component Pre-Testing: All control equipment shall undergo strict inspection standards. The
equipment shall be previously tested and burned-in at the factory prior to installation.
E. System Checkout: A factory-trained technician or factory-authorized personnel or Contractor shall
functionally test the control system and verify performance after installation.
F. Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years’ experience in control systems. These
specifications are based on the nLight Network Control System from Sensor Switch, an Acuity Brands
Company. Substitutions of the specified equipment will be considered providing sufficient
documentation is provided to the Engineer which certifies that the equipment qualification meets the
requirements of this specification.
G. Similar systems manufactured by Encelium, Hubbell (NX Networked Lighting Controls) and Wattstopper
(Digital Lighting Management, DLM) are acceptable. The listing of any manufacturer as “acceptable”
does not imply automatic approval. It is the sole responsibility of the electrical contractor to ensure that
any price quotations received and submittals made are for devices and systems which meet or exceed
the specifications included herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on lighting control system and components.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings of lighting control system and accessories including, but not
necessarily limited to, the low voltage relay panels, power wiring, and switch inputs.
1. Complete layout of every space with the parts identified and wire routing
2. Riser Diagram/System Diagram
3. Switch Input Wiring
4. Example Contractor Startup/Commissioning Worksheet
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL Job Number 2210142.00
26 09 23 - 2/10
5. Hardware and Software Operation Manuals
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate lighting control components to form an integrated interconnection of compatible
components.
B. Coordinate lighting controls with BAS (building automation system) either through IP based
intercommunication of system or hardwired auxiliary relay outputs.
C. The installing contractor shall be responsible for a complete and functional system in accordance with all
applicable local and national codes.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. All devices in lighting control system shall have a 5-year warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
. System shall have an architecture that is based upon three main concepts:
1. Intelligent lighting control devices
2. Standalone lighting control zones
3. Network backbone for remote or time-based operation.
A. Intelligent lighting control devices shall consist of one or more basic lighting control components;
occupancy sensors, photocell sensors, relays, dimming outputs, manual switch stations, and manual
dimming stations. Combining one or more of these components into a single device enclosure should be
permissible so as to minimize overall device count of system.
B. System must be able to interface directly with intelligent LED luminaires such that only CAT-5e cabling is
required to interconnect luminaires with control components such as sensors and switches.
C. Intelligent lighting control devices shall communicate digitally, require <4 mA of current to function
(Graphic wall stations excluded), and possess RJ-45 style connectors.
D. Lighting control zones shall consist of one or more intelligent lighting control components, be capable of
stand-alone operation, and be capable of being connected to a higher-level network backbone.
E. Devices within a lighting control zone shall be connected with CAT-5e low voltage cabling in any order.
F. Lighting control zone shall be capable of automatically configuring itself for default operation without
any start-up labor required.
G. Individual lighting zones must continue to provide a user defined default level of lighting control in the
event of a system communication failure with the backbone network or the management software
becoming unavailable.
H. Power for devices within a lighting control zone shall come from either resident device already present
for switching (relay device) or dimming purposes, or from the network backbone. Standalone “bus
power supplies” shall not be required in all cases.
I. All switching and dimming for a specific lighting zone shall take place within the devices located in the
zone itself (i.e. not in a remotely located devices such as panels) to facilitate system robustness and
minimize wiring requirements. Specific applications that require centralized or remote switching shall be
capable of being accommodated.
J. System shall have one primary wall mounted network control “gateway” devices that are capable of
accessing and controlling connected system devices and linking into an Ethernet LAN.
K. System shall use “bridge” devices that route communication and distribute power for up to 8 directly
connected lighting zones together for purposes of decreasing system wiring requirements.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23 - 3/10
L. System shall have a web-based software management program that enables remote system control,
status monitoring, and creation of lighting control profiles.
M. Individual lighting zones shall be capable of being segmented into several “local” channels of occupancy,
photocell, and switch functionality for more advanced configurations and sequences of operation.
N. Devices located in different lighting zones shall be able to communicate occupancy, photocell, and
switch information via either the wired backbone.
O. System shall be capable of operating a lighting control zone according to several sequences of
operation. System shall be able to change a spaces sequence of operation according to a time schedule
so as to enable customized time-of-day, day-of-week utilization of a space. Note operating modes
should be utilized only in manners consistent with local energy codes.
1. Auto-On / Auto-Off (via occupancy sensors):
a. Zones with occupancy sensors automatically turn lights on when occupant is detected.
b. Zones with occupancy and/or photocell sensors turn lights off when vacancy or sufficient
daylight is detected.
c. Pressing a switch will turn lights off. The lights will remain off regardless of occupancy until
switch is pressed again, restoring the sensor to Automatic On functionality.
2. Manual-On / Auto-Off (also called Semi-Automatic, Vacancy Sensing or Occupant Sending Device
set to Vacancy Mode):
a. Pushing a switch will turn lights on.
b. Zones with occupancy and/or photocell sensors turn lights off when vacancy or sufficient
daylight is detected.
3. Manual-On to Auto-On/Auto-Off:
a. Pushing a switch will turn lights on.
b. After initial lights on, zones with occupancy and/or photocell sensors turn lights on/off
according to occupancy/vacancy and/or daylight conditions.
c. Sequence can be reset via scheduled (ex. daily each morning) events
4. Auto-to-Override On:
a. Zones with occupancy sensors automatically turn lights on when occupant is detected.
b. Zone lighting then goes into an override on state for a set amount of time or until the next
time event returns the lighting to an auto-off style of control.
c. Sequence can be reset via scheduled (ex. daily each morning) events
5. Manual-to-Override On:
a. Pushing a switch will turn lights on.
b. Zone lighting then goes into an override on state for a set amount of time or until the next
time event returns the lighting to an auto-off style of control.
Sequence can be reset via scheduled (ex. daily each morning) events
6. Auto On / Predictive Off:
a. Zones with occupancy sensors automatically turn lights on when occupant is detected.
b. Zones with occupancy and/or photocell sensors turn lights off when vacancy or sufficient
daylight is detected.
1. If switch is pressed, lights turn off and a short “exit timer” begins. After timer expires,
sensor scans the room to detect whether occupant is still present. If no occupancy is
detected, zone returns to auto-on. If occupancy is detected, lights must be turned on via
the switch.
P. Control software shall enable logging of system performance data and presenting useful information in a
web-based graphical format and downloadable to .CSV files.
Q. Control software shall enable integration with a BMS via BACnet IP.
R. Desktop or Laptop Computer shall be furnished by the school district, and software will be loaded, and
tested, during system start-up and programming by factory authorized technician.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL Job Number 2210142.00
26 09 23 - 4/10
2.02 INDIVIDUAL DEVICE SPECIFICATIONS
A. Control Module (Gateway):
1. Control module shall be a device that facilitates communication and time-based control of
downstream network devices and linking into an Ethernet.
2. Devices shall have a user interface that is capable of wall mounting, powered by low voltage, and
have a touch screen.
a. Control device shall have three RJ-45 ports for connection to other backbone devices
(bridges) or directly to lighting control devices.
b. Device shall automatically detect all devices downstream of it.
c. Device shall have a standard and astronomical internal time clock.
d. Device shall have one RJ-45 10/100 BaseT Ethernet connection.
e. Device shall have a USB port
f. Each control gateway device shall be capable of linking 1500 devices to the management
software.
g. Device shall be capable of using a dedicated or DHCP assigned IP address.
h. Network Control Gateway device shall be the following Sensor Switch model Series:
i. GWY2
B. Networked System Occupancy Sensors:
1. Occupancy sensors system shall sense the presence of human activity within the desired space and
fully control the on/off function of the lights.
2. Sensors shall utilize passive infrared (PIR) technology, which detects occupant motion, to initially
turn lights on from an off state; thus, preventing false on conditions. Ultrasonic or Microwave
based sensing technologies shall not be accepted.
3. For applications where a second method of sensing is necessary to adequately detect maintained
occupancy (such as in rooms with obstructions), a sensor with an additional “dual” technology shall
be used.
4. Dual technology sensors shall have one of its two technologies not require motion to detect
occupancy. Acceptable dual technology includes PIR/Microphonics (also known as Passive Dual
Technology or PDT) which both looks for occupant motion and listens for sounds indicating
occupants. Sensors where both technologies detect motion (PIR/Ultrasonic) shall not be
acceptable.
5. All sensing technologies shall be acoustically passive meaning they do not transmit sounds waves
of any frequency (for example in the Ultrasonic range), as these technologies have the potential for
interference with other electronic devices within the space (such as electronic white board
readers). Acceptable detection technologies include Passive Infrared (PIR), and/or Microphonics
technology. Ultrasonic or Microwave based sensing technologies shall not be accepted.
6. Communication and Class 2 low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard CAT-5
low voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors.
7. All sensors shall have two RJ-45 ports or capable of utilizing a splitter.
8. All sensors shall have the ability to detect when it is not receiving valid communication (via CAT-5
connections) and blink its LED in a pattern to visually indicate of a potential wiring issue
9. Every sensor parameter shall be available and configurable remotely from the software and locally
via the device push-button.
10. Sensors shall be able to function together with other sensors in order to provide expanded
coverage areas by simply daisy-chain wiring together the units with CAT-5 cabling.
11. Sensors shall be equipped with an automatic override for 100-hour burn-in of lamps. This feature
must be available at any time for lamp replacements.
12. Network system shall also have ceiling, fixture, recessed, & corner mounted sensors available.
13. Sensors shall be the following Sensor Switch model numbers, with device options as specified:
nCM PDT 10 (ceiling mounted) or nWV PDT 16 (wall mounted).
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23 - 5/10
C. Networked System Daylight (Photocell and or Dimming) Sensors:
1. Photocell shall provide for an on/off set-point, and a deadband to prevent the artificial light from
cycling. Delay shall be incorporated into the photocell to prevent rapid response to passing clouds.
2. Photocell and dimming sensor’s set-point and deadband shall be automatically calibrated through
the sensor’s microprocessor by initiating an “Automatic Set-point Programming” procedure. Min
and max dim settings as well as set-point may be manually entered.
3. Deadband setting shall be verified and modified by the sensor automatically every time the lights
cycle to accommodate physical changes in the space (i.e., furniture layouts, lamp depreciation, or
lamp outages).
4. Sensor shall be the following Sensor Switch model numbers, with device options as specified: nCM
ADC X (on/off, 0-10 VDC dimming)
D. Networked System Power (Relay) Packs:
1. Dimming Power Pack shall incorporate one Class 1 relays, contribute low voltage power to the rest
of the system, and provide 0-10 VDC dimming output
2. Power Packs shall accept 120 or 277 VAC (or optionally 347 VAC), be plenum rated, and provide
Class 2 power to the system.
3. All devices shall have two RJ-45 ports.
4. Every Power Pack parameter shall be available and configurable remotely from the software and
locally via the device push-button.
5. Power Pack shall securely mount to junction location through a threaded ½ inch chase nipple or be
capable of being secured within a luminaire ballast channel. Plastic clips into junction box shall not
be accepted. All Class 1 wiring shall pass through chase nipple into adjacent junction box without
any exposure of wire leads. Note: UL Listing under Energy Management or Industrial Control
Equipment automatically meets this requirement, whereas Appliance Control Listing does not
meet this safety requirement
6. Auxiliary relay pack shall provide cry contact output for connection to HVAC system.
7. Power (Relay) Packs and Supplies shall be the following Sensor Switch model Series: nPP16 D
(Power Pack w/ 16A relay, and 0-10VDC dimming output); nAR 40 (Low voltage auxiliary relay pack)
E. Networked LED Luminaires:
1. Networked LED luminaire shall have a mechanically integrated control device
2. Networked LED luminaire shall be able to digitally network directly to other network control
devices (sensors, photocells, switches, dimmers)
3. Networked LED luminaire shall provide low voltage power to other networked control devices
4. System shall be able to turn on/off LED luminaire without using a relay
5. System shall be able to maintain constant lumen output over the specified life of the LED luminaire
(also called lumen compensation) by varying the input control power (and thus saving up to 20%
power usage).
6. System shall indicate (via a blink warning) when the LED luminaire has reached its expected life (in
hrs.).
7. nLight enabled luminaires will be noted in the fixture schedule.
F. Networked System Wall Switches & Dimmers:
1. Devices shall recess into single-gang switch box and fit a standard GFI opening.
2. Communication and low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard CAT-5 low
voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors.
3. All devices shall have two RJ-45 ports.
4. All devices shall provide toggle switch control.
5. Devices shall be available in four colors (Ivory, White, Light Almond, Gray).
6. Devices with mechanical push-buttons shall provide tactile and LED user feedback.
7. Devices shall have custom button labeling as indicated on drawings.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL Job Number 2210142.00
26 09 23 - 6/10
8. Wall switches & dimmers shall be the following Sensor Switch model numbers, with device options
as specified:
a. nPOD (single on/off, capacitive touch, audible user feedback)
b. nPOD 2P (dual on/off, capacitive touch, audible user feedback)
c. nPODM (single on/off, push-buttons, LED user feedback)
d. nPODM 2P (dual on/off, push-buttons, LED user feedback)
e. nPODM DX (single on/off, single dimming raise/lower, push-buttons, LED user feedback)
f. nPODM 2P DX (dual on/off, dual dimming raise/lower, push-buttons, LED user feedback)
g. nPODM 4P (quad on/off, push-buttons, LED user feedback)
h. nPODM 4P DX (quad on/off, quad dimming raise-lower, push-buttons, LED user feedback)
G. Networked System Graphic Wall Station:
1. Device shall have a 3.5” full color touch screen for selecting up to 8 programmable lighting control
presets or acting as up to 16 on/off/dim control switches.
2. Device shall enable configuration of lighting presets, switched, and dimmers via password
protected setup screens.
3. Device shall enable user supplied .jpg screen saver image to be uploaded.
4. Device shall surface mount to single-gang switch box
5. Device shall have a micro-USB style connector for local computer connectivity.
6. Device shall have two RJ-45 ports for communication
7. Device shall be the following Sensor Switch model number:
8. nPOD GFX
H. Networked System Scene Controllers:
1. Device shall have two to four buttons for selecting programmable lighting control profiles or acting
as on/off switches.
2. Device shall recess into single-gang switch box and fit a standard GFI opening.
3. Devices shall provide LED user feedback.
4. Communication and Class 2 low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard CAT-5
low voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors.
5. All sensors shall have two RJ-45 ports.
6. Device shall be capable of reprogramming other devices in its zone so as to implement user
selected lighting scene.
7. Device shall be capable of selecting a lighting profile be run by the system’s upstream Gateway so
as to implement selected lighting profile across multiple zones (and not just its local zone).
8. Device shall have LEDs indicating current selection.
9. Scene Selector device shall be the following Sensor Switch model number:
a. nPODM 2S (2 Scene, push-button)
b. nPODM 4S (4 Scene, push-button)
c. nPODM 4S DX (4 Scene, push-button, On/Off/Raise/Lower)
I. Communication Bridges:
1. Device shall surface mount to a standard 4” x 4” square junction box.
2. Device shall have 8 RJ-45 ports.
3. Device shall be capable of aggregating communication from multiple lighting control zones for
purposes of minimizing backbone wiring requirements back to Control Gateway.
4. Device shall be powered with Class 2 low voltage supplied locally via a directly wired power supply
or delivered via a CAT-5 cabled connection.
5. Device shall be careful of redistributing power from its local supply and connect lighting control
zones with excess power to lighting control zones with insufficient local power. This architecture
also enables loss of power to a particular area to be less impactful on network lighting control
system.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23 - 7/10
6. Communication Bridge devices shall be the following Sensor Switch model numbers:
a. NBRG 8 (8 Ports)
J. IP & Building Management Interface
1. Shall be native BACnet and listed as a BACnet Building Controller.
2. HTML5 management through ENVYVISION
3. nLight ECLYPSE
2.03 EMERGENCY LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
A. Provide an Emergency Lighting Control Unit to allow standard lighting control device to control
emergency lighting in conjunction with normal lighting in any area within a building. Emergency Lighting
Control Unit shall be a UL 924 listed device that monitors a switched circuit providing normal lighting to
an area. The unit provides normal ON/OFF control of emergency lighting along with the normal lighting.
Upon normal power failure the emergency lighting circuit will close, forcing the emergency lighting ON
until normal power is restored. Features include:
1. 120/277 volts, 50/60 Hz, 20-amp ballast rating
2. Push to test button
3. Auxiliary contact for remote test or fire alarm system interface
2.04 DMX512 CONTROLLER
A. Provide a standalone entry-level controller enabling creation and playback directly at the LCD
touchscreen.
B. The controller shall feature an astronomical time clock for automating shows and expands the
controller’s features by accepting inputs from remote button stations, and button station contact
closure inputs.
C. Acuity Control - Easyl EZ Pro.
2.05 LIGHTING CONTROL PROFILES
A. Changes to the operation of the system shall be capable of being made in real-time or scheduled via
lighting control profiles. These profiles are outlines of settings that direct how a collection of devices
function for a defined time period.
B. Lighting control profiles shall be capable of being created and applied to a single device, zone of devices,
or customized group of zones.
C. All relays and dimming outputs shall be capable of being scheduled to track or ignore information
regarding occupancy, daylight, and local user switches via lighting control profiles.
D. Every device parameter (e.g. sensor time delay and photocell set-point) shall be configurable via a
lighting control profile.
E. All lighting control profiles shall be stored on the network control gateway device and on the software’s
host server.
F. Lighting control profiles shall be capable of being scheduled to run according to the following calendar
options: start date/hour/minute, end date/hour/minute, and sunrise/sunset +/- timed offsets.
G. Sunrise/sunset times shall be automatically derived from location information using an astronomical
clock.
H. Daylight savings time adjustments shall be capable of being performed automatically, if desired.
I. Lighting control profile schedules shall be capable of being given the following recurrence settings: daily,
weekday, weekend, weekly, monthly, and yearly.
J. Software shall provide a graphical tool for easily viewing scheduled lighting control profiles.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL Job Number 2210142.00
26 09 23 - 8/10
2.06 MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
A. Every device parameter (e.g. sensor time delay and photocell set-point) shall be available and
configurable remotely from the software
B. The following status monitoring information shall be made available from the software for all devices for
which it is applicable: current occupancy status, current PIR Status, current Microphonics Status,
remaining occupancy time delay(s), current photocell reading, current photocell inhibiting state,
photocell transitions time remaining, current dim level, device temperature, and device relay state(s).
C. The following device identification information shall be made available from the software: model
number, model description, serial number, manufacturing date code, custom label(s), and parent
network device.
D. A printable network inventory report shall be available via the software.
E. A printable report detailing all system profiles shall be available via the software.
F. Software shall require all users to login with a User Name and Password.
G. Software shall provide at least three permission levels for users.
H. All sensitive stored information and privileged communication by the software shall be encrypted.
I. All device firmware and system software updates must be available for automatic download and
installation via the internet.
J. Software shall be capable of managing systems interconnected via a WAN (wide area network)
2.07 BMS COMPATIBILITY
A. System shall provide a BACnet IP gateway as a downloadable software plug-in to its management
software. No additional hardware shall be required.
B. BACnet IP gateway software shall communicate information gathered by networked system to other
building management systems.
C. BACnet IP gateway software shall translate and forward lighting relay and other select control
commands from BMS system to networked control devices.
D. Sensorview software must be running on a computer connected to the nGWY2, with BACnet plug-in
enabled for this feature to function.
2.08 LIGHTING CONTROL APPLICATIONS
A. Unless relevant provisions of the applicable local Energy Codes are more stringent, provide a minimum
application of lighting controls as follows:
1. Space Control Requirements – Provide occupancy/vacancy sensors with Manual- or Partial-ON
functionality in all spaces except toilet rooms, storerooms, library stacks, or other applications
where hands-free operation is desirable and Automatic-ON occupancy sensors are more
appropriate. Provide Manual-ON occupancy/vacancy sensors for any enclosed office, conference
room and meeting rooms. For spaces with multiple occupants, or where line-of-sight may be
obscured, provide ceiling- or corner-mounted sensors and Manual-ON switches.
2. Daylit Areas – Provide daylight-responsive automatic control in all spaces (conditioned or
unconditioned) where daylight contribution is available as defined by relevant local building energy
code:
a. All luminaires within code-defined daylight zones shall be controlled separately from
luminaires outside of daylit zones.
b. Daytime setpoints for total ambient illumination (combined daylight and electric light) levels
that initiate dimming shall be programmed in compliance with relevant local building energy
codes.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23 - 9/10
c. Multiple-leveled switched daylight harvesting controls may be utilized for areas marked on
drawings.
d. Provide smooth and continuous daylight dimming for areas marked on drawings. Daylighting
control system may be designed to turn off electric lighting when daylight is at or above
required lighting levels, only if system functions to turn lamps back on at dimmed level, rather
than turning full-on prior to dimming.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
. A factory authorized manufacturer’s representative shall provide the electrical contractor a functional
overview of the lighting control system prior to installation. The contractor shall schedule the pre-
installation site visit after receipt of approved submittals to review the following:
1. Confirm the location and mounting of all digital devices, with special attention to placement of
occupancy and daylighting sensors.
2. Review the specifications for low voltage control wiring and termination.
3. Discuss the functionality and configuration of all products, including sequences of operation, per
design requirements.
4. Discuss requirements for integration with other trades.
A. Calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivity to guarantee proper detection of occupants and energy
savings.
1. Adjust time delay so that controlled area remains lighted while occupied.
B. Provide written or computer-generated documentation on the configuration of the system including
room by room description including:
1. Sensor parameters, time delays, sensitivities, and daylighting setpoints.
2. Sequence of operation, (e.g. manual ON, Auto OFF. etc.)
3. Load Parameters (e.g. blink warning, etc.)
C. Post start-up tuning – After 30 days from occupancy contractor shall adjust sensor time delays and
sensitivities to meet the Owner’s requirements. Provide a detailed report to the Architect / Owner of
post start-up activity.
3.02 COMMISSIONING SUPPORT SERVICES
A. On this project, a commissioning agent will be hired to verify the installation and programming of all
building systems, which includes the lighting control system. Manufacturer should include an extra day
of technician’s time to review the functionality and settings of the lighting control hardware with the
commissioning agent, including reviewing submittal drawings and ensuring that instructions on how to
configure each device are readily available. Manufacturer is NOT responsible for helping the
commissioning agent inspect the individual devices. It will be the commissioning agent’s responsibility to
create and complete any forms required for the commissioning process, although the manufacturer or
contractor may offer spreadsheets and/or printouts to assist the agent with this task.
B. The commissioning agent shall work with the electrical contractor during installation of the lighting
control hardware to become familiar with the specific products. The agent may also accompany the
manufacturer’s technicians during their start-up work to better understand the process of testing,
calibration and configuration of the products. However, the contractor and manufacturer shall ensure
that interfacing with the agent does not prevent them from completing the requirements outlined in
the contract documents.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL Job Number 2210142.00
26 09 23 - 10/10
3.03 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND DOCUMENTATION
A. Installation: The control system shall be installed and fully wired as shown on the plans by the installing
Contractor. The Contractor shall complete all electrical connections to all control circuits and override
wiring.
B. Documentation: The Contractor shall provide accurate "as-built" drawings to the Owner for correct
programming and proper maintenance of the control system. The "as-builts" shall indicate the load
controlled by each relay and the relay panel number.
C. Operation and Service Manuals: The factory shall supply all operation and service manuals as related to
the design of the control system.
3.04 PRODUCT SUPPORT AND SERVICE
A. Factory Support: Factory telephone support shall be available at no cost to the Owner. Factory
assistance shall consist of solving programming or application questions concerning the control
equipment. The factory shall maintain toll-free numbers for technical support for their customers.
3.05 START-UP & SUPPORT FEATURES
A. Upon completion of the installation, the manufacturer's factory authorized representative shall start up
and verify a complete fully functional system.
B. The electrical contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the electrical engineer with three
weeks written notice of the system start up and adjustment date.
C. Upon completion of the system start up, the factory-authorized technician shall provide the proper
training to the owner's personnel on the adjustment and maintenance of the system.
D. To facilitate start-up, all devices daisy-chained together (using CAT-5) shall automatically be grouped
together into a functional lighting control zone.
E. All lighting control zones shall be able to function according to default settings once adequate power is
applied and before any system software is installed.
F. Once software is installed, system shall be able to auto-discover all system devices without requiring any
commissioning.
G. All system devices shall be capable of being given user defined names.
H. All devices within the network shall be able to have their firmware reprogrammed remotely and without
being physically uninstalled for purposes of upgrading functionality at a later date.
I. All sensor devices shall have the ability to detect improper communication wiring and blink it’s LED in a
specific cadence as to alert installation/startup personnel.
3.06 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
A. The Contractor is responsible for complete installation of the system according to strict factory
standards and requirements. The following items shall be included requirements:
B. All system equipment shall operate in accordance with specification and industrial standard procedures.
C. An operational user program shall exist in the control system. The program shall execute and perform
all functions required to effectively operate the site according to the requirements.
D. Demonstration of program integrity during normal operation and pursuant to a power outage.
E. Contractor shall provide a minimum of three hours training on the operation and use of the control
system. Additional support services shall be negotiated between the Contractor and the building Owner
or manager.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 MOTOR CONTROLLERS
26 24 19 - 1/3
SECTION 26 24 19
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Work under this section includes all requirements for motor controls to be furnished under the
electrical portion of the work on all electrical motor driven equipment. Individually mounted starters
shall be provided by Division 26 Contractor. Motor controls shall conform to NEMA Standards for each
specific purpose.
B. The Division 26 Contractor shall furnish all motor controllers not included with equipment furnished
under other divisions of these specifications or by Owner. The Division 26 Contractor shall install all
motor controllers including all controllers not factory assembled into equipment furnished under other
divisions of these specifications or by Owner.
1.03 MOTOR VOLTAGE INFORMATION
A. Voltages available are 480 Volt, 3 phase or 208 Volt, 3 Phase, and 115 Volt Single Phase.
B. Circuits are designed (in general) for motors as follows:
1. Smaller than 1/2 H.P. - 115 Volts, Single Phase 1/2 H.P. and larger - 460 or 200 Volts, 3 Phase
C. Verify motor sizes and voltages provided under other divisions and notify General Contractor
immediately if any discrepancies are noted.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide motor protection switches of the appropriate NEMA size. For units not using NEMA rating, use
equivalent NEMA size.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MOTOR STARTERS
A. Magnetic Motor Starters: Unless noted otherwise, shall be full voltage non-reversing with three
overloads sized to suit nameplate amperes of motor served, motor "On" and "Off" pilot lights,
"Hands-Off-Auto" switch, and auxiliary contacts for interlocking.
B. Combination Motor Starter/Disconnect: Shall be fused switch type with all features of Paragraph A
above. In addition, provide disconnect switch auxiliary contacts for disconnection of externally
powered control circuits where applicable. Fuses shall be sized in accordance with motor
manufacturer's requirements.
C. Manual Starters: Shall be toggle switch or push-button type, lockable in the "Off" position, with
overload relays, pilot light and enclosure pursuant to Paragraph D below. Manual starters shall only be
used where specifically shown or called out on the drawings and only for single phase, fractional
horsepower motors.
D. Enclosures: All motor controllers shall be contained in an enclosure suitable for the environment in
which the controller is mounted, and shall be weatherproof when exposed to weather.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
MOTOR CONTROLLERS Job Number 2210142.00
26 24 19 - 2/3
E. Overload Devices: Shall be melting alloy or bimetallic type. One overload shall be provided for each
phase. Provisions shall be made for resetting the overload devices from outside the starter enclosure.
Provide ambient compensated overload devices only when the motor is at a constant temperature and
the controller is subject to a separate, varying temperature. Automatic reset overload devices are not
permitted.
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D
B. Allen Bradley
C. General Electric
D. Cutler-Hammer
E. Siemens
2.03 NAMEPLATES
A. Pursuant to Section 26 00 00, Paragraph 2.05, provide nameplates permanently attach (with screws on
NEMA 1 enclosures) on each controller, nameplates with the following information: Load served,
voltage, phase, short circuit rating, panel/circuit number and where applicable fuse size and type.
2.04 FAN SHUTDOWN RELAYS
A. Contractor shall provide relay(s) with sufficient contacts to shutdown all fans over 2000 cfm upon
receipt of Fire Alarm. See Section 28 31 00. Coordinate coil voltage with Fire Alarm System Supplier.
2.05 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION
A. Provide power factor correction capacitors for all motors 25 horsepower and above. Capacitor size
when indicated on the drawings is an approximation only. Final size shall be determined by the
Contractor based on the recommendations of the motor manufacturer to bring the power factor to
between 0.9 and 0.95. All capacitors are to be fused, with blown fuse indicators mounted on the front
of the unit. Provide discharge resistors when required by code.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FINISHED AREAS
A. In finished areas, mount motor protection switches flush and install suitable coverplates.
3.02 HEATERS
A. Install heaters co-related with full-load current of motors provided.
3.03 OVERLOADS
A. Set overload devices to suit motors provided.
3.04 SUPPORTS
A. Securely mount to equipment, wall or acceptable mounting frame.
3.05 FAN SHUTDOWN WIRING
A. Provide wiring interlock connections for all (over 2000 cfm) fan starter control circuits via Division 23
furnished fan shutdown relay to shutdown fans upon receipt of Fire Alarm.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 MOTOR CONTROLLERS
26 24 19 - 3/3
3.06 FAN SHUTDOWN WIRING
A. Provide wiring interlock connections for all (over 2000 cfm) fan starter control circuits via a relay to
shutdown fans upon receipt of Fire Alarm.
3.07 CONNECTION TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ON ROOFS
A. The Contractor shall coordinate all roofing penetrations with the general contractor and roofing
contractor to assure that the roofing warranty is maintained.
B. Attachment of conduits to the roof to serve mechanical equipment and devices shall comply with
Section 26 05 33.
3.08 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE RATINGS
A. The Division 26 Contractor shall verify that the nameplate ratings of the mechanical equipment, when
they arrive on site, are consistent with the ampacity called out on the drawings. The Contractor shall
bring any discrepancies to the Engineers attention prior to installation of conduit and wiring.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
26 27 26 - 1/4
SECTION 26 27 26
SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all wiring devices and plates.
B. No push-in terminals allowed.
C. All devices shall be white in color, unless otherwise noted. Device plates shall be stainless steel.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Hubbell
B. Pass & Seymour
C. Leviton
D. Cooper
2.02 SWITCHES
A. Emergency Push-Button Switches: Provide a red emergency push-button, momentary contact, yellow
enclosure with clear plastic cover. Reset shall be by twisting the push-button.
1. For shut-down of boilers: Switch shall be connected through an auxiliary contact tied to the boiler
power supply. Label shall read: “BOILER SHUT-DOWN”. The switch shall be located adjacent to an
exit door.
2. Approved Manufacturer: STI – Safety Technology International.
B. "Industrial Specification Grade", quiet type, rated 277-Volt, 20-Amp, unless otherwise noted, with
plastic handle. Single-pole, double-pole, 3-way, or locking type as required. Meets Federal Specification
WS-896. Provide matching styles and colors in other devices as required for the conditions of
installation. Hubbell CSB120, Eaton CSB120, Leviton 1221, and P&S 20AC1.
C. Interchangeable type shall be rated same as above.
D. LED Dimmer: LED 0-10V dimmer switch shall be compatible with supplied LED board and driver.
Dimmer shall have high and low end, field adjustable trim setting, and scene functions as described in
the Sequence of Operations noted on the plans. Provide with associated power pack for control.
E. Momentary Contact Line Voltage Switches: Single-pole, double-throw, 3-wire, normally open. Rating
same as above.
F. Key Operated: Hubbell HBL1221L (or equal) with 1209 Key. Provide 24 spare Keys.
G. Timer Switch: Provide electronic light timer switch where indicated on drawings. The timer switch shall
be connected to the room lighting and fan. The timer switch shall be programmable for time-out from
5 minutes to 2 hours. Set timer for standard 20 minutes time-out period, time scrolls up, flash off,
beeper on. Manufacturer: Watt Stopper – Inteli-switch Digital Time Switch.
H. Motor rated switches: Switches serving as motor disconnecting means shall be horsepower rated with
overload relays and meet requirements as stated above. See manual starters in Section 26 24 19,
‘Manual Starters’.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES Job Number 2210142.00
26 27 26 - 2/4
2.03 RECEPTACLES
A. In All Unfinished Areas & Non-Occupiable Spaces: Provide "Industrial Specification Grade", Duplex
NEMA 5-20R configuration (20-Amp, 120-Volt) unless shown otherwise. Must have “rivetless ground”
contact manufactured as an integral component of the external ground screw terminal. Meets Federal
Specification WC-596 Hubbell HBL5362, Cooper 5362, P&S 5362A, and Leviton 5362.
B. In All Finished Areas: Provide heavy-duty specification grade; general purpose 20-Amp. 125-Volt, NEMA
5-20R, 2-pole, 3-wire decora plus duplex receptacle, straight blade, commercial grade, self-grounding,
back and side wired - Leviton 16352W.
C. Self-Testing Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Duplex Receptacles: 20-Amp. 125-Volt ; 2-pole,
3-wire grounding; 10,000-Amps current interrupting; green light indicator when power is ‘on’; red light
indicator when device is in the tripped position; Red “EOL” (end of life) indicator with rapid flash when
the unit has reached end of life and/or cannot provide GFCI protection. Provide GFCI receptacles where
required by Code and as indicated on the plans.
D. Tamper-resistant duplex receptacle with (1) Type-A and one (1) Type-C USB charger: Duplex 20-Amp;
125-Volt; 5.1-Amp, 5-Volt USB charging capability - Leviton T5833.W.
E. Switched Receptacles: Switched receptacles shall be gray in color, smooth nylon face, and permanently
marked for use with automatic control systems, back- and side-wired, decora style - Leviton 16352-2PG
or Leviton G5362-2TG (GFCI).
F. Tamper resistant, Duplex NEMA 5-20R Configuration: Hubbell BR20WHITR, Leviton 5362-SGW, Cooper
TR8300W, or Leviton TDR20-W to match decora style installed in finished spaces per Paragraph B
above.
G. Weather Resistant (WR) / Ground Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Outdoor Duplex Receptacles:
NEMA 5-20R. Hubbell GFWRST20W or equal, for 20-Amp, 125-Volt AC.
H. Special Purpose Receptacles: For special purpose receptacles, see drawings for Voltage, amperage, and
phase. Provide with matching plug delivered to the Owner.
2.04 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Provide occupancy sensor switches for control of lighting as shown on the drawings. Sensors shall be
ceiling mounted to provide adequate coverage. Occupancy sensor shall be “Sensor Switch” Model
CM-PDT-R, complete with power pack PP-20-20P, Auxiliary Relay SP-20-20P and associated mounting
hardware. Sensors shall be wired and installed per Manufacturer’s direction to maintain switching and
circuits shown on drawings. Where multiple sensors are located in an individual room, sensors shall be
wired parallel with the relays such that either sensor will provide input to turn all lights on and reset
time delay. Where occupancy sensors are shown on the drawings to be wall mounted, provide WSD or
approved equal.
2.05 DEVICE PLATES
A. Plates for recessed boxes shall be Hubbell or Cooper Type 302 stainless steel. Attachment screws shall
match finish of plate. Plates for surface mounted boxes shall be of pressed stainless steel with size to fit
exactly the box used.
1. Where a duplex receptacle is indicated next to a USB receptacle, provide a dual-gang faceplate
and mount both devices in the same backbox under the same faceplate.
B. Exterior: Intermatic # WP1010MC, for vertical mount and # WP1010HMC for horizontal mount, or
equivalent for receptacles. Metal cover shall be lockable, raintight while-in-use.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
26 27 26 - 3/4
2.06 LABELING
A. For NEMA 5-20R receptacles, each device shall be identified with a clear label with black typing stating
the panel & circuit number.
B. For receptacles other than NEMA 5-20R, the cover plate shall have Ampere rating, Voltage, and phase
engraved on a phenolic label and attached to the cover plate.
2.07 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLY (WHEN SHOWN)
A. Provide assemblies complete, including necessary fittings and hardware with circuits as indicated on
Plans and outlet spacing as indicated. All assemblies shall contain ground wire. Wiremold or equal.
2.08 SPARE DEVICES
A. Provide the following spare devices:
Device Quantity
Single-pole switch 5
Duplex receptacle (each type used) 5
GFCI receptacle 3
20A, single-phase equipment connection 2
20A, three-phase equipment connection 2
B. Each spare device shall include 100-feet of conduit, wire, faceplate, and labor; all as required for a
complete installation. Location of these units to be determined by the Owner’s representative at the
site. Unused devices shall be turned over to the Owner.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 MOUNTING
A. Rigidly fasten each device to the outlet box at proper position with the wall to bring receptacle flush
with plate or switch handle the proper distance through the plate.
B. Occupancy sensors that are ceiling mounted shall be located a minimum of 4’-0” away from a
mechanical equipment diffuser.
3.02 ORIENTATION
Unless noted otherwise:
A. Set switches vertically with handle operating vertically, up position "ON" at +48" above finished floor
when measured to top of box.
B. Set receptacles vertically with ground slot down at +18" above finished floor.
C. Set exterior receptacles horizontally at +18" above finished grade.
3.03 DEVICE PLATES
A. Shall be stainless steel for each new wiring device and for each telephone and signal equipment outlet,
except where equipment mounted thereon covers the outlet box completely.
B. Provide new stainless steel covers on existing outlet boxes being reused.
3.04 DIMMER SWITCHES
A. Provide a separate neutral for each phase.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES Job Number 2210142.00
26 27 26 - 4/4
3.05 RECEPTACLE GROUNDING
A. Provide bare bonding wire between receptacle grounding terminal and box. Plaster ear screws
connecting frame to the box will not be acceptable for grounding.
B. Provide green insulated grounding conductor in all branch circuits supplying isolated ground and
ground-fault circuit-interrupter type receptacles.
3.06 HANDICAPPED ACCESS
A. Comply with requirements of Washington State Handicapped Access Code.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 FUSES
26 28 13 - 1/2
SECTION 26 28 13
FUSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all fuses as required. Provide three (3) spare of each size and type required. Fuses shall not be
installed until equipment is ready to be energized. This measure prevents fuse damage during shipment
of the equipment from the manufacturer to the jobsite or from water that may contact the fuse before
the equipment is installed. Final tests and inspections shall be made prior to energization of the
equipment. This shall include a thorough cleaning, tightening, and review of all electrical connections
and inspection of all grounding conductors. All fuses shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor. All
fuses shall be of the same manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MAINS, FEEDERS, AND BRANCH CIRCUITS
A. Circuits 0 to 600 amperes shall be protected by current limiting BUSSMANN LOW-PEAK Dual-Element
Fuses LPN-RK (250 volts) or LPS-RK (600 volts). All dual-element fuses shall have separate overload and
short-circuit elements. Fuse shall incorporate a spring activated thermal overload element having a
284°F. melting point alloy and shall be independent of the short-circuit clearing chamber. The fuse must
hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 10 seconds and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc., with an interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes r.m.s. symmetrical. The fuses shall be UL Class RK1
to maintain the Engineered protection of the system components.
B. Motor Circuits: All individual motor circuits with full load amperes ratings (FLA) of 480 amperes or less
shall be protected by BUSSMANN LOW-PEAK Dual-Element Fuses LPN-RK (250 volts) or LPS-RK (600
volts). Larger H.P. motors shall be protected by BUSSMANN Type KRP-C Low-Peak Time-Delay Fuses of
the ratings shown on the drawings. All other motors, (such as 1.0 service factor motors) shall be
protected by BUSSMANN LOW-PEAK Dual-Element Fuses LPN-RK (250 volts) or LPS-RK (600 volts)
installed in ratings of approximately 115% of the motor full load current except as noted above. The
fuses shall be UL Class RK1 Dual Element Time Delay or Class L.
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Bussman
B. Littlefuse
2.03 SPARE FUSE CABINET
A. Provide a spare fuse cabinet for the above-required spare fuses.
2.04 NAMEPLATE
A. Provide Nameplate "Spare Fuse Cabinet.”
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FUSES
A. Install in all fusible devices provided under this Contract.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
FUSES Job Number 2210142.00
26 28 13 - 2/2
3.02 SPARE FUSE CABINET
A. Locate in 4th floor electrical room.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 DISCONNECTS AND FUSED SWITCHES
26 28 16 - 1/2
SECTION 26 28 16
DISCONNECTS AND FUSED SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provided all disconnects, fused and unfused, required by code for equipment furnished under this and
other divisions of these specifications and as shown on the drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. General Electric
B. Square-D
C. Siemens
D. Cutler-Hammer
2.02 DISCONNECTS
A. Switch shall be heavy-duty type, shall be quick-break and shall be horsepower rated. Switch shall have
blades as required to open all ungrounded conductors and shall be single throw unless noted.
B. Enclosure shall have interlocking cover to prevent opening door when switch is closed. Door interlock
shall include a defeating scheme, shall be padlockable in the "Off" position.
C. Enclosure shall be suitable for environment in which mounted. All exterior enclosures shall have a
minimum raintight rating.
2.03 FUSED SWITCHES (OR FUSED DISCONNECTS)
A. Shall be as above with addition of fuse space and clips to accept only fuses as noted in Section 26 28 13.
B. Fuses shall be sized in accordance with manufacturer's requirements of protected equipment.
2.04 NAMEPLATES
A. Provide nameplates on all enclosures and include the following information: Load served, voltage,
phase, panel and circuit number. Construct and attach in accordance with Section 26 00 00,
Paragraph 2.05.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SUPPORTS
A. Secure solidly to wall or approved mounting frame. Disconnects supported only by Raceway are not
acceptable.
3.02 SPLICES
A. Wiring space within enclosure shall not be used as a junction box.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
DISCONNECTS AND FUSED SWITCHES Job Number 2210142.00
26 28 16 - 2/2
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. All material installation shall be in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations and the provisions
of applicable codes.
B. Fuses shall not be installed until equipment is ready to be energized.
END OF SECTION
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD)
26 43 00 - 1/9
SECTION 26 43 00
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A.This Section describes the materials and installation requirements for Surge Protective Devices (SPD). SPD
devices are used for the protection of all AC electrical circuits from the effects of lightning induced currents,
substation switching transients, and internally generated transients resulting from inductive and/or capacitive
load switching.
B.This Specification also describes the mechanical and the electrical requirements for the SPD devices. The SPD
shall be suitable for application in both category A, B and C environments as described in ANSI/IEEE C62.41-
2002.
C.The SPD shall be of parallel design and provide individual protection components connected Line to Ground and
Line to Line for Delta and High Resistance Grounded systems and Line to Ground, Line to Neutral and Neutral to
Ground for Wye and Single-Phase distribution systems.
D.Systems not providing discreet protection components in the above configuration will be rejected. A schematic
diagram showing the configuration and technology of all internally connected components must be provided
with submittals.
E.The SPD devices will be used both near electrical service entrance locations and at locations distant from service
entrance locations (panels, MCCs, equipment disconnects, etc.). For the purposes of this Specification it should
not be assumed that on wye-connected systems, a neutral-to-ground bond will not be located electrically close
to the suppressor location, thus, discreet neutral-to-ground suppression and filter components are required.
F.The Manufacturer/Vendor shall furnish all of the necessary SPD products and related hardware (i.e. flush
mounting kits, mounting brackets, etc.) as required for the installation of the Surge Protective Devices (SPD)
system suitable for the application.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A.Section 26 00 00 - Electrical General Conditions
B.Section 26 05 19 - Wire and Cable
C.Section 26 05 26 - Grounding
D.Section 26 05 32 - Outlet and Pull Boxes
E.Section 26 05 33 - Raceways
F.Section 26 24 16 - Panelboards
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.The Vendor/Manufacturer shall submit three (3) copies of all related SPD Specifications, product data, electrical
and mechanical shop drawings, installation requirements/instructions, maintenance manuals (if applicable), and
performance/warranty information requested in this document for the actual proposed SPD device(s) to the
Project Engineer. All information shall be submitted in a PDF indexed by response and test. The Project Engineer
reserves the right to select or reject any vendor response or product.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD)Job Number 2210142.00
26 43 00 - 2/9
B.In order for the SPD device to be considered for this project, all responses to information requested in this
Specification must be provided in writing and must reference each Specification section and sub-section. Written
submittal responses shall be signed by the Manufacturer’s VP of Engineering. Attach information as necessary to
provide compliance with specification response requirements. If a manufacturer can not fully comply with a
section of the Specification, this must be stated in the response and the reason for non-compliance shall be
provided.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND PERFORMANCE
A.Each complete suppression unit shall be UL1449 4th Edition Listed as a Surge Protective Device. UL 1449 test
data for proposed SPD devices, including UL let through voltage classification, shall be provided with submittal.
Units shall bear suppressed voltage rating issued by UL.
B.The Engineer reserves the right to have an employee or a representative designated by the Firm witness any
testing required by this document. Vendor/Manufacturer shall provide written notice of intent to test and shall
coordinate testing with the Engineer, should the Engineer desire to witness tests.
C.Performance & Durability Testing: Units shall be tested by an independent test agency in accordance with test
procedures outlined in ANSI/IEEE C62.45, NEMA LS1 & UL1449. The following test data shall be provided:
1.Provide Maximum Surge Current (Single Pulse Rated, 8/20µS, by mode, Amperes) as per NEMA LS1-1992 –
2.2.9 with submittals document. Maximum surge current rating shall not be less than 120kA (60kA per
mode including N-G) for branch panel models in low exposure areas, high exposure areas and for IEEE
C62.41.1-2002 - Category B Switchboard and Motor Control Center Locations. Maximum surge current
rating (per phase in applicable modes other than Neutral to Ground) shall not be less than 240kA (120kA
per mode including N-G) for IEEE C62.41.1-2002 - Category C Locations, including all Electrical Equipment
located at Service Entrance location. Provide proof of completion of such tests and test data with submittal
data. Provide surge current ratings for each applicable protection mode (L-L, L-N, L-G & N-G) with
submittals.
2.Provide durability test data utilizing the ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991, Category C3, 20kV/10kA, 1.2 x 50 S - 8x20S
combination waveform. Provide test data with submittals. Let through voltages shall be provided for all
applicable protection modes (L-N, L-G & N-G) from zero reference. All SPD devices (including branch panel)
shall withstand a minimum of 5,000 hits delivered at a rate of one pulse per minute. Unit shall not fail or
suffer let through voltage degradation of more than 7%. Lead length for testing and let through
measurements shall be 6”. Provide lead length used for testing with submittals.
3.Provide performance test data utilizing the ANSI/IEEEC62.41.2-2002, Exposure - High, 10kV/10kA, 1.2 x
50µS - 8x20µS combination waveform. Provide test data with submittals. Let through voltages shall be
provided for all applicable protection modes (L-N, L-L & L-G) from zero reference. Lead length for testing
and let through measurements shall be 6”. Provide lead length used for testing with submittals.
4.Provide let through voltage test data and test waveforms used for (N-G) with the submittals for units
intended for grounded Wye systems.
5.Provide let through voltage test data for the ANSI/IEEE C62.41.2-2002, Category B, 0.5µS-100 kHz 6kV/.5kA
ring wave (L-L, L-N & L-G) with the submittals. Let through voltages shall be provided for all applicable
protection modes and shall be measured from the zero reference.
6.Provide let through voltage test data for the ANSI/IEEE C62.41.2-2002, Neutral grounded at service
entrance – Far Category, 0.5µS-100 kHz 3kV ring wave (N-G) with the submittals for units intended for
grounded systems.
7.If available, test data shall be provided for the ANSI/IEEEC62.41.2-2002 level three category of the 5/50 nS
EFT Burst waveform as a part of this submittal package. Let through voltages shall be provided for all
applicable protection modes (L-L, L-N, L-G & N-G).
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD)
26 43 00 - 3/9
8.All SPD tests must provide let through voltages using a positive polarity pulse at the 90-degree phase angle
location on the sine wave for Category B and C waveforms and 180-degree for Category A waveforms. Let
through voltages must be measured from the zero-voltage reference line for the tests.
9.All let through voltage test results must be provided with a minimum of six inches of lead length as
measured from the point where the wire would normally exit the SPD enclosure (standard installation) to
the point of termination. Wire used for test must be of the type of building wiring material recognized by
the latest adopted version of the NEC and must be readily available for wiring commercial buildings, unless
permanently attached to and supplied with suppressor. Conductors sizing used for test shall be based on
manufacturer's installation instructions for the proposed product.
10.The above test results, including oscillographs, test conditions, identity of the testing lab and the test
technicians and engineers shall be provided as part of the submittal package. The manufacturer shall
provide the contact phone number for a readily available factory engineer responsible for answering
questions about this product and the tests performed. Information shall be provided in a format that is
easily to analyze and review.
11.Maximum Let Through Voltages based on above requirements:
Peak Voltage Let Through Table
Peak Let Through Voltages (measured from zero reference per NEMA LS-1) shall not exceed:
Voltage & Configuration Test / Wave L-L L-N L-G N-G Phase
Angle
480/277 Wye - Grounded C3 – 20 kV/10ka 2500 1600 1900 1700 90
480/277 Wye - Grounded B3 – 6 kV/3kA 1700 1000 1100 1000 90
480/277 Wye - Grounded A1 – 2kV – 67A 150 150 150 150 180
480/277 Wye - Grounded UL1449 Rev2 Update 1500 800 800 800 ----
480 Delta C3 – 20 kV/10ka 2400 N/A 2400 N/A 90
480 Delta B3 – 6 kV/3kA 2000 N/A 1900 N/A 90
480 Delta A1 – 2kV – 67A 75 N/A 1200 N/A 180
120/208 Wye C3 – 20 kV/10ka 1400 1100 1300 1150 90
120/208 Wye B3 – 6 kV/3kA 950 550 600 550 90
120/208 Wye A1 – 2kV – 67A 100 75 120 100 180
120/208 Wye UL1449 Rev2 Update 800 400 400 400 -----
120/240 Split Phase C3 – 20 kV/10ka 1400 1100 1250 1200 90
120/240 Split Phase B3 – 6 kV/3kA 1000 600 600 600 90
120/240 Split Phase A1 – 2kV – 67A 100 75 120 95 180
D.Manufacturers Qualifications: Only firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of SPD products for category C
locations (ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-2002), and whose products have been providing satisfactory service for not less
than five years, shall be considered. A customer reference list, with a minimum of five contact names and current
phone numbers shall be provided with the submittals. All manufacturer qualifications shall be provided as part of
the submittal.
E.The successful manufacturer/vendor shall assign a technical contact person for SPD application, installation and
warranty questions. This contact shall be available to provide a response to a technical question within a
maximum of two business days.
F.The Engineer reserves the right to accept or reject any or all submittals, to request additional information as
deemed necessary or to request submittals for a different unit that may be deemed more appropriate for this
installation.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD)Job Number 2210142.00
26 43 00 - 4/9
G.Engineer reserves the right to have an employee or a representative designated by firm witness any testing
required by this document. Vendor/manufacturer shall provide written notice of intent to test and shall
coordinate testing with Engineer, should Engineer desire to witness tests.
1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS
A.UL compliance and labeling: Listed per UL 1449, 4th Edition.
B.SPD and Enclosures proposed and submitted shall be safety agency listed for all intended installations, meeting
or exceeding all of the following: NEMA 1, 3R, 4, 12 & 13.
C.SPD device shall be designed to allow installation in accordance with latest adopted version of the National
Electrical Code (NEC), National Electrical Safety Codes (NESC) and applicable OSHA 1910 requirements.
D.NEMA LS1 (latest revision)
E.IEEE Standard C62.41.1, IEEE Standard C62.41.2 & IEEE Standard C62.45 (latest revisions)
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.The SPD shall be compatible with the electrical system voltage, current, system configuration and intended
applications.
B.The SPD maximum continuous operation voltage (MCOV) shall be capable of sustaining 115% of the nominal RMS
voltage (with the associated peak voltage of 1.414*RMS) continuously without degradation and heating.
C.The SPD shall only use clamping components connected in parallel with the supply to limit the surge voltages.
D.Arc Discharge components, such as Gas Tube Arresters shall not be used as the sole protection component in any
protection mode. Gas Tube Arresters may be used in conjunction with other components, such as MOVs and
SADs to provide protection. Where Gas Tube Arresters are installed, the circuit shall be specifically designed to
prevent power follow current.
E.Internal Fusing – If provided, shall be component level style:
1.Component Level Fusing:
a.Each Metal Oxide Varistor, or other primary suppression component, shall be individually fused for
safety and performance to allow the SPD to withstand the full rated single pulse peak surge capacity
per mode without the operation or failure of the fuses. Overcurrent fusing that limits the listed peak
surge current of the SPD is not acceptable. Replaceable cartridge type per phase or per mode
overcurrent fusing is not acceptable.
b.For arc quenching capability, minimization of smoke and contaminates in the event of a failure, and
to ensure the safest possible design, all surge components, current carrying paths and fusing shall be
packed in fuse grade silica sand.
c.Fusing shall be present in every mode, including Neutral-to-Ground.
d.The fusing shall be capable of interrupting up to a 200kA symmetrical fault current with 600VAC
applied, providing a listed 200kAIC Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) without additional over-
current protection.
F.Status Indication & Monitoring: The suppressor shall include individual Phase Status LEDs, a red Service Required
LED, an integrated Audible Alarm with silence button and Form C dry contacts (N.O. or N.C.) for remote
monitoring capability. The form C contacts must be rated a minimum of 65VDC/150VAC with a load of
30WDC/60VA AC, and must be isolated and insulated from the ground plane and the power system to prevent
Surges from reaching the monitoring system. The system shall provide insulation and isolation against any
impressed voltages. Contacts shall be designed to change state upon device failure or loss of power.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD)
26 43 00 - 5/9
G.The protection should be housed in the appropriate NEMA rated, heavy duty powder coated steel enclosure. This
enclosure must provide complete protection against personnel hazards and damage to equipment should a
failure of the SPD protection device occur. This enclosure shall also be designed to allow connection of the SPD
device without sharp bends in the conductors and lead lengths of less than 18" from the SPD Lugs (or enclosure
opening for devices with leads attached) to the final point of attachment to the power system for the application
(assuming connection point is 12" from the exterior of the enclosure).
H.Manufacturer shall provide a comprehensive warranty that provides for unlimited full replacement of a
suppressor that is damaged or that fails to meet manufacturers published specifications and specifications
provided within, without pro-rating value. Warranty shall provide coverage for a minimum period of 20 years for
individual units (standard warranty) and. Series SPDs shall be covered for ten (10) years. These Unlimited
Replacement Warranties cannot exclude system overvoltages or direct lightning strike events. Warranty shall not
require any factory or third-party testing. Warranty shall apply to installed unit(s) for the duration of the
warranty period no matter who owns the facility or equipment. All warranty information and copies of warranty
documents must be provided with this response.
1.All replacements shall be of same make, model and configuration as original unit unless otherwise
requested or approved by customer.
2.The manufacturer/vendor shall provide a warranty replacement unit at the facility within five (5) days of
receipt of written notification that the SPD unit has failed, at no cost to the customer.
3.If the manufacturer/vendor requires inspection of the installed unit to validate warranty claim, the
manufacturer/vendor must visit the site where the failed SPD device(s) are located within three (3) days of
notification. This visit will be performed at no cost to customer. This section does not modify the
requirement for the SPD replacement to be within five (5) days of written notification as described in
section G, above.
4.The replacement unit shall be sent to the facility without shipping, handling, examination or other fees.
I.Complete, comprehensive installation instructions shall be provided for the SPD systems proposed. Installation
instructions must provide for compliance with latest adopted NEC requirements and UL listing requirements,
while not degrading performance of SPD device as tested. Provide copies of installation instructions for the
models proposed with the specification response. Successful vendors/manufacturer shall provide a complete,
comprehensive installation checklist.
J.If manufacturer claims SPD device to have filtering capabilities, provide complete information on filtering
performance of SPD device with specification response. This information must include attenuation across a
stated frequency range. If the SPD is a UL 1283 listed device, the manufacturer shall provide all performance
specifications for filter attenuation.
K.Provide complete enclosure dimensions (H*W*D) and cutsheets indicating dimensions including locations of
terminations and wire entry locations with specification response.
L.Provide UL Short Circuit Current Ratings (SCCR). Minimum ratings shall be 200kAIC without additional/external
over-current protection.
M.Manufacturer shall make available metal flush plates for distribution and branch panel SPDs. The flush plate
shall provide for a clean architectural finish and be utilized where the attached panel is mounted flush.
N.Manufacturer must have knowledgeable local representation and distribution within 100 miles of the project
location and must be willing to provide technical support, warranty claim support, and installation support for
the project.
O.Successful manufacturer/vendor must be capable of supplying SPD for project within 20 days of receipt of order
for orders of 25 units and less for models submitted in response to this specification.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD)Job Number 2210142.00
26 43 00 - 6/9
2.02 SERVICE ENTRANCE
A.Surge Protective Devices shall be installed at all service entrances of each building and as shown on the riser /
one-line diagram. Suppressors shall be listed in accordance with UL 1449 4th Edition, Standard for Surge
Protective Devices.
B.For 3-phase, 4-wire plus ground configurations, suppressors shall provide suppression and filter elements
between each phase conductor and the system neutral, each phase conductor and the system ground and
between the neutral conductor and ground.
C.Suppressors shall include a passive circuit that allows the suppressor to actively follow the voltage waveform and
provide a clamping envelope that follows the sine wave to limit low level IEEE C62.41 A1 ring waves (of either
polarity) at all locations on the sine wave. This circuit shall also perform in the Neutral to Ground Mode where a
sine wave does not exist. Details of circuit used to provide this function and information detailing and quantifying
the performance of this circuit (in all modes with Category A1 ring wave) shall be provided with specification
response. All Let Through Voltage (LTV) values shall not exceed those stated in section 1.04.C.11.
D.Indication of proper suppressor connection and operation shall be provided, consisting of status LEDs for each
phase, a Red Service Required LED and an internal Audible Alarm with silence/mute button. Dry contacts
(NO/NC) are required for external monitoring.
E.SPD shall exhibit fully redundant protection for each phase.
F.The surge suppressor shall be of parallel design and shall be capable of being removed and replaced without
disrupting electrical service to the facility.
G.Suppressors shall consist of solid-state components and shall operate bi-directionally.
H.All surge protective devices shall be of the same manufacturer.
I.The minimum single impulse current rating (as per NEMA LS-1) shall not be less than 240,000 amperes per phase
(120KA per mode). Provide proof of compliance by supplying certified test results from independent test lab
with submittals.
J.Maximum size of SPD units for Primary, Service Entrance applications is 15.5”x12.3”x8.25”.
2.03 SECONDARY SUPPRESSORS FOR MCC, DISTRIBUTION & BRANCH PANELS
A.Surge Protective Devices shall be installed at all service entrances of each building and as shown on the riser /
one-line diagram. Suppressors shall be listed in accordance with UL 1449 4thEdition, Standard for Suge Protective
Devices.
B.For 3-phase, 4-wire plus ground configurations, suppressors shall provide suppression and filter elements
between each phase conductor and the system neutral, each phase conductor and the system ground and
between the neutral conductor and ground.
C.Suppressors shall include a passive circuit that allows the suppressor to actively follow the voltage waveform and
provide a clamping envelope that follows the sine wave to limit low level IEEE C62.41 A1 ring waves (of either
polarity) at all locations on the sine wave. This circuit shall also perform in the Neutral to Ground Mode where a
sine wave does not exist. Details of circuit used to provide this function and information detailing and quantifying
the performance of this circuit (in all modes with Category A1 ring wave) shall be provided with specification
response. All Let Through Voltage (LTV) values shall not exceed those stated in section 1.04.C.11.
D.Indication of proper suppressor connection and operation shall be provided, consisting of status LEDs for each
phase, a Red Service Required LED and an internal Audible Alarm with silence/mute button. Dry contacts
(NO/NC) are required for external monitoring.
E.SPD shall exhibit fully redundant protection for each phase.
F.The surge suppressor shall be of parallel design and shall be capable of being removed and replaced without
disrupting electrical service to the facility.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD)
26 43 00 - 7/9
G.Suppressors shall consist of solid-state components and shall operate bi-directionally.
H.All surge protective devices shall be of the same manufacturer.
I.The minimum single impulse current rating (as per NEMA LS-1) shall not be less than 120,000 amperes per phase
(60KA per mode). Provide proof of compliance by supplying certified test results from independent test lab with
submittals.
J.Maximum size of SPD units for Secondary Suppressors for MCC, Distribution & Branch Panel applications is
15.5”x12.3”x8.25”.
2.04 PRIOR APPROVALS
A.The following manufacturer(s) have submitted the required information and have been reviewed and approved
for this project:
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A.Suppressors shall be installed per the manufacturer's installation instructions and the requirements of: the NEC,
the local authority having jurisdiction and the project engineer.
B.Size overcurrent protective device and conductors per manufacturer's recommendations and NEC requirements.
Total Protection Solutions SPD by Thomas & Betts Power Solutions
Voltage
Location
480Y277v
3 Phase
Bonded Wye
480v
3 Phase Delta
208Y120v
3 Phase
Bonded Wye
208v
3 Phase Delta
120/240v
Single / Split
Phase
120v
Fire Alarm,
Security, PLC,
etc.
Main Services ST240-3Y480-
FL
ST240-
480NN-FL
ST240-
3Y208-FL
ST240-
240NN-FL
ST240-1S240-
FL N/A
Distribution MCC &
Branch Panels
LP120-3Y480-
FL
ST120-
480NN-FL
LP120-
3Y208-FL
ST120-
240NN-FL
LP120-1S240-
FL N/A
Dedicated
Equipment N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A LTE120-30A
SPD Applications Notes:
1.Use 60 Amp Circuit Breakers for Service Entrances and 30 Amp Circuit Breakers for Distribution,
MCC & Branch Panel applications.
2.Use Delta units for unbonded/ungrounded and high resistance ground Wye applications.
Innovative Technology Protector by Eaton/Cutler Hammer
Voltage
Location
480Y277v
3 Phase
Bonded Wye
480v
3 Phase Delta
208Y120v
3 Phase
Bonded Wye
208v
3 Phase
Delta
120/240v
Single / Split
Phase
120v
Fire alarm
Security, PLC,
etc.
Main Services PTE240-
3Y201-L-SD
PTE240-
NN400-L-SD
PTE240-
3Y101-L-SD
PTE240-
NN201-L-SD
PTE240-
1S101-L-SD N/A
Distribution MCC &
Branch Panels
PTE120-
3Y201-L-SD
PTE120-
NN400-L-SD
PTE120-
3Y101-L-SD
PTE120-
NN201-L-SD
PTE120-
1S101-L-SD N/A
Dedicated
Equipment N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A LTE120-30A
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD)Job Number 2210142.00
26 43 00 - 8/9
C.Project Engineer or their appointed representative may perform inspection of the installed suppressors and
reserves the right to require corrections to the installation to comply with manufacturer’s installation
requirements and project specifications.
D.The SPD supplier must provide on-site installation training for the electrical contractor.
3.02 SERVICE ENTRANCE
A.Install one primary suppressor at each utility service entrance to the facility as indicated on the drawings.
B.Suppressor shall be installed on the load side of the service entrance disconnecting means in accordance with
NEC requirements.
C.Provide a 60 Amp circuit breaker (with a safety clip to ensure the circuit breaker cannot be inadvertently turned
off) in the switchboard as over-current protection for the wire and as a disconnecting means for the SPD (or as
specified by the manufacture).
D.Use minimum #6 AWG wire for connecting the SPD.
E.Conductors between suppressor and point of attachment shall be kept as short and straight as possible. Lead
length of connecting conductor shall not exceed two (2) feet without written permission of the specifying
Engineer. If length is exceeded, Contractor may be required to relocate SPD at no cost to the Owner.
F.Over-length SPD leads (greater than 24”) must be twisted together (1 twist/foot) and securely tie-wrapped once
per foot to reduce impedance of the leads.
G.SPD leads may not be spliced.
H.Suppressor's ground shall be bonded to enclosure frame and the service entrance ground bus, and conduit
between the SPD and the switchboard must provide secure electrical/mechanical connections.
3.03 SECONDARY SUPPRESSORS FOR MCC, DISTRIBUTION & BRANCH PANELS
A.Install one secondary suppressor at each MCC, Distribution Panel, Branch Panel & Sub-Panel location as indicated
on the drawings.
B.Provide a 30 Amp circuit breaker (with a safety clip to ensure the circuit breaker cannot be inadvertently turned
off) in the panel being protected as over-current protection for the wire and as a disconnecting means for the
SPD (or as specified by the manufacture).
C.Conductors between suppressor and point of attachment to the panelboard shall be kept as short and straight as
possible. Mount the SPD directly adjacent to the circuit breaker closest to the neutral bus, such that the
maximum length of connecting wiring is kept as short as possible, not exceed 18 inches for all phase and neutral
leads (24” for ground lead on IG panels). If length is exceeded, Contractor may be required to relocate SPD at no
cost to the Owner.
D.Over-length SPD leads (greater than 18”) must be twisted together (2 twists/foot) and securely tie-wrapped once
per foot to reduce impedance of the leads. Quality compression butt-splice connections are required when
extending SPD leads (wire nuts are not acceptable).
E.Grounding for all non-IG installations: Suppressor's ground lead shall be bonded to the panel enclosure with a
small ground lug as close as possible to the SPD mounting point. Conduit between the SPD and the switchboard
must provide secure electrical/mechanical connections.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD)
26 43 00 - 9/9
F.Multiple “Feed-Through” Panels with shared SPD units must be immediately adjacent to each other (side by side)
with short tie cables not to exceed 36”. Sub-panels must be feed from a primary panel with a “lug-out’, lug-in”
tie connection, and the tie connection lugs must be at the same end of the primary and sub-fed panel. i.e.
bottom to bottom or top to top to ensure short tie “sub-feed” cables.
1.Dual Panel Configurations: One SPD per two panels
2.Three and Four Panel Configurations: One SPD installed on both outside panels of the multi-panel
configuration, i.e. Install SPD on first (primary) and another one on the third or fourth sub-fed panel for a
total of two SPDs.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 1/3
SECTION 26 50 00
LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide the lighting system complete and operational.
B. Recessed fixtures installed in fire-resistive ceiling construction shall have the same fire rating as the
ceiling or shall be provided with fireproofing boxes having materials of the same fire rating as the ceiling.
1.03 FIXTURE SCHEDULE MANUFACTURER'S SERIES NUMBERS
A. Series numbers are a design series reference and do not necessarily represent the number, size, wattage
or the type of lamp, ballast or special requirements as specified hereinafter.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shall be neatly and clearly marked to indicate the fixtures, lamps and ballasts fully comply with contract
documents. When substitute fixtures are submitted (if permitted) the data shall clearly cross reference
(written or highlighted) that the substitute fixture complies with every detail of the specified fixture.
Fixtures not fully complying with contract documents are not permitted.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL PARTS
A. Interior Fixtures: Steel or aluminum with 300°F, baked enamel finish, brushed aluminum with baked
acrylic clear lacquer finish, or stainless steel with a brushed finish, manufacturer's standard color unless
specified otherwise.
2.02 LIGHT TRANSMITTING COMPONENTS
A. Virgin acrylic or polycarbonate plastic (0.125-inch thick overall minimum), UV stabilized or glass. Shall
be contained in a captive metal frame that remains attached to the fixture when door is in open
position.
2.03 SPECIAL PARTS
A. Adapters, Plates, Brackets and Anchors: Provide where required by construction features of the building
to suitably mount lighting fixture. All such appurtenances and mounting methods shall be approved by
the Architect/Engineer prior to fabrication and installation.
B. Low Voltage Transformers: Provide and install where required to power individual or linear runs of low
voltage light fixtures.
2.04 LAMPS
A. Provide for each fixture in the exact number and type for which the fixture is designed or as noted.
B. Solid-State Lighting: Fixtures shall have a lumen maintenance life expectancy (L70) of > 50,000 hours, a
CRI of > 82, and a CCT of 3500K. Each solid-state fixture model shall be tested in accordance with IES
LM-79.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
LIGHTING Job Number 2210142.00
26 50 00 - 2/3
2.05 HANGING FOR PENDANT FIXTURES
A. Rigid type, with not less than 5 thread engagement at each end, consisting of iron pipe, with brass or
aluminum tubing casing, or painted tubing not less than 0.040 inches thick.
B. Aircraft cable, stainless steel, sized appropriately by manufacturer for weight and seismic zone.
C. Provide a canopy for each fixture hanger except where fixture conceals the outlet box directly without a
canopy.
2.06 EXIT SIGNS
A. Fronts: Cutout stencils made of minimum #20-gauge sheet steel or sheet aluminum with red glass or
plastic back of the cutout. Mount fronts either on concealed hinges or pull-out type with chain catch.
Removable cutout arrows shall indicate direction of travel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES - GENERAL
A. Size and mounting height from finished floor to bottom of fixture as indicated on the drawings. Verify
mounting provisions prior to the ordering of fixtures. Fixtures shall be UL listed for the location, and
application in which they are installed.
B. Ceiling fixtures shall be coordinated with and suitable for installation in, on or from the ceiling as shown.
Installation and support of fixtures shall be in accordance with NFPA 70 and manufacturer’s
recommendations.
C. Recessed fixtures installed in seismic areas shall be installed utilizing specially designed seismic clips.
D. Suspended fixtures installed in seismic areas shall have 45° swivel hangers and shall be located with no
obstructions within the 45° range in all directions. The stem, canopy and fixture shall be capable of 45°
swing.
3.02 DIFFUSERS AND ENCLOSURES
A. Install lighting fixture diffusers only after construction work, painting and clean up are completed. Prior
to final acceptance, remove all lamps, reflectors and diffusers, wash, rinse and reinstall.
3.03 ADJUSTMENT OF FIXTURES
A. Make all final spotlight and adjustable light settings under the direction of the Architect/Engineer during
a scheduled period of time prior to the completion of the project. Include costs for all equipment and
personnel expenses required for adjustment.
B. For fixtures with indirect lighting, notify Engineer prior to installation of any circumstance where the
fixture lamp source will be within 12” of ceiling.
3.04 LED FIXTURES
A. Recessed Troffer Type: For fixtures supported by the ceiling suspension system, provide integral tabs,
which rotate into position after fixture is lifted into the ceiling cavity. Provide two safety chains secured
to structural members above suspended ceiling. Circuit connection shall be through use of 60-inch
flexible conduit from a rigidly supported junction box. For plaster or GWB ceilings, provide a plaster
frame compatible with light fixture.
B. Recessed Downlight Type: Mount in frames suitable for the ceiling, with the recessed portion of the
fixture securely supported from the ceiling framing. For fixtures supported by a ceiling suspension
system, provide two safety chains secured to structural members above suspended ceiling.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 3/3
C. Surface and Pendant Mounted Type:
1. Where mounted on accessible ceilings, hang from structural members by means of hanger rods
through ceiling or as approved.
2. Where ceiling is of insufficient strength to support weight of lighting fixture, provide additional
framing to support as required. Fixtures shall be supported from structure with seismic bracing
independent of ceiling.
3. For Pendant Mount Type: Provide a unistrut channel for mounting fixtures entire fixture length
unless light fixture is designed specifically for supporting itself. Provide 3/8-inch thread rod
secured to structural members for support of unistrut channel.
4. Continuous Runs of Fixtures: Straight when sighting from end to end, regardless of irregularities in
the ceiling. Where fixtures are so installed, omit ornamental ends between sections.
3.05 LOCATION
A. Mount to the dimensions shown on the drawings. Mount at quarter points where no dimensions
appear. Architect shall specify mounting locations where no dimensions appear and quarter point
mounting is impractical or not indicated on the drawings.
B. Refer to details, mechanical drawings, and coordinate with mechanical Contractor for equipment and
ductwork mounted in ceilings to prevent conflict with light fixtures prior to installation. If conflicts
cannot be resolved with the Mechanical Contractor, notify Architect/Engineer.
3.06 SPARE PARTS
A. Drivers/Ballasts: Provide (10) or 10% spare (whichever is less) of each replaceable LED driver or
fluorescent/HID ballast.
3.07 SPARE FIXTURES
A. Provide the following spare devices:
Item Quantity
EX1 2
B. Spare fixtures shall include 100 feet of conduit, wire, miscellaneous appurtenances, and all labor, as
required for a complete installation. Location of these units to be determined by the Owner’s
representative at the site. Unused devices shall be turned over to the Owner.
C. Self-Luminous Exit Sign: Provide (4) four Self-Luminous Exit Signs Lithonia # DSW1X Green or Red to
match EX-1. Install at locations as directed by Architect.
3.08 FIXTURE TENTING
A. Contractor shall coordinate ceiling types with architectural drawings and specifications and provide
equivalent fire rated enclosures above all light fixtures which penetrate rated ceilings.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00 - 1/25
SECTION 27 00 00
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General Conditions and Divisions 00 and 01
Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1. Phasing and Schedule: Phasing and Schedule are critical for successful completion of this project
on an occupied school site and it is anticipated overtime, double-shifting, or special work schedules
and coordination of phased work will be required. Refer to the Phasing Plans and specification
Section 01 1100 for additional information.
1.02 SCOPE AND RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The work performed under this specification shall be of good quality and performed in a workmanlike
manner. In this context "good quality" means the work shall meet industry technical standards and
quality of appearance. The owner reserves the right to reject all or a portion of the work performed,
either on technical or aesthetic grounds. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall make all corrections as
needed, to the satisfaction of the Architect.
B. Provide system documentation and Owner training as specified below.
C. An important item of the construction process for this project is the Pre-Construction Kick-Off Meeting,
which shall take place PRIOR to Submittal of equipment data sheets.
1. The General Contractor shall coordinate the scheduling of the meeting.
2. The Owners representative and the Owners IT Department representative will be present for the
meeting.
3. The General Contractor, Electrical Contractor, and a representative from EACH Section shall attend
this coordination meeting.
4. The estimated time is approximate and shall be extended for each Installing Vendor as necessary.
5. EACH Installing Vendor shall submit their list of coordination items through the Construction
Channels a minimum of 14 Days in advance of the meeting for Owner review.
a. Review EACH specific Section for the sub-section titled “Coordination” for a minimum list of
items to be discussed during the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting
D. The requirements of the conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements,
or other work specified to provide a fully functional system for EACH specific Low Voltage Section in all
Division 27 and Division 28 sections as a part of this project.
E. Applicable Standards: All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest revisions of the
following standards:
1. International Building Code (latest edition)
2. International Fire Code (latest edition)
3. NEC (National Electrical Code) (latest edition).
4. Telecommunications Architectural Standards - In Washington State Government (latest edition)
5. TIA-607-B Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications
F. EACH Installing Vendor for their Section shall possess a current and valid Washington State 06 Electrical
Low Voltage License.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00
27 00 00 - 2/25
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Device or wiring arrangement shown on the drawings represents the intent of the system. If additional
equipment (that may not be shown) is required to make a fully functional system, then provide such
equipment as required.
B. Each specification section that is governed by these specifications shall be provided, installed,
commissioned, and warranted by a local Installing Vendor that meet the following requirements for the
equipment manufacturer that is being submitted for:
1. All equipment for EACH Specification Section shall be provided and installed by a single supplier.
2. Have installed a minimum of three (3) Systems within the past five (5) years.
3. Maintain a 24-hour emergency service program using Manufacturer Trained technicians, shall
respond to service calls within 24 hours during and after the warranty period.
4. The Installing Vendor shall be Manufacturer Approved to purchase the equipment, have a local
office staffed with Manufacturer Certified installers that are capable to maintain, service, and
warrant the equipment being installed, who are full-time employees and are capable of
programming, testing, inspecting, maintaining, warranting, inventorying parts for the life of the
system, and shall be located within a 100-mile radius of the project site.
5. Offices that require staff from another “Branch Office and/or Company Office” outside of this
radius, are not acceptable.
C. Prior to completion of the installation, the Installing Vendor shall provide:
1. At the Owner’s option, a preventative maintenance agreement shall become effective at the end of
the warranty period.
2. A proposal for off-site monitoring services (for systems that are applicable).
1.04 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. In addition to the “Substantial Completion” requirements, when applied to EACH of the specification
sections identified in “Scope and Related Documents” listed elsewhere in this specification, this shall be
defined as follows;
1. The stage in the progress of the Work, where the Work or designated portion is sufficiently
complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Owner can utilize the Work for
its intended use.
2. ALL of the requirements listed in “Testing & Complete System Functionality” shall be met. Once all
conditions have been met, this shall be deemed Substantial Completion. These requirements shall
be completed on or before the Substantial Completion date listed in the Contract Documents.
1.05 DOCUMENTATION
A. Document Format:
1. All documents shall be generated on a PC. Provide these documents electronically, with the
As-built Documentation, where applicable.
a. Data sheets, installation manuals, technical documents, brochures, and user manuals may be
in PDF format.
b. Power Point Presentation(s) shall be in MS-Power Point.
c. Test Forms and other project specific documents shall be in an editable format, either
MS-Word or MS-Excel.
d. Drawings and details shall be in AutoCAD™ 2013 or newer.
1.06 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submittals and Shop Drawings shall be provided for EACH Low Voltage System Specification Section
Number and shall contain, but not be limited to the items listed below:
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00 - 3/25
B. Submittals – Prior to installation of any equipment, the Installing Vendor/Contractor shall provide the
Architect with seven (7) copies of submittals for approval. Provide the following:
1. A complete materials list of the quantity of each device, the manufacturer, model number, and
description of the equipment for each individual system component or device that will be
provided. This list shall precede the data sheets.
a. Each System component or device data sheet shall have and indicating arrow next to each
component or device that is being submitted.
C. Additional Shop Drawing Requirements:
1. For additional shop drawing requirements, refer to EACH Low Voltage System Specification Section
Number, in addition to what is listed below.
D. Shop Drawings – Prior to installation of any equipment, the Installing Vendor/Contractor shall provide
the Architect with seven (7) copies of submittals for approval.
1. Shop Drawing Requirements: The installing vendors complete and full-size set of shop drawings
shall be issued in the following format:
a. They shall be clear and legible.
b. The same sheet size as the Contract Drawings (i.e. 30” x 42”).
c. A minimum of 1/8” text height shall be used for all text, symbol text, and subscript text.
d. Scale of Drawings:
1. Site Plan Drawings shall be the same scale as issued in the Contract Documents.
2. Floor Plan Drawings shall be 1/8” =1’-0”, unless directed to do otherwise.
e. The Electrical Legend, Wire Legend, Load and Battery Calculations, Riser Diagram, Sequence
of Operation info, Wiring Details, and Mounting Details shall precede the Site Plans and Floor
Plans.
f. All sheets, including the cover, shall include a Title Block along the edge of each of the
drawings, that when the drawings are rolled up, the following information shall be visible:
1. The System specific sheet number.
2. Project Name, specification Section Number and Section Title name.
3. Floor Name, area, and/or section of the building (use the name of the area and/or floor
description that is on the Contract Drawings).
g. Architectural information on the Contract Drawings, shall be included on the Installing Vendor
Shop Drawing, including, but not limited to; Match Lines, Grid Lines, Grid Bubbles, Key Plan,
and Enlarged Floor Plans.
h. Electrical information on the Contract Drawings shall be included on the Installing Vendor
Shop Drawing, including, but not limited to; all applicable General Notes and applicable
Construction Notes for each of the Floor Plans. Where Enlarged Plans are shown on the
Contract Drawings, include this in Installing Vendor Shop Drawings to show the room and ALL
equipment within the room, to help facilitate and coordinate the installation of the Low
Voltage equipment for all systems.
2. Cover Sheet: The first page of the shop drawings shall be a cover sheet to include the following
items;
a. Owners Project information:
1. Site Information
2. Name of site, address, city, and zip code of where the installation shall take place.
b. Installing Vendors Project information:
1. Business name
2. Local office address of the Installing Vendor
3. Primary contact person name, phone number, and email address who is responsible for
the long-term management of the Owners System.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00
27 00 00 - 4/25
c. Provide a “Sheet Index”, which assigns a sheet number and unique name for each sheet that
is included in the shop drawing submittal package. As part of the sheet index, list every sheet
that is part of the system shop drawing package. On the left side of the Sheet Index, provide
two columns - “Included” and “Not Included”. Include a check box and provide a check in
each box for all sheets that are included or not included, in each submittal.
1. Each sheet shall have a System Specific Sheet Number and shall match the Contract
Drawing sheet numbering system. (i.e. E4.02 shall be FA-4.02 [for Fire Alarm], E4.02
shall be LAN-4.02 [for Local Area Network]).
3. Legend Information: From Left to Right, provide the following information for EACH device:
a. Use the symbol on the Legend of the contract drawings.
b. List the manufacturer’s name.
c. List the manufacturer’s model number.
4. Provide a logical description of the device.
a. Provide the back-box requirements and related information. At a minimum, this shall include;
1. The height, width, and depth of each required back box for each symbol on the legend.
2. If the device is a back box or comes with a back box (IE: control panel, power supply,
enclosure, etc.) then provide the height, width, and depth of the dimensions.
3. Indicate if this device back box is going to be installed flush, semi-flush, or surface
mounted.
5. Provide a Wire Legend listing the cable manufacturer, model number, cable rating, size of
conductors, quantity of conductors, and color of each conductor. Use the format in the Sample
“Wire Legend”, as it applies to each system (see the Sample at the end of this specification).
Provide a cable identification naming scheme (as defined within these specifications).
a. The Wire Legend shall include the Cable Manufacturer and Model Number for EACH of the
following types of cables (as applicable to the project):
1. Conduit/Raceway Cable
2. Open Cabling
3. Wet Rated Cable
4. Aerial Rated Cable
5. EACH cable and EACH cable type shall have a different letter designation.
6. Load and Battery Calculations: For EACH control Panel, Power Supply, and/or Amplifier for EACH
System, at a minimum show the following Amp Draw, Circuit, and Battery calculations;
a. The total Amp Draw load in stand by or non-active mode.
b. The total Amp Draw load with all devices active and in a maximum load condition.
c. Provide the spare power information that is available for future additional devices and/or
equipment.
1. Include the quantities of spare circuits that are available (where applicable).
d. Circuit calculations:
1. The quantity of each device per circuit
2. The Amp Draw per device per circuit (where applicable [this is not applicable to
addressable devices that receive their power from an addressable data loop. Simply
include the maximum amount of devices than can be placed on each addressable loop
and the amount of addressable devices that are included on each addressable loop for
this project]).
3. The total Amp Draw load per circuit
4. The cable length distance of each circuit
5. The gauge size of wire used for each circuit
6. The total line loss for each circuit
7. Factor the line loss and Amp Draw to show the actual voltage available at the end of
each circuit (after the last device).
8. Include in the design layout, the requirements of “Spare Capacity” in Part 2 of this
specification (where applicable).
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00 - 5/25
e. Battery Back Up:
1. All Batteries shall be sized to provide at least 20% spare capacity. Include this
information in all calculations.
2. For Fire Alarm, include all calculations that are required by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
f. Uninterruptible Power Supply(s) (UPS):
1. For systems that include a UPS, provide the maximum load (allowed by the UPS
manufacturer) that EACH UPS is capable of providing, and list each item and its
maximum load that will be connected to the UPS. Include the total load of all
equipment connected to the UPS and list the spare capacity available.
7. Riser Diagram: Provide a System One-Line Riser Diagram that shows the entire system. List the
following:
a. List the head-end equipment and IP addressed devices. Show the connection to the “Cloud”
WAN, where applicable.
1. Show each location (the MDF and EACH designated IDF separately).
2. Show each cable types, sizes, and quantities between the MDF and each designated IDF
location.
3. Show EACH device in the MDF and each designated IDF location (Control Panel, CPU,
DVR, Server, Power Supply and Terminal Cabinet [where applicable]) for each applicable
system, the room name that each major system component is located in and show the
connection to the headend equipment.
4. Show all field devices with their respective room names and/or room numbers and
connections to their associated equipment.
5. Show all field devices with their respective address point (where applicable).
8. For the Fire Alarm System ONLY, provide a detailed Sequence of Operation matrix that meets or
exceeds industry standards, and shows how the System will work. This includes, but is not limited
to:
a. All Inputs and/or Actions
b. All Outputs and/or Controls
9. Provide all Mounting Details and mounting heights for:
a. All head-end equipment
b. Rack(s) (where applicable)
c. Device(s)
10. Detailed Wiring Information:
a. Show each individual conductor color for all wiring on the point-to-point wiring diagrams for
each device.
b. Show complete scale drawings of equipment, devices, wiring diagrams, and terminations of:
1. Each Control Panel, CPU, DVR, etc
2. Power Supply and/or amplifier
3. Rack equipment (where applicable)
4. EACH device type
5. EACH Terminal Cabinet (where applicable)
11. Rack Layout (where applicable)
a. Show the intended equipment layout within the Rack(s).
b. Show blank filler plates in spaces where equipment is not installed.
c. Indicate the rack unit size of each device or filler plate in the rack.
1. If rack equipment is installed on the rear side of the rack, show rear view of the rack
also.
12. The matrix as defined in the ‘System Device Naming Matrix’ of each system specification (where
applicable).
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00
27 00 00 - 6/25
13. On the shop drawings, include a letter signed by the System designer that is responsible for the
design depicted in the submittals and on the shop drawings. The letter shall state that the
equipment and shop drawings design conform to national, state, local codes as adopted by the
local authority having jurisdiction and meet or exceed all of the performance requirements as
outlined in the specifications.
a. Designers shall provide the following:
1. Provide a “signature” line and signature of the designer.
2. Provide a “printed name” line, below [or to the right] of the signature line and the
printed name of the designer.
3. Provide a “date” line, below [or to the right] of the printed name line and date of the
design.
b. For Fire Alarm Shop Drawings, include the above information and the system shall be
designed by one of the following (provide a copy of the supporting documentation):
1. NICET Level III Certified Designer
2. Registered Professional Engineer.
14. Label and Labeling:
a. On the drawings, label each Rack, Control Panel, CPU, DVR, Power Supply(s), and Terminal
Cabinet(s) in a logical numeric sequence. (i.e. for Fire Alarm Power Supplies, list them as
FAPS-1, FAPS-2, etc).
b. Cables: Generate an alpha-numeric label for each cable type and cable run.
c. For projects with multiple sites, all labeling shall be consistent for all sites.
15. Show floor plan layout of devices and the anticipated routing of cable runs in parallel with all
structural framing in a neat and orderly fashion.
16. EACH device at EACH location shall be shown on EACH floor plan. The cabling for EACH device shall
be shown from EACH device to the device that it shall be connected to. EACH cable(s) shown on
the floor plan shall be identified as described in the “Wire Legend” portion listed within this
specification.
a. Floor Plans: Show all system related devices and all equipment that the system specific shop
drawings will interface to, on each of the floor plans. Provide Cabling for each device and the
related wire type (as shown on the “Wire Legend”) shown for each of the device(s). Where
multiple devices are on the same circuit or an addressable data cable is used, show all devices
and their related cable(s).
17. EOL Supervision:
a. Indicate on the floor plan drawings where EACH of the End-Of-Line Resistor(s) is located
(where applicable).
18. Addressable Device information:
a. Show each device address next to each device (where applicable), and clearly displaying this
information so that it is not confusing as to which address belongs to which device. For non-
addressable devices that will be connected to an addressable module, show the device
address next to each device and the addressable module that it will be connected to.
b. List the System Address Point(s) using a logical numbering sequence for the devices on a
single run.
c. Maintain the “Spare Capacity” requirements listed elsewhere in the specifications (where
applicable).
d. Include the complete Dip Switch and/or Rotary Addressing Scheme (used to set the device
address for each addressable point) on the drawings.
19. Illuminated Graphic Map(s) (where applicable) – Prior to ordering or installation of any equipment,
the Installing Vendor/Contractor shall obtain written approval by the Architect. Provide the
Architect with seven (7) copies of submittals for approval. These shall be submitted with the Shop
Drawings, but not be bound with the Shop Drawings submittal.
a. Provide the actual full-size scale drawing and artwork that will be provided to the Owner for a
final product.
b. The Drawing submittal shall be in color.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00 - 7/25
20. All drawing submittals shall be a complete and full set of the system. If drawings are required to be
re-submitted, a full and complete set must be re-submitted. Partial system drawing sets will be
rejected and the Installing Vendor/Contractor shall reissue a full set of drawings. Any re-
submittal(s) shall be provided at the Installing Vendor/Contractors expense.
21. The Installing Vendor/Contractor is responsible for assuring that the conduit size, wire quantity,
wire size, and wire type is suitable for the equipment supplied. The Installing Vendor/Contractor
shall review the proper installation method(s) for each type of device/equipment with the
manufacturer’s representative, and the AHJ, Prior to Rough-In.
22. Provide shop drawings that are usable for trouble-shooting purposes showing equipment/device
locations, conduit routing, junction boxes and connection wiring of entire system.
E. Contract drawings shall not be used as Shop Drawings.
F. The Shop Drawings shall be system specific. For example: only Fire Alarm equipment and connections
to other equipment that will be interfaced to the Fire Alarm, shall be shown on the Fire Alarm drawings.
G. Floor plans for the project have been developed by the Engineer using AutoCAD™ software. These
drawing files will be made available to the Installing Vendor/Contractor for development of Shop
Drawings and/or As Builts with a signed waiver of responsibility.
1.07 GOVERNING CODES AND CONFLICTS
A. If the requirements of this section, related sections or the Project Drawings exceed those of the
governing codes and regulations, then the requirements of this section, related sections, and the
Drawings shall govern. However, nothing in this section, related sections or the Drawings shall be
construed to permit work not forming to all governing codes and regulations.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS – CIVIL PLANS
A. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall carefully coordinate the various symbols utilized on the drawings
and shall consult the civil plans to determine site conditions in the various areas.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide all equipment as defined in each specification and on the drawings.
B. All equipment, panels, power supplies, and devices shall be manufactured under the appropriate
category by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the UL label.
C. All equipment for each system shall bear the UL label. Partial or pending listings shall not be acceptable.
It shall be the Installing Vendor’s responsibility to ensure that these requirements are met and replace
any and all equipment up to and including the entire system if these requirements are not met.
D. EACH of the specified Low Voltage Systems identified in PART 1 of these specifications including the
design, devices and/or wiring arrangement shown on the drawings, represent that based on various
equipment manufacturers. Any changes resulting from differences between the specified product and
other manufacturers or substitute manufacturers, shall be the responsibility of the Installing Vendor.
1. Substitutions of the specified equipment and/or supplier will be considered provided that sufficient
documentation is provided to the Engineer which certifies that the equipment and or supplier
qualification meets the requirement of these specifications. Any request for substitution shall be
submitted by the Installing Vendor in writing so as to be received by the Architect not later than
(10) days prior to the bid due date. Equipment that is approved by the Engineer will be issued by
addendum prior to the bid date.
E. Refer to PART 1 for any equipment that is not specifically defined.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00
27 00 00 - 8/25
2.02 CONDITION OF MATERIAL
A. All equipment shall be new, in un-opened boxes, and be the most current model available for each
component and/or device that is provided for this project. For products that use firmware, the most
current version available shall be downloaded and installed at each component and/or device, prior to
any programming being performed. Outdated or used equipment, as determined by the Architect, shall
be removed and replaced by the Installing Vendor/Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
B. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers'
recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics,
physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system installation. All materials shall be in working
order as intended by the manufacturer, at the completion of the project.
2.03 TERMINAL CABINETS, TERMINAL STRIPS, AND ENCLOSURES
A. On-Site System Information Binder and Enclosure: EACH Specification Section identified on the first
page of this specification shall have an Information Binder that shall be housed in a System Information
enclosure. The enclosure shall have a hinged door with the text “(Section Title here) Information”, with
each specific system name silk screened onto the enclosure door and shall bear the Underwriters’
Laboratories “UL" label. A “T-Turn” cam lock shall be used to keep the enclosure door closed, and a key
shall NOT be required to open the enclosure. Use the following Space Age Electronics model number or
approved equal.
1. All Systems (other than Fire Alarm): Model # YD9048DBXAA. Verify with the Architect the color of
the enclosure(s) prior to ordering the enclosure. There shall be no additional charge to the Owner,
for changes to the color of the enclosure.
2. For the Fire Alarm: Model # YD9049DBXAA shall be Red in color, have a hinged door, and have
“Fire Alarm System Documentation” silk screened on the enclosure door.
B. Terminal Cabinets (TC):
1. See EACH Specification for Terminal Cabinet requirements (where applicable).
C. Terminal Strips:
1. See EACH Specification for Terminal Strip requirements (where applicable).
D. Enclosures:
1. Each Systems Control Panel(s), Power Supply(s), TC(s), and other metal enclosures shall have the
following:
a. Use key operated locks to secure the enclosure (keyed so that a single key can lock and
unlock all enclosure locks for the entire system) and provide ten (10) keys.
b. Use some form of wire management that uses permanently secured fasteners (no double
back tape), and uses reusable and adjustable Velcro style cable straps, which shall be installed
approximately every four inches within each enclosure.
2.04 LABELS AND LABELING
A. The alpha-numeric labeling shall be developed by the Installing Vendor.
B. Label all equipment and cables in an identical fashion of a sequential manner.
C. The Installing Vendor proposed alpha-numeric labeling that is intended to be used to identify all
components of the system shall be submitted for approval by the engineer, with the submittal of
equipment data sheets.
D. All labeling information shall be recorded on the as-built drawings and all test documents shall reflect
the appropriate labeling scheme.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00 - 9/25
E. Phenolic name plates shall be used for identification of the Racks, Control Panel(s), Power Supply(s),
Terminal Cabinet(s), and other appurtenances of each system in a logical numeric sequence. Use an
alpha-numeric name of each device for each location (created by the Installing Vendor) to identify the
equipment on the Shop Drawings.
1. The size of the plate shall be two-inches high by approximately eight-inches wide. Different colors
of backgrounds may be used for each System (but Red shall only be used for Fire Alarm).
2. The text color shall be White Letters that are 3/4-inch high and are 1/2-inch in width.
F. Labeling of Cables must be provided in the following locations: EACH System Control Panel, Power
Supplies, Terminal Cabinets, Terminal Strips, Racks, other system related appurtenances, and all junction
boxes. Label all cables as shown on the Installing Vendors Shop Drawings.
G. All label printing shall be machine generated using indelible ink ribbons or cartridges, self-laminating
labels shall be used on cable jackets, appropriately sized to the outside diameter of the cable, and
placed within view at the termination point on each end.
1. Temporary Labels: Shall consist of the following:
a. Using a fine point permanent style marker, Sharpie® or equivalent, to write directly onto the
outer jacket of the cable or use temporary tags.
b. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall take all precautions to use care when pulling the cable
to insure the integrity of the temporary label.
c. Remove all temporary labels and tags, prior to installing the permanent label.
2. Permanent Labels: Labels shall be produced using an electronic labeler. Cabling shall be marked
with a permanent, electronic printed label with a self-laminating clear wrapping to cover the
printed label and shall be secured to the outer jacket of the cable.
3. Provide Brady Model XSL-116-427 or approved equal.
2.05 SYSTEM CABLES
A. All cable(s) shall be new.
B. All cable types shall be rated to meet all code requirements for site conditions, including, but not limited
to; underground, wet, plenum, and aerial requirements as mandated per N.E.C. and local AHJ
requirements. The Installing Vendor shall be responsible for ensuring that all cables meet all national
codes, state codes, local codes, AHJ requirements, and each equipment manufacturer’s requirements,
for a reliable, fully functional, and warrantable system, as intended. Do not exceed the wiring distance
limitation of the equipment, device(s), cable(s) and/or conductor(s) as recommended by the
manufacturer of either the equipment and/or the cables for each installation application:
1. Use the manufacturer recommended cables for EACH application and as required by Code (i.e.
Raceway, Open Cabling, Wet and/or Aerial).
2. All cables shall be stranded, unless otherwise noted and/or recommended otherwise in writing by
the manufacturer.
a. Balanced twisted pair horizontal cabling as part of the permanent link (CAT5e, CAT6, CAT6A)
are excluded from this requirement.
3. See PART 3 of this section, and of each System specification for more information.
2.06 PROOF OF DELIVERY FORM
A. When providing Equipment to the Owner, the Installing Vendor shall provide the following transmittal
document and obtain the necessary signatures.
1. The Installing Vendors Transmittal Document is defined as:
a. Company logo
b. Name
c. Address
d. Telephone number
e. Delivery date
f. Installing Vendors representative name that is making the delivery
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00
27 00 00 - 10/25
g. Quantity of each item
h. Manufacturers Name and Model Number
i. The exact same description of the device (as used on the shop drawings)
j. Provide a “signature” line for the Owners representative.
k. Provide a “printed name” line, for the Owners representative.
l. Provide a “date” line, below for the Owners representative.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WORK ENVIRONMENT
A. General:
1. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall have implemented an OSHA approved safety plan at their
place of business and is a daily practice for all staff.
a. Avoiding an injury is the primary concern for this project. Use OSHA industry standards to
avoid accidents.
2. Coordination with Other Trades:
a. It is the responsibility of the Installing Vendor/Contractor to coordinate with all trades for this
project. Maintain all requirements for; project schedule deadlines, rough in, installation,
programming, training, and ensuring that the Owner receives a fully functional system as
defined in this specification.
3.02 APPROVED EQUIPMENT AND PERMITS
A. No equipment shall be delivered to the job site until shop drawings have been reviewed and approved
by the Architect.
B. An approved set of shop drawings shall be continuously available at the job site during construction, for
review by the Architect.
C. Obtain all permits as required, prior to installation of any equipment. They shall be continuously
available at the job site during construction, for review by the Architect.
3.03 CABLE INSTALLATION – GENERAL
A. Open Cable installation methods are acceptable for this project when they are above accessible ceilings
or in attic spaces, provided that all requirements identified in this specification are met.
B. All cable types shall be rated to meet all code requirements for site conditions, including, but not limited
to; underground, wet, and aerial requirements as mandated per N.E.C. and local AHJ requirements.
C. Do not exceed the wiring distance limitation of the equipment, device(s), cable(s) and/or conductor(s) as
recommended by the manufacturer of either equipment and/or cables for each installation application.
The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all cables meet all equipment
manufacturers’ requirements for a reliable, fully functional, and warrantable system, as intended.
D. Wiring insulation shall be one of the types required by NEC 725-16.
E. Cable Supports: Clamps, "D-Rings", “J-Hooks”, Hangers, and Velcro tie-wraps are all acceptable ways to
support cable. However, installation of these supports must be done with care so as not to cause
crushing or distortion of the cable, nor cause tighter bends than the minimum radius permitted for each
type cable.
1. See each specific Section requirements that shall be applied to this project in addition to these
requirements.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00 - 11/25
F. Allowable Cable Bend Radius and Pull Tension: In general, all cables cannot tolerate sharp bends or
excessive pull tension during installation. The minimum radius bend shall be ten (10) times the cable
outer diameter with no tensile load applied, and twenty (20) times the cable outer diameter with a
maximum tensile load of 25ft/lbs applied during installation. The Installing Vendor/Contractor is
responsible for maintaining the cable manufacturers Bend Radius and Pull Tension at all times.
Corrections to cable installation shall be made to the satisfaction of the Architect at no additional cost to
the Owner.
G. Service Loops and Cable Management:
1. Comb all wires for the duration of the cable run so they are neat, orderly, do not have excessive
slack, and are not tangled, prior to any service loop, continuing through any service loop,
continuing into EACH Enclosure(s) and/or System Rack(s).
a. Provide a 10’-0” service loop of EACH device cable (a minimum of 2’-0” above the accessible
ceiling (within 5’-0” of plan view) above EACH device.
b. For ceilings that are open to structure, do NOT provide a service loops, except for the
following locations:
1. MDF Rooms
2. IDF Rooms
3. Electrical Rooms
4. Storage Rooms
5. Designated system equipment locations that are NOT in view of the public.
6. Prior to rough-in, obtain Architects approval.
2. Cable Management shall be used to bundle all cables of like kind, separated by system type.
3. See Systems Plywood Backboard Cabling, listed elsewhere in this specification for more
information.
H. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall ensure that communications cable is installed with care, using
techniques which prevent kinking, sharp bends, scraping, cutting, deforming the jacket, or other
damage. During inspection, evidence of such damage will result in the material being declared
unacceptable. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall replace all unacceptable cabling at no additional
expense to the Owner.
I. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall order and install the exact cables as specified on the Installing
Vendors Shop Drawings. If at any time during the installation and through the warranty period, it is
discovered that any cable other than what is called for on the Installing Vendors drawings has been
installed, the Installing Vendor/Contractor shall remove all effected cables and shall provide and install
the correct cable, as required. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall also provide the staff to monitor
the building during the cable replacement period until the System is fully operational to the satisfaction
of the Architect, without any additional cost to the Owner.
J. All horizontal cables shall be supported at a maximum of 4’-0” intervals with UL approved devices. At no
point shall cables rest on, be tied to or otherwise secured to electrical conduit, plumbing, ventilation
ductwork, accessible ceiling and/or light fixture hangers, or any other equipment. Cable shall be
secured to building supports or wire hangers (at the structures ceiling) specifically designed to support
cables and/or to additional blocks or anchors specifically installed for this purpose.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00
27 00 00 - 12/25
K. All open cabling and/or conduit shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the structure. Open cable
installations shall use insulated mounting supports or rings approved for such use. Wiring shall be
installed near or on structural members as to minimize risk of physical damage by other trades or
maintenance personnel servicing the equipment.
1. Installing open cabling and/or conduit on an exposed area of wall that could have been installed in
a less conspicuous manner, especially where art or murals are to be painted is NOT acceptable.
Any installation that does not meet this requirement will be required to be removed, and to patch
and paint to match adjacent surfaces to the satisfaction of the Architect. Then install the conduit,
fasteners, and wire as required by the project, at no additional cost to the Owner in an acceptable
manner that meets with the Architects approval. Obtain direction from the Architect prior to
rough-in, for areas that need clarification.
2. In some cases, it may be more aesthetically appealing to install conduit down the wall to the floor
and either through the floor or along the floor, to be less conspicuous. Contact the Architect for
further clarification.
L. Conduit type and areas where conduit will be required for this project are:
1. Provide EMT metal raceway in the following areas:
a. Always conceal conduits within walls and/or ceiling spaces wherever possible.
b. Provide conduit in all areas required by Code.
c. Provide conduit from the device to accessible ceiling.
d. Areas exposed to view and inaccessible areas. Install conduits to an accessible ceiling space,
as defined above.
2. Provide conduit, conduit sleeves, junction boxes, couplers, connectors, cabling and terminations as
recommended by the manufacturer and as required for a complete installation.
3. Conduit, conduit sleeves, raceways, floor boxes, device boxes, mud rings, etc., shall be furnished
and installed per the Division 26 requirements. Maintain all Conduit Code Fill Requirements and
provide no less than an additional 40% spare capacity for future growth.
4. Conduit and Raceway Usage: All communications cable shall be dedicated for communications
purposes, and not to be shared with other electrical wiring when required by code. Obtain written
approval from EACH of the manufacturers if more than one system type is going to be installed in a
single conduit.
a. Fire Alarm Cabling shall be in a separate, dedicated raceway (where indicated on the
drawings).
5. Pull Cords: Provide Nylon type pull cords in EACH Conduit raceway.
M. Cable Lubricants: Lubrications specifically designed for installing cables may be used to reduce pulling
tension as necessary when pulling cable into conduit. After installation, exposed cable and other
surfaces must be cleaned of lubricant residue.
1. Recommended Products:
a. Dyna-Blue
b. American Polywater
N. Horizontal Cabling:
1. Horizontal cable terminations shall be made at the appropriate patch panel and labeled. At each
outlet box, a sufficient length of spare cable shall be provided for terminating outlet devices such
that the outlet can be easily removed and inspected. In addition, each cable shall be terminated as
indicated below:
a. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in the
TIA/EIA-568-C document, manufacturer’s recommendations and/or best industry practices.
b. Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall not be less than 4 times the outside
diameter of the cable.
c. The cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination point.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00 - 13/25
O. Systems Plywood Backboard Cabling:
1. Cable shall be routed as close as possible to the ceiling, floor, or corners to ensure that adequate
backboard space is available for current and future equipment and for cable terminations. Cables
shall NOT be tie-wrapped to existing electrical conduit, existing cables, or other equipment.
Minimum bend radius shall be observed.
2. Install cables via the shortest route directly to the nearest edge of the backboard from the
mounted equipment or block. Lace, Plastic or Velcro tie wrap all similarly routed cables together
and attach to the outside edge(s) of the backboard vertically and/or horizontally, then route via
"square" corners over a path that will offer minimum obstruction to future installations of
equipment and/or other cables.
3. See “Service Loops and Cable Management” listed within this specification for additional
information.
3.04 SYSTEMS PLYWOOD BACK BOARD(S)
A. Systems plywood back board(s) shall be used to mount enclosures of any kind, to any wall or surface.
The systems plywood backboard shall be securely fastened to the walls to accommodate no less than
ten times the total weight of the equipment to be mounted. The systems plywood backboard shall be a
minimum of 3/4", APA exterior grade Douglas Fir A-C, and fire retardant with a flame spread rating not
more than 25 when tested according to ASTM E-84. Provide the systems plywood backboard from the
floor up to ceiling height (not exceeding 12’-0”) on all walls shown, unless otherwise noted. The entire
backboard shall be painted with three (3) coats of fire-retardant paint (the color shall match the
adjacent surface). EACH enclosure, when mounted, shall bear a minimum of 150 pounds weight on the
enclosure.
B. Mounting of equipment shall be logically placed, and shall be located at the top, bottom, left, or right
portion of the systems plywood backboards to accommodate future growth of the system. Under no
circumstances will the equipment be allowed to be mounted in the middle of the backboards.
3.05 GROUNDING
A. Ground all equipment per the Manufacturers recommendations, per Division 26 and as required by
Code.
B. Provide grounding and bonding per TIA-607-B.
C. Provide (1) #3/0 green insulated copper grounding conductor in 1” conduit from the Main Electrical
Room MDB Ground Busbar to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) Telecommunication Main Grounding
Busbar (TMGB).
D. Provide (1) #3/0 green insulated copper grounding conductor in 1” conduit between the MDF Room
TMGB and EACH designated Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) location shown on the drawings and
terminate on the Telecommunication Grounding Busbar (TGB).
E. Provide (1) #3/0 green insulated copper grounding conductor in 1” conduit between the EACH
designated Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) location shown on the drawings and terminate on the
Telecommunication Grounding Busbar (TGB).
F. See Section 27 2000 “TMGB and TGB (Telecommunication Grounding Busbars)” for additional Grounding
requirements.
3.06 DEVICE RELOCATIONS
A. Device location may be changed prior to installation, within 15’-0” without extra charge, if so desired by
the Architect.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00
27 00 00 - 14/25
3.07 INSTALLATION
A. Provide all equipment, wiring, conduit, and outlet boxes required for the installation of a complete, fully
functioning, operating system in accordance with applicable local, state, national codes, AHJ
requirements, the manufacturer's recommendations, these plans and specifications. All circuits not in
conduit must be wired with UL listed power limited cable under NEC 725, Class II wiring. Plenum cable
shall be utilized in all return air plenum ceilings.
1. Color coded wires shall be used throughout.
2. Wiring shall conform to the National Electrical Code Article 725.
B. Provide 120vac wiring and connections to the Control Panel(s), EACH Amplifier(s), CPU(s), DVR(s), and
Power Supply(s) as required for a fully functional system, while maintaining all of the design
requirements described elsewhere within each system specifications. At a minimum, this shall include
the following;
1. Multiple Power Supplies and/or the Control Panel(s) may be placed on the same circuit, while
maintaining all code mandated load calculations, but shall be on circuit(s) that is dedicated for
EACH System.
a. Consult with the Architect to verify load calculations meet all code requirements.
b. Install 120 VAC wiring and conduit as specified in Division 26.
c. Show on the As-Built drawings, the location of each panel board that is being used to power
any System equipment and list each panelboard circuit for each system (at the panel board).
(i.e. Panelboard “x”, circuit 12=FAPS-3; Circuit 14=IACP.)
C. Maintain all fire wall ratings, as required.
D. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be closely
coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors.
E. EACH manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide on-site supervision of the installation for
EACH of the systems equipment for the duration of the project. This includes programming, training,
and the Owners ability to use the Complete System Functionality as it was designed.
F. Install wire guards at locations as shown on the drawings and as described elsewhere within these
specifications.
G. Every attempt shall be made to avoid running telecommunications close to (less than 2’-0") and/or
parallel to other communication cables in the building, all lighting, and conduits containing 120vac (or
greater). This shall be to avoid interference with any other service or system, operation, or maintenance
purposes such as access boxes, ventilation-mixing boxes, access hatches to air filters, switch or electrical
outlets, electrical panels, fire alarm equipment, clock systems, and lighting fixtures. Avoid crossing areas
horizontally just above or below any conduit and/or riser. Route cables in such a manner to allow other
cables to enter the conduit and/or riser without difficulty at a later time by maintaining maximum
distance from these openings. Maintain all recommended distances from other cables, as required by
the manufacturer. Install cable to whichever of these two requirements are more stringent.
H. Room numbers shown on plans are architectural designs numbers for construction purposes. These
numbers are NOT to be used for programming. Final system programming shall reflect the final room
numbering plan and actual room signage, unless directed to otherwise in writing or as specified in
another specification section. Update the As-Built Drawings to reflect the final room numbering plan
and actual room signage.
3.08 MOUNTING HEIGHTS, LOCATIONS, AND SETTINGS
A. Install all equipment as recommended by the Manufacturer.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00 - 15/25
B. The installation of EACH device, enclosure, and/or control panel shall be installed so that the
Maintenance Staff will be able to access, test and/or replace any component of the system. If this
installation does not meet this requirement to the satisfaction of the Architect, it will not be accepted.
The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall be required to remove the item, patch and paint the area to the
satisfaction of the Architect, and reinstall the device, enclosure, or control panel as required to make the
system easily maintainable and acceptable, at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Control Panel(s), Power Supply(s), and Locations:
1. Mount Control Panel(s), Power Supplies, and Enclosures (provide quantities as required) with
approximately two inches of separation between the enclosures.
2. Each enclosure, when mounted, shall meet the following criteria;
a. Conduit shall not enter any enclosure or panel, except where conduit entry is approved by the
manufacturer.
b. Chase nipple the enclosures together. At a minimum, use two (2) 1½” conduits. Size and/or
provide additional conduits as required. Provide conduits between enclosures to
accommodate an additional 100% conduit fill while maintaining all NEC requirements. Avoid
installing chase nipples where batteries are to be installed (contact the manufacturer and/or
the Installing Vendor prior to drilling any holes). Any chase nipples installed where batteries
are to be located will be rejected, and require the reinstallation as specified, up to and
including installing new enclosures.
c. The bottom of the chase nipples shall be a minimum of two-inches above the location where
any batteries are to be installed.
d. EACH enclosure door shall be able to open no less than 105°.
e. The top of each enclosure shall be mounted at the same height of 60-inches above the
finished floor and shall be level.
f. If changes to the above requirements are preferred, contact the Architect for approval prior
to rough-in.
D. All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held firmly in place (IE:
devices shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings). Fasteners and supports shall be able to
support the no less than four times the weight of the equipment and/or device.
E. Rack Equipment: EACH Rack shall be securely attached to the floor and/or wall using the manufacturer’s
recommended mounting hardware.
F. See each system specification for additional mounting information.
3.09 FLUSH MOUNT AND SURFACE MOUNT EQUIPMENT AND ENCLOSURE LOCATIONS
A. Prior to rough-in, consult the Architect for clarification for Flush Mount and Surface Mount locations.
B. Flush mounted equipment and enclosures shall be installed in areas where the rooms are finished such
as Administrative Areas, Offices, Work Rooms, Break Room and Corridors. Provide the appropriate
finish work around each enclosure as required. This type of equipment includes, but is not limited to
the following:
1. Enclosures: Typically, are Control Panels, Power Supplies, etc.
a. Provide the manufacturers flush mount Trim Rings, Adapters, and/or Brackets for this type of
equipment.
C. Surface mounted equipment and enclosure shall be installed in areas where the rooms are NOT finished
such as Electrical Rooms, MDF/IDF Rooms, Mechanical Rooms, or Utility Rooms. Unless otherwise
noted, this equipment shall be installed on the Systems Plywood Back Boards. This type of equipment
includes, but is not limited to the following:
1. Enclosures: Typically, are Control Panels, Power Supplies, etc
2. Punch Blocks: Typically, are used with Telephone PBX and Intercom equipment
3. Wall Mounted and Floor Mounted Racks
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00
27 00 00 - 16/25
3.10 NUMBERING AND LABELING
A. Phenolic Plates:
1. Install phenolic plates at each of the Control Panel(s), Power Supply(s), Terminal Cabinet(s), and
Rack(s).
a. All phenolic plates shall be secured to each enclosure with rivets.
b. Install each plate 1” from the top of the enclosure and be centered on the door. Relocate as
required to avoid interfering with equipment or components within the enclosure or that may
prevent the enclosure door from closing properly. The location of the phenolic plates shall be
consistently installed in the same location on each system enclosure, at EACH location.
B. Terminal Cabinets:
1. Label each termination point on the inside of EACH enclosure door. All information shall be legible,
as defined by the Architect.
C. Addressable Devices/Address Point Labels (where applicable):
1. Install the Address Label for each addressable device on or near the device. Verify with the
Architect, prior to installation.
2. Clean the surface from dust, grease, or lubricants as recommended by the manufacturer of the
label.
3. The addressable label shall be able to be viewed by the general public when standing on the
ground.
a. Prior to Installation, coordinate with the Owner’s Representative for exact location of how
and/or where to mount the address label for EACH device type to fulfill this requirement,
prior to installation.
4. Provide the following address label format:
a. The background shall be clear (see through).
b. The text shall be Black in color, and a minimum of ½” tall.
c. Use Brothers or P-Touch models to produce the label.
3.11 WIRING
A. For consistency of wiring throughout the entire system equipment, if specific conductor colors are not
called out in EACH system specification, then the following colors shall apply:
1. Red is (+) Positive voltage or data bus (+) positive.
2. Black is (-) Negative voltage or data bus (-) negative.
3. White is common.
4. Green is normally open or normally closed.
B. Wiring within EACH enclosure shall have the outer jacket of the cable removed to within three-inches of
the cable entering the enclosure. Individual conductors from each jacketed cable shall be spirally
twisted to keep them together, until they are routed into each appropriate individual terminal. Route all
conductors parallel with the walls of the enclosure, make 90° turns within the enclosure, and always
keep a two-inch minimum spacing from any circuit board and/or terminals.
1. Labeling of Cables.
a. Prior to installing any label, clean each cable with the appropriate cleaner to remove any
pulling compound residue, grease, oil, dirt, etc. in order for the label to properly adhere to
the cable jacket.
b. The Label shall indicate the Device or Outlet and the area or wing of the building that the
cable is being routed from. The Label shall also indicate the MDF Room or designated IDF
location that the cable is being routed to.
c. Each label shall be located on each cable that enters any enclosure or junction box and shall
be easily visible and readable.
d. The cable numbering system shall be consistent with shop drawings.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00 - 17/25
C. End-of-Line (EOL) Resistors: Each device that is capable of being supervised by the Control Panel and/or
Power Supply shall be supervised. Install equipment and/or program as required.
1. Indicate on the As-Built drawings where EACH of the End-Of-Line Resistors is located.
2. Each End-of-Line Resistor shall be installed at the last device on each circuit. Locating the EOL in
the Control Panel and/or Power Supply is NOT acceptable.
D. The telephone dialer connections and Ethernet WAN connections shall be made by the Installing
Vendor. Coordinate with the Owner for scheduling the Owners IT Department to supervise all
terminations and connections.
E. All wiring routed under slab or underground shall be suitable for wet locations.
F. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of EACH
enclosure after completion of the installation, and prior to any testing being performed.
G. All circuits shall be identified in accordance with table below and all labels shall include wire type,
quantity and circuit number. Wire code shall match approved shop drawings wire code.
Table
Example: C2HX3
C = Signal Circuit Wire
2 = Signal circuit number
H = LCD Keypad wire
X = Addressable initiating device circuit wire
3 = Addressable initiating device circuit number
3.12 SPLICE CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS
A. All references to splices are for cables that are 50 volts or less.
B. A continuous cable run without any splices is the preferred method. When a splice is required the
following information shall apply.
1. Cable splices are only allowed in accessible, dry locations, in a junction box or terminal cabinet
suitable for the purpose. The only exception is for field devices that have wire leads (i.e. Pigtail)
and require a connection of two wires at the device.
a. Each cable end that is spliced must be labeled, as specified. (i.e.: At the splice point, “From
FACP in MDF Room XXX” on one cable, and “To the East Wing RCAP” on the other cable).
C. All splices shall be performed in one of the following methods:
1. Wire nuts shall NOT be used on this installation, will be deemed unacceptable, and shall be
removed and installed as outlined below.
2. In Junction Boxes:
a. Either one of the following Splice Methods are acceptable:
1. Use the Tool-less Terminal Strip, Model Number SSU00470 (Black) or SSU00471 (White),
and SSU00465 (the Back-Box Bracket) for use with extra deep 4S boxes. This equipment
is manufactured by Space Age Electronics.
2. Use Model DC-100-S Blue Dolphin Connectors (with Sealant), Manufactured by Dolphin
Components Corporation, on all splice connections that are size 18 gauge or less. The
rubber coated outer jacket of the inch-long connector shall contain non-curing sealant
that fills the crimp cavity when crimped. Strip the color coded outer jacket of each
individual conductor that is going to be crimped, approximately 1/8-inch shorter than
the length of the crimp connector, so that when the conductors are inserted all of the
way in the connector, no bare wires (or any strands of wire) are exposed or visible out of
the connector.
3. In Terminal Cabinets:
a. In Terminal Cabinet(s) with each conductor to be landed on a separate terminal.
b. Indicate on the Shop Drawings and As-Builts, the locations of EACH Terminal Cabinet.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00
27 00 00 - 18/25
c. Maintain the “Spare Capacity” requirements, as specified.
4. At Field Devices (where the device has wire leads and not a terminal strip).
a. Use Model DC-100-S Blue Dolphin Connectors as described above.
5. Spare or unused conductors shall be:
a. Landed on terminal strips
b. Shall have the Blue Dolphin Connectors crimped on the end of each conductor.
1. Field devices with pigtails shall have a Blue Dolphin Connectors crimped on the end of
any unused conductor(s).
D. All conductors, if spliced, shall be ONLY spliced to the same gauge size and color of conductor. Changing
of gauge size or color at any point within any cable run is strictly prohibited, and all cables will be
replaced at no additional cost to the Owner, and to the satisfaction of the Architect.
1. If the field device has wire leads, then wire as necessary at the device for proper operation.
Indicate the color code change on the shop drawings per point wiring diagrams. Update any and
all changes to the drawings, for accurate as-builts.
3.13 ON-SITE SYSTEM INFORMATION BINDER ENCLOSURE
A. The Installing Vendor shall install the wall mount enclosure that is labeled “(Section Title here)
information”. The enclosure shall be located in the administrative area or the MDF room. Verify the
exact location with the Architect, prior to installation.
B. The enclosure shall have a Site-specific manual, in a “D” style 3-ring binder with an 18-inch heavy-duty
chain securely fastened to the inside of the enclosure.
C. See “As-Built Documentation” for more information.
3.14 TESTING & COMPLETE SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY (SPECIFICALLY FOR THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ONLY)
A. The installing vendor shall notify the Architect a minimum of five (5) business days in advance of testing.
B. The warranty shall NOT begin until the following conditions have been met:
1. Fire Alarm System Testing:
a. The Installing Vendor shall provide two-way communication devices for their own staff, each
Owners Representative, and the Architect, so that all parties can communicate as required to
perform all tests.
b. Completely fill out the 2007 Edition NFPA Fire Alarm System Record of Completion document.
c. Obtain the AHJ signature, printed name, date, and telephone number on the Record of
Completion.
d. Obtain the AHJ signature, printed name, date, and telephone number on the Fire Alarm
Permit.
e. If the Installing Vendor fails the Fire Marshal Inspection, the following shall occur:
1. The Installing Vendor shall make all of the necessary corrections as required, to pass the
AHJ testing and inspection. Then, notify the AHJ and schedule another test, and
continue making corrections until the Fire Alarm System has been accepted by the AHJ.
f. The Installing Vendor is subject to the Close Out requirements as specified in Section 20 0000,
Schedule of Values.
2. As-builts:
a. Refer to the “As-Built Documentation” of this specification for more information.
3. Training:
a. Refer to Section 28 3176 for the Training Requirements as described in “Training Materials”.
4. Complete System Functionality:
a. After ALL the above conditions have been met, and includes each of the required signatures,
this shall then be deemed that the Owners ability to use the Complete System Functionality
as it was designed.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00 - 19/25
5. Warranty:
a. The Warranty period shall now begin, and the initiating date of the Warranty period shall
commence on the date of the Owners ability to use the Complete System Functionality as it
was designed. Refer to the “Warranty” of this specification for more information.
C. Upon completion of the installation, testing, and Instruction & Training, the Installing Vendor shall
provide the following Signed Test Forms, in the as-built documentation as required.
1. The signed original Record of Completion
2. The signed original Fire Alarm Permit
3.15 TESTING & COMPLETE SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY (SPECIFICALLY FOR AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEMS)
A. Electronic System Testing:
1. After all equipment specified herein for the system has been completely fabricated and wired and
is in operating condition in the Sound System Installing Vendor's shop, performance tests shall be
conducted by the Sound System Installing Vendor on the system to determine if the installation
and components comply with these specifications.
2. The following test shall be performed and the system shall be made to meet each listed
performance criterion:
3. Overall frequency response of the complete electronic system (unequalized) shall be 20 to 20,000
Hz +2 dB. Equalizing circuits shall be temporarily set in the indicated "flat" position.
4. Total harmonic distortion from microphone input to power amplifier output at rated power shall
be less than 1% for the frequency range of 20 to 20,000 Hz
5. The overall broadband hum and noise from 20 Hz to 20 kHz using 6 dB/octave filter at 12.47 kHz
shall be at least 65 dB below the rated output from system input to output.
6. The total system shall be installed from microphone to loudspeaker in Absolute Polarity. A positive
pressure on the microphone shall produce a positive pressure from the loudspeaker.
B. Acoustical Testing:
1. After all electronic equipment specified herein is fully installed at the job site and the speakers are
fully installed, the system shall be equalized and acoustically tested by the Sound System Installing
Vendor utilizing the Real-Time testing technique. Personnel, test equipment, complete report, and
signing shall be as described.
2. The speakers shall be oriented and sound levels set to provide an even distribution of the Sound
Field frequency response of 250 to 10,000 Hz throughout the seating area.
3. Provide equalization to DSP (when applicable) to attain frequency response that is within +3 dB
from 100 to 10,000 Hz with a 6 dB roll off below 80 Hz and above 12,500 Hz, at any seat in the
audience covered by the loudspeakers.
4. The system shall deliver a minimum of 85 dB average program level with additional 10 dB peaking
margin to any seat in the audience at distortion level below 1% THD over the specified frequency
range.
3.16 TESTING & COMPLETE SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY (FOR ALL SYSTEMS THAT IDENTIFY THIS TESTING
REQUIREMENT)
A. The warranty shall NOT begin until the following conditions have been met:
1. Obtain the AHJ signature, printed name, date, and telephone number on the Permit(s) and other
required documentation. Provide this documentation with the As-Built documents.
2. The Installing Vendor shall provide a copy of the (Section Number and Section Title here)-
Operational Test Form has been performed and submitted to the Architect for review. The
purpose of this document is to show that the Installing Vendor has in fact performed a complete
test. In some cases, every device may not pass the test. This shall serve as the Installing Vendors
own punch list, to make corrections prior to the Acceptance Test. This must be completely filled
out and have an original signature of the representative of the Installing Vendor. Allow for a
minimum of ten (10) business days for the Architect to review this document.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00
27 00 00 - 20/25
3. After the Architects review of the System Operational Test Form, the Architect will discuss the
results of the test with the Installing Vendor.
4. The Installing Vendor shall coordinate with the Architect to witness Performance Test. Allow for a
minimum of ten (10) business days to schedule this testing.
5. System Testing:
a. The Installing Vendor shall provide two-way communication devices for their own staff, each
Owners Representative, and the Architect, so that all parties can communicate as required to
perform all tests.
b. The Installing Vendor shall demonstrate the testing of each device, to the Owners
Representative and the Architect, and document this information on the (Section Number
and Section Title here) - Performance Test Form.
c. Upon the completion and passing the Performance Test with 100% positive results, the
Acceptance Test form shall be signed by the Installing Vendor, the Owners Representative,
and the Architect.
1. If the Installing Vendor fails this test by NOT passing the test with 100% positive results,
the following shall occur;
2. The Installing Vendor shall make all of the necessary corrections to provide 100%
positive results.
3. The Installing Vendor shall document the corrective action taken for each item that
failed the Test and submit to the Architect for review. Upon approval by the Architect,
the Acceptance Test shall be rescheduled.
4. The Installing Vendor is subject to the Close Out requirements as specified in Section 01
29 50, Schedule of Values.
6. As-builts:
a. Refer to the “As-Built Documentation” of this specification for more information.
7. Training:
a. Refer to EACH specific Section for the Training Requirements as described in “Training
Materials and Programming Survey”.
8. Complete System Functionality:
a. After ALL the above conditions have been met as deemed by a “Pass” on the Governing
Acceptance Form - (Section Name and Section Title here), all training has been completed,
and the required signatures have been acquired, this shall then be deemed that the Owners
ability to use the Complete System Functionality as it was designed.
9. Warranty:
a. The Warranty period shall now begin, and the initiating date of the Warranty period shall
commence on the date of the Owners ability to use the Complete System Functionality as it
was intended. Refer to the “Warranty” of this specification for more information.
3.17 WARRANTY
A. See “Testing & Complete System Functionality”, listed elsewhere in these specifications, to establish the
requirements and confirm when the actual warranty period shall begin.
B. The Installing Vendor shall include in the pricing of their bid that they will honor and provide EACH of
the manufacturers Full Term Warranty period for the provision of replacement equipment for EACH
individual device and/or component provided for this project. The completed and fully functional
System, including wiring, installation, and all equipment shall be free from inherent mechanical and
electrical defects. At a minimum, this shall be no less than one (1) year from the date of Complete
System Functionality as defined in “Testing & Complete System Functionality” portion of this
specification. Warranty service for the on-site replacement of equipment shall be provided by the
system supplier's Manufacturer trained representative during normal working hours, Monday through
Friday, excluding holidays, and respond for service no later than the following business day after the call
was received.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00 - 21/25
C. When the manufacturers warranty exceeds one year, the Installing Vendor shall be responsible for
replacing the actual component or device for the Full Duration of the manufacturer’s warranty, if the
Owner or their representative chooses to take the item to the Installing Vendors place of business. If
the Owner chooses to have the Installing Vendor provide on-site service, then the Installing Vendor is
entitled to their standard published (or negotiated) labor rates and miscellaneous material items to
replace the damaged warranty item.
D. The Installing Vendor who is authorized to provide Warranty Service for this project is defined in
“Quality Assurance” located in Part 1 of this specification.
3.18 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION
A. The following documentation must be completed to the satisfaction of the Architect, in order to fulfill
the Close Out requirements as specified in Section 26 00 00, Schedule of Values.
B. All electronic and hard copy information submitted to the Owner shall immediately become the Owners
property to use as best determined by the Owner, without any compensation to any party.
C. All labeling shall match the final room number identification at completion of the project (not the room
number that is indicated on the Bid Set of drawings).
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall provide three (3) sets of
detailed Operation and Maintenance manuals in a “D” style 3-ring binder. The binder shall be sized to
allow for 20% additional documentation. The spine of the binder shall have a clear cover with an insert
clearly typed with the following label “(Project Name, Section Number, and Section Title here) Operation
and Maintenance Manual”. The binder shall have a clear front cover with an insert clearly typed with
the title of the spine on the binder, located at the top of the page, and centered. The following
information shall also be included on the front sheet of the binder; the Project Name and Project
Number, Specification Section Number and Section Title, the Owners name, the Site Name and Site
Address, the Installing Vendors Name, Address, and Contact Name. These O & M Manuals shall include
the following:
1. Use color-coded numbered tabs to separate each item defined below and for each device that was
installed. Provide the following in the order listed below:
a. Provide an 8½” x 11” clear heavy plastic sheet in front of a Table of Contents page as the first
page of the binder indicating each of the equipment or device documents contained in each
tab section.
b. The System Software User Guide
c. The Web Server “Web-based” software User Guide
d. The System Control Panel LCD Display User Guide
e. The Remote LCD Display User Guide (Where Applicable)
f. Provide Step-By-Step instructions for typical Basic Operation of EACH System.
g. Warranty information. The Installing Vendor shall provide Warranty information in the form
of a matrix from left to right, list the following information:
h. Use the symbol on the Legend of the contract drawings.
i. List the actual manufacturer’s name of each device shown on the Installing Vendors shop
drawings.
j. List the actual manufacturer’s model number of each device shown on the Installing Vendors
shop drawings.
k. Provide the description of the device that is used for each symbol on the legend.
l. On the matrix, indicate recommended testing frequency for each item.
m. State the Manufacturers Full Term of the Warranty for EACH control panel, EACH power
supply, and EACH device provided.
n. Indicate where the Owner may purchase each of these devices. Provide the Business Name,
Address, City, State, Zip Code, Phone Number, and list two (2) contact names.
o. A reduced copy (11”x17”) of record drawings. Enlarge all notes, text, and symbols to a legible
(as defined by the Architect) reading format.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00
27 00 00 - 22/25
p. Provide one (1) original and two (2) copies of the “Spare Parts Proof of Delivery” form that
was signed by the Owners representative.
q. A printed copy of the final completed version of the (Section Number and Section Title here)
technical configuration and this document shall be dated.
r. A printed copy of the final completed version of the (Section Number and Section Title here)
software ‘point status report’ (where applicable) and this document shall be dated.
s. Update the matrix as defined in the ‘System Device Naming Matrix’ for each specification
section, to correct any changes that may have occurred through the course of this project.
This list shall follow the above equipment list.
t. The technical date sheet for each Control Panel, Power Supply, Terminal Cabinet, field device
and component installed. Use a separate tab for each of these that were supplied and/or
installed.
u. Include all testing documentation and the procedure to properly test each device. Put this
document immediately behind the respective technical data sheet.
v. Include the installation manual for each device that was installed. Put this information
immediately behind the testing documentation.
w. Provide one (1) original and two (2) copies of the AHJ approved document(s).
x. Provide one (1) original and two (2) copies of the completed documents:
y. The (Section Number, and Section Title here) - Operational Test Form.
z. The (Section Number, and Section Title here) - Performance Test Form.
aa. The approved Governing Acceptance Form - (Section Number, and Section Title here).
bb. If the Governing Acceptance Form has not been approved, accepted, and signed by the
Architect, this binder will be rejected.
cc. Each binder shall not exceed three-inches in width. Use multiple binders as required.
Indicate Volume 1 of X, Volume 2 or X, etc.
dd. Provide the above information on six (6) CD’s and label each one (with a PC generated label)
“(Owners Name, Project Name, Section Number, Section Title, and the current date goes
here) - Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Data Sheets, Documents, and As-Built Shop
Drawings”. Organize the manuals, data sheets, documents, and drawings into separate
folders.
ee. Include on EACH system CD provided, the AutoCAD As-Built Drawings, located elsewhere in
these specifications.
ff. EACH of the three (3) Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall have one CD securely
fastened inside.
gg. Provide three (3) CD’s for general As-Built documentation for the project.
E. On-Site System Information Binder: The Installing Vendor shall provide Individual Site Manual, in a “D”
style 3-ring binder with an 18-inch heavy-duty chain securely fastened to the inside of the “(Section Title
here) information” enclosure. See the “On-Site System Information Binder Enclosure” listed elsewhere
in these specifications, for the enclosure information and location. The binder shall be sized to allow for
20% additional documentation. The spine of the binder shall have a clear cover with an insert clearly
typed with the following label “(Section Title here) information”. The binder shall have a clear front
cover with an insert clearly typed with the title of the spine on the front sheet, located at the top of the
page, and centered. The following information shall also be included on the front sheet of the binder;
the Project Name and Project Number, Specification Section Number and Section Title, the Owners
name, the Site Name and Site Address, the Installing Vendors Name, Address, and Contact Name. Each
binder shall include the following:
1. Use color-coded numbered tabs to separate each item defined below and for each device that was
installed. Provide the following:
a. Provide an 8½” x 11” clear heavy plastic sheet in front of a Table of Contents page as the first
page of the binder indicating each of the equipment or device documents contained in each
tab section.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00 - 23/25
2. The Installing Vendor shall coordinate with the Owner to obtain the information listed below. A
single sheet shall list the following items:
a. The Site Name and Site Address.
b. State “In case of emergency during regular business hours: (list the appropriate name and
telephone number)”. List the Owners Representative who should be contacted during regular
business hours.
c. State “In case of emergency after regular business hours: list the appropriate name and
telephone number)”. List the Owners Representative who should be contacted after regular
business hours.
d. List the following information (where applicable). State “The monitoring of the (Section Title
here) is being monitored by (list the name of the central monitoring station here), Phone
Number: (list the central station phone number here) Account # (enter the account number
here)”.
3. Provide each of the items identified in the operation and Maintenance Manuals, with the following
exceptions. Do NOT provide:
a. Spare Parts Proof of Delivery form.
b. As-built Operation and Maintenance CD’s of the project.
F. As-Built Drawings: The Installing Vendor shall provide three (3) sets of hard copy As-Built drawings.
Drawings shall be the same size that were issued for the shop drawings and clearly indicates the
following:
1. Update the Shop Drawings:
a. To address any changes, including but not limited to the Riser, point-to-point wiring diagrams,
and mounting details.
b. To accurately reflect the final installation of equipment and devices that were relocated,
added or removed.
c. Update the matrix as defined in the ‘System Device Naming Matrix’ of the specification, to
correct any changes that may have occurred through the course of this project.
d. Actual routing of all raceways.
e. Actual routing of all Open Cables.
f. Actual cable type, color, and numbers.
g. Actual splice locations.
h. Actual system wiring diagrams, connection diagrams, and interface of all components in the
system.
i. Provide scale drawings of the internal components of the main panel, and each power supply.
Show each circuit number coming from the terminals of each Control Panel and/or Power
Supply.
j. Actual room number and programming addresses (where applicable) for all components in
the system.
k. Show on the As-Built drawings the location of each panel board that is being used to power
any System equipment and list each panel board circuit used (at the device that is connected
to that circuit. IE: FACP or FAPS).
l. Indicate on the As-Built drawings where EACH of the End-Of-Line Resistors is located.
m. Provide all updated As-Built drawings in AutoCAD™ 2004 format (or newer) and put these
electronic files on the Operation and Maintenance Manuals CD, as described elsewhere in
these specifications.
G. Provide all As-Built Documentation to the Architect prior to any Training and no less than ten (10)
business days prior to project completion.
H. Any re-submittal(s) shall be provided at the Installing Vendor/Contractors expense.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00
27 00 00 - 24/25
**Sample**
WIRE LEGEND
CONDUIT/RACEWAY SINGLE CONDUCTOR OPEN CABLE
LETTER FUNCTION CONDUCTOR
COLOR
AWG QTY TYPE CABLE
MFR
CABLE
MFR PART
#
CONDUCTOR
COLOR
AWG QTY TYPE CABLE
MFG
CABLE
MFR
PART #
A ADDRESSABLE
INITIATING CIRCUIT
- BLACK #16 1 THWN-
SOLID
#16/2 1 16/2 –
FPLP
+ RED #16 1
B ADDRESSABLE
INITIATING CIRCUIT
LOOP
- BLACK #16 2 THWN-
SOLID
#16/2 2 16/2 –
FPLP
+ RED #16 2
C HORN/STROBE
CIRCUIT
- BLUE #14 1 THWN-
SOLID
#14/2 1 FPLP
+ WHITE #14 1
D HORN/STROBE
CIRCUIT LOOP
- BLUE #14 2 THWN-
SOLID
#14/2 2 FPLP
+ WHITE #14 2
E CONVENTIONAL
INITIATING CIRCUIT
- BLACK #16 1 THWN-
SOLID
#16/2 1 16/2 –
FPLP
+ YELLOW #16 1
F CONVENTIONAL
INITIATING CIRCUIT
LOOP
- BLACK #16 2 THWN-
SOLID
#16/2 2 16/2 –
FPLP
+ YELLOW #16 2
G 24V DC POWER
CIRCUIT
- BLACK #14 1 THWN-
SOLID
#14/2 1 FPLP
+ RED #14 1
H SPEAKER CIRCUIT RED #14/2 1 TWISTED
SHIELDED
FPLP W/
DRAIN
#14/2 1 TWISTED
SHIELDED
FPLP W/
DRAIN
I SPEAKER CIRCUIT
LOOP RED #14/2 2 TWISTED
SHIELDED
FPLP W/
DRAIN
#14/2 2 TWISTED
SHIELDED
FPLP W/
DRAIN
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00
27 00 00 - 25/25
**Sample**
WIRE LEGEND
CONDUIT/RACEWAY SINGLE CONDUCTOR OPEN CABLE
LETTER FUNCTION CONDUCTOR
COLOR
AWG QTY TYPE CABLE
MFR
CABLE
MFR PART
#
CONDUCTOR
COLOR
AWG QTY TYPE CABLE
MFG
CABLE
MFR
PART #
J ANNUNCIATOR
CIRCUIT
BROWN
BLUE
#16
#16
1
1 THWN-
SOLID
#16/2 1 16/2 –
FPLP
- BLACK #14 1 #14/2 1
FPLP
+ RED #14 1
K FIREMANS PHONE
CIRCUIT
RED #18/2 1 18/2
TWISTED
SHIELDED
FPLP W/
DRAIN
#18/2 1 18/2
TWISTED
SHIELDED
FPLP W/
DRAIN
L FIREMANS PHONE
CIRCUIT LOOP
RED #18/2 2 18/2
TWISTED
SHIELDED
FPLP W/
DRAIN
#18/2 2 18/2
TWISTED
SHIELDED
FPLP W/
DRAIN
M CONTROL CIRCUIT - PURPLE #14 1 THWN-
SOLID
#14/2 1 FPLP
+ ORANGE #14 1
N SPARE
CONDUCTORS
- PURPLE #14 2 THWN-
SOLID
#14/4 2 FPLP
+ ORANGE #14 2
ADD PROJECT SPECIFIC NOTES HERE ADD PROJECT SPECIFIC NOTES HERE
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 05 28 - 1/9
SECTION 27 05 28
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General Conditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification
Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1.Phasing and Schedule: Phasing and Schedule are critical for successful completion of this project on an
occupied school site and it is anticipated overtime, double-shifting, or special work schedules and
coordination of phased work will be required. Refer to the Phasing Plans and specification Section 01 11 00
for additional information.
B.WSSP REQUIREMENTS: The work of this section is part of the overall requirements to comply with the required
minimum Washington Sustainable School Protocol (WSSP) requirements. Comply with Section 01 81 13 – WSSP
Requirements; refer to WSSP Scorecard in Section 01 81 13 for WSSP edition and Credit identification.
C.Specification Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Conditions
D.Applicable Standards: All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest revisions of the following
standards:
1.National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
a.NEMA FG 1 - Fiberglass Cable Tray Systems
b.NEMA VE 1 - Metal Cable Tray Systems
c.NEMA VE 2 - Cable Tray Installation Guidelines
2.NFPA 70: National Electrical Code
3.ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises
4.ANSI/TIA-569-B Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
5.TIA-607-B Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications.
1.02 SCOPE
A.The installation shall include innerduct, fire rated and non-fire rated penetration assemblies, conduit, cable tray,
and wire management.
B.The bonding of metallic raceways
C.The work performed under this specification shall be of good quality and performed in a workmanlike manner.
In this context "good quality" means the work shall meet industry technical standards and quality of appearance.
The owner reserves the right to reject all or a portion of the work performed, either on technical or aesthetic
grounds.
D.The system shall meet ALL of the requirements listed in Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General
Requirements PART 3 “Testing & Complete System Functionality”, prior to “Substantial Completion”.
E.Contractual information, guidelines, requirements, or other work specified to provide a fully functional system
for Section 27 05 28 includes, but is not limited to the sections identified in Section 27 00 00.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00
27 05 28 - 2/9
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Installing Contractor Qualifications:
1.Work in this section shall be performed by a licensed and bonded low voltage Installing Contractor with a
minimum of five years’ experience in the installation and maintenance of
high-speed data and voice networks. Only Installing Contractors whose primary business is that of
installing, maintaining, troubleshooting, and testing Telecommunication Infrastructures shall perform this
work.
2.License Classification: Installing Contractor must possess a valid Washington State 06 Electrical Low
Voltage License.
1.04 GOVERNING CODES AND CONFLICTS
A.If the requirements of this section or the Project Drawings exceed those of the governing codes and regulations,
then the requirements of this section and the Drawings shall govern. However, nothing in this section or the
Drawings shall be construed to permit work not conforming to all governing codes and regulations.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS - ARCHITECTURAL PLANS
A.The Installing Contractor shall carefully coordinate the various symbols utilized on the drawings and shall consult
the architectural plans to determine ceiling and floor types in the various areas.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A.Refer to specification 27 0000 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements, for additional data sheet submittal
requirements and the shop drawing submittal requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.See Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional requirements.
B.The Installing Contractor shall review the Site Plans, Floor Plans, Riser Diagrams, and Detail Sheets for additional
work that is required to be performed by the Installing Contractor of this section.
2.02 COORDINATION
A.Refer to “Installation of Owner Furnished Equipment” for additional coordination and installation requirements.
B.Refer to “Submittals” for additional coordination requirements.
2.03 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A.Refer to “As-Built Drawings” listed elsewhere in this specification for additional equipment required for this
project.
2.04 SEISMIC BRACING
A.Provide Seismic Bracing as required by the AHJ.
B.This includes, but is not limited to:
1.Racks
2.Cable Tray
3.Cable Supports
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 05 28 - 3/9
2.05 INNERDUCTS AND CONDUIT SEALS
A.Innerduct (Fabric Mesh):
1.The Installing Contractor shall provide the proper type of fabric mesh innerduct for the application in
which it is being used.
2.Provide flexible multi-cell fabric mesh innerduct consisting of White Polyester and Nylon resin polymer.
3.EACH Cell shall contain a factory installed pull tape, which shall be a different color of pull tape for EACH
Cell.
4.Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXC3456BK (Black), or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required where shown on plans.
a.This shall be the default color for one 3-Cell innerduct.
5.Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXC3456RD (Red), or approved equal. Provide quantities as required
where shown on plans.
a.Where two 3-Cell innerducts are shown in a single conduit on the plans, this shall be the second
color.
6.Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXC3456BL (Blue), or approved equal. Provide quantities as required
where shown on plans.
a.Where three 3-Cell innerducts are shown in a single conduit on the plans, this shall be the third color.
B.Inner Duct (Non-Metallic Tubing):
1.Provide 1” corrugated inner duct for EACH fiber optic cable run.
2.Inner duct shall be rated for the application and environment that it is installed in and shall meet all Code
and AHJ requirements.
3.Non-Metallic Tubing for Fiber Optic Cables shall be Orange in color.
4.Provide quantities as required where shown on plans.
5.Approved Manufacturer: Pyramid Industries or approved equal.
C.Inflation Bags (for 3” Conduits and 4” Conduits):
1.Inside EACH Hand Hole and inside EACH Man Hole, install inflation bags in 3” Conduit(s) and 4” Conduit(s)
that comes into the building. Provide inflation bags in EACH conduit at the opposite end (in the MDF and
designated IDF locations).
2.Provide inflation bags
3.Locate inflation bags in EACH 3” underground conduit and in EACH 4” underground conduit (at each end of
the conduit) that is routed between the MDF and EACH designated IDF location.
4.Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXCITB3 (for 3” conduits), or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
a.Seal each conduit as described above using the manufacturer approved inflation seal method at the
completion of the project.
b.Provide (6) 3” conduit inflation bags (when this sized conduit is used on this project) to the Owner at
the completion of the project.
5.Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXCITB4 (for 4” conduits), or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
a.Seal each conduit as described above using the manufacturer approved inflation seal method at the
completion of the project.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00
27 05 28 - 4/9
b.Provide (6) 4” conduit inflation bags (when this sized conduit is used on this project) to the Owner at
the completion of the project.
6.Inflation Tool.
a.Provide (1) new (unopened package) inflation tool to the Owner at the completion of the project.
b.Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXCITT, or approved equal.
7.Gas Cartridges.
a.Provide (12) new (unopened packages) gas cartridges to the Owner at the completion of the project.
D.Duct Seal (for conduits that are 2.5” or less):
1.Inside EACH Hand Hole and inside EACH Man Hole, install a water tight seal in EACH Conduit that comes
into the building. Provide a water tight seal in EACH conduit at the opposite end (in the MDF and
designated IDF locations).
2.In addition to the above locations, provide Duct Seal that includes, but is not limited to other conduits
such as:
a.Reader Boards
b.Portables
c.Hand holes for future equipment.
3.Manufactured by Ideal: Model # 31-601, or Manufactured by Gardner Bender: Model # DS-130, or
approved equal.
2.06 OPEN CABLING SUPPORT & HARDWARE
A.Each Cable Support shall be UL Listed for the Application and meet the TIA requirements for structured cabling
systems.
B.Provide manufacturer approved mounting brackets and fasteners.
C.Do not exceed the cable support manufacturer’s cable fill capacity for each type provided for this project.
D.Do not exceed the cable manufacturer’s recommendations for cable suspension in open cabling environments.
E.J-Hooks shall have a galvanized finish.
1.Manufactured by Erico CADDY: Model # CAT32HP, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required.
2.Manufactured by Erico CADDY: Model # CAT48HP, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required.
3.Mounting Tree:
4.Manufactured by Erico CADDY: Model # CATHPTM, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required.
F.Adjustable Cable Support:
1.Manufactured by Erico CADDY: Model # CAT425 Series, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 05 28 - 5/9
G.Conduit Waterfalls:
1.Conduit Waterfalls shall be used where conduits empty into cable trays.
2.Manufactured by Panduit: Model # CWF400, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required.
H.Conduit Bushings:
1.Conduit Bushings shall be used to protect communications cabling where conduits terminate in accessible
ceiling space.
2.Bushings shall be non-metallic to reduce cable abrasion.
3.Manufactured by Arlington: Model #EMTXXX, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required.
2.07 CABLE TRAY – WIRE BASKET STYLE
A.Chatsworth Products (CPI) is the basis of design for all wire-style cable. Equivalent manufacture’s solutions may
be submitted for prior approval no less than 2 weeks before bid date closing. Products not submitted for prior
approval shall be rejected.
B.Provide Seismic bracing.
C.The Cable Tray shall be UL Classified.
D.The Cable Tray shall be 4” high x 18” wide (unless otherwise noted).
1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34821-618, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
E.Splice Bar, Splice Bolt/Washer Trapeze Support Bracket, Cable Radius Drop, Ground Clam and other related
materials:
1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34728-501, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
2.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34739-501, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
F.Trapeze Support Bracket:
1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34730-620, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
2.Unistrut may be used in lieu of the above model number if approved by the AHJ.
G.Cable Radius Drop:
1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34747-701, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
H.Ground Clamp:
1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34838-001, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
2.08 CABLE TRAY – LADDER STYLE
A.Chatsworth Products (CPI) is the basis of design for all ladder-style cable. Equivalent manufacture’s solutions may
be submitted for prior approval no less than 2 weeks before bid date closing. Products not submitted for prior
approval shall be rejected.
B.Provide Seismic bracing where required by the AHJ.
C.The Cable Tray shall be UL Classified.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00
27 05 28 - 6/9
D.The Cable Tray shall be 1.5” high x 18” wide (unless otherwise noted) with 9” rung spacing in Steel construction
that has been painted by the manufacturer.
1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 11275-718, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
E.Butt Splice, Junction Splice, Swivel Butt Splice, Swivel Junction Splice, Wall Mount Bracket, Rack Mount Plate,
Ground Strap, Cable Runway Dividers and Cable Radius Drop:
1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 16301-701, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
F.Junction Splice:
1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 16302-701, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
G.Swivel Butt Splice:
1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 16487-701, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required, where applicable.
H.Swivel Junction Splice:
1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 16488-701, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required, where applicable.
I.Wall Mount Bracket:
1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 11746-718, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
J.Ground Strap:
1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 40164-001, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
K.Cable Runway Dividers:
1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 13392-721, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
L.Cable Radius Drop:
1.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 12100-718, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
2.Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 12101-702, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
2.09 FIRE RATED PENETRATIONS AND NON-FIRE RATED PENETRATIONS
A.Provide Fire Rated Penetration equipment for EACH wall that is rated for 1-Hour or more.
B.Provide penetration equipment for each wall that is not a fire rated wall.
C.A firestop system shall be comprised of the item or items penetrating the fire rated structure; the opening in the
structure and the materials and assembly of the materials used to seal the penetrated structure. Firestop
systems comprise of an effective block for fire, heat, vapor, and pressurized water stream.
D.All penetrations through fire rated building structures (walls and floors) shall be sealed with an appropriate
firestop system. This requirement applies to through penetrations (complete penetration) and membrane
penetrations (through one side of a hollow fire rated structure). Any penetrating items i.e., riser slots and
sleeves, cables, conduit, cable tray, and raceways, etc. shall be properly firestopped.
E.Firestop systems shall be UL Classified to ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 05 28 - 7/9
F.Indicate on the Shop Drawings EACH location showing the proposed system location for approval, prior to
installing the penetration system(s).
G.All firestop systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and shall be
completely installed and available for inspection by the local authorities prior to cabling system acceptance.
H.For EACH penetration, the following requirements shall apply:
1.Provide pathway assemblies for EACH Low Voltage System Cables for each individual assembly opening.
2.Provide the quantity of pathway assemblies required for the Horizontal cables, while maintaining all code
requirements. Additionally, provide (1) pathway assembly opening for EACH System listed on the
Electrical Legend. This includes, but is not limited to: Fire Alarm System, Intrusion Alarm System, Intercom
System, Access Control System, CCTV System, etc.) and no less than (2) Spare empty assembly openings,
which shall remain empty at the completion of the project.
3.Manufactured by Specified Technologies, Inc (STI): EZ Path Model # 33 Series and/or EZ Path Model # 44
Series for fire rated walls. Provide quantities as required for all rated installations.
a.For EACH penetration, provide the Stud Wall Attachment (for either series provided), filling the entire
stud wall space with cable pathways for all cabling required and future cabling. Maintain all spare
capacity requirements.
b.For EACH EZ Path Model # 33 Series provided, provide one pair of Radius Control Modules.
c.Manufactured by Specified Technologies, Inc (STI): EZ Path Model # RCM33.
4.Manufactured by Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI): EZ Path Model # NEZP33 Series. Provide quantities as
required for all non-rated fire wall installations.
2.10 ADDITIONAL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
A.See Part 3 of this specification for additional provision of system Equipment and/or Labor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A.See Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional information.
B.Prior to rough-in, coordinate with the Architect for the exact location(s).
C.Install all equipment per the manufacturer’s recommendation.
3.02 PRODUCT INSPECTIONS
A.The Installing Contractor shall inspect all cable prior to installation to verify that it is identified properly on the
reel identification label, that it is of proper gauge, containing correct number of pairs, and is the material
ordered. Any physical damage to the cable and wire must be noted; un-uniform jacket thickness and jacket
tightness should also be identified. Note any buckling of the jacket, which would indicate possible problems.
3.03 GROUNDING AND BONDING
A.Provide grounding and bonding per TIA-607-B, which includes, but is not limited to: Cable Tray, Rack(s), conduit
sleeves, and other equipment connected to the TMGB/TGB.
B.The minimum conductor size shall be #6 green insulated copper grounding conductor. However, size each
conductor shall be based on the actual cable length as defined in TIA-607-B.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Job Number 2210142.00
27 05 28 - 8/9
3.04 HORIZONTAL PATHWAYS
A.It is the responsibility of the contractor to ensure that ALL PATHWAYS for the permanent link of each balanced
twisted pair cable shall not exceed 295’ in length from work area outlet to telecommunications room patch
panel.
B.To ensure this length, all pathways shall be coordinated and installed prior to pouring of any slabs or the
installation of any permanent structure which would inhibit a conduit or cable tray run from being installed after
the structure is complete.
C.See section 27 20 00 for horizontal cabling types and additional requirements.
3.05 FIRE RATED PENETRATIONS AND NON-FIRE RATED PENETRATIONS
A.Install per manufacturers recommendations.
B.Maintain all Code and AHJ requirements.
3.06 PLENUMS
A.Provide metallic conduit through building plenum spaces for all cables which do not bear a CMP rated label.
3.07 WARRANTY
A.The warranty shall be direct to the end user, from the manufacturer, supported through the installing and
certified Installing Contractor, and shall cover both materials and labor costs for any claims related to the
warranty program. If the Installing Contractor were to default, the manufacturer will assume responsibility of
employing another certified installer to maintain the existing warranty. Bids from installers or Installing
Contractors who are not certified by the connecting hardware manufacturer and wire manufacturer at the time
of project bid, will be rejected.
3.08 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS (O&M’S)
A.Provide all Operation & Maintenance Manuals (O&M’s) documentation as defined in Section 27 00 00 Low
Voltage Systems General Requirements and listed elsewhere in this specification.
3.09 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A.Provide all As-Built documentation as defined in Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements
and listed elsewhere in this specification.
B.All labeling shall match the final room number identification at completion of the project (not the room number
that is indicated on the Bid Set of drawings).
C.Update all documents provided in the Submittal and Shop Drawings to accurately reflect the actual equipment
that was provided for this project, and the actual locations of the installed equipment.
D.The Installing Contractor shall provide As-Built drawings to the Architect, which clearly indicates:
1.The floor plan of the building showing the As-Built location of conduit runs, cable tray, and terminal
cabinets.
2.Provide (3) sets of complete As-Builts.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A.Upon completion of the system installation, the installation representative shall conduct a system test for the
Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Owner or their appointed representatives.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 05 28 - 9/9
B.Upon completion of the installation, after test and demonstration, the Installing Contractor shall provide to the
Architect a signed written statement substantiating the:
1."System has been completely tested, demonstrated to the Owner's representative, and accepted by the
appropriate authority."
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00 - 1/17
SECTION 27 20 00
DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary
Conditions and Divisions 0 and 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
B. Contractual information, guidelines, requirements, or other work specified to provide a fully functional
system for Section 27 20 00 includes, but is not limited to the sections identified in Section 27 00 00.
C. Specification Section 26 00 00 Electrical General Conditions.
1.02 SCOPE
A. The Installing Contractor shall furnish and install all materials for a fully functional extension of the
existing data and voice Telecommunications Infrastructure system in accordance with this specification
and the contract drawings. The system shall be in full compliance with a “Limited Lifetime Warranty”.
The Installing Contractor shall be responsible for providing a complete, functional system including all
necessary components, whether included in this specification or not.
B. The installation shall include Copper Category Rated Cables, interconnect equipment, connectors,
jumpers punch blocks, copper patch panels, copper and fiber patch cables, telecommunication outlets,
and wire management.
C. All cables shall be plenum rated.
D. The Installing Contractor is required to coordinate with the Owner so that the telephone system can be
patched into the Data and Voice infrastructure by the Installing Contractor.
E. All copper Horizontal Cables shall be terminated on patch panels in the Telecommunication Rooms
(designated IDF location) and on Telecommunications Outlets. All copper backbone cables shall be
terminated on punch blocks at main cross connects and on patch panels at the horizontal cross connect
end, unless noted otherwise.
F. Upon completion of installation, the Installing Contractor shall test all fiber and copper cables. All cables
shall be tested as defined elsewhere within this specification.
G. The work performed under this specification shall be of good quality and performed in a workmanlike
manner. In this context "good quality" means the work shall meet industry technical standards and
quality of appearance. The owner reserves the right to reject all or a portion of the work performed,
either on technical or aesthetic grounds.
H. The system shall meet ALL of the requirements listed in Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General
Requirements PART 3 “Testing & Complete System Functionality”, prior to “Substantial Completion”.
I. Contractual information, guidelines, requirements, or other work specified to provide a fully functional
system for Section 27 20 00 includes, but is not limited to the sections identified in Section 27 00 00.
J. See “Horizontal Cable” and “Racks” located in this specification for additional work and equipment. This
includes, but is not limited to; CAT6 Cabling for ALL Local Area Network (LAN) based Systems as shown
on the plans, detail sheets, and riser diagrams.
1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to work specified in this Section.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE Job Number 2210142.00
27 20 00 - 2/17
B. Applicable Standards: All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest revisions of the
following standards:
1. BICSI Information Technology Systems Installation Methods Manual, 6th Edition
2. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, 13th Edition
3. ANSI/TIA 606-A (2002) Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure.
4. ANSI/TIA 607-B Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications.
5. EIA/TIA-455-61 (latest edition). "FOTP-61, Measurement of Fiber or Cable Attenuation Using An
OTDR".
6. TIA-526-7. Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant OFSTP-7.
7. ANSI/TIA 568-C.0. "Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises."
8. ANSI/TIA 568-C.1. "Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 1: General
Requirements."
9. ANSI/TIA 568-C.2. “Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced
Twisted Pair Cabling Components."
10. ANSI/TIA 568-C.3. “Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard."
11. EIA/TIA 569-B. "Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces."
12. IEEE 802.3 (latest edition) "Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection.”
13. International Building Code (latest edition).
14. International Fire Code (latest edition).
15. NEC (National Electrical Code) (latest edition).
16. Telecommunications Architectural Standards - In Washington State Government (latest edition).
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installing Contractor Qualifications:
1. The Installing Contractor project manager shall hold a valid and current Registered Communications
Distribution Designer (RCDD) certification issued by Building Industry Consulting Service
International (BICSI). The project manager shall have a minimum of five years’ experience with
projects of similar size and scope.
2. The Installing Contractor field staff installers shall hold valid and current Installation certifications
issued by Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI) or hold documented certification
of training from the manufacturer of the cabling and equipment that is being installed. The field
staff shall have a minimum of five years’ experience with projects of similar size and scope.
3. The Installing Contractor shall be an Authorized Premier Network Installer Certification Only Partner
of the Manufacturer of the equipment being installed and shall furnish documentation showing that
the Installing Contractor is trained and certified. The Installing Contractor shall be capable of
providing the Owner with a documented Limited Lifetime Performance Warranty of the equipment
being installed at the time of project bid, to be approved for bidding.
4. Work in this section shall be performed by a licensed and bonded low voltage Installing Contractor
with a minimum of five years’ experience in the installation and maintenance of high-speed data and
voice networks. Only Installing Contractors whose primary business is that of installing, maintaining,
troubleshooting, and testing Telecommunication Infrastructures shall perform this work.
5. In order to qualify for installation of the Telecommunications Infrastructure Installing Contractor
must possess the required license classification, a performance history, experience in the installation
and termination of copper and optical fiber cable systems, and proof of time in business.
6. License Classification: Installing Contractor must possess a valid Washington State 06 Electrical Low
Voltage License.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00 - 3/17
1.05 GOVERNING CODES AND CONFLICTS
If the requirements of this section or the project drawings exceed those of the governing codes and
regulations, then the requirements of this section and the drawings shall govern. However, nothing in this
section or the drawings shall be construed to permit work not conforming to all governing codes and
regulations.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS - ARCHITECTURAL PLANS
A. The Installing Contractor shall carefully coordinate the various symbols utilized on the drawings and
shall consult the architectural plans to determine ceiling and floor types in the various areas.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to specification 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements, for additional data sheet
submittal requirements and the shop drawing submittal requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. See Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional requirements.
B. The Installing Contractor shall review the Site Plans, Floor Plans, Riser Diagrams, and Detail Sheets for
additional work that is required to be performed by the Installing Contractor of this section.
C. Leviton / Berk-Tek manufactures the products that are used for the basis of design of this specification.
1. Equivalent manufacture’s solutions may be submitted for prior approval no less than 2 weeks before
bid date closing. Products not submitted for prior approval shall be rejected.
a. Include with substitution request, a 3rd party verified testing agency’s report which shall
include, but not be limited to, the following TIA-568-C.2 tests:
1. Insertion Loss / Attenuation
2. NEXT (Near End Cross Talk)
3. PSNEXT (Power Sum Near End Cross Talk)
4. ACR (Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio)
5. PSACR (Power Sum Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio)
6. ACR-F (Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio – Far End)
7. PSACR-F (Power Sum Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio – Far End)
8. The following tests are only required for CAT6A cabling:
a. PSANEXT (Power Sum Alien NEXT)
b. PSAACRF (Power Sum Alien ACRF)
D. All products shall be new, and brought to the job site in original manufacturer's packaging. Electrical
components shall bear the Underwriter's Laboratories label. All Telecommunications cable shall bear
the manufacturer's label in accordance with NEC 800 based on flammability testing as follows:
1. CMR General Purpose Communications Riser Cable
2. CMP Plenum-rated Communications Cable
3. And other cable ratings to comply with the National Electrical Code requirements for the installation.
E. All products shall meet the certification requirements of the warranty. All device products and all
cabling products shall be of a single manufacturer.
F. Provide all equipment as defined in the specification(s) and shown on the drawings.
G. Refer to PART 1 for any equipment that is not specifically defined.
2.02 MATERIALS NOT INCLUDED (PROVIDED & INSTALLED BY OTHERS)
A. Telephone switching equipment and related appurtenances.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE Job Number 2210142.00
27 20 00 - 4/17
B. Telephones
C. Switchers, routers, network hubs, data concentrators and other similar active electronic equipment for
data communications
D. Computers, printers, facsimile machines, modems and other similar utilization equipment
2.03 COORDINATION
A. Refer to “Installation of Owner Furnished Equipment” for additional coordination and installation
requirements.
B. Refer to “Submittals” for additional coordination requirements.
2.04 INSTALLATION OF OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT
A. The Installing Contractor shall install the following Owner Furnished equipment:
1. Wireless Access Points (WAP’s). Coordinate with the Owner as required.
a. Install each WAP where indicated on the plans.
2.05 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to “As-Built Drawings” listed elsewhere in this specification for additional equipment required for
this project.
2.06 SEISMIC BRACING
A. Provide Seismic Bracing as required by the AHJ.
B. This includes, but is not limited to:
1. Cable Supports
2.07 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide Horizontal Cabling from each Telecommunication port to the nearest MDF or designated IDF
location. Each Telecommunication Outlet type and style shall contain the quantity of Horizontal Cables
identified on the Legend, unless noted otherwise.
B. Horizontal cables are to be terminated on rack-mounted patch panels of the same data speed transfer
rating. Horizontal Cabling shall be to Patch Panels within each designated rack. Horizontal Cabling shall
be cross-connected to backbone cables.
C. Modems, fax machines, wall mount voice outlets for telephone handsets, etc. shall be connected to the
data and voice infrastructure via Horizontal Cabling.
2.08 LABELING
A. See Section 27 00 00 for additional label type and additional requirements.
B. The alpha-numeric labeling shall be developed by the Installing Contractor, under the direction of the
Owners IT Department at the Pre-Installation project kick-off meeting.
C. The Installing Contractor shall label all equipment and cables in an identical fashion of a sequential
manner to the satisfaction of the Owner.
D. All label printing shall be machine generated using indelible ink ribbons or cartridges, and self-laminating
labels shall be used on cable jackets appropriately sized to the outside diameter of the cable.
E. All labeling shall match the final room number identification at completion of the project (not the room
number that is indicated on the Bid Set of drawings). This includes, but is not limited to; the Outlets,
Port Addresses, Patch Panels, As-Built Drawings, and Test Results.
F. Patch panels shall have each port labeled to identify each outlet port.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00 - 5/17
G. Racks shall have phenolic labels installed at the Top and Centered of EACH Rack installed on this project.
Phenolic labels shall be size 36 font.
H. Cable Identification Labels shall be placed in the following locations:
1. Horizontal Cables. Each cable shall be identified and marked with the outlet port identification near
the cable termination point at the rear of the patch panel and placed within view.
2. Backbone Cables. Each cable shall be identified and marked on all backbone cables (at both ends of
the cable) with an identifier as to the location of the beginning and termination of each cable. Labels
shall be attached to each cable at the point of entrance and exit to the MDF and each designated IDF
location.
a. Where telecommunications outlets are located above accessible ceiling space, provide a label
directly on the ceiling tile grid indicating “TELECOM OUTLET ABOVE”.
2.09 TELECOMMUNICATION OUTLETS
A. Review the Site Plan(s), Floor Plan(s), Riser Diagram(s), and Detail Sheet(s) for all cable types and
quantities required for this project.
B. Each Telecommunication Outlet type and style shall contain the quantity of Horizontal Cables identified
on the Electrical Legend, unless otherwise noted.
C. Provide Horizontal Cabling from EACH Telecommunication Outlet port to the nearest MDF or designated
IDF location.
D. Telecommunication Outlet:
1. Each Outlet shall accommodate individual modular ports and each modular port shall be individually
removed without affecting any other port within the outlet.
2. Coordinate the labeling requirements with the Owner’s IT department.
a. Outlet label identification information shall be typed text and indicate patch panel and port for
each jack and shall comply with the Owners Labeling Standards. Hand written information will
not be acceptable.
b. The Installing Contractor shall match the color and finish of the devices specified in
Section 26 27 26. Modify the model number if a different color or finish is identified in
Section 26 27 26.
c. 1-Port Stainless Steel Telecommunication Outlets, where shown on the plans, shall be
manufactured by Leviton: Model # 43080-1L1, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
d. 2-Port Stainless Steel Telecommunication Outlets, where shown on the plans, shall be
manufactured by Leviton: Model # 43080-1L2, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
e. 4-Port Stainless Steel Telecommunication Outlets, where shown on the plans, shall be
manufactured by Leviton: Model # 43080-1L4, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
f. 6-Port Stainless Steel Telecommunication Outlets, where shown on the plans, shall be
manufactured by Leviton: Model # 43080-1L6, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
3. Surface Mount Outlet Locations shall only be installed above accessible ceiling spaces, the MDF
Room, and designated IDF locations. They are not to be installed below the ceiling surface or
exposed to view, unless approved in writing by the Engineer.
a. Provide modular single-port or dual port Surface Mount Outlet where indicated on the Plans.
This includes, but is not limited to:
1. Wireless Access Points
2. Projector Mounts
3. CCTV Cameras
4. Intrusion Alarm Control Panel
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE Job Number 2210142.00
27 20 00 - 6/17
5. Access Control Panel
6. Energy Management Panels
b. 1-Port Surface Mount Telecommunication Outlet, where shown on the plans, shall be
manufactured by Leviton: Model # 41089-1IP, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
c. 2-Port Surface Mount Telecommunication Outlet, where shown on the plans, shall be
manufactured by Leviton: Model # 41089-2IP, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
E. Modular Inserts:
1. 8-position, 8-conductor (8P8C). Individual workstation port and patch panel port modules shall be
Category 6 rated, 8-position, 8-conductor (8P8C) for termination of conductors and shall be
approved by the manufacturer.
2. 8-position, 8-conductor (8P8C). Individual Wireless Access port and patch panel port modules shall
be Category 6A rated, 8-position, 8-conductor (8P8C) for termination of conductors and shall be
approved by the manufacturer.
3. EACH workstation port shall be Category 6 rated.
4. Each Wireless Access port shall be Category 6A rated.
5. Cables shall be wired in accordance with TIA/EIA-T568B, unless noted otherwise.
6. Each individual insert shall be fully compatible with the Face Plates provided.
a. The Installing Contractor shall match the color and finish of the devices specified in
Section 26 27 26 for the workstation modules. Modify the model number if a different color or
finish is identified in Section 26 27 26. The Installing Contractor shall match the color of the
horizontal cabling as called out in this specification for the patch panel modules.
b. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 61110-R(X)6 Series for Category 6 applications, or approved
equal for all workstation outlets. Provide quantities as required. (X) Indicates color.
c. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 6110G-R(X)6 Series for Category 6A applications, or
approved equal for all Wireless Access point outlets. Provide quantities as required. (X)
Indicates color.
7. Blank inserts. Fill all remaining unused ports with a blank filler insert that is approved by the
manufacturer.
a. The Installing Contractor shall match the color and finish of the devices specified in
Section 26 27 26. Modify the model number if a different color or finish is identified in
Section 26 27 26.
8. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 41084BGB, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required.
F. Wall Mount Telephone Outlet:
1. Provide modular single-port stainless steel wall phone outlet with mounting studs.
2. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 4108W-1SP, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required.
2.10 PATCH CABLES – FIBER OPTIC
A. Upon completion of the project, the Data and Voice Infrastructure Installing Contractor shall deliver the
following Fiber Optic patch cables for the MDF and EACH designated IDF location to the owner, as
identified below:
1. EACH Data Rack shall have a Qty. of 4 – 3' (1 meter) Fiber Optic multimode patch cords with Duplex
LC connectors.
a. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 5LDLC-M01, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
b. Provide Single Mode patch cords when Single Mode Fiber is shown on the Drawings.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00 - 7/17
2. EACH Data Rack shall have a Qty. of 4 – 23' (10 meters) Fiber Optic multimode patch cords with
Duplex LC connectors.
a. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 5LDLC-M10, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
b. Provide Single Mode patch cords when Single Mode Fiber is shown on the Drawings.
2.11 HORIZONTAL CABLE – INSIDE PLANT (ISP)
A. See “Testing of Cables” listed elsewhere within this specification for Testing Requirements to be
documented and submitted at the completion of this project.
B. EACH Cable installed shall be rated for the appropriate application, such as; Riser Rated, Plenum Rated,
Wet Rated, etc.
C. Provide Horizontal Cabling from each Telecommunication Outlet to the nearest MDF or the nearest
designated IDF location.
D. Analog Plain Old Telephone Service (POTS) lines shall be provided for, but not limited to, the following
items. These items shall be installed complete without splices between the jack and cable termination
point.
1. Fire Alarm System
2. Intrusion Alarm System
3. Elevator (where applicable)
4. Terminate all telephone jacks as described elsewhere in these specifications.
a. Cable color codes shall be as follows.
1. All horizontal data cable shall be blue in color
2. All voice cable shall be white in color
3. All CCTV and IP Access Control cable shall be yellow in color
4. All Wireless Access Point cable shall be green in color
E. The work station Telecommunication Horizontal Cable shall be Category 6 rated, 4-pair, 23 AWG UTP,
unless noted otherwise.
1. Manufactured by Berk-Tek: Model # LANmark 1000 Series plenum rated cable for Category 6
applications, or approved equal.
a. The Wireless Access Point Cable shall be Category 6A rated, 4pair, 23 AWG UTP, unless noted
otherwise
2. Manufactured by Berk-Tek: Model # LANmark-10G Series plenum rated cable for Category 6A
applications, or approved equal.
2.12 HORIZONTAL CABLE – OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP) & WET RATED LOCATIONS
A. See “Testing of Cables” listed elsewhere within this specification for Testing Requirements to be
documented and submitted at the completion of this project.
B. Outside Plant (OSP) cables shall be used where conduits are routed below grade. Such as; slab on grade
floor boxes, underground conduits to another building, where required by code, etc. All Outside Plant
(OSP) cable extending within the building at a distance greater than 49 feet shall be run in conduit.
C. Provide Horizontal Cabling from each Telecommunication port to the nearest MDF or the nearest
designated IDF location.
D. The Telecommunication Horizontal Cable shall be Category 6 rated, 4-pair, 23 AWG UTP, unless noted
otherwise.
1. Manufactured by Berk-Tek: Model # LANmark-6 OSP Series, or approved equal.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE Job Number 2210142.00
27 20 00 - 8/17
2.13 PATCH PANELS – COPPER
A. Existing 96-port and 48-port CAT5e patch panels are to remain unless every cable associated with that
panel is removed during demolition. Existing panels and horizontal CAT5e cables upon completion to
verify functionality. Contractor is to troubleshoot and re-terminate as required.
B. All new patch panels shall be located at the designated IDF location. They shall be rack mounted in Rack
1 or Rack 3 unless specifically otherwise noted.
C. Provide a minimum of 25 % spare patch panel jack capacity.
D. Patch panels should be fully populated, avoiding blanks and empty ports (with the exception being the
last patch panel in the series which may not be fully populated).
E. All Category patch panels shall be tested and approved for Category wiring as specified to cable type,
per TIA/EIA-568C; shall have rear cable management bar and front labeling.
F. Provide separate Patch Panels for the following equipment connection types:
1. Data Cables.
2. Wireless Access Points
3. Analog Voice Cables (existing)
4. Section 28 23 00 CCTV System
a. Prior to running any cables, coordinate with the CCTV System Installing Contractor for actual
Patch Panel locations within each Rack.
5. Section 28 13 00 IP Access Control System.
a. Prior to running any cables, coordinate with the CCTV System Installing Contractor for actual
Patch Panel locations within each Rack.
6. The panel shall be field-configurable and shall accept a full range of modular connectors.
a. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 4S255-S48, or approved equal for 48 port applications.
b. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 4S255-S24, or approved equal for 24 port applications.
2.14 MULTI-CONDUCTOR BACKBONE CABLE
A. Provide multi-pair plenum cables from the MDF Room to each designated IDF location unless noted
otherwise.
1. See the riser diagram for more information.
2. Provide (1) 25-pair riser service cables, unless noted otherwise. Provide Plenum Rated Cable or Wet
Rated Cable where required by Code. Cable shall be 24 gauge with pair count as indicated, UL listed
for the application that which it is installed in.
2.15 PATCH CABLES - COPPER
A. The Patch Cables shall be Category 6 rated, 4-pair, 23 AWG UTP for all Category 6 systems and Category
6A rated, 4-pair, 23 AWG UTP for all Category 6A systems, unless noted otherwise. Provide (1) Patch
Cable per telecommunications outlet jack and (1) Patch Cable per telecommunications patch panel port
as described below.
B. The outer cable jacket shall match the color selection of the Horizontal Cable Color identified in
“Horizontal Cable”.
1. Provide a minimum quantity of (1) 15’ equipment cord for EACH telecommunication workstation
outlet box shown in work areas. (Leviton # 62460-15L), or approved equal. See table below for
MDF/IDF patch cord quantities.
2. Provide a minimum quantity of (1) 3’ equipment cord for EACH telecommunication jack at Each
Wireless Access Point. (Leviton # 6210G-3(X), or approve equal. (X) Indicates color of equipment cord
according to Horizontal Cable Color identified in “Horizontal Cable”.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00 - 9/17
3. Provide a minimum quantity of (1) 3’ equipment cord for EACH telecommunications jack at systems
related equipment such as CCTV, IP access control system. (Leviton # 62462-03(X), or approved
equal. (X) Indicates color of equipment cord according to Horizontal Cable Color identified in
“Horizontal Cable”.
C. Upon completion of the project, the Data and Voice Infrastructure Installing Contractor shall deliver the
following patch cables:
The following items shall apply ONLY to the MDF Room and designated IDF locations.
Item #Cable
Length
Color to be
determined by
horizontal
System cabling.
Quantity of
Patch Cables
(provide the following
percentage of patch cables
based on the Total patch
panel Ports provided for
this project)
Unless noted otherwise.
manufactured
by
Model # X
indicates color of
patch cable
1 3’ CAT6 20%Leviton (eXtreme CAT6)
62460 series (X)
2 7’ CAT6 50%Leviton (eXtreme CAT6)
62460 series (X)
3 15’ CAT6 30%Leviton (eXtreme CAT6)
62460 series (X)
4 1’ CAT6A 100%Levition (eXtreme CAT6A)
6210G series (X)
2.16 RACKS AND ENCLOSURES
A. Rack Mount all equipment that is capable of being Rack Mounted.
B. 45RU Two Post Data Racks are existing and contain 25% free rack space for rack mounting new patch
panels. Provide additional racks as required only if existing Rack 1 and Rack 3 become full. Rack 2 is
designated for the owner’s switches and new horizontal wire managers.
C. Equivalent manufacture’s solutions may be submitted for prior approval no less than 2 weeks before bid
date closing. Products not submitted for prior approval shall be rejected.
D. Provide seismic bracing for ALL RACKS AND ENCLOSURES per manufacturer’s recommended
instructions/accessories.
E. Section 27 20 00 shall provide ALL Racks and related equipment, including but not limited to; Patch
Panels, Patch Cords, Wire Management, Power Strip assemblies, etc. for ALL Local Area Network (LAN)
bases Systems as shown on the site plans, floor plans, detail sheets, and riser diagrams.
F. Racks:
1. Free-Standing 2-Post
a. The Rack shall have the following features:
1. Complies with 19” wide rack EIA-310-D standards.
2. Rack Height: 45RU
3. Color: Black
b. Installation:
1. Secure EACH Rack to the floor using the manufacturer recommended installation method
and the manufacturers recommended hardware/bolt down kit.
2. Secure EACH Rack to the Cable Tray using the manufacturer recommended installation
method.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE Job Number 2210142.00
27 20 00 - 10/17
3. Provide vertical cable management between each rack
c. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products: Model # 55053-703 or approved equal
1. Provide the quantities where shown on the drawings.
2. Free-Standing 4-Post Rack
a. The Rack shall have the following features:
1. Complies with 19” wide rack EIA-310-D standards.
2. Rack Height: 45RU.
3. Rack Depth: 29”.
4. Color: Black.
b. Installation:
1. Secure EACH Rack to the floor using the manufacturer recommended installation method
and the manufacturers recommended hardware/bolt down kit.
2. Secure EACH Rack to the Cable Tray using the manufacturer recommended installation
method.
c. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products: Model # 15053-703, or approved equal for Small Server
Equipment Frame.
d. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products: Model # 20120-703, or approved equal for Data
Equipment Frame. Includes 12-24 threaded rack rails.
1. Provide the quantities where shown on the drawings
G. Enclosures:
1. Free-Standing Data Equipment Enclosure
a. The Rack shall have the following features:
1. Complies with 19” wide rack EIA-310-D standards
2. Rack Height: 44RU
3. Rack Depth: 36”
4. Color: Black
5. Racks shall be gang-able
6. Front Door: Locking, Vented
7. Rear Door: Locking, Vented
8. Front and Rear rails
9. Vertical wire management (“LACE” series, quantities and sizes as required to
accommodate full rack-height)
10. Vertical power distribution (“PD” series, quantities and sizes as required to accommodate
full rack-height)
b. Installation:
1. Secure EACH Rack to the wall using the manufacturer recommended installation method
and the manufacturers recommended hardware/bolt down kit.
c. Manufactured by Middle Atlantic Products: Model # R412-4524B or approved equal.
1. Provide the quantities where shown on the drawings
2. Wall-Mounted Hinged Enclosure
a. The Rack shall have the following features:
1. Complies with 19” wide rack EIA-310-D standards.
2. Rack Height: 24RU
3. Color: Black
4. Front Door: Locking, Vented
5. Provide Top Mount Fan Kit Model # DWR-FK32
6. Provide Solid Copper Bussbar Model # BB-12
7. Provide Rear Rail Kit Model # DWR-RR24
8. Vertical wire management (“LACE” series, quantities and sizes as required to
accommodate full rack-height)
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00 - 11/17
9. Vertical power distribution (“PD” series, quantities and sizes as required to accommodate
full rack-height)
b. Installation:
1. Secure EACH Rack to the floor/wall using the manufacturer recommended installation
method and the manufacturers recommended hardware/bolt down kit.
c. Manufactured by Middle Atlantic: Model # DWR-24-32 or approved equal.
1. Provide the quantities where shown on the drawings
H. Grounding Terminal Block for Rack: For EACH Rack provided for this project, provide one Grounding
Terminal Block.
I. Cable Management:
1. Vertical Cable Management for open-frame racks: Provide vertical cable management on both sides
of each rack. Where two racks are installed side-to-side, provide one section between the Racks for
each Rack provided for this project.
a. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products: “30161” series, or approved equal. Provide quantities
as required. Match existing wire managers as required if different than the above part.
2. Horizontal Cable Management
a. .Manufactured by Chatsworth Products: Model # 30130-x19 for 2RU applications, or approved
equal. Provide quantities as required.
2.17 WIRE RINGS
A. Cables on backboards shall be supported using open distribution rings. Rings shall be located within 12”
of entering or exiting conduit, 6” prior to any radius bends and at least 12” on center. The rings shall
have rounded edges and be designed in a “C” configuration. Securely mount distribution rings to the
plywood backboard.
B. Chatsworth Products Inc. (CPI): Model # 12035-001, or approved equal. Provide quantities as required.
2.18 CABLE MANAGEMENT TIES
A. Wire ties of any type shall NOT be used anywhere in this installation.
B. Bundle all Horizontal Cables together with Velcro-type tie wraps.
1. Adjustable Velcro Straps shall be used for all cable bundles.
a. Provide Velcro Straps every two-feet (approximately) above accessible ceilings, in Cable Trays
(where applicable) and throughout the cable run.
b. Provide Velcro Straps every twelve-inches (approximately) within the MDF and each designated
IDF location.
2. Chatsworth Products Inc. (CPI): Model # 020XX-201, or approved equal. XX indicates actual length.
“06” (6-inches long for two-inch diameter cable bundles), “09” (9-inches long for three-inch diameter
cable bundles), and “12” (12-inches long for four-inch diameter cable bundles). Provide quantities
as required.
2.19 TMGB AND TGB (TELECOMMUNICATION GROUNDING BUSBARS)
A. See Section 27 00 00 for additional Grounding requirements.
B. Ground all equipment per the Manufacturers recommendations, per Division 26, and as required by
Code.
C. Provide grounding and bonding per ANSI-STD-J-607-A, which includes, but is not limited to: Cable Tray,
Rack(s), conduit sleeves, and other equipment connected to the TMGB/TGB.
1. The minimum conductor size shall be #6 green insulated copper grounding conductor. However,
size each conductor shall be based on the actual cable length as defined in ANSI-STD-J-607-A.
D. TMGB is existing and is located in the electrical room.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE Job Number 2210142.00
27 20 00 - 12/17
E. TGB: Provide and install at EACH designated IDF location (1) 2” high x 12” wide Copper
Telecommunication Grounding Busbar (TGB). Use standoff brackets to wall mount the copper busbar
and insulators.
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 13622-012, or approved equal.
F. Lug Style: EACH connection to the TMGB/TGB shall be a Copper 2-Hole Lug Straight Long Barrel
Connection.
1. Manufactured by Thomas & Betts: Model # 256 Series, or approved equal.
2.20 UNINTERRUPTED POWER SUPPLY (UPS)
1. A large format UPS is currently installed in the electrical room that feeds the sub-panel powering the
designated IDF outlets.
2. The UPS backed 208V 1P outlets at the rear of Rack 2 are dedicated 20A circuits for rack PDUs.
2.21 HORIZONTAL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS (PDU)
A. Provide two (2) Horizontal PDU in Rack 2 for the owner provided switches. Coordinate with the owner
for exact location and requirements.
1. Horizontal PDU manufactured by APC, Model # AP9566.
2.22 ADDITIONAL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
A. See Part 3 of this specification for additional provision of system Equipment and/or Labor.
B. See 27 05 28 for pathway requirements (cable tray, inner duct, etc.).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. See Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional information.
B. Prior to rough-in, coordinate with the Architect for the exact location(s).
C. Install all cabling, devices, and/or equipment per the manufacturer’s recommendation.
3.02 PRODUCT INSPECTIONS
A. The Installing Contractor shall inspect all cable prior to installation to verify that it is identified properly
on the reel identification label, that it is of proper gauge, containing correct number of pairs, and is the
material ordered. Any physical damage to the cable and wire must be noted; un-uniform jacket
thickness and jacket tightness should also be identified. Note any buckling of the jacket, which would
indicate possible problems.
3.03 CABLE INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. EACH CABLE RUN SHALL BE CONTINUOUS, WITHOUT ANY SPLICES, from the Telecommunications Outlet
to the patch panel(s). Any cable run that does not meet this requirement shall be replaced at no
additional cost to the Owner.
B. The Installing Contractor shall ensure that EACH Telecommunications cable is installed with care, using
techniques which prevent kinking, sharp bends, scraping cutting, deforming the jacket, or other damage.
During inspection evidence of such damage will result in the material being declared unacceptable. The
Installing Contractor shall replace unacceptable cabling at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Conduit and Raceway Usage: All Telecommunications cable shall be installed in grounded metal conduit
or raceway dedicated for Telecommunications purposes, when called for on the Project Drawings, and
not to be shared with electrical wiring.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00 - 13/17
D. Cable shall not be draped on, tied or otherwise secured to electrical conduit, plumbing, ventilation
ductwork or any other equipment. Cable shall be secured to building supports or hangers or to
additional blocks or anchors specifically installed for this purpose.
E. All wiring to be installed in a neat and inconspicuous manner and per local code requirements. Route
wires parallel or perpendicular to the building structure using the specified cable supports. Wiring shall
be installed near or on structural members as to minimize risk of physical damage by other trades or
maintenance personnel servicing the equipment.
F. Cable Lubricants specifically designed for installing Telecommunications cable may be used to reduce
pulling tension as necessary when pulling cable into conduit. After installation, exposed cable and other
surfaces must be cleaned of lubricant residue.
G. Backboard and Rack Cable Supports: Clamps, "D-Rings”, Velcro and tie-wraps are all acceptable ways to
support cable. However, installation of these supports must be done with care so as not to cause
crushing or distortion of the cable, nor cause tighter bends than the minimum radius permitted for each
type cable.
3.04 HORIZONTAL CABLING
A. Horizontal Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with TIA/EIA-568-B requirements and
the cable manufacturer’s recommendations.
1. Untwisting of pairs at the termination point shall not exceed one-half an inch for Category 6
connecting hardware.
2. Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall not be less than the manufacturer’s
recommendation.
3. The Horizontal Cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination point.
B. Every attempt shall be made to avoid running Horizontal Cables close to (less than 24") and parallel to
power raceway and wiring, or close to light fixtures.
C. When an approved cable support is used to support cable bundles, all horizontal cables shall be
supported at a maximum of four-foot intervals with UL approved cable support. At no point shall cables
rest on acoustic ceiling grids or panels. Cables shall not be attached to ceiling grid or lighting support
wires. Where light support for drop cable legs is required, the Installing Contractor shall install clips to
support the cabling.
D. The installation of Horizontal Cables around moveable devices, instruments, subpanels, etc. shall be
provided with adequate support, length, protection, and flexibility so that the cable is not damaged in
the event the equipment is moved.
E. Pathways:
1. It is the responsibility of the contractor to ensure that ALL PATHWAYS for the permanent link of each
balanced twisted pair cable shall not exceed 295’ in length from work area outlet to
telecommunications room patch panel.
2. To ensure this length, all pathways shall be coordinated and installed prior to pouring of any slabs or
the installation of any permanent structure which would inhibit a conduit or cable tray run from
being installed after the structure is complete.
3. See section 27 05 28 for pathway types and additional requirements.
3.05 PLYWOOD BACKBOARD CABLING
A. Plywood backboard shall be painted with fire-resistant white paint prior to equipment mounting and
cabling.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE Job Number 2210142.00
27 20 00 - 14/17
B. Horizontal Cable installation must conform to the Project Drawings. All cabling shall be routed so as to
avoid interference with any other service or system, operation, or maintenance purposes such as access
boxes, ventilation mixing boxes, access hatches to air filters, switch or electrical outlets, electrical
panels, fire alarm equipment, clock systems, and lighting fixtures. Avoid crossing areas horizontally just
above or below any riser conduit. Lay and dress cables to allow other cables to enter the conduit/riser
without difficulty at a later time by maintaining maximum distance from these openings.
C. Horizontal Cables shall be routed as close as possible to the ceiling, floor, or corners to ensure that
adequate backboard space is available for current and future equipment and for cable terminations.
Horizontal Cables shall not be connected or attached to electrical conduit or other equipment.
Minimum bend radius shall be observed.
D. Lay cables via the shortest route directly to the nearest edge of the backboard from the mounted
equipment or block. Velcro wrap all similar cables together and attached by means of clamps screwed
to the outside edge(s) of the backboard vertically and/or horizontally, then route via "square" corners
over a path that will offer minimum obstruction to future installations of equipment or other cables.
E. Horizontal Cables that are not dressed in a neat fashion, or with excessive slack, will not be accepted.
3.06 TELEPHONE RISER BACKBONE CABLE
A. Backbone Cable splices are only allowed in accessible, dry locations and housed in a splice case
enclosure intended and suitable for the purpose. Each cable end that is spliced must be labeled. Verify
intended splice locations with Engineer prior to installation.
B. Backbone cables shall be installed separately from horizontal cables.
C. Where backbone cables and horizontal cables are installed in a cable tray, backbone cables shall be
installed first and bundled separately from the horizontal cables.
3.07 CABLE LABELING
A. Alpha-numeric numbering shall be developed by Installing Contractor, under the direction of the
Owners IT Department. Label all equipment and cables in an identical fashion.
B. Patch Panel Labeling: Each terminal shall be identified and marked on the patch panel with the outlet
port identification.
C. Outlet Port Labeling: Outlet labels for each port shall be identified and marked on the Outlet with the
outlet port identification.
D. Backbone Labels: Labels shall be identified and marked on all backbone cables (at both ends of the
cable) with an identifier as to the location of the beginning and termination of each cable. Labels shall
be attached to each cable at the point of entrance and exit to the MDF and IDF Rooms.
E. Horizontal Cables: Each cable shall be identified and marked with the outlet port identification near the
cable termination point at the rear of the patch panel.
3.08 TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS
A. The Telecommunication Rooms (MDF and designated IDF’s) shall house Racks, Patch Panels, Wire
Management, UPS’s, Punch Blocks, and required cable routing hardware. Racks shall be placed in a
manner that will allow a minimum of 3 feet of clearance from the front and rear mounting surfaces and
on one side. If one mounting rail of the rack is placed against a wall, the mounting rail shall be no closer
than 6” to the wall to allow room for vertical management. Where there is more than one rack, the
racks shall be ganged with vertical management hardware to provide interlay management. Ganged
rack frames will be placed in a manner that will allow a minimum of 3 feet of clearance from the front
and rear mounting surfaces.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00 - 15/17
B. Racks shall be installed in the following manner:
1. EACH Rack shall be securely attached to the floor and/or wall using the manufacturer’s
recommended mounting hardware.
2. EACH Rack shall be Grounded/Bonded to the TMGB/TGB with a minimum size of one (1) #6 copper
green insulated conductor or larger due to distance requirements based on ANSI-J-STD-607-A.
3. Rack mount screws (#12-24) that are spare shall be bagged and left with the rack upon completion
of the installation.
4. All rack mounted equipment shall be installed in a designated Rack Unit. Equipment shall NOT be
installed in between Rack Units; this will NOT be considered acceptable.
C. Cable Tray: Configure as shown on the drawings. Provide Cable Tray as specified in 27 0528. Install the
Cable Tray using the manufacturer’s recommended mounting hardware, connectors, brackets, and
fasteners.
3.09 TESTING OF CABLES
A. Notification shall be given a minimum of 14 days prior to any testing so that the testing may be
witnessed by the Owner.
1. An ETL certified, TIA-1152 Level IIIe (ISO/IEC 11801 Level IV) Test Meter shall be used to test all
balanced twisted-pair coper cabling.
B. All labeling shall match the final room number identification at completion of the project (not the room
number that is indicated on the Bid Set of drawings). This includes, but is not limited to; the Outlets,
Port Addresses, Patch Panels, As-Built Drawings, and Test Results.
C. Provide documentation of the following items of EACH Test Meter used:
D. Calibration certification from a third party shall be within two-years of testing (at the time that the test
is performed).
1. Manufacturer of Test Meter
2. Model Number of Test Meter
3. Serial Number of Test Meter
E. Copper Cables – Category 6 and 6A Cables: Each of the pairs shall be tested from the Patch Panel or
Punch Block to the Outlet. The Installing Contractor shall test:
1. Wire Map
2. Length
3. Insertion Loss / Attenuation
4. NEXT (Near End Cross Talk)
5. PS-NEXT (Power Sum Near End Cross Talk)
6. ACR-F Loss (Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Far-end)
7. PS ACR-F Loss (Power Sum Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Far-end)
8. Return Loss
9. Propagation Delay
10. Delay Skew
11. The following tests are only required for CAT6A cabling:
a. PSANEXT (Power Sum Alien NEXT)
b. PSAACRF (Power Sum Alien ACRF)
F. Copper Cables – Category 3 or 5e Cables: Each of the pairs shall be tested from the Patch Panel or
Punch Block to the Outlet. The Installing Contractor shall test:
1. Wire Map
2. Length
3. Insertion Loss / Attenuation
4. NEXT (Near End Cross Talk)
5. PS-NEXT (Power Sum Near End Cross Talk)
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE Job Number 2210142.00
27 20 00 - 16/17
6. ACR-F Loss (Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Far-end)
7. PS ACR-F Loss (Power Sum Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Far-end)
8. Return Loss
9. Propagation Delay
10. Delay Skew
G. Fiber Optic Cables – Multi-Mode Inside Plant (ISP) and Outside Plant (OSP): Each of the fibers shall be
tested from End-to-End. The Tests performed shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 standards. The
Installing Contractor shall test:
1. Polarity Testing
2. Length Measurement
3. OLTS / Link Attenuatio
4. OTDR
5. Two 2-meter patch cords shall be used for the actual test. The two-jumper test shall be used to
estimate the actual link loss of the installed cables plus the loss of the connectors. This measurement
is consistent with the loss which network equipment will see under normal installation and use.
H. Fiber Optic Cables – Multi-Mode Inside Plant (ISP): Each of the fibers shall be tested from End-to-End.
The Tests performed shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 standards.
I. Fiber Optic Cables – Single-Mode Inside Plant (ISP) and Outside Plant (OSP). Each of the fibers shall be
tested from End-to-End. The Tests performed shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 standards.
J. The source of each error shall be determined, corrected, and the cable re-tested. All defective cables,
connectors, connections, and related appurtenances shall be replaced and re-tested at no additional
cost to the Owner.
K. Submit the Test Reports in PDF format.
L. See the O & M Manual / As built Drawings requirements in this specification and also in
Section 27 00 00 for additional requirements.
M. Acceptance of these test procedures is predicated on the Installing Contractor's use of the
recommended products including, but not limited to; the specified cable type, patch panels, outlets,
punch blocks, specified equipment identified in Part 2 and the installation standards of this specification.
Adherence to these requirements shall be determined upon the completed installation and will be
evaluated in the context of each of these factors.
3.10 FIRE RATED PENETRATIONS
A. Install per manufacturers recommendations.
B. Maintain all Code and AHJ requirements.
C. See Section 27 05 28 for additional requirements.
3.11 WARRANTY
A. Upon final installation, a certificate providing a "Performance and Application Warranty" shall be
provided to the owner. This warranty shall be valid for a period of no less than 25 Years. The warranty
shall be direct to the end user, from the manufacturer, supported through the installing and certified
Installing Contractor, and shall cover both materials and labor costs for any claims related to the
warranty program. If the Installing Contractor were to default, the manufacturer will assume
responsibility of employing another certified installer to maintain the existing warranty. Bids from
installers or Installing Contractors who are not certified by the connecting hardware manufacturer and
wire manufacturer at the time of project bid, will be rejected.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00 - 17/17
3.12 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS (O&M’S)
A. Provide all Operation & Maintenance Manuals (O&M’s) documentation as defined in Section 27 00 00
Low Voltage Systems General Requirements and listed elsewhere in this specification.
B. Provide hard copies of the Test Results of EACH Cable tested.
C. Provide the Test Results on CD in PDF format.
3.13 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Provide all As-Built documentation as defined in Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General
Requirements and listed elsewhere in this specification.
B. All labeling shall match the final room number identification at completion of the project (not the room
number that is indicated on the Bid Set of drawings). This includes, but is not limited to; the Outlets,
Port Addresses, Patch Panels, As-Built Drawings, and Test Results.
C. Update all documents provided in the Submittal and Shop Drawings to accurately reflect the actual
equipment that was provided for this project, and the actual locations of the installed equipment.
D. The Installing Contractor shall provide As-Built drawings to the Architect, which clearly indicates:
1. The floor plan of the building showing the As-Built location of Telecommunication Outlets and their
associated Port Address(es), conduit runs, and terminal cabinets.
2. A list of EACH Telecommunication Outlet and the associated Port Address(es) shall clearly be
identified according to system labeling scheme. Show all ports and punchdowns.
3. Provide (3) sets of complete As-Builts.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00 - 1/25
SECTION 28 13 00
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE AND RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.The pre-approved access control and security vendor for this project is Entrance Controls.
1.All other vendors submit for a prior-approval and be approved by the owner prior to the bid date.
B.The project Access Control System is an addition to the owner’s existing system. The Installing Vendor shall provide
new equipment at the project site and include the necessary programming for viewing reports, changing card holder
information, changing card holder access capabilities, and control functions of the new Access Control System to
and from the following locations:
1.Locally at the project site.
2.Remotely at the Owners Administrative Offices.
3.Remotely at the Owners Information Technology Department Offices.
C.Furnish and install a complete Access Control System as described herein and as shown on the Plans; to be wired,
connected, and left in first class operating condition. The system shall include, but not be limited to: Access Control
Panels, Access Control Reader Interface(s), Input Board(s), Output Board(s), Power Supplies, Card Readers, Door
Position Switches, Request to Exit motion sensors, Electric Locks, Electrified Exit Devices, Panic Buttons, Push
Buttons, Intercom Stations, device Input supervision, control Relays, importing of Database(s), Configure, Program,
conduit, junction boxes, fittings, wire, connections to devices, and all other necessary material for a completely
reliable and fully functional system.
D.All cables shall be plenum rated.
E.The installing vendor shall coordinate new cards and card readers with the owner’s existing cards and card readers.
F.The system shall be of modular design to facilitate both expansion and service, providing an individual system for
specific requirements of this project.
G.The system shall grant access to card holders with a valid card, monitor the status of open and closed doors, and
activate relays. All relay outputs shall be programmable to change state via control-by-event equations,
programmable inputs, and timed-events.
H.All activity of the Access Control System shall be recorded in an event history log. This history shall be able to be
printed in a report format.
I.The system shall support industry standards for databases, networks, credential printers, and more, such as
Microsoft™ SQL.
J.An important aspect of the construction process for this project is the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting, which shall
take place PRIOR to Submittal of equipment data sheets. See “Submittals” and “Coordination” listed elsewhere
within this specification.
K.Section 26 00 00 – General Electrical Conditions.
L.The system shall meet ALL of the requirements listed in Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General
Requirements PART 3 “Testing & Complete System Functionality”, prior to “Substantial Completion”.
M.Contractual information, guidelines, requirements, or other work specified to provide a fully functional system for
Section 28 13 00 includes, but is not limited to the sections identified in Section 27 00 00 as well as Section 08 71 00
Finish Hardware.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00
28 13 00 - 2/25
1.02 SYSTEM OPERATION
A.Access Control System:
1.Overview:
a.The Access Control System and related components shall control access and prevent un-authorized
entrance to selected areas from entrance during secure hours using Cards and Card Readers.
b.Integrate with other systems as described within these specifications and as required.
c.The system shall integrate various systems and devices, fully, completely, and seamlessly through the
use of inputs, outputs, and software interfaces. The system shall serve as the hub for all system
functions. The software shall allow System Operators to view specific information and status of devices
and equipment.
d.The modularity of the system shall allow the Owner to add or remove control functions, adapting to
their needs as the system expands and as the operating requirements change.
e.The system shall also be configured with remote workstations sharing system monitor and control tasks,
if required. From Video to Alarm and printing equipment, industry standard protocols shall be used as
the system framework.
f.The software shall also combine all application information into a unified database, allowing for more
informed operation and automatic system communication transfer between Subsystems, regardless of
system drivers and/or protocols.
2.Central Configuration for System Monitoring and Control
a.To support alarm management and monitoring, the system shall provide a wide range of display and
control features.
b.History Log:
1.The History Log shall monitor all incoming events. At a minimum, this shall provide the following
information:
a.Date/Time
b.Device state
c.Card Holder Name
d.Access denied/granted
e.Door/Gate/Device location
c.Reports:
1.The System Operator shall be able to search and generate reports from groups or individual
persons, doors, locations, inputs, or outputs. The reports shall be captured in a standard
document format. The report shall include, but not be limited to the following data:
2.Date/time
3.Group name(s)
4.User name(s)
5.Door(s)
6.Location(s)
7.Input(s)
8.Output(s)
d.Display of Events:
1.The system shall support the real-time display of EACH event.
e.Schedules and Timers:
1.The system shall provide timer and schedule functions to support:
2.Time based control of programmable relays
3.Time based automatic controls into any subsystem
4.The timer shall support time frames per weekday, public holidays, and individual special days.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00 - 3/25
f.System Operator Generated Alarm:
1.The system shall support a manual alarm trigger by a System Operator to allow alarm operation,
for example, lock all doors.
B.Workstations and User Interface:
1.Workstations shall be connected by standard IP network. Any computer on the network shall be usable as a
workstation.
2.The system shall be expandable to support an unlimited number of integrated workstations.
3.The system shall provide a flexible and simple way to adapt to specific Owner requirements, such as different
System Operator groups.
C.System Modularity:
1.The system shall have a modular structure that provides specific project solutions. The system shall be
expanded at a later date. Common expansion may include the number of System Operators, Subsystem
connections, or monitored devices and/or equipment.
D.System Operators and Authorization Management:
1.The system shall allow the creation of individual authorizations per System Operator or operator group. This
includes:
2.Selectable displaying, monitoring, and control of locations, such as individual floor, building, or site
permissions.
3.Selectable displaying, monitoring, and control of Subsystems, such as CCTV System, Intrusion Alarm Systems,
Fire Alarm System, etc.
4.Selectable displaying, monitoring, and control of devices, such as cameras, readers, doors, or gates.
E.Subsystem and Device Programming:
1.Subsystems and their peripheral devices shall be configurable in the system configuration tool.
F.Customizing the System:
1.The system shall be adaptable and configurable to the project requirements, the expertise of the System
Operator, and to the configuration of the workstations (resolution and number of monitors).
2.The system shall automatically detect from where a System Operator is logging in, and supplies the correct
features, contents, and resolution for EACH appropriate workstation.
3.The system shall provide a toolbox containing all specific controls for display features, such as location tree,
alarm queue, toolbar, and customizable action buttons for individual use.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.The Installing Vendor shall identify and designate two (2) Manufacturer Trained and Certified Installing Vendor
Technicians for the duration of this project.
1.To be deemed a qualified Installing Vendor for this project, a minimum of (2) technicians shall hold the
following Manufacturers Certifications PRIOR to issuing submittals for this project:
a.The Installing Vendor shall submit copies of the technicians Manufacturer Certification(s).
B.The Installing Vendor shall provide a Staff Commitment Letter in the Submittal and Shop Drawings submittal
package, that states the following:
1.The Installing Vendor shall identify and designate two (2) Manufacturer Trained and Certified Installing Vendor
Technicians for the duration of this project.
a.One of the Technicians shall be the designated LEAD TECHNICIAN.
1.This individual shall be responsible for no less than 80% of the technical portion of this project.
b.The other Technician shall be the designated BACK-UP TECHNICIAN, who may assist the Lead Technician
with the project.
1.This individual shall be responsible for no greater than 20% of the technical portion of this project.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00
28 13 00 - 4/25
c.The Installing Vendor shall submit copies of the above designated technicians Manufacturer
Certification(s).
d.Additional Installing Vendor field technicians may also work on the site, but only while one of the two
designated technicians are on-site.
2.The Installing Vendor shall identify and designate a Project Manager whose responsibilities will include, but
are not limited to:
a.The Primary Point of Contact between the Owner and the Installing Vendor.
1.This person can be the Lead Technician.
b.Scheduling of technicians to perform the work on the Owners premises.
c.Scheduling of any meetings.
1.All meetings shall be on the Owners premises.
d.Scheduling and coordination of any deliveries to the Owners premises.
C.The system, devices, and equipment, shall be manufactured under the appropriate category by Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the UL label. Partial or pending listings are not acceptable. The installation of
EACH device and/or component shall be in compliance with the UL listing. The system, devices, and equipment shall
fully comply with the latest issue of these standards, where applicable, which includes, but is not limited to:
1.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - USA:
a.NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
b.NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
2.Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) - USA:
a.UL 294 Access Control Systems
b.UL 1034 Burglary-Resistant Rated
c.UL 1076 Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems
3.Meet or exceed Building Codes and Standards:
a.Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) Requirements
b.State
1.WAC 51-20 Washington Barrier Free Regulations
c.National
1.National Electrical Code (see NFPA 70)
2.Americans with Disabilities Act
d.International
1.International Building Code
2.International Electrical Code (see NFPA 70)
3.International Fire Code
D.Approvals:
1.The system shall have proper listing and/or approval from the following nationally recognized agencies:
a.UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
b.ULC Underwriters Laboratories Canada.
c.Factory Mutual.
d.FCC.
E.The Installing Vendor shall, at a minimum, provide and/or perform on-site installation assistance to the Contractor
throughout the duration of the project, up to and including acceptance of the System as defined in Section 27 00 00
“Testing & Complete System Functionality”.
F.Service and Software Modifications:
1.Provide the services of a Manufacturer Certified/Authorized Technician to perform all system software
modifications, upgrades or changes.
2.For non-emergency service, response time of the technician to the site shall not exceed 4 hours. If the call is
received by the Installing Vendor before 1:00pm, service shall be provided that day, and if the call is received
after that time, then the response shall be the following business day.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00 - 5/25
3.Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary to modify the system on-
site. Modification includes addition and/or deletion of system devices, changes to system operation, and
custom label changes for devices. The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type or extent
of software modifications on-site.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.Refer to specification 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements, for additional data sheet submittal
requirements and the shop drawing submittal requirements.
B.Refer to “As-Built Drawings” for additional requirements.
C.Data Sheets Submittals and other documentation.
1.Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting:
a.PRIOR to submitting any project Data Sheets, coordinate with the General Contractor as described in
Section 27 00 00.
1.Submit the Coordination Questions a minimum of 14 Days in advance of the meeting for Owner
review for the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting as described under “Coordination” identified
elsewhere in this specification.
b.The Installing Vendor shall document the Meeting Minutes of the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting as
described under “Coordination” identified elsewhere in this specification.
c.Provide the follow up documentation for the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting as described under
“Coordination” identified elsewhere in this specification.
1.The Installing Vendor shall make the necessary corrections or changes as discussed during this
meeting and provide a revised formal Submittal through the normal construction channels.
2.Be sure to include ALL responses by the Owner in the revised formal Submittal. This includes, but
is not limited to:
a.IP Address Equipment List.
2.Installing Vendor/Manufacturer Agreement. Provide the following documentation of the Manufacturer of the
equipment being installed:
a.The Installing Vendor shall be an Authorized Partner that is trained and certified by the Manufacturer of
the equipment being installed.
3.Installing Vendor Staff Qualifications. Provide copies of the following information (Certification and Training
documents):
a.Provide a copy of no less than (2) separate technicians (from the Installing Vendors local office) Factory
Certifications issued by the manufacturer of the equipment that is being installed.
4.Provide The Installing Vendor Staff Commitment Letter as described in “Quality Assurance” listed elsewhere in
this specification.
5.Materials List:
a.A complete materials list, which shall include; the quantity of each device, the manufacturer’s name,
model number, and a description of the equipment for each individual system component or device that
will be provided. This list shall precede the data sheets.
b.Equipment Data Sheets. Each System component or device data sheet shall have an indicating arrow
next to each component or device that is being submitted.
c.Prior to ordering or installation of any equipment, the Installing Vendor/Contractor shall obtain written
approval by the Architect.
6.Provide ALL requested submittal documents in “Programming Survey” listed elsewhere in this specification.
This includes, but is not limited items listed under “Interview the Owner”:
a.Generate the document titled “Section 28 13 00 Access Control System – PRE-INTERVIEW of Owner
Requested Systems Programming Sheet” and submit for review.
b.Provide a sample copy of the Step-by-Step Instructions.
7.Submit the “System Device Naming Matrix” listed elsewhere in this specification, with the Data Sheet
submittal.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00
28 13 00 - 6/25
8.Load Calculations.
a.UPS Load Calculations. Provide load calculations for the MDF UPS and each designated IDF UPS location.
1.Each device connected to the UPS shall be included in the calculations.
b.ACPS Load Calculations. Provide load calculations for each ACPS location.
1.Each device connected to the ACPS shall be included in the calculations.
D.Shop Drawing Submittals shall include the following items:
1.Prior to ordering or installation of any equipment, the Installing Vendor/Contractor shall obtain written
approval by the Architect.
2.Provide the follow up documentation for the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting as described under
“Coordination” identified elsewhere in this specification.
a.The Installing Vendor shall make the necessary corrections or changes as discussed during this meeting
and provide a Revised Submittal through the normal construction channels.
1.Be sure to include ALL responses by the Owner in the Revised Submittal.
3.Device Point-to-Point Wiring Diagrams:
a.Provide an Illustration of EACH Device that is being provided for this project.
1.Identify EACH conductor and the equipment type and termination point that it is intended to be
connected to.
2.For equipment that is being connected to Integrate to another system, provide a brief description
of the functional operation of the two different systems.
4.Device Mounting Details:
a.Provide an Illustration of EACH Device that is being provided for this project.
1.Identify the back box, conduit rough-in, and manufacturer recommended mounting method.
5.Door Hardware Illustrations and Wiring Diagrams:
a.Coordinate with the Electrical Contractor/General Contractor as required to obtain the following
information that shall be included on the Shop Drawing submittal:
1.Provide a “typical” Illustration of EACH Electro-Mechanical Door Hardware device that the access
control system will be connecting to.
2.Provide a “typical” Point-to-Point Wiring Diagram of EACH Electro-Mechanical Door Hardware
device that the access control system will be connecting to.
a.Show a “typical” of EACH connection and termination to the Access Control Reader Interface
(ACRI) and/or Access Control Panel.
6.The Riser Diagram shall show the following items:
a.Identify EACH Equipment location (the MDF and EACH designated IDF) separately.
1.Identify EACH cable type, size, and quantities between the MDF and EACH designated IDF location.
b.Identify EACH Device and the associated room number where it is located in the building. Use the
designated door number on the Contract Drawings.
1.Identify the associated cable for EACH device (as described on the wire legend) routed to the
Access Control Reader Interface (ACRI) and each cable routed from EACH ACRI to the MDF and
EACH designated IDF location.
2.This includes, but is not limited to; Card Reader(s), Door Position Switches, Request to Exits,
ACRI(s), ACPS(s), EDPS(s), Server(s), Workstation(s), and other system equipment.
7.Rack and/or Equipment Layout”
a.Show the intended equipment layout within EACH of the Rack(s) and/or Cabinets.
b.Indicate the rack unit size of each device or filler plate in the rack.
c.Show blank filler plates in spaces where equipment is not installed.
d.If rack equipment is installed on the rear side of the rack, show rear view of the rack also.
e.Show the equipment layout as it is intended to be installed.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00 - 7/25
8.An Elevation View of the Wall Mount equipment for the Electrical, MDF Room and each designated IDF
location shall be provided.
a.The proposed locations for EACH wall mount device (control panel(s), power supplies, and other
equipment), proposed cable routing, wire management, 120vac conduits (including receptacles and
junction boxes).
b.All equipment shall be shown to scale.
c.Provide dimensions of the equipment, the space required between the adjacent item and the overall
dimensions of the anticipated wall space.
9.Floor Plans shall show EACH Device type, style, and each individual cable required for EACH Device.
10.Shop Drawings shall be specific to the System that is specified in the Section.
a.Do NOT show other low voltage system equipment on the Shop Drawings, except where this system is
integrated to other equipment and/or systems.
b.Provide EACH device Symbol and related description (as described on the Contract Drawings) on the
Legend with the text that states “provided by others”.
1.Intrusion Alarm System as described on the Floor Plans and Riser Diagrams.
2.Fire Alarm System integration as described on the Floor Plans and Riser Diagrams.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.See Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional information.
B.See Section 27 20 00 Data and Voice Infrastructure for additional equipment requirements.
C.The Access Control System design, devices and/or wiring arrangement shown on the drawings represent that based
on equipment as manufactured by Lenel. Any changes resulting from differences between the specified product
and other manufacturers or substitute manufacturers, shall be the responsibility of the Installing Vendor.
1.Substitutions of the specified equipment and/or supplier will be considered provided that sufficient
documentation is provided to the Engineer which certifies that the equipment and or supplier qualification
meets the requirement of these specifications.
D.Provide all equipment as defined in the specification(s) and shown on the drawings.
E.Refer to PART 1 for any equipment that is not specifically defined.
2.02 COORDINATION
A.Refer to “Submittals” for additional coordination requirements.
B.The Installing Vendor shall include in their bid; the time, staff, and materials that are necessary to perform the
following services.
C.Provide the follow up documentation. Each of the items discussed during the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting
shall be included in the Data Sheet Submittals and shown on the Shop Drawing Submittals.
D.Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting. An important aspect of the construction process for this project is the Pre-
Construction Kick-Off Meeting. The Installing Vendor shall allow as much time as necessary to accommodate each
of the Owner preferences for; equipment layout, programming features, and each item identified within this
specification. This meeting shall take place PRIOR to the Submittal of equipment Data Sheets and/or Shop
Drawings.
1.The Installing Vendor Technician shall attend this MANDATORY meeting.
2.The Installing Vendor shall coordinate with the Electrical Contractor to confirm the date and time of this
meeting.
3.See the paragraph titled “Coordination” in Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for
more information.
4.Coordination Questions shall be submitted a minimum of 14 Days in advance of the meeting for Owner review
for the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting. This would include, but is not limited to;
a.IP Address Equipment List.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00
28 13 00 - 8/25
b.Rack/Equipment layout preferences.
c.Automatic (pre-programmed) functions, such as; Lock/Unlock times of perimeter doors on a door-by-
door basis.
d.The Installing Vendor Other questions that would like clarification of.
5.The Installing Vendor shall bring to the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting 95% design engineered submittal
documents, which shall be a complete Preliminary Submittal package.
a.These items shall be reviewed during the course of the meeting. The intent is to identify incomplete or
inaccurate information that was intended to be submitted. The Drawings, Material Lists, and/or Data
Sheets will be marked up during this meeting.
b.The Installing Vendor shall make the necessary corrections and provide a revised formal Submittal
through the normal construction channels.
1.Be sure to include ALL responses by the Owner in the revised formal Submittal.
c.Provide a minimum of (3) Full-Size sets of 95% design engineered Shop Drawings. Insure that the
drawings show the following items:
1.A legend that identifies; each device, manufacturer, model number, description, rough-in of
electrical back boxes and the related conduits.
2.The proposed Rack / Equipment layout(s) for the MDF Room and each designated IDF location
that will have Rack mounted equipment provided for this project.
3.An Elevation View of the Wall Mount equipment for the Electrical Room, MDF Room and each
designated IDF location shall be provided. The proposed locations for EACH wall mount device
(control panel(s), power supplies, and other equipment), proposed cable routing, wire
management, 120vac conduits (including receptacles and junction boxes) shall be shown to scale.
Provide dimensions of the equipment, the space required between the adjacent item and the
overall dimensions of the anticipated wall space.
4.Proposed route for cable installation (throughout the building).
5.Riser Diagram. Insure the following items are shown:
a.The MDF Room
b.Each individual designated IDF Room
c.Each type shall be shown between the MDF and each designated IDF location.
d.Provide a minimum of (3) sets of 95% design engineered Material List.
1.Provide the Data Sheets for each device and component on the Material List.
6.The items discussed at the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting shall include, but not be limited to:
a.Coordinate with the Electrical Contractor and General Contractor to obtain the Door Hardware
Illustrations and Wiring Diagrams, so that this information can be included on the Access Control System
Shop Drawing submittal. See “Submittals” for more information.
b.Coordination with other Trades
c.Cable ID labeling
d.Confirmation of the Outlet Connector Type
e.Owner furnished equipment to be installed by the Installing Vendor
f.Verification and approval by the Owners of the following items:
1.Proposed Rack/Equipment layout
2.Proposed Rack locations and orientation within the MDF Room and EACH designated IDF location.
3.Proposed wall mounted equipment layout(s) for the MDF Room and each designated IDF location.
g.Automatic (pre-programmed) functions, such as:
1.Lock/Unlock times of perimeter doors on a door-by-door basis
2.First Man In functional operation
h.Integration to other systems. Discuss the intended operation.
E.Additional items to be discussed shall include, but not be limited to:
1.General questions about IT Department standards
2.Access to locked doors within the building
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00 - 9/25
3.General coordination with staff
F.Follow up documentation of the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting. The purpose of this information is to illustrate
to the Owners IT Department that the information discussed during the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting was
understood by the Installing Vendor. Provide the following information:
1.Make corrections to the Shop Drawings as marked up and discussed with the Owner and Engineer.
2.Each of the above items and items discussed during the meeting shall be included in the Data Sheet Submittals
and/or Shop Drawing submittals.
2.03 NETWORK RELATED EQUIPMENT
A.Switch(es):
1.Utilize the Owners Ethernet Switch(s) at the MDF Room and EACH designated IDF location indicated on the
drawings. The Owner shall provide the necessary switches for a functional LAN/WAN.
2.The Access Control System Installing Vendor shall program all other system equipment.
B.Data Infrastructure:
1.Section 27 20 00 Data and Voice Infrastructure shall provide EACH of the following items at EACH location
required:
a.CAT5e/Cat6 Cable Infrastructure
b.Patch Panels
c.Patch Cords
2.04 SERVER(S) AND WORKSTATION(S)
A.Server(s):
1.Additional server(s) are not required for this project.
2.Use the server(s) that will be provided by the Owner.
B.Workstation(s):
1.Additional Workstation(s) are NOT required for this project.
2.Use the Workstation(s) that will be provided by the Owner.
2.05 SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A.The Lenel Access Control System and Lenel On Guard Software are the basis of design.
B.Substitutions of the specified equipment and/or supplier will be considered provided that sufficient documentation
is provided to the Engineer which certifies that the equipment and or supplier qualification meets the requirement
of these specifications. Any request for substitution shall be submitted by the contractor in writing so as to be
received by the Architect not later than (10) days prior to the bid due date. Approval by the Engineer will be issued
by addendum prior to the bid date.
C.Software.
1.The owner is to provide the most current version of software available by the Manufacturer.
D.It is the Installing Vendors responsibility to insure that the system is fully functional with the specified equipment.
1.The database shall be programmed and accessed through the Owners WAN.
2.Import/Download the database to the ACP(s) and ACRI(s), as required.
3.The software shall operate completely separate and independently from other locations.
E.General Functional Operation:
1.It will be the Installing Vendors responsibility to insure that the system is fully functional.
a.Provide configuration and functional operation of EACH door as directed by the Owner.
2.Load and configure the software as required. This includes, but is not limited to:
a.User Groups
b.Time Zones
c.Automated functions, such as; Door(s) automatically Lock and Unlock
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00
28 13 00 - 10/25
3.Populate all database fields as directed by the Owner.
4.Coordinate with the Owners IT department as required.
F.Emergency Lock Down functionality.
1.Provide manual Emergency Lock Down button(s) (ELD) for system activation. When the ELD is pressed, the
following actions shall include, but not be limited to;
a.Lock the perimeter doors.
1.Override EACH door that is an automatic timer that is unlocked. Lock each door.
b.Close and Lock the interior doors (that are held open by Magnetic Door Holders).
c.Send a Text Message to multiple Owner Staff members as directed by the Owner.
d.Provide the functionality of the Graphic Maps as described elsewhere in this specification.
2.Provide a manual Reset Key Switch to restore the system to its normal operating condition.
G.The following functional capabilities are to be considered standard, without the need for add-on software. Not all
of the system features are listed in this specification. This information shall be used as a summary of the
requirements. This summary does not lessen the specified system Make, Model Number, and performance
requirements in any way.
1.General Requirements:
a.All databases will have the ability to ADD, DELETE, REPORT, VIEW and EDIT information.
b.Provide storage of all system transactions in a retrievable file.
c.Log all events by time and date.
d.Provide ability for the Owner to make system configuration changes such as, but not limited to door
open time, door contact shunt time, point and reader names, when and where a cardholder is valid, and
the ability to add or modify card databases at any time.
e.Provide mode of system operation that stores system commands that were not accepted by the
hardware.
f.All commands and updates to the panels shall be verified and shall automatically retry if
communications have failed.
g.Provide a system scheduler that shall automatically initiate a preprogrammed command event/action
and also synchronize system to intelligent controller time.
2.Cardholder Database:
a.Cardholder information shall include unique card number digits and optional Personal Identification
Number.
b.Allow multiple cards per cardholder.
c.Provide special card options that include, but are not limited to:
1.Time zone reference, which defines valid time.
2.Temporary User, which provides a specified activation date and expiration date (spanning years).
3.Provide ability to store digital images of cardholder or other digital images such as property or
family members. Up to two (2) such images shall be associated with the cardholder.
d.Upon editing card information, the updated information shall be sent automatically to the appropriate
access control panel(s) and access control reader interface(s), when hardwired, with no other user
intervention. If the scheduler is used, then card updates shall be sent based on scheduling.
3.Access Levels:
a.Provide the ability to define specific times of access.
b.Provide the ability to define specific readers to specific locations.
c.Provide a template of a defined access level detail, where changes can be made to the template and
saved as a new access level detail.
4.Alarm Monitoring – Alarms Only View:
a.Execute alarm notification in all modes of operation.
b.Provide a display of the most current transactions in real time.
c.Provide a “Panel Not Responding” alarm if communication to a panel is lost.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00 - 11/25
5.System Operator Database:
a.Provide ability for manual System Operator control of system function. The manual functions shall
include the ability to Lock, Un-Lock, Activate and Restore the Emergency School Lock-Down System.
b.The software shall allow the assignment of System Operator levels to define the system components
that each System Operator has access to view, operate, change or delete.
c.Define the accounts to which the System Operator has access.
d.Provide the ability to log System Operator actions in the history files.
6.Reports:
a.Provide reporting capability for printing of selected system transactions from the disk files by specific
time and date selection, range from time and date to time and date, or from start time to end time each
day of the selected date range.
b.Provide feature to generate a history report for a card(s) state. A card state shall be defined as Normal,
Trace, Not Found, Anti-Passback Violation, PIN Violation, Time Zone Violation, Site Code Violation, or
Expired card. Additional search criteria shall include cardholders that meet up to at least 3-note field
restriction and filter the report with defined reader location(s).
c.Provide feature to generate a history report for System Operator(s) activities. The report shall include
time, date, operator name the device associated with the action and the type of action performed by
the operator.
d.Provide complete database reporting of all data programmed into the system data files.
7.Time Zones:
a.Time zone definitions shall include Starting time, Ending time, Days of the week, and Holiday override.
b.Time shall be definable in 24-hour (military) time.
c.The maximum time zones that can be defined in a system shall be a maximum of 255 time zones.
8.Lenel: Model # On Guard 2008, Version 7.2 release or greater.
2.06 ACCESS CONTROL PANEL (ACP)
A.Provide the most current version of panel and firmware available by the Manufacturer.
B.The following functional capabilities are to be considered standard, without the need for add-on software or
hardware. Not all of the system features are listed in this specification. This information shall be used as a summary
of the requirements. This summary does not lessen the specified system Make, Model Number, and performance
requirements in any way.
C.The Access Control Panel (ACP) shall include an on-board LAN/WAN communication module and shall link the
Access Control System software to all other Subsystems. The system field devices (Access Control Reader Interfaces
[ACRI], Readers, Door Position Switches, etc.) shall connect to the ACP and/or ACRI(s). EACH ACP and EACH ACRI
shall provide full distributed processing of access control, alarm monitoring operations, emergency school lock-
down, and reader led control (to indicate when the door is locked/unlocked).
D.Access levels, hardware configurations, and programmed control functions assigned at the administration
workstation or database server shall be downloaded to EACH ACP and EACH ACRI, which shall store the information
and control functions.
E.EACH ACP and EACH ACRI shall be wall mounted and installed in enclosures located as shown on the drawings.
F.The Access Control Panel (ACP) shall contain the following features:
1.Communications: The following communication formats shall be supported:
a.RS-485 to EACH of the ACRI(s)
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00
28 13 00 - 12/25
b.Ethernet at 10/100Mbps (10/100BASE-T, RJ45).
1.The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall provide the following for the LAN/WAN Interface:
a.Furnish all necessary wiring, RJ45 jacks, modular harness’s, and patch cords as required for
connection to the designated LAN/WAN. Provide programming, final testing, and use the
communication protocol as necessary so that all information is reported the Server and
workstations, as required.
b.Coordinate with the Owners IT Department as required, to insure proper communication
over the LAN/WAN.
2.All access granted/denied decisions shall be made at the ACP to provide fast response to card
reader transactions.
3.Memory for the ACP shall be Flash-based and shall be completely non-volatile. If power to an ACP
is lost, upon restoration of power the unit shall retain all information contained in the unit at the
time of the power loss including cardholder database, system configuration, event transaction
history, etc.
2.Memory:
a.Real time program updates, and overall host communications shall utilize flash memory.
b.Shall be configured for up to 240,000 cardholders and 50,000 event buffer.
3.Processor: The controller shall contain a 32-bit processor.
4.Light emitting diodes (LED) shall indicate status of components and communication links.
5.Readers: The controller shall support the following:
a.Up to eight card formats and facility codes.
b.Multiple card technologies
c.Biometric interface support
d.Integration with other manufacturers’ card readers
e.Issue code support shall be provided for both magnetic and Wiegand card readers
f.Up to eight-digit PIN codes
g.Up to two (2) card readers, two (2) door position switches, two (2) Request to Exit devices, two (2)
electro-mechanical locking devices, four (4) auxiliary input devices, and two (2) auxiliary relay output
devices
6.Electrical Power:
a.Primary input power shall be 120vac
7.Lenel: Provide Model #LNL-3300 series Intelligent System Controller, EACH in a Model # LNL-AL600ULX-4CB6
key locking metal enclosure with Model # ABT-12. Provide quantities as required to service the number of
Readers, Emergency Lock-Down System, and other devices shown on the drawings, detail sheets, and listed in
this specification.
G.The Star Multiplexer:
1.The Star Multiplexer shall be capable of eight different downstream directions in RS-485 (2-wire)
communications (using Belden 9841 or equivalent) or four different downstream directions with RS-485 (4-
wire) communications (using Belden 9842 or equivalent). Each Leg of the star, in either configuration, shall
support a maximum wire distance of 4000 feet. Each leg shall support up to eight (8) Lenel hardware RS-485
devices in many configurations.
2.Electrical Power:
a.Primary input power shall be 120vac
3.Lenel: Provide Model #LNL-8000 series Star Multiplexer, EACH in a Model # LNL-AL600ULX-4CB6 key locking
metal enclosure with Model # ABT-12. Provide quantities as required to service the number of Readers,
Emergency Lock-Down System, and other devices shown on the drawings, detail sheets, and listed in this
specification.
2.07 POWER SUPPLIES
A.Power Supplies of various types shall be used to provide power to system related equipment, as required, providing
a fully functional system.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00 - 13/25
B.Access Control Power Supply (ACPS):
1.For some applications, the ACRI will provide the electric power. For applications that require more power
than the ACRI is capable of outputting, use an Access Control Power Supply(s) (ACPS’s) to power; Electric Locks
(EL), Electric Strikes (ES), and Maglocks (MAG) as required. This power supply may also be used to power
other system related equipment as required. The power supply shall be U.L. listed, have sixteen (16) Class 2
Rated PTC Power Limited outputs and a key locking enclosure. The ACPS shall have automatic switch over to
stand-by batteries when AC power fails, and have AC fail supervision which is a Form “C” contact closure upon
loss of power.
a.Connect as required, one (1) ACRI Input to monitor AC power for EACH ACPS that is provided for this
system.
2.The power supply shall be capable of supplying 10.0 Amps.
3.At a minimum, provide (1) ACPS at EACH location shown on the drawings and/or as required for a fully
functional system. If additional ACPS’s are needed, provide the quantities as required for a fully functional
system, while maintaining the design requirements that are defined elsewhere in these specifications.
4.Altronix: Model# AL1024ULXPD16CB.
C.Electrified Exit Device Power Supply (EDPS):
1.See “Field Devices” listed elsewhere in this specification.
2.08 BATTERY BACKUP FOR COMPLETE SYSTEM OPERATION
A.Battery back up power shall be an integral part of the Access Control system.
B.Provide and install gel-cell, maintenance free batteries, as required. Provide battery back up power for the entire
Access Control system to provide a minimum of (1) hour of standby operation. Batteries shall be sized to provide at
least 20% spare capacity.
1.Provide quantities as required for maintaining or exceeding the submittal calculation requirements listed
elsewhere in Section 27 00 00 “Submittals and Shop Drawings”.
C.EACH Power Supply shall have automatic switch over to stand-by batteries when AC power fails. The power
supply/charger shall be an integral portion of the control panel and/or power supply and be capable of charging
fully discharged system batteries to 100% in 8 hours.
D.All batteries shall be placed inside a key lockable, metal enclosure that is approved by the manufacturer.
E.Each battery shall have the date of installation written on the battery with a permanent marker. The date shall be
legible and clearly written in 1” numbers and be visible when the enclosure door is open.
2.09 FIELD DEVICES
A.Review the Access Control System Riser Diagram for Card Reader related equipment that is NOT shown on the
drawings, but shall be provided and installed for this project.
B.Prior to Bidding and Ordering ANY equipment, it shall be the responsibility of the Installing Vendor to confirm the
Owners existing Access Cards will work on the specified equipment.
C.Access Control Reader Interface (ACRI):
1.The ACRI shall incorporate support communications between ACRI’s via the ACP for local input/output
programming.
2.ACRI’s shall be able to provide 12 VDC (125 mA) to each Reader and also provide Reader LED control (to
indicate when the door is locked/unlocked).
3.Communications shall be RS-485 to the Access Control Panel. The ACRI shall be equipped with an
input/output port. If one of the ACRI’s should lose power, it shall not affect the operation of the ACRI’s.
4.Memory:
a.Real time program updates and shall utilize flash memory.
5.Light emitting diodes (LED) shall indicate status of components and communication links.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00
28 13 00 - 14/25
6.Readers: The ACRI(s) shall support the following:
a.Up to eight card formats and facility codes
b.Multiple card technologies
c.Biometric interface support
d.Integration with other manufacturers’ card readers
e.Issue code support shall be provided for both magnetic and Wiegand card readers.
f.Up to nine-digit PIN codes
g.Up to (2) card readers, (2) door position switches, (2) Request to Exit devices, (2) electro-mechanical
locking devices, (4) auxiliary input devices, and (4) auxiliary relay output devices.
h.Electrical Power:
1.Primary input power shall be 12VDC or 24VDC.
7.Lenel: Model # LNL-1320 Series2 Intelligent System Controller, located in a Model # LNL-CTX key locking metal
enclosure. Provide quantities as required to service the number of Readers, Emergency Lock-Down System,
and other devices shown on the drawings, detail sheets, and listed in this specification.
a.One (1) ACRI shall be located at EACH Card Reader location.
b.One (1) ACRI shall be located at EACH Electro-Mechanically controlled door location.
c.Provide additional ACRI’s as required for a complete and fully functional system.
d.See “System Software” for the functional requirements. This includes, but is not limited to; General
Functional Operation, Emergency Lock Down functionality, and Graphic Map software.
D.Card Readers and Credentials: Provide one (1) Card Reader at EACH location shown on the drawings. Card readers
shall connect to the ACRI, for a fully functional system, as required.
1.The card reader(s) shall be compatible with existing access cards.
2.Card Readers shall meet the following minimum requirements:
a.Provide Card Reader(s) that are compatible with the ACRI(s) and ACP(s)
b.Private labeled Readers are not permitted
c.Readers shall be weather resistant
d.When a card is presented to the reader, the beeper shall sound.
e.The LED’s shall be controlled individually by the host system.
1.Reader LED’s shall change color when the door is unlocked.
f.Reader color shall be specified by the Architect.
1.PRIOR to ordering, obtain written approval of the color selection.
g.Manufacturer’s lifetime warranty
3.Single Gang Mount – ThinLine II:
a.Read range distance up to 4”, as listed on the manufacturer’s data sheet.
b.Surface mount to a single-gang electrical box.
c.HID Corporation: Model# 5395 Series. Provide quantities, as shown on the drawings.
4.Mullion Mount – MiniProx:
a.Read range distance up to 3”, as listed on the manufacturer’s data sheet.
b.Surface mount onto metal surfaces, such as door mullions or storefront applications, where indicated on
the drawings.
c.HID Corporation: Model# 5365 Series. Provide quantities, as shown on the drawings.
5.Credentials:
a.Credentials shall meet the following minimum requirements:
1.Provide Credentials that are compatible with the Card Readers, ACRI(s), and ACP(s).
2.Private labeled Credentials are not permitted.
3.A unique Credential identification number shall be preprinted and encoded on each Credential.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00 - 15/25
b.Cards:
1.Provide 500 Cards.
a.HID: Model# 1386 Corporate 1000 ISOProx II
b.Coordinate with Owner.
E.Card Badging Stations:
1.Provide all devices, software and equipment except workstation PC for a complete turnkey system.
Workstation PC shall be furnished by Owner. Provide only one (1) Card Badging Station for this project to be
turned over to the owner at the beginning of the project.
a.Software: Provide one (1) SWC-IDADV license
2.Manufacturers: Provide the following manufacturers’ products that adhere to the following specifications and
will be incorporated into the Work:
a.HID Global – Fargo HDP5000
b.HID Global – ISOProx II Card – Corporate 1000 Format
c.RFIdeas – pcProx Plus Enroll.
d.Videology Imaging Solutions Inc. – 24C708AF
3.Equipment for enrolling personnel into, and removing personnel from, system database, using a dedicated
workstation PC.
a.Include equipment to enroll selected biometric credentials.
4.Enrollment equipment shall support encoding of credential cards including cryptographic and other internal
security checks as required for system.
a.Allow only authorized entry-control enrollment personnel to access the enrollment equipment using
passwords.
b.Include enrollment-subsystem configuration controls and electronic diagnostic aids for subsystem setup
and troubleshooting with the central station.
c.Enrollment-station records printer shall meet requirements of the report printer.
5.Entry-Control Enrollment Software:
a.Shall include database management functions for the system, and shall allow an operator to change and
modify the data entered in the system as needed.
b.Software shall not have alarm response or acknowledgment functions as a programmable function.
c.Multiple, password-protected access levels shall be provided at the enrollment station.
d.Database management and modification functions shall require a higher operator-access level than
personnel enrollment functions.
e.Software shall provide a means for disabling the enrollment station when it is unattended, to prevent
unauthorized use.
f.Software shall provide a method to enter personnel identifying information into the entry-control
database files through enrollment stations to include a credential unit in use at the installation.
g.In the case of personnel identity-verification subsystems, this data shall include biometric data.
h.Software shall allow entry of this data into the system database files through the use of simple menu
selections and data fields. The data field names shall be customized to suit user and site needs.
i.Personnel identity-verification subsystems selected for use with the system shall fully support the
enrollment function and shall be compatible with the entry-control database files.
6.System Capacity: Number of badges shall be limited only by hard disk space. Badge templates and images shall
be in color, supporting the maximum color capability of Microsoft Windows.
7.Badge Configuration:
a.Software for badge template creation shall include a template consisting of background and
predetermined locations of photographs, text objects and data fields for text, and bar-code and
biometric information. Include automatic sizing of data fields placed on a badge to compensate for
names, which may otherwise be too large to fit in the area designated.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00
28 13 00 - 16/25
b.Allow different badge templates to be used for each department, tenant, or visitor.
c.As a setup option, templates shall be automatically selected for the badge, based on the group to which
the credential holder is assigned. Allow the operator to override the automatic template selection and
use a template chosen by the operator for creating a badge.
d.Setup shall determine which graphics and credential-holder information will be displayed and where on
the card it will be placed. All data in the security access system, such as name, code, group, access level,
and any of the 99 user-defined fields, shall be selectable, with the ability to place them anywhere on the
card.
e.System shall include an importing, filing, and recall system of stored images and shapes that can be
placed on the badge.
f.Allow multiple images on the same badge, including, but not limited to, bar codes, digital photos, and
signatures.
g.Support transparent backgrounds so that image is only surrounded by the intended background and not
by its immediate background.
8.Photo Imaging: Integral to security access.
a.Import images from bitmap file formats, digital cameras, TWAIN cameras, or scanners. Allow image
cropping and editing, WYSIWYG badge-building application, and badge print-preview and printing
capabilities.
b.System shall support multiple images stored for each credential holder, including signatures, portrait
views, and profile views.
9.Text Objects: Badge configuration shall provide for creation of custom text as an object, allowing font
selection, typing, scaling, and formatting of the text object. Formatting options shall include changing font,
font size, text flow, and text alignment; bending or curving the text object into a circle or semicircle; applying
3-D effects; and applying predefined effects such as tilt, extrusion, or beveling. Text shall be placed and
optionally automatically centered within any region of the badge layout.
10.Badges and Credential Cards:
a.Badges are credential cards that do not contain data to be read by card readers.
b.Credential cards shall store uniquely coded data used by card readers as an Identifier.
1.Proximity Cards: Use proximity detection without physical contact with the reader for proper
operation.
c.Allow entry-control card to be modified by lamination or direct print process during the enrollment
process for use as a picture and identification badge without reduction of readability. The design shall
allow for the addition of at least one slot or hole to accommodate the attachment of a clip for affixing
the credential card to the type of badge holder used at the site.
1.Card Size and Dimensional Stability: Standard size (CR-80); dimensionally stable so that an
undamaged card with deformations resulting from normal use shall be readable by the card
reader.
2.Card Material: Abrasion resistant, nonflammable, and nontoxic; and impervious to solar radiation
and effects of ultraviolet light.
3.Card Construction: Core and laminate or monolithic construction. Lettering, logos, and other
markings shall be hot stamped into the credential material or direct printed.
a.Incorporate holographic images or phosphorous ink as a security enhancement.
b.Furnish equipment for on-site assembly and lamination of credential cards.
4.Card Durability and Maintainability: Provide manufacturer standard one year warranty. Allow
credential cards to be cleaned by wiping with a sponge or cloth wetted with soap and water.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00 - 17/25
11.Card-Making Equipment: Consisting of a workstation, video camera, video-imaging equipment, and a printer.
Provide one set of Card-Making Equipment.
a.Camera: NTSC color standard, RGB video output, 470 lines minimum horizontal resolution, and
automatic white balance with full rated output under illumination of 0.5 fc (5 lx).
b.Video Imaging: Live-image capture software and hardware and a digital signature capture pad.
c.Standard workstation, modified as follows:
1.Redundant workstation is not required.
2.Inkjet Printer is not required.
3.UPS is not required.
4.Sound card is not required.
d.Printer: Dye-sublimation resin thermal transfer, 300 dpi resolution, 16.7 million colors, accepting
standard HID card size (CR-80) and having card thickness ranging from 0.030 to 0.050 inch (0.762 to 1.27
mm). Throughput shall be not less than 60 seconds per card.
F.Request To Exit (REX): Provide Dual Technology REX with Built-In Sounder.
1.Provide REX(s) at EACH Reader location, as shown on the drawings.
a.For EACH single door location, provide one (1) REX.
b.For EACH double door location, provide two (2) REX’s.
c.Provide manufactures recommended mounting plates as required.
2.GE: Model # RCR-REX-W.
G.Door Position Switches (DPS’s):
1.Coordinate with the Intrusion Alarm System Installing Vendor. See the Electrical Legend and Riser Diagram for
more information.
a.A DPDT Door Position Switch shall be provided for the following systems to use;
b.Access Control System
c.Intrusion Alarm System
2.Roll-up Doors:
a.Each switch shall be provided with the magnet, for the roll-up doors application and all necessary
mounting brackets as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide all necessary mounting brackets and
fasteners, as recommended by the manufacturer.
b.GE (formerly Sentrol): Model #2202AU-L.
H.Auxiliary Relays (AUXR):
1.Where called for on the plans, specifications, or where required, provide the necessary quantities of auxiliary
relays, as required.
2.For outdoor applications:
a.Space Age Electronics: Model# SSU-PAM-1
3.For indoor applications:
a.Space Age Electronics: Model# SSU-PAM-1, SSU-MR-101 Series, or SSU-MR-201 Series
I.Access Control Power Supply (ACPS):
1.Use Access Control Power Supply(s) (ACPS’s) to power; Electric Locks (EL), Electric Strikes (ES), and Maglocks
(MAG) and other system equipment that consume 24vdc power as required.
2.The power supply shall be U.L. listed, have sixteen (16) Class 2 Rated PTC Power Limited outputs and a key
locking enclosure. The ACPS shall have automatic switch over to stand-by batteries when AC power fails, and
have AC fail supervision which is a Form “C” contact closure upon loss of power.
a.Connect as required, (1) ACP Input to monitor AC power for EACH ACPS that is provided for this system.
3.The power supply shall be capable of supplying 10.0 Amps.
4.At a minimum, provide (1) ACPS at EACH location shown on the drawings. If additional ACPS’s are needed,
provide the quantities as required for a fully functional system, while maintaining the design requirements
that are defined elsewhere in these specifications.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00
28 13 00 - 18/25
5.Altronix: Model# AL1024ULXPD16CB.
a.The ACPS shall be adjusted to provide 26.0vdc or less.
J.Electrified Exit Device Power Supplies (EDPS):
1.Elector-Mechanical locks shall be powered by and/or be compatible with the system Power Supplies. The
following items provided by the Division 8 Door Hardware supplier, shall include, but not be limited to:
a.Electric Locks and/or Electrified Exit Devices
b.Electrified Exit Device Power Supply (EDPS)
K.Local Door Alarm:
1.Provide Multi-Tone Electronic Chime.
2.ATW Security: Model # PC-300, or approved equal. Provide quantities as shown on the plans.
L.Panic Button:
1.United Security Products: Model # Hub-2SA
M.Strobe Light (activate when the Panic Button is pressed):
1.Wire this device for the Strobe only. Silent operation is required (do not wire the siren portion of this unit).
2.ATW Security: Model # Doberman
N.Push Buttons:
1.Emergency Lock Down (ELD) Button, manufactured by Schlage (formerly Locknetics): Model # 623–RD–L2/LL–
626. Provide quantities as shown on the Drawings.
a.The Emergency Lock Down (ELD) Buttons Illuminated LED’s shall continually display the current status of
the system (LED in Normal Mode and then change LED color when in Lock Down Mode).
2.10 SPARE CAPACITY
A.Spare capacity to add additional devices in the future, shall be an integral part of the system design.
B.INCLUDE the additional system growth capability items listed below, when CALCULATING the requirements for EACH
of these items, listed elsewhere in this specification.
C.Access Control Power Supply (ACPS):
1.The ACPS(s) shall have enough spare power available to add no less than two (2) additional electric locks that
are typical for this project.
D.Spare Cables:
1.Provide spare cabling as shown on the drawings.
2.11 FLEXIBILITY IN SYSTEM DESIGN LAYOUT
A.Where indicated on the drawings, the Installing Vendor shall have the flexibility in their design to provide system
equipment at any of the MDF and designated IDF locations. Do not install equipment in other locations, unless
noted otherwise.
B.Provide all quantities of equipment as specified, while maintaining the “Spare Capacity” requirements listed
elsewhere within this specification.
C.Coordinate the exact location of field devices with the Architect, prior to installation.
2.12 SYSTEM DEVICE NAMING MATRIX
A.The installing Vendor shall include in the pricing of their bid, the time and materials to generate and create a single
System Device Naming Matrix. From left to right, list the information for EACH device, which shall include, but not
be limited to the following;
1.Each row shall have an “Item #”
2.The device name (i.e.: Reader, Duress Button, etc.)
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00 - 19/25
3.The device abbreviation
a.This is a sample abbreviation that could be used: (i.e. Reader = Rdr).
4.List the Serial Number for EACH device
5.The device ID number
6.Device model number
7.Device Location (for example; South Wing Side Door, MDF Room XXX, etc.).
8.For other system equipment (such as “Head end Equipment”), add rows to the bottom of the matrix, and list
the appropriate information.
a.Group this information by location. Such as MDF Room XXX, IDF Room XXX, etc.
B.Use the maximum characters allowable from the system, to be incorporated into a fully functional system. At the
Top of the Matrix, state the Maximum number of characters that are available.
1.Submit this information with the Submittals and Shop Drawings in 11’ x 17’ format, or smaller.
C.Prior to ANY system programming, obtain written approval from the Architect of the System Device Naming Matrix.
Make corrections as noted.
D.Using the Matrix that is included at the end of this specification (see Exhibit ‘A’ for a partial sample format), the
Installing Vendor shall create a spread sheet and identify EACH system device and description. For room or area
abbreviations that are not listed or if there is more than one room or area of the same name, use a reasonable and
logical name.
1.The Matrix shall have consistent information of EACH device.
2.Each system device shall be wired and programmed to communicate to the ACRI(s), ACP(s), system Server, and
Workstation(s), to indicate EACH system device abbreviation, as indicated on the System Device Naming
Matrix.
2.13 SYSTEM CABLES, CONNECTORS, AND PATCH CORDS
A.See PART 3 of this specification and Section 27 00 00 for additional requirements.
B.Include the “Spare Capacity” requirements listed elsewhere within this specification, for the calculations and sizing
requirements of the cables and/or conductors.
C.ALL cables and conductors shall be the same size and color throughout EACH cable run. Such as from EACH field
device to the terminals on the ACP, ACRI, and Power Supply.
D.Cables/Conductors: The minimum allowable size conductors are specified below. Use larger conductors and/or
additional conductors, as required. Prior to Bidding, consult with the system Manufacturer that the following cable
types are acceptable. It shall be the Installing Vendors responsibility to provide and install Manufacturer approved
cables. Use the Manufacturers equivalent cable requirements, to meet all code requirements [such as “Wet Rated”
or “Aerial Rated” cable] for the appropriate devices.
1.CAT6 cable(s):
a.Refer to Section 27 20 00
b.The outer jack of the data cable color is specified in Section 27 20 00
2.Readers:
a.Non-Plenum: West Penn 3021 (18/6oas), or approved equal
1.Provide additional conductors for Reader control of LED’s as specified, as required.
b.Plenum: West Penn 253186B (18/6oas), or approved equal.
1.Provide additional conductors for Reader control of LED’s as specified, as required.
3.Door Position Switches (DPS’s):
a.Non-Plenum: West Penn 221 (22/2ns), or approved equal
b.Plenum: West Penn 25221B (22/2ns), or approved equal
4.Request To Exit’s (REX’s):
a.Non-Plenum: West Penn 241 (22/4ns), or approved equal
b.Plenum: West Penn 25241B (22/4ns), or approved equal
5.Electro-Mechanical Locks:
a.Non-Plenum: West Penn 224 (18/2ns), or approved equal
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00
28 13 00 - 20/25
b.Plenum: West Penn 25224B (18/2ns), or approved equal
6.Electrified Exit Devices:
a.Non-Plenum: West Penn HA210 (10/2 ns), or approved equal
b.Plenum: West Penn 25210 (10/2 ns), or approved equal
E.Connectors/Terminations: Use the manufacturer approved wire strippers and crimping tool as required.
1.CAT6 cable(s):
a.Refer to Section 27 20 00
2.Maintain all cable and system requirements.
F.Patch Cords: Size EACH cable length to provide ease of maintenance, while not leaving excessive slack.
1.CAT6 cable(s):
a.Refer to Section 27 20 00
2.Maintain all cable requirements.
2.14 PROGRAMMING SURVEY
A.The Installing Vendor shall include in the Pricing of their Bid, the time and materials necessary to generate and
create the following Documentation, provide the staff and necessary equipment as required to provide the
following services, as described below.
B.EACH of the documents shall have the following:
1.List the Name or Title of the document, the Section Number, and Section Title. This shall be bold and centered
at the top.
2.Header of document:
a.The Project Name and the current date.
3.Footer of document:
a.Use multiple pages as required, but identify each page by having the footer state “Page 1 of X”, “Page 2
of X”, etc.
C.Interview the Owner for no less than a minimum of two (2) 4-Hour sessions. Allow for additional time if required, at
no additional cost to the Owner. The Installing Vendor shall be present for this meeting. The purpose of this
Interview is to verbally discuss all of the feature sets of the system. The dialog shall describe the benefits for
implementing each of the systems features, thus allowing the Owner to make an informed decision on the how they
can maximize the functional operation of their system.
1.Prior to starting the Interview process with the Owner, have EACH attendee fill out a “Sign In Sheet” listing
EACH attendee’s name, department they work in, and their phone number.
2.Provide a detailed list of software features on a document titled “Section 28 13 00 Access Control System –
PRE-INTERVIEW of Owner Requested Systems Programming Sheet”. This shall be provided in the “Submittal
and Shop Drawings” with the Section 27 00 00 submittal. This shall be used as the basis of discussion for the
Interview process.
a.For EACH separate software feature, provide a row with an ascending number indicating the “Item #”
(on the far left side of the page).
b.Next to the Item #, provide a Yes, No, and N/A column. This shall be checked off by the Installing
Vendor during the course of the Interview, to determine which options the Owner would like to have
programmed.
c.On each row, provide a brief description of the feature set.
d.On the far right of each row, provide adequate space to write comments.
3.All parties shall review the drawings and discuss the intended functions of EACH device. This will allow all
parties to have a complete understanding of EACH system devices purpose and the performance requirements
of the system that was identified during the Interview process.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00 - 21/25
4.At the conclusion of the Interview with the Owner, prior to leaving the premises, the Installing Vendor shall do
the following:
a.Review with the Owner, by verbally recapping EACH of the feature sets listed on the
“Section 28 13 00 Access Control System – PRE-INTERVIEW of Owner Requested Systems Programming
Sheet” and reiterating this with a Yes (the Owner wants this feature) or No (the Owner does not want
this feature). Make any corrections as required.
b.Provide no less than three (3) copies of the completely filled out, “Section 28 13 00 Access Control
System – PRE-INTERVIEW of Owner Requested Systems Programming Sheet” to the Architect.
5.For Bidding Purposes, the Installing Vendor shall be expected to program the system to Industry Standards,
based on a project of this size, scope, typical functionality for this market segment, and as described
throughout this specification.
a.Review the testing requirements specified elsewhere within this specification for additional information.
D.Within five (5) business days of the conclusion of the Interview, provide the following documents to the Architect
for review:
E.The updated Interview Document with a new title of “Section 28 13 00 Access Control System – Owner Requested
Systems Programming Sheet”. This shall have the Yes, No, and N/A columns electronically filled out to demonstrate
what will and will not be programmed. Include at the conclusion of this document, the following;
1.The date(s) of the Interview with the Owner.
2.The address, building name, room name, and room number of the location that the Interview took place at.
3.Provide copies of the sign in sheet(s).
2.15 ADDITIONAL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
A.See Part 3 of this specification for additional provision of system Equipment and/or Labor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A.See Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional information.
B.See Section 27 20 00 Data and Voice Infrastructure for additional cable and installation requirements.
C.Prior to rough-in, coordinate with the Architect for the exact location(s).
D.Install all equipment, devices, and cabling, per the manufacturer’s recommendation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.EACH CABLE RUN SHALL CONTINUOUS, WITHOUT ANY SPLICES, from the device to the terminal strip on the ACRI(s),
ACP(s), and Power Supplies. Any cable run that does not meet this requirement shall be replaced at no additional
cost to the Owner.
B.Setup, connect, and configure the Servers/Workstations/Monitors per the manufacturer’s recommendations to
operate as intended. Load, configure, and test the software for a fully functional system.
3.03 MOUNTING HEIGHTS, LOCATIONS, AND SETTINGS
A.Mount enclosures as specified in Section 27 00 00.
B.Prior to Bidding, the Installing Vendor(s) shall confirm and coordinate the actual quantities and locations of the
power requirements with the electrical contractor see “Power Supplies” and “Flexibility in System Design Layout”
listed elsewhere in this specification. At a minimum, provide 120vac wiring and connections to the ACP(s) and all
power supplies, as required for a fully functional system.
C.Prior to rough-in, coordinate with the Architect for the exact location(s).
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00
28 13 00 - 22/25
D.Install EACH of the devices and/or equipment per the manufacturer’s recommendation.
E.Access Control Reader Interfaces (ACRI’s):
1.Install EACH ACRI:
a.On the hinge side of the door, and approximately 5’-0” from the door on parallel or perpendicular walls,
to accommodate servicing this unit without blocking the doorway.
b.Approximately 6” above the accessible ceiling (where applicable) or at 8’-0” above the finished floor,
unless otherwise noted.
F.Card Readers:
1.Install EACH Card Reader:
a.Flush to the wall surface.
1.Surface mounted boxes are unacceptable
2.At 44” on center
2.For Electric Strike(s), install per the manufacturers recommendation.
G.Request To Exits (REX’s):
1.Prior to rough-in:
a.Verify exact location with the Architect.
b.Mount in the middle of the door frame or header, as recommended by the manufacturer.
c.Verify the functional operation of the REX will not be hindered by other equipment. Such as exit signs.
2.Install manufactures recommended mounting plates, as required.
3.Install and make all adjustments to EACH REX, per the manufacturer’s recommendation.
H.Door Position Switches shall be installed on the latch side of the door, NOT the hinge side. At the upper portion of
the door, near the top of the door (surface mount), on the top of the door (recessed mount), and 4” to 6” from the
edge of the door (unless approved by the Architect). Install per manufacturers recommendations. After installation
the door shall be able to close properly without rubbing on the door position switch.
1.Provide the appropriate style of Door Position Switch and application appropriate magnet for each type of
door.
2.Recessed Mount Door Position Switches:
a.The Door Position Switch shall be provided and installed by the Intrusion Alarm Installing Vendor.
Coordinate with the Installing Vendor for cable terminations, as required.
3.Surface Mount Door Position Switches:
a.Install per the manufacturers recommendation. Conceal all cabling within the walls and/or ceiling, as
required.
4.Hollow Metal Door with Grout Filled Frame(s) and/or Concrete/CMU Wall Applications:
a.Heavy Duty Surface Mount Door Position Switches: for these types of applications, secure the device to
the frame and/or wall using a minimum depth of 1.25 inch of screw in the wall penetration. Plastic
insert anchors are NOT acceptable. Either one of the following methods is acceptable or approved
equal;
b.Lead anchors.
c.Concrete sleeve anchors.
d.Secure the armored cable every 4” with U-shaped two-hole steel clamps that are secured on both sides
of the clamp, sized to be a snug fit on the armored cable, until it enters the junction box. Secure at the
junction box with a screw type clamp as it enters the junction box.
5.Roll-Up Door Applications:
a.The door position switch(s) shall be installed in a manner to be the least obtrusive in the door opening.
Consult with the Architect for actual location, prior to mounting.
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00 - 23/25
b.Secure the device to the floor and/or wall using a minimum depth of 1.25 inch of screw in the floor or
wall penetration. Plastic insert anchors are NOT acceptable. Either one of the following methods is
acceptable or approved equal:
1.Lead anchors
2.Concrete sleeve anchors
c.Secure the armored cable every 4” with U-shaped two-hole steel clamps that are secured on both sides
of the clamp, sized to be a snug fit on the armored cable, until it enters the junction box. Secure at the
junction box with a screw type clamp as it enters the junction box.
I.Access Control Power Supplies (ACPS):
1.Electric Lock Power Supplies (ACPS) shall power the Electro-Mechanical Door Hardware and other system
related equipment.
2.Mounting of ACPS’s, wiring, and terminations of ALL Elector-Mechanical locks shall be by the Installing
Vendor/Contractor.
a.Locate the ACPS’s in the MDF/IDF locations, as required, unless noted otherwise.
J.Electrified Exit Device Power Supply (EDPS):
1.Electrified Exit Device Power Supply (EDPS) shall power the Electrified Exit Devices (ED). The following items
shall be provided by the Division 8 Door Hardware supplier.
a.Electric Locks and/or Electrified Exit Devices
b.Electrified Exit Device Power Supply (EDPS)
2.Mounting of EDPS’s, wiring, and terminations of ALL Elector-Mechanical locks shall be by the Installing
Vendor/Contractor.
a.Locate the EDPS’s directly above the ACRI, unless noted otherwise.
b.Mount approximately 6” above the accessible ceiling (where applicable) or at 9’-0” above the finished
floor, unless otherwise noted.
3.04 DATA CABLES AND OUTLET LOCATIONS
A.See Section 27 20 00 Data and Voice Infrastructure for additional information. Connect the ACP(s) to the LAN/WAN
as required.
3.05 PROGRAMMING AND CONFIGURATION
A.Program the database as described in “System Software” listed elsewhere in this specification.
B.Program the system emergency lock down as required by the owner.
C.Time and Date Synchronization.
1.EACH of the ACRI(s), EACH of the ACP(s), and the Access Control Server(s) shall be synchronized for the Time
and Date to be exactly the same (where applicable).
2.The “Access Control System” shall be synchronized to other designated systems, such as the CCTV System, for
the Time and Date to be exactly the same (where applicable).
D.The Installing Vendor shall program the system as defined in the documents that were completed during the
“Interview the Owner”, as described throughout this specification, and as required for a fully functional system.
1.The Owner shall program the Owners staff.
E.Program EACH ACRI to communicate to the Server and EACH ACRI on the Owners LAN/WAN as required.
F.The Installing Vendor shall program the Configuration Files of the system to be automatically backed up onto the
Designated Server. These back ups shall occur once per week. Coordinate with the Owners IT Department, as
required. This includes, but is not limited to:
1.EACH of the Configuration Files of EACH ACRI and EACH ACP
2.EACH Site Workstation
3.The Server
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Job Number 2210142.00
28 13 00 - 24/25
3.06 TRAINING
A.Training for Site Staff:
1.The training sessions shall be held at the project Site.
a.Provide Training for up to ten (10) Site Staff.
b.Provide a total of two (2) separate training sessions for the Owners personnel. Schedule both training
sessions with the Owner, providing a minimum of 14 days advance notice, and offer a minimum of three
dates to choose from.
2.The Site Training Session(s) shall only take place AFTER the Owners Administrative Staff have had their first
training session.
3.The 1st Training Session shall consist of:
a.Being conducted by one of the designated Installing Vendor technicians. The training shall be a
minimum of one (1) 4-Hour session that shall be held on the same day, and provide a thorough and in-
depth full feature training session. Provide additional training time as required, to answer EACH of the
staff’s questions, at no additional cost to the Owner. This training shall address EACH of the software
features that meet the Owners requirements identified on the documents that were filled out during the
“Interview with the Owner”. This includes, but is not limited to:
1.The “Section 28 13 00 Access Control System – Owner Requested Systems Programming Sheet”.
2.The Manufacturers Programming Worksheets.
3.At the Owners option, the Installing Vendor may be allowed to provide the Training Session on the
Owners Workstation.
b.The 2nd Training Session shall consist of:
1.A refresher training session shall be held approximately 30 days after the first training session.
The training session shall be a minimum of two (2) hours that may be conducted by one of the
Installing Vendors designated technicians that attended the first training session. Provide
additional training time as required, to answer EACH of the staff’s questions, at no additional cost
to the Owner.
2.Using an Installing Vendors laptop and projector, connect to the Owners WAN and demonstrate
each of the features and functions that the Owner’s staff would like clarification on.
a.No less than five (5) business days in advance of this meeting, the Installing Vendor shall
request from the Owner, EACH of the items that the Owner would like clarification on.
b.The documents that were filled out during the “Interview with the Owner” shall be used as
the reference document.
c.At the Owners option, the Installing Vendor may be allowed to provide the Training Session
on the Owners Workstation.
c.Following the 2nd training session, the Installing Vendor shall include additional programming to
accommodate system functionality changes, based on the requirements of the Owner.
1.Provide up to four (4) hours of system programming changes.
3.07 AS-BUILTS
A.Provide all As-Built documentation as defined in Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements and
listed elsewhere in this specification.
B.Update all documents provided in the Submittal and Shop Drawings to accurately reflect the actual equipment that
was provided for this project, and the actual locations of the installed equipment.
C.The Installing Vendor shall include in the pricing of their bid, the time and materials to generate and create the
documentation, as described below.
1.Provide an “Equipment Information Sheet”, in the O & M manuals. At a minimum, from left to right, provide
the following information:
2.Each row shall have an “Item #”
Renton City Hall - 7th Floor HR Tenant Improvement - Construction Documents 8 July 2022
Job Number 2210142.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00 - 25/25
3.Manufacturers Name
4.Equipment Device Type (such as Workstation, Control Panel, etc)
5.Location (such as MDF room 103, or area of building)
6.IP Address
7.Software Name
8.Software Version that is installed on the device
9.List the “Highest Level” configurable password for EACH device.
10.List “EACH System Operator” password.
11.List all other password settings for EACH device.
D.Provide ALL CD(s)/DVD(s) of installation software, legally required software licenses, and the associated
documentation to reinstall all portions of the software that is running on the new and/or existing
Server/Workstations.
1.Separate ALL information by Server, and EACH individual Workstation, into large plastic Ziploc bags that are
clearly identified with a PC generated label. The information on the label shall include, but is not limited to:
a.Project Name
b.Date
c.PC location (building name, room name, and room number).
d.List the contents of EACH bag.
e.Software:
1.List EACH bag for EACH PC and lists the contents of EACH bag.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.